JP6625092B2 - Nail adjusting method, nail adjusting member used therein, and gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to adjustment of obstacle nails provided on a board of a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge array on a game board surface of a gaming machine, but a nail adjustment member on which a normal adjustment state of the plurality of obstacle nails is printed is prepared. There has been proposed a device in which a nail adjustment sheet is applied to a game board surface to adjust a gauge arrangement of obstacle nails to a normal state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-147954 A

  In the gaming machine described above, it is possible to adjust the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails to the normal state by applying the sheet for nail adjustment to the game board surface. If the state is simply printed, the accuracy of the worker's application of the nail adjustment sheet to the game board surface may be deviated, and as a result, the adjustment state of the obstacle nail may vary.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a nail adjustment method capable of facilitating adjustment of an obstacle nail, a nail adjustment member used therein, and a gaming machine. It is in.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A nail adjusting method for a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on a gaming board surface of a gaming machine,
A plurality of reference members provided in a specific area that is a part of the game board surface , and only the specific area of the game board surface having transparency is printed on a nail adjustment sheet to be printed, and the specific area The plurality of reference patterns corresponding to the plurality of reference members, and the nail adjustment sheet facing the specific area so as to match, to determine the position of the nail adjustment sheet with respect to the specific area ,
Of the plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the game board surface, whether or not the specific obstacle nail implanted in the specific area is sandwiched by the plurality of reference members in a normal adjustment state, Of the plurality of obstacle nail designs printed on the nail adjustment sheet, among the plurality of obstacle nail designs, those that are externally identifiable by comparison with a specific obstacle nail design sandwiched between the plurality of reference designs ,
The plurality of reference members are three-dimensionally shaped members having a flat surface that is substantially flush with the top of the specific obstacle nail, and a first reference member and a second reference member that form the plurality of reference members. The reference members have different shapes from each other, and the plurality of reference patterns include a first reference pattern that matches the first reference member and a second reference pattern that matches the second reference member. And
The first guide pattern is brought into contact with the flat portion of the first guide member, and the second guide pattern is brought into contact with the flat portion of the second guide member, so that the nail adjusting sheet for the specific region is It is characterized by easy positioning .
In the invention according to claim 2,
A nail adjustment sheet provided to face a specific area that is a part of a game board surface on which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a gaming machine,
The nail adjustment sheet has permeability,
A specific obstacle nail pattern indicating that it is a specific obstacle nail implanted in the specific area to be checked for the adjustment state of the plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the game board surface,
It can be used at the time of positioning the nail adjustment sheet with respect to the specific area , and a plurality of reference patterns corresponding to a plurality of reference members provided in the specific area , and are printed ,
The plurality of reference patterns are provided so as to sandwich the specific obstacle nail pattern, and are to be brought into contact with a plane portion formed on the plurality of reference members that is substantially flush with a top portion of the specific obstacle nail. And
Further, each of the plurality of reference patterns has a different shape .
In the invention according to claim 3,
A gaming machine having a gaming board in which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined arrangement in a gaming area where a game is performed,
In a specific area that is a part of the gaming board surface,
A specific obstacle nail to be checked for the adjustment state of the plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area,
A plurality of reference members that are members that can be used when positioning the predetermined nail adjustment sheet with respect to the specific area ,
The plurality of reference members are provided in the specific area so as to sandwich the specific obstacle nail, and are three-dimensional modeling members having a flat portion that is substantially flush with a top portion of the specific obstacle nail,
Further, each of the plurality of reference members has a different shape .

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a nail adjustment method capable of facilitating adjustment of an obstacle nail, a nail adjustment member used in the method, and a gaming machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right at the time of the press operation part of the effect operation unit being in an ascent position. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where a door frame is opened from a main body frame and a main body frame is opened from an outer frame in another embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, which is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame left assembly of the outer frame, and the outer frame right assembly, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 39 is a sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 40 is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view. It is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partial enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line invalidating member. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullifying member. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullifying member. (A) is a longitudinal front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line nullifying member, and (b) is a cross-sectional plan view thereof. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 45 showing a normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 45 showing a state in which an illegal ball is prevented from reversing. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of a foul cover unit showing other forms of an operation line invalidation member. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z part of FIG. 49, (b) is an enlarged view of the Z part of FIG. 49 showing a state in which a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of the Z part of FIG. 49 which shows the state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) is a magnified view corresponding to the Z part of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the operation line invalidating member is motorized, and showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of an important section showing other forms of an operation line nullification member. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of a handle unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the plate unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. It is an explanatory view showing a relation between a production operation ring and a rotation drive unit in a left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and (c) is a center pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, and (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the upper front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of a main body frame of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 4 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing unit of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotation position of the dispensing blade. It is a rear view of the paying-out apparatus for demonstrating prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 3 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 119 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the exploded view seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line of FIG. 117 (a). It is another structure of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment). It is another structure of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment). It is another structure of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment). It is another structure of this invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (the structure of measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment). It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 130 as viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked from behind. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the game panel was made transparent. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a game panel is made opaque to show a game area in which game balls circulate and obstacle nails. It is a front view which expands and shows the vicinity of an attacker unit in a game board. It is a front view of a front component and a game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front component member and the game panel from the front by disassembling. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front structural member and the game panel and looked from behind. (A) is a front view of the game panel shown with the board cover removed, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decorative board in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern of a game panel, a front component, and a front unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel. It is an enlarged view which shows the installation aspect of an upper left panel decorative board. It is an enlarged view showing a game panel in a modification. It is a front view of the presentation effect unit in a modification. It is a front view of the panel board in a modification. (A) is a front view of the panel board in which the decorative pattern different from FIG. 143 was formed, and (b) is a front view showing the panel board of (a) with a front unit. It is a front view which shows the nail adjustment film for adjusting the obstacle nail implanted in the game panel. It is a front view of a main part frame shown in the state where a game board was attached. (A) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged state before the nail adjustment film is mounted on the game board, and (b) is an enlarged view showing the state where the nail adjustment film is mounted on the game board. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from a function display unit on a main control board. It is a front view of a presentation effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 1st design light-emitting decoration in the presentation effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 2nd design light-emitting decoration in the presentation effect unit. It is a front view showing the state where the 2nd picture of the presentation effect unit different from this embodiment was made to luminous decoration. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower back movable decoration body with which the lower back production unit in the back unit was provided and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower back movable decoration body with which the lower back production unit was equipped and was seen from behind. It is a front view showing movement of a lower back movable ornament. It is a schematic perspective view of an internal structure, such as a back left movable decorative body. It is a front view showing movement of a back left movable decoration object of a back left production unit in a back unit. From the normal state, raise the lower back movable decorative body of the back lower production unit from the standby position and set the lower back moving arm to be the same as the lower left lower movable movable body of the back left directing unit and the lower right lower movable movable body of the back right directing unit At the same time as the height, the movable decorative body on the back of the back production unit is lowered from the standby position, and the upper back moving arm is the same as the upper left movable decorative body of the back left and right upper movable unit of the back right production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made into height. FIG. 165 shows a state in which the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are being rotated. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board showing the state where the back left movement arm of the back left production unit and the back right movement arm of the back right production unit were moved to the second state from the normal state. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body have been moved to the second state from the state of FIG. 167. The back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left from the normal state, and the back upper left movable decorative body and the lower right lower movable decorative body, and the lower left lower movable movable body and the upper right movable movable decoration are arranged. It is a front view of the game board showing a state where the effect image was displayed on the effect display device after the body was turned so as to face each other. The lower back movable decorative body, back upper movable decorative body, back upper left movable decorative body, back lower left movable decorative body, back upper right movable decorative body, and back lower right movable decorative body were moved from the normal state to the second united position. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. Move the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. 170 to the first combined position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which was set. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 1st design was made to light-emission decoration in the light guide plate of the presentation effect unit. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of an effect which performs the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of a game panel, and the 1st design in the light guide plate of a presentation effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 2nd design was made to luminously decorate in the light guide plate of the display effect unit. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of an effect which performs the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of a game panel, and the 2nd pattern in the light guide plate of a presentation effect unit. 172 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern of the presentation effect unit according to the embodiment different from that of FIGS. 172 and 174 is decorated with light emission. The first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the display unit, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the lower left upper movable movable body, the lower left lower movable movable body, the lower right upper movable movable decorative body, and the lower right lower back are provided. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where a movable ornament was moved to the second union position. The first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the display unit, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the lower left upper movable movable body, the lower left lower movable movable body, the lower right upper movable movable decorative body, and the lower right lower back are provided. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where a movable ornament was moved to a first union position. In the light guide plate of the rendering unit according to the embodiment different from that in FIG. 178, the second pattern is illuminated and decorated, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the lower left lower movable movable body, and the upper right back It is a front view of the game board which shows the movable decorative body and the back lower right movable decorative body moved to the first united position. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a view as viewed from the direction of the arrow A in FIG. 182. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the connection relationship with a panel drive board. FIG. 186 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 186. It is a figure showing composition of a frame earth board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an outline of a circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. FIG. 190 is a view on arrow B in FIG. 190. FIG. 6 is silk printing (part 1) of an electronic component printed on a mounting surface of a power supply board. FIG. 9 is a silk printing (part 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of a production discontinuation electronic component. This is a configuration of a commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic circuit diagram illustrating a circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view illustrating an outline of wiring to a substrate treated as a main substrate. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decoration board with which a door frame is provided. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of an LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 202 is an enlarged view of a part D in FIG. 202 as viewed from a non-LED mounting surface. This is a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. This is a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. 205 is an enlarged view of the D ′ part in FIG. 204 or the D ″ part in FIG. 205 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. This is a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 207 is an enlarged view of a portion D ′ ″ in FIG. 207 as viewed from a surface where LEDs are not mounted. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with a magnetic type magnetic pole change detection circuit etc. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 210 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 210. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payment control part. 213 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in FIG. 213. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part following FIG. 214. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a modification of a dispensing device. It is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the prior judgment processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting-port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a big hit determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit, and (B) is a symbol determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit type. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning opening opening and closing process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hold advance notice determination table used for determining a hold advance notice pattern at hold 1; (B) is a hold advance notice determination table used to determine a hold advance notice pattern at hold 2; ) Is a suspension notice determination table used for determining the suspension notice pattern at 3:00. (D) is a suspension notice determination table used for determining the suspension notice pattern at 4:00. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the production pattern set as the 1st hold change production. It is an example of a specific effect in the effect display device at the time of executing the first hold change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the production pattern set as the second hold change production. It is an example of a specific effect in the effect display device at the time of executing the second hold change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the production pattern set as the third hold change production. It is an example of a specific effect in the effect display device at the time of executing the third hold change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of performing the stock effect over a plurality of fluctuations when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance. (A) is a type of operation valid time, (B) is a scenario determination table used for determining a scenario determination pattern at hold 4:00, and (C) is a scenario determination pattern at hold 3:00. It is a scenario determination table used for (1). It is a specific production example on the production display device at the time of executing the stock production and the operation production. It is a specific production example on the production display device at the time of executing the stock production and the operation production. (A) is a type of the mode immediately before the operation, (B) is a scenario determination table used for determining a scenario determination pattern at 4 o'clock on hold, and (C) is a scenario determination pattern at 3 o'clock on hold. It is a scenario determination table used for (1). It is a specific production example in the production display device at the time of executing the stock production and the operation production that stock the contents of the mode immediately before the operation. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification when a specific period occurs after the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change. It is a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 when the light guide effect at the time of the fluctuation and the light guide effect at the time of the release notification are executed. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of a stop look-ahead effect and a disappointing effect in a temporary stop period of a lost symbol. It is an example of a specific effect on the effect display device at the time of executing a stop-time pre-reading effect and a disappointing effect using a temporary stop period of a lost symbol. It is an explanatory view showing a dialogue notice as an example of a button-related effect performed by an effect display device. It is a timing chart of the dialogue notice shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation trigger pseudo error effect as an example of the button related effect performed by the effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-operation pseudo error effect as an example of the button related effect performed by the effect display device. (A) is a timing chart of the operation trigger pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 261, and (B) is a timing chart of the non-operation pseudo error effect shown in FIG. It is the schematic of the handling of the conductor which floated with respect to the earth provided in the various effect units provided in the game board.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the production operation unit is at the ascending position, and FIG. is there. FIGS. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closably attached to the outer frame 2, a player which is detachably mounted to the main body frame 4 from the front side and which is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 106) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is coaxially and rotatably supported, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  When the door frame 3 is closed, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and emitted forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 is for decorating the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 182. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game played by the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. Hinge member 510 and lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and the door frame 3 to be opened and closed, and a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the body frame base unit 500. And a ball launching device 540 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for paying out the received game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 includes outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, or uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides an outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a centrally located game area 5a in front view. An effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the game panel 1100 and a rear surface side of the effect display device 1600. A peripheral control unit 1500 is configured as that the transparent substrate box, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails which are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving out a predetermined number of game balls B), a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is implanted in the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the gaming area 5 a of the gaming board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the direct effect unit 2600, the back lower effect. The player can enjoy the movable effect and the luminous effect by various effect units such as the unit 3100, the back upper effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, as viewed from the front, respectively. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down, and are disposed apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending up and down with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower right end of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward at a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from the opposite side to the concave portion 11a. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c of the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a contact the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to the end. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the outer frame left member 11, the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, and screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending up and down with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a lower right connecting member 23. A lower hook member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed leftward at a rear portion of the right-side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a left portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side face are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side face are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c which extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to contact the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a left side from a rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the end. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to lock an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b to which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a plate-like hook piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates back and forth through the hook piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 has the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper and lower fixing members 12b and the upper and lower fixing members 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted into the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is mounted on the mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame viewed from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends to the left and right. A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and having an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially equal to the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with cutout portions 41a that are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while being vertically penetrated at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends, respectively, in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes from the rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the opened rear side is closed by the rear panel 43 to cooperate with the rear panel 43 and become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending left and right on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front surface of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tubular portion 43a extending right and left and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the interior space 40a of the curtain plate. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear part 43 of the curtain plate. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The length of the connecting cylinder 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the entire length of the rear panel 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear panel 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to an upper end of the connection tube portion 43a. 620a is in communication with the internal space, forming an enclosure 624.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the position of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as it goes backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent the intrusion of an unauthorized tool. Even if the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, the tool abuts on the forwardly protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, thereby invading further. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B that has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason is raised. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is moved to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole 60d. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and having two cylinders extending forward and backward. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frame 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having countless small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the enclosure of the loudspeaker from leaking from between the connection cylinder 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 22B is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2 viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a downward extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock main body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a lock body 52a extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position behind the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock main body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. This allows the upper frame hinge pin 512 to be inserted into the bearing groove 51c and the upper frame hinge pin 512 to be removed from within the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape having an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 is for decorating the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the unit, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper part of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400 and the upper side of the plate unit are attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose front view is extended vertically and having a door window 101a penetrating forward and backward, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 attached below, a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear of the door frame base 101, and an attachment near the rear right lower end of the rear portion of the door frame base 101. Door frame main relay board 104, a door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame main relay board 104, and a door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear handle board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear side, and the rear handle board 106 after the handle is A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feed unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been fired by the ball firing device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved by the ball launching device 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. For playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the front frame so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the main frame 4, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board mounted on the main frame 4. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101, and for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted on the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. , Which is attached to the rear side of the door and covers the relay board 106 after the handle from the rear side, and a cable which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the post-handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover a lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b whose left end side is inclined so as to protrude slightly forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. Between the front side and the right side in the front view, from the rear side to the front side, and into the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted. The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b, which penetrate back and forth on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in front. And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is shifted leftward from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a ball for a lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage port 101f, a ball passage port 101g for a plate which penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and which faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality (three in this example) of ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire length of the cylindrical portion 102a in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper part of the cylindrical part 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower part of the cylindrical part 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a state of being similarly inclined.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to favorably guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board, door frame auxiliary relay board, relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and has a connection cable 503 (FIG. 99) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 100) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an outer shape is combined with a square extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a square extending vertically, and the door extends vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled with the door frame base unit 100, and a portion extending vertically above and below the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is a door. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered with the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a vertically extending portion of an inverted L-shape) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view open. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The relay board cover 108 after the handle is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 106 after the handle. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which are vertically separated from each other, and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having a left end side attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connected to the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of vertically mounted spaced rear sides of the right reinforcing frame 112 are hooked by hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. And a hook member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that matches the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position that matches the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. The vehicle includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extensions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. This cylinder mounting frame 115 has a cylinder lock 130 mounted on the front piece.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates back and forth. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is The door frame base 101 is assembled below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. And the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending portion penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end thereof is an upper end. A portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame has its upper end rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion extending vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame has a state in which the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire hinge pin 122 downward. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be lowered below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 allows the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to be inserted or pulled down from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is coaxial with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 23) protruding downward from a lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 below the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the projecting piece 125b that extends vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  This door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main frame side lower hinge member. Can be.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular hole inserted into the keyhole 132 and attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into a pair of cutout portions to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the plate unit main body 252 in the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball having entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 which is a box-shaped front end having a closed rear end and an open front end and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. On the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, one by one. To the ball supply port 142a, and rotates the ball supply member 144 and the ball supply member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, a ball feeding member 144 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and a ball removing member 143 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing upper bowl balls 240. And a portion that is opened rearward on the upstream end side of the ball-extraction guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. Of the rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported on the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35A). The operating rod 143c is moved through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 by the pressing operation of the upper tray ball removing button 222 of the tray unit 200, and the lower end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removing slider 242 (FIG. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in a vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holding portion 144b has an arcuate concave shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-like rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the sphere holding portion 144b of the sphere feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 such that the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation is moved in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and a ball holding portion 144b in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding unit 144b (the hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking unit 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition unit 143a (a state where it stays at the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding unit 144b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the vertical direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends right and left, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and an engaging portion 147 a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147 a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c which engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 36 (b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be pivoted around an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B at the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 185) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the ball or the weight 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting part 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition, and the rotation is restricted. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operation rod 143c moves with the downward movement of the operation transmitting portion. Also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed from the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the ball removing member 143 with which the operating rod 143c is in contact is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partitioning portion 143a. , The impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball-pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being separated from the partitioning portion. At 143a, it is possible to prevent bouncing.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line nullifying member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. I have. Here, the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated because the operation line is cut or pinched (pinched and stopped) or entangled (rolled up) or adhered by hot melt or the like. It refers to the state.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape having an outer shape in a front view extending left and right, and is vertically separated at a substantially central portion in a vertical direction between left and right sides by a predetermined distance. The inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 and the opposing sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702. And The first piece 701 of the operation line nullifying member 700 is bent with respect to the flat surface of the operation line nullifying member 700 so that the right end in front view in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line nullifying member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V-shape toward the right.

  The operation line nullifying member 700 is attached to the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is located inside the ball supply port 142a. It is in a state of communicating with.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 700, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as that) is driven from the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out on the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. The game is played by the ball launching device 540 when an operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as moving an illegal ball into or out of the first starting port 2002 is performed. The operation line attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the illegal ball fired (hit) with a strength that can reach the area 5a. The first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  Note that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be another embodiment. For example, if the configuration is such that the operation line attached to the illegal ball is cut or narrowed to suppress the misconduct, the metal plate may be bent into a different form from the above, or the bent operation line invalidating member 700 may be used. A configuration may be provided, or a resin molding member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided instead of the metal plate.

  If the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the above-mentioned standby position (on the above-mentioned partition 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). ), And the detection signal is added to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, whereby the launch of the illegal ball itself can be prevented. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive for ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball firing device 540 with a force (a firing force that cannot reach the game area 5a) smaller than a predetermined force (a fire force that can reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is fired. The game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside is guided to the lower plate 202, and the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 whose front side is opened, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and has a lower normal dispensing passage 610 a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and an upper dish ball supply port 211 a which is a ball opening of the dish unit 200. And a through-open passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a when viewed from the front. And a full tank receiving port 150b.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 150b and lacks momentum despite being fired from firing rail 544 by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving portion 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop port 1013 formed between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the inside of the game area 5a, and a right front view In the vicinity of the lower corner, the game ball B is forwardly opened and is filled with the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. Outlet 150d that communicates with the air, a communication passage 150 that connects the ball outlet 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. It has a, and. The communication passage 150h has an upper passage wall 150i disposed under the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c at a gradient opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one ball of game balls from the upper passage wall 150i. And a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel at a distance from the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. And open downward.

  In addition, a series of passages from the foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h, and the storage passage 150e are used to return the foul ball. A return passage 1014 is formed by a series of these elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving section 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150 e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152, and movable piece 153. And a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 becomes full of the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so that the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the rotation. This makes it possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and stops the further payout of the game balls B when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the game balls B are full. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, so as to urge the lower plate 202 to be full.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150 a, and a discharge passage opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 610 in a discharge unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact part 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud preventing means for suppressing fraud by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached, and similarly the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 are provided. The operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S, which are the third fraud prevention means, are provided in the foul ball drop port 1013 opened between the two.

  The second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between upper passage wall 150i of communication passage 150h and bottom wall 150g of foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is enlarged in FIG. As shown in the figure, both lateral projections 7001 are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixedly attached (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Further, the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 cover and house the unit from the outside so that the hands of employees and gaming machine assemblers are difficult to contact due to safety considerations.

  The specific operation line nullification member 7000 includes components equivalent to the operation line nullification member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. A V-shape opening in the direction facing the downward flow direction of the sphere of the communication passage 150h by the one piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extending from the convex part 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702. Is formed.

  In addition, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 corresponds to the cover member 152 of the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment. It is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and is directed toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k that can guide the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game balls to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and is turned toward the lid member 152 toward the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first inclined portion 150 ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side, and the width is narrowed along the lid member 152 toward the shear portion 7000 v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150 ka. The tapered guide portion 150k includes a second inclined portion 150kb having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L). Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, comes into sliding contact with the guide portion 150k, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the second inclined portion 150ka to move from the first inclined portion 150ka to the second inclination portion. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 by sliding on the inclined portion 150 kb of the. Thus, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for smooth flow of the normal ball and for guiding the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corners of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guide portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is changed using the space communicating from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is caused to enter the game area 5a, and at the same time, the operation line L protruding toward the lower counter ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, It is possible to prevent illegal acts such as moving the ball Q into and out of the first starting port.

  For example, using a special tool such as a cell plate, the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage section 1014 from the lower counter ball supply port 211c to flow backward and is sent to the firing position of the ball launching device 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act”). A ") is performed, the illegal ball Q moves toward the firing position of the firing rail 544 over the folded portion of the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. The operation line L is pulled (pulled by tension) and wraps around the folded portion in a U-turn shape. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020, and finally enters As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated, so that it is possible to suppress an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  Also, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the firing position, which is intentionally turned into a foul ball, and the lower counter ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Also, when an illegal act of grasping the operation line L connected to the illegal ball that has become a foul ball and firing the subsequent illegal ball Q to the game area 5a (hereinafter referred to as “illegal act B”) is performed, The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent ejection of the illegal ball Q (with tension applied). L is pressed against the folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. Yes To become. FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where the fraudulent act B is performed. Also, with respect to the above-described fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line nullifying member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, a foul ball). The operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength). Therefore, this embodiment reinforces the fraud measures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has the effect of doing. Therefore, when the injustice B is targeted, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud preventing means, and the operation line nullifying member 7000H as the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are appropriately used together, and one first operation line nullification member 700 and another second operation line nullification member 7000 or a third operation line nullification member 7000H, 7000S are provided. The pachinko machine 1 may be provided together. In this case, the first operation line nullifying member 700 and the second operation line nullifying member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble described above, the anti-fraud information is hard to leak. In addition, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 can easily maintain the security performance if replaced with the door frame 3 because the sharpness and the like affect the security performance.

  By the way, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v and nullify the operation line L, but pinch the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between the two metal plates 7011 and 7022, for example, so that the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. May be invalidated as follows.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by hatched portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 The first half of the non-joined portion at the front end is expanded in a V-shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joined portion is defined as a clamping portion 7044. Such an operation line nullifying member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152. Further, the unit main body 151 is hardly touched by an employee or a game machine assembler due to safety considerations. And is covered and accommodated from outside by a lid member 152.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded portion of the metal plate is turned into a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-joined portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 7044, it is pinched and pinched like tweezers.

  As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed back from the lower counter ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the firing position of the firing rail 544, or the illegal ball Q intentionally turned into a foul ball by the illegal act B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower counter ball supply port 211c, the operation line L is only loosened thereat, and consequently the amount of the operation line L to be extended cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging on the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to suppress an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joined portion at the front end of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V-shape to be the introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joined portion is set to the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surface, and the leading end of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V-shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (the guide portion). ), And the sandwiched portion of both plate surfaces may be used as the sandwiching portion 7044. Thereby, while achieving the same effect as the above-described fraud deterrence effect, the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate can be improved.

  The operation line nullifying member 7000 for pinching the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in the gap between the second inclined portions 150 kb in FIG. Thus, an adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be immobilized by being adhered to the adhesive portion.

  Also, the operation line nullifying member 7000 for holding the operation line L is configured by changing the above-described one composed of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. It may be installed and formed such that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150 kb of the guiding portion 150 k is substantially perpendicular to the center axis of the guiding portion 150 k. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb fits between adjacent coils of the coil spring and is clamped.

  Coil springs, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, have a structure in which adjacent coils abut against each other when there is no load, but need to be installed in a compressed state like a compression coil spring. This is more advantageous in installation work.

  The coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied. However, as shown in FIG. 43, the coil spring is installed so as to be curved so that the coils on the entry side of the operation line L slightly expand. It is more preferable that the operation line L enters smoothly. As described above, when the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, it can be manufactured at a low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

  In addition, foreign matter such as a cell plate is inserted into the above-described operation line nullifying member 7000 from the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c), and the guide plate 150k to the operation line nullifying member 7000 is closed with the cell plate. In order to cope with this, in the above-described embodiment, a course change portion of the return path portion 1014 of the foul sphere (a portion corresponding to the position directly above the lower counter ball supply port 211c in the present embodiment). Further, a slit 1015 into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress further unauthorized manipulation of inserting the foreign matter through the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c) and closing the guiding portion 150k. In addition, as a countermeasure against an illegal operation in which a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted from the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c) to close the guiding portion 150k, the foreign object such as the cell plate is removed as in the slit 1015 described above. A configuration in which a projection-shaped obstacle 1016 that impinges on a foreign substance such as a cell plate or the like to impede reaching the guide 150k as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. As such, a higher level of fraud prevention may be achieved.

  Also, the first and second operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 described above have a static structure that nullifies the operation line L after entering it. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

  FIGS. 49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D. The operation line nullification member 7000D includes a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). (A corner corresponding to a position directly above the lower bowl supply port 211c).

  That is, in FIG. 49, the operation line nullifying member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped nullifying portion 2646 vertically protruding from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. And a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the nullification portion 2646 intersects with the center portion, and an arcuate ball stopper 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 protruding rightward from the upper edge of the nullification portion 2646, A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving position in FIG. Can swing to the release position. Further, the operation line nullifying member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the nullifying portion 2646 across the shaft hole 2647. The ball receiving portion 2645 is urged by the balance weight 2660. In the state where no external force (specifically, the load for one game ball) acts on the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50A, the load for one game ball acts on the ball receiving portion 2645. At this time, it swings to the release posture of FIG. 50 (b).

  In addition, the edge of the nullification portion 2646 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is an intersection 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the nullification member 7000D swings to the release position shown in FIG. 50 (b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball connects the communication path 150h of the foul ball return path as shown in FIG. Immediately after flowing down and changing the course in the downward direction by the course changing unit, the robot is placed on the ball receiving unit 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullifying member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649, and changes to the release posture of FIG. Then, the foul ball placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is discharged to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line nullification member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached with the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at once, but even in such a case, while the first foul ball is being processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul ball is as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Are stopped by the arcuate ball stopper 2648, and the processing is continued after the operation line invalidating member 7000D has returned. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul spheres are generated at the same time, the processing can be performed one by one without any trouble.

  Next, the above-mentioned fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is fired from the hit ball supply port 142a) to the foul cover unit 150 having the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. Into a foul sphere by intentionally launching the foul ball weakly from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, and further grasping the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball to cause a subsequent fraud. When an illegal ball Q due to an illegal act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a) flows in, the illegal ball Q flows down the communication path 150h as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and changes its course downward in the course changing unit. Immediately after being placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullifying member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture of FIG. 51 (b). At this time, the nullifying portion 2646 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D also rotates, and the crossing edge 2651 of the edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side. When the vehicle crosses the foul ball return passage, the operation line L passing through the foul ball return passage naturally also crosses the foul ball return passage, so that the operation line L is caught between the intersection side 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Stop). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D continues the release posture without being released from the illegal ball Q. Of course, since the operation line nullifying member 7000D is at a position where it cannot be reached even if a hand is put through the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q remaining at this position is taken out from the outside.

  Note that if the operation line L is made to meander between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 to make it difficult to reverse the operation line L, the operation line L may be captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D can be stored and collected as a proof ball.

  The dynamic operation line nullifying member 7000D described above utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q. However, the operation line nullifying member 7000D may be operated by the electric driving means as shown in FIG. Good.

  In other words, the operation line nullifying member 7000D of FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 as the electric driving means to the portion where the above-described balance weight 2660 is provided, and connects the ball detector to the nullifying portion 2646 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D. When a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D moves from the ball receiving position to the release position. When the ball changes, and the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change of the signal from the presence or absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered and the operation line is lowered. The invalidating member 7000D is to return from the release position to the ball receiving position. .

  When a normal ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, generation and release of the ball are detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is received by the detection. In order to operate appropriately, foul balls are processed one by one similarly to the operation line nullifying member 7000D using the own weight.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, and the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is pinched between the intersection side portion 2651 of the invalidating portion 2646 and the receiving portion 2652, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since no emission signal is issued from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the aimed ball opening, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Note that the above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersection side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646. be able to. In addition, the operation line nullifying member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the intrusion of the illegal ball Q from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 covers the return passage portion 104. It can also be used as reverse running prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D has, for example, a disabling portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and has a tip end of the shutter plate. Is a crossed side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream of the movable area of the crossed side and passes through the movable area of the crossed side. Then, the invalid ball Q is detected by the ball detector to activate the invalidating portion, so that the operation line L is pinched or cut off at the intersection side crossing the communication passage 150h. Is also good.

  Further, the above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D can be applied to the first operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the effect of suppressing illegality can be surely enhanced.

  FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, which winds up and invalidates the operation line L.

  In other words, the operation line nullifying member 7000D is a square ring-shaped nullifying portion 2646 attached to the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 2656 that is orthogonal to the passage. And a motor 2657 as an electric driving means for rotating the nullification unit 2646, and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the nullification unit 2646 as an intersection side 2651 provided downstream of the movable (rotation) area of the intersection side 2651. And a ball detector 2655, and the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a ball is detected by the ball detector 2655.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h, passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball is detected by a ball. The invalidating unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the device 2655, but the foul sphere flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside from the ball opening.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q dives through the invalidating section 2646. Since the illegal ball Q passes through the invalidation unit 2646 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L winds around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q will reach the hands of the unauthorized person.

  In addition, the ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be one that is displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidating member 7000D for winding the operation line L described above.

The description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line invalidating member includes the following technical idea.
"A game area where game balls are played,
A ball launching device that launches a game ball,
A launching passage section that forms a launching sphere passage communicating from the launching position of the ball launching device to the game area,
A return path portion forming a foul ball return path connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the launching ball path and a ball opening for discharging game balls to the outside in front of the machine,
Fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from being operated from the forefront,
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates by nipping or cutting or winding the operation line,
The operation line disabling member includes an intersection that crosses the foul ball return path of the game ball, and operates the intersection when the illegal ball passes through the movable area of the intersection. A gaming machine configured to cross a return path and to pinch, cut, or wind up the operation line passing through the foul ball return path at the intersection side to invalidate the operation line. "

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 11, FIG. 39, FIG. 47, and FIG. ) And an operation line nullifying member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a resin rail base 1001x).

  The operation line nullifying member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is formed in a comb-like shape so that an operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. Are covered by a safety cover 1017 arranged in a row. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, an illegal act of pushing the illegal ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 to flow backward from the lower counter ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and sending the illegal ball Q to the launch position of the ball launch device 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the firing position, the operating line L is pulled by the tension (the tension is applied) and the operation line disabling member is applied. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent to the firing position from the hit ball supply port 142a, which is intentionally turned into a foul ball, and the lower counter ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening is formed. Even in the case where cheating B in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball Q is grasped and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a is performed, the fraudulent ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage unit 1014 is formed. Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H in the process of falling, the cutting is performed at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  On the other hand, the operation line nullifying member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wires in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. 10, 39 and 47. It protrudes.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state where it is connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower dish ball supply port which is a ball opening. Even if an unauthorized person is grasping via the 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is caused by the tension of the operation line invalidating member 7000S between the wires. Then, even if the force of the hand operating the operation line L is lowered to lower the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. Movement of the hand that has been loosened does not reach the illegal ball Q. That is, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, the illegal act using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed as a result.

  As described above, the third fraud prevention means is that the operation line nullifying member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side exhibits an effect in the initial stage of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullifying member 7000S on the side exerts an effect, a higher level of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Note that it is of course possible to use either one of the operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S alone, and it is also possible to implement a specific nullifying member for the operation line nullifying member 7000H and the operation line nullifying member 7000S. The forms may be interchanged, or the same invalidating member may be employed.

  In addition to the case where the operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S are separately provided as in the embodiment and attached to the firing rail 544 or the outer rail 1001, for example, a metal plate forming the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to disable the operation line. Forming member 7000H integrally, or integrally forming a wire on a resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or forming a V-groove at the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. May be engraved, and the operation line L may be attracted to the inside of the groove of the clamping portion 7000Sv to be clamped.

  Further, the operation line nullifying member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line nullifying member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIGS. , 7022, and a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, in the embodiment in which the second operation line nullification member 7000 for nullifying the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, and the third operation line nullification member 7000 is also used for the third embodiment. Although the embodiment provided in the ball drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the communication passage 150h. The line nullification member 7000 is provided at the outlet portion of the communication passage 150h (see the arrow z in FIG. 39), provided on the rear side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 38 (a), or formed as a foul ball drop port 1013. The operation line L is a portion that bends by contacting a part of the return passage portion 1014, such as provided at the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the firing rail 544, and the operation line L is determined by the weight of the illegal ball Q and the like. In any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is going to be straightened by a tension caused by a pulling force by an unauthorized person. Unishi may be. In addition, the installation position of the operation line invalidating member 7000 in the embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch even if a fingertip is inserted from the ball opening, and this position is a safety surface of the player and the operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of a security surface that makes it difficult to perform unauthorized manipulation on the forming member 7000 itself.

  Further, in the embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided to be shifted to one side of the communication passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed to fill the entire width of the passage. You may make it arrange | position a cutting blade. In FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the communication passage 150h are formed as a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. Is not touched. As the cutting blade of the operation line nullifying member 7000 in this case, a well-known bent blade structure or a tip structure is used, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i, and the unit main body 151 If a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is pushed out in such a manner that the cutting blade can be exchanged between old and new, the sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), reference numeral 1021 is a pinching part for the operation line L cut into the valley of the safety cover part 1017, and the operating line L can bite into the pinching part 1021. It has become. Therefore, even if the operation line nullifying member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the pinching part 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g, so that the certainty of preventing fraud is reduced. improves.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate has been described. However, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including a case where the lower plate is not provided). In the case of, the fraudulent act of intruding the illegal ball Q, to which the operation line L is attached, into the game area 5a by using a space communicating with the game area 5a from the upper bowl supply port (ball opening) (the illegal acts A, B). In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of a foul return passage located in a space communicating from the upper ball supply port to the gaming area 5a as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second falsification preventing means is provided in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, but a plurality of the second fraud preventing means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (in each of the folded portions) is provided with a second bent portion as in the above-described embodiment. A second fraud prevention means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent activities using the fraudulent ball Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal plate is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, but a resin molded product having a similar configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding of the foul cover unit 150 itself may be formed into a special shape so as to function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, a metal plate which is a second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, and instead, a taper provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guide member 150k, a slit-shaped capture portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is pinched by the capture portion which is the narrowest portion of the guide portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same illegal deterrence effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In FIGS. 45, 46 and 49, the illegal sphere Q that prevents the illegal sphere Q from entering from the ball opening (prevents the illegal sphere Q from reversing and flowing backward) without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere. By providing the reverse running prevention means, the fraud by the fraudulent ball Q is prevented.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into a course changing portion (a portion corresponding to immediately above the lower counter ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. In addition, it is possible to exemplify the provision of the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the illegal ball Q itself to another passage and sealing the movement (first illegal ball reverse movement prevention means). Thereby, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act such as the fraudulent act A described above that causes the illegal ball Q to flow backward without affecting the normal flow of the ball. In addition, at the entrance of the attraction unit 1022, a capture valve (which allows the backflow of the illegal ball Q to swing into the attraction unit 1022 only in the invasion direction of the attraction unit 1022 is allowed, and A one-sided valve (not shown) that makes the disengagement impossible may be provided, so that a trace using the illegal ball Q and evidence of the illegal act can be left.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the downflow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (backflow). Yes (second means for preventing illegal ball reversal). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent action such as the above-described fraudulent action A, in which the fraudulent ball Q flows backward, without affecting the flow of the normal ball. The operation line invalidating member 7000D in FIG. 49 is also a type of check valve, and has the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  Further, the static operation line invalidating member and the dynamic operation line invalidating member described above may have both of them.

  In the above-described embodiment, an operation line nullification member different from the first operation line nullification member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014. However, such an operation line nullification member may be provided, for example, in a foul ball drop port 1013. And between the launch position and the fall ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachinko gaming machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachinko gaming machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 162 and a pair of glass units rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a flat plate shape, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 115). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 115).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 from above. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by a procedure reverse to the procedure described above. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at the rotation position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 has a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is spaced apart in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thus, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The driving of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In a state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 will prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Things.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

  Also, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end projecting outward from a left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (a shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. Locking projection 182f.

  The four first projections 182a, the second projections 182b, the third projections 182c, and the fourth projections 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first projection 182a is formed such that a side surface in a clockwise direction in a front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 182a is opposite to the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second projection 182b is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first projection 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees clockwise, and It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first projection 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a clockwise rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 182c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gently inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees clockwise, and It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a pass through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and round, and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via the outside is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player comes into contact with the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 controls the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the operation before the single-shot button 193 is operated is released. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first projections 182a, second projections 182b, third projections 182c, and fourth projections 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is most rotated clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth protrusion 182d is moved by the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by a player.

  The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, a plate body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having a plate 201, and a right side of the plate body 212. A mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward; a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213; a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213; The unit includes an upper tray removing unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray removing unit 240 mounted behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front face of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252, and separated from each other left and right. It includes a dish upper right decoration unit 275, a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is an effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, an operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 The transmission gear 350 includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to a lower surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the operation unit base 320. A vibrating speaker 354, a production operation button unit 360 attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330, and an operation section relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320. And

  The plate unit 200 is entirely swelled forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape that bulges forward on the left side more than the center in the right and left directions when viewed from the front, and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion that is approximately 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The front end of the upper plate 201 is receded rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 62). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side thereof is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211 e. B is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (earth ground) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to play a game. The static electricity charged on the ball B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is located below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a which penetrates up and down the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower bowl 202 is closed by a lower bowl removing unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl 202 of the lower bowl 202 is positioned below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower bowl supply port 211c in a state where the lower bowl 202 is assembled to the pan unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower plate hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state in which the lower dish hole 202a is opened, the lower dish hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is mounted on the upper right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front part of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. Dish relay board 214.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. And an upper tray removing unit 240 attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow open rear portion). (Box shape).

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates backward and forward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a, and extends downwardly and cylindrically. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c which penetrates forward and backward at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape; A cut-out portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of a portion extending cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and a front-rear front-right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper tray ball feed port 211e which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper tray ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted, and an upper portion at the left side of the upper tray ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 of the upper tray removing unit 240 penetrates forward and backward below the tray body, and penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150 d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed in a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are moved to the upper plate ball feed port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140, The ball is discharged from the lower bowl supply port 211c into the lower bowl 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the tray is removed.

  The upper bowl feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 in a state assembled with the bowl base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper part and the rear part opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end receding rearward as it goes rightward in a front view from a portion that bulges forward most, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate main body 212 is mounted such that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220 in a state where it is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper part is open. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the rear right corner.

  The front slider 232 of the unit for removing the upper counter ball 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through-hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the lower left decorative board 283, the lower right decorative board 288, and the operation section relay board 392. It is for doing. The plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. And a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 after the player has inserted the card or the prepaid card. To return the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the game ball B after deducting the rented game ball B.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 which is disposed to the right of the pull button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation It includes a return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear part of the ball rental operation base 223.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball rental machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the returned game ball B is deducted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the amount of cash and prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit for removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball and the unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. When the upper ball removing button 222 of the ball rental operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper ball removing unit 230 and the upper ball removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to form the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f and below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to a rear portion of the unit for removing the upper tray ball 230 on the rear surface of the tray unit base 211.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front barrel 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the barrel of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end abutting on a lower end of the upper counter ball removing button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper counter ball removing slider 242 of the upper counter ball removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. A slider 242 that is slidably mounted on the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 that is mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted and opens forward, and has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a game at a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a, when assembled to the dish base unit 210, is directed forward through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e of the dish unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper dish 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion to which the upper ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed on the rear side by a rear cover 244. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, an upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the pitch guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper bowl removing slider 242 has a square shape in front view, and has an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner, and protruding rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is located lower as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In a state where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242 a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211 g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242 a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the head. Further, in the state in which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242, and urges the upper counterslider 242 upward. Therefore, the slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring 243.

The unit for removing the ball from the upper plate 230 and the unit after removing the ball from the upper plate 240 are positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the unit for removing the ball from the upper plate is removed. The upper dish removal button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 abutting on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and are sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball supply member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper ball removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper ball removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper ball removing slider 242 is performed. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partitioning portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and then is lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper tray removing button 222 is released, the upper tray removing slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is removed via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. The ball removal button 222 is raised, and the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, so that the partition 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side through the ball feed unit 140 by the unit for removing the upper plate ball 230 and the unit for removing the upper plate ball 240, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish main body 251 and a dish attached to the upper front of the dish unit main body 252 with a left and right space. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252, respectively. 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is opened and closed by a lower bowl removing lid 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered by the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. In addition, when the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom face is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball hole 202a is provided with the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The plate unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape having an open rear, and have a dish upper left decoration unit 270, a dish lower left decoration unit 280, a dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower right decoration unit on the front surface thereof. 285 are attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower portions become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the plate unit body 252 includes a front notch 252e cut out upward from a lower front end of a portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f that is cut out at a portion below the bottom. In the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f, a lower tray removing unit 260 is inserted.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion opening 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side swelling parts 252a that are located at the center in the left-right direction. And a production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . In addition, in a state where the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate removing button 260 of the lower plate removing unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate removing base 260 of the lower plate removing unit 260 is connected. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower dish removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower bowl removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower bowl removing hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower bowl 202 or the gaming balls B are discharged from the lower bowl 202. It is to make it.

  The lower plate removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a plate-shaped lower plate removing base 261 having a through hole vertically penetrating at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower plate removing unit 261. A slider 262 mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable back and forth, a lower countersunk ball removal button 263 mounted on a front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 for urging the slider 262 forward; The slider 262 is provided with a lower ball removing cover 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower ball removing cover 265 through the slider 262 in an open state.

  The lower bowl removing base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the lower bowl unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower bowl removing hole 202a of the lower bowl 202 (lower bowl main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower bowl removing hole 261 is formed in the same size as the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted in the lower countersunk ball base 261 at a position on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a columnar shape.

  The lower tray removing cover 265 is attached to the lower tray removing base 261 at the left end side at a position on the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and the right end side is the slider 262. And the right end side is formed so as to close the through hole. The lower bowl removing lid 265 is formed with a left and right extending slit into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish removing unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish removing base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower face of the lower dish removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate part 252c. Further, the lower dish removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the lower bowl removing unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is located immediately above the through hole. And the through hole (lower countersunk ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower bowl extracting hole 202a is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, so that the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower counter button 263 is pressed rearward to move rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower counter button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower countersunk ball cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower countersunk ball cover 265 centers on the left end side and the right end side moves rearward. It turns in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball cover 265 located immediately above the through-hole moves rearward from the position of the through-hole, so that the through-hole is opened and the lower countersunk ball-extraction hole 202a is opened. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate hole 202a.

  Note that when the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower plate removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is kept rotating backward, the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower bowl 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, when the lower bowl removing button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. You. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball removing button 263 is returned to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower countersunk ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower countersunk ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower countersunk ball extraction lid 265. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4e. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 are mounted on the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical, left and right upper left dish decoration 271 having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The upper left dish 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The upper left dish reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the upper left decorative body 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the upper left decorative board 273 corresponding to the LED. The upper left dish decoration substrate 273 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the upper left dish decoration 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light.

  The upper left dish unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the upper left dish decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper left dish decoration 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper left dish decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left dish decoration 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical shape and extends left and right, and has a translucent dish upper right decoration 276, a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, and A decorative upper right plate 278 mounted on the rear side of the upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the upper right side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decorative board 278 corresponding to the LED. The dish upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled with the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Decorative unit at lower left of plate and decorative unit at lower right of plate]
The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is. The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends left and right and has a translucent lower left dish decoration 281, a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, A lower left decorative plate 283 mounted on the rear side of the lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The lower left decorative plate 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center rearward in plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. In the lower left dish decoration 281, a semicircular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and a center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The lower left corner of the dish 281 has a spherical shape at the left end. The curvature of the semi-circular arc changes so that the lower left decorative plate 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decoration 281 is formed in milky white.

  The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted from the rear inside the lower left decorative body 281, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative board 283 corresponding to the LED. The lower left dish decorative substrate 283 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the lower left dish decorative body 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the lower left decoration body 281 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  When the lower left dish unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left dish unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left dish decoration unit 280, the left end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end seems to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left dish decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decoration piece 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower left decoration board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decoration piece 281 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent lower right decoration 286, and a lower right lower plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decoration 286. It comprises a reflector 287 and a lower right decorative plate 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as going from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. In the lower right plate decoration 286, a semi-circular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely right rearward at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The right lower end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower right decoration plate 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the interior of the dish lower decoration 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower decoration board 288 corresponding to the LED. The lower right plate decorative substrate 288 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending right and left along the lower right decorative body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and the lower right right decoration body 286 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower right decorative unit 285 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous with the right end of Since the right end of the lower right decoration unit 286 is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decoration unit 285 appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right dish decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the lower right dish decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right dish decoration board 288 emit light, the lower right decoration body 286 is formed. The entire front surface can be almost uniformly illuminated and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the direction in which the effect operation button moves forward and backward. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by a player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about ／ of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is an effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, an operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 An operating ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 to the operating section base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and has a plurality of effect operation ring decoration substrates 352 and effect operation ring decoration substrates 352. The decoration board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the display unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit facing the inside of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is depressed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover 312. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center decoration 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the front side to emit light forward. And a decorative plate 316 below the center of the dish on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the LED are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with the front side swelling downward from the center rearward in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is a production operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a front semicircular arc shape is located forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape whose plan view bulges forward in a plan view along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is formed on the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along a front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a forward part below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A lower plate center decoration 312b in which the protruding semi-arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a shape bent as described above. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled to the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper decorative body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish center lower decorative body The left and right ends of 312b are respectively connected to the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center decoration board 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center decoration body 312a can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center lower decorative board 316 is formed in a long and narrow strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish-under-center decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish-under-center decoration body 312b can be illuminated.

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the semi-circular arc in the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, When the LED of the upper center decorative substrate 314 and the LED of the plate lower center decorative substrate 316 emit light, it is possible to make the whole of each LED emit light substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is the dish left lower decorative body 281 and the dish right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 stands out and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 has a substantially cubic box-shaped outer shape, and has a main body 321 open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 to have a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (four in this case) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and mounted to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion of the lower surface where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into sound such as voice or music and output the sound. it can.

  The leg 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. In the main body 321, a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The outer diameter of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially coincident with the inner circumference of the upper plate center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. In a state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. 322 is exposed to the outside below.

  When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state where the vibration speaker 354 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to a lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact therewith.

[3-5-5c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 71 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice as large as the size in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter of approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation section base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the shaft 332 and are rotatably mounted on an axis extending up and down on the ring mounting base 331, and mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotary base 332 upward. And a restricting ring retaining member 334.

  The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332 and is attached to a lower outer ring cover 335 constituting a part of the rotating operation unit 302, and is attached to a lower side of the outer ring upper cover 335. The outer ring lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotary operation unit 302 and the upper surface of the rotary base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 form a part of the rotary operation unit 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

  The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotating base 332 is mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction, and is arranged in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss 331b for cylindrically protruding upward from a plurality (four in this example) of parts and rotatably mounting the bush 333, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of locations. The plurality of through-holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a protruding downward from the lower surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. When the ring gear 332a is assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 has an outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc constituting an outer and upper portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a. And a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending to the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. I have. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and to the center side from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming the inner and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from an inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover attachment portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface 337 b has the same cylindrical inner diameter as the inner diameter of the rotating base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the inner cover 337 are assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface 335a, the outer lower surface 336a, and the inner surface 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a half or more of a circle, and have a donut shape as a whole. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotary drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 such that the rotation axis projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342; a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343; and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and cover the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is opened to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. I have. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and a leftward projection from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. A plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344, and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detecting pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from integral multiples of the intervals of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thus, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become. Thereby, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Meshes with In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole when assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating the rotary operation unit 302 to vibrate. it can.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotated rotation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted, and by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the player can be performed. Can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear meshing with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring gear 350a and the drive gear 350b have the same pitch circle diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and crosses the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320. Can be

  In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is The transmission drive gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also controls the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Directional operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annular ring is divided into front and rear, and a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear semicircle. And a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having an arc shape. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state where the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 having a transparent upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear similarly to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352 a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and passes through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through-hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to form the rotation operation portion 302 on the outside of the ring. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with its output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice, sound effect, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player gets a feeling as if the effect operation unit 300 was shaking. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can provide a variety of effects to a player.

  The vibration speaker 354 provides sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and provides sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, since the resonance depends on the characteristics of the vibrating speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibrating speaker is attached, and the mounting method, input sound information only at a specific frequency. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a certain width. More specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (swept) eight times in one cycle, approximately one second, in units of 1 Hz. This is intermittently repeated for one second sweep input and one second later.

  In the assembling operation of the gaming machine, the inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibrating speaker at the time of shipment is performed by operating the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game. On the basis of this. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the game machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command for clearing and initializing the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting the vibration speaker (operation confirmation). The inspector can confirm the sound (sound) of the sound and the music by the vibration speaker 354 and also confirm the vibration of the staging operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation processing. .

[3-5-5h. Direction operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and FIG. 78B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by a player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is disposed symmetrically with a button unit base 361 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a center axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward and in a columnar shape, and a disc-shaped connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other and having a circular outer shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis provided on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 so that the central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough. 370, the lower and upper cam drive gear members 370 are connected to the lower end, and the central shaft The lifting / lowering cam member 371 for rotating the lifting / lowering base 364 by rotating the lifting / lowering base 364, the lifting / lowering driving gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting / lowering cam driving gear member 370. A disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the central button body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button body 373. A central button cover 375 that is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape with a closed upper end and that is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover above the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation unit 303a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button main body 373 and has a ring-shaped outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer periphery. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and ascending and descending so as to cover the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 with the central button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing detection sensor 381 is attached to the button unit base 361, and the up / down cam driving gear member 370 is provided. A lifting / lowering detection sensor 382 for detecting the lifting / lowering of the lifting / lowering base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base main body 361a, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base main body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting / lowering detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The button unit base 361 has the lower ends of the legs 361 b attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 forward and backward from the center, respectively, at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at the center so as to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. An upright wall portion 364c protruding upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c so as to face each other into the central hole 364b. I have. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 restricts upward movement by the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c abutting on the upper base 363, and provides a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the center button body 373 can move between itself and the upper base 363. Has formed. Further, the lifting base 364 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the lifting cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And an elevation detecting piece 370 c which is cylindrically protruded downward from the front and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the lifting base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  Further, the elevating cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. It is formed as follows. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and are inserted through the button spring 374.

  The center button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward. The lower end of the central opening 373d contacts the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the center button main body 373.

  The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and the lower ends are attached with screws into which washers are inserted. When the washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, the upward movement of the center button main body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 is configured such that the bottom 373 b (the lower end of the center opening 373 d) of the center button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 is formed so as to penetrate downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a smaller urging force than the lifting spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button main body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate 375a. It is provided so as to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can make the center button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can make the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers an upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular board section 378 a is extended from the inner periphery of the board section 378 a to a cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is mounted on the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the assembled state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the effect operation button unit 360 is configured such that the guide pins 364 d of the elevating base 364 are in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into a locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 has moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button main body 373 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, in a state where it is assembled to effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of outer peripheral button cover 380. Also project upward (see FIG. 79).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 78A), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button main body 373 is pressed. There is no detection by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating cam drive is driven via the driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 78 moves rightward, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the fourth position. Rolling to the left of the locking portion 371c of the one cam 371b, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls leftward along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting / lowering cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the state of the ascending position.

  In the state of the ascending position, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the ascending position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the state of the ascending position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowering position is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation section 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has protruded above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in a state where they are assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation section 303a) is pressed downward with a stronger force than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The central button body 373 moves downward against the force, and comes into contact with the elevating base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is connected to the button unit base 361. , The pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (the center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the elevating base 364 is moved via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the biasing force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the elevating base 364 are in the lowered position. However, since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) projects upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 78B, the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the state is returned to the original lowered position.

[3-5-5i. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted inside the board box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the rendering operation unit 300. The operation section relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the elevation detection sensor 382, and the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is relayed. I have.

[3-5-5j. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rendering operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81 (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 81 (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 81 (c) is the center pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when the operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer circumference pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing unit 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the front side of a virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the circular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is inclined to be lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79, etc.).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. Rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by a player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in left side view. The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction is different from the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Thus, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in a left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. I do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. At the same time, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy and a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more arc of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by a player's hand. .

  Thus, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a manner that the player can easily perform. Sex has been enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform the rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lower position or the upper position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Thus, the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light, so that the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, so that the plurality of LEDs arranged in line are sequentially rotated in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be made to emit light. Thereby, the player can be illusioned as if an LED (decorative board) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated and the center operation unit 303a of the operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

  In the normal (down position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b of the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing detection is performed. No pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). As a result, the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing operation portion 303 to vigorously protrude upward together with the elevating base 364 to a state of the ascending position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotating operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude more upward than the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330.

  When the central operating unit 303a is pressed downward in the state where the operating unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the central operating unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central operating unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect pressing. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b The state is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

  Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed downward in the state where the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation section 303a projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 81A). . In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect pressing.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a firmly, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the staging operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to further entertain the player-participation type production.

  Note that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation is facilitated by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 becoming a hindrance. As a result, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front and exploded. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, And a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Have been. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decoration 271 of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of decorative portions 410b in the side window capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the pachinko machine 1 where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to make the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine located on the right side difficult to see, or the player playing with the right pachinko machine. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and a plurality of side-window decorative portion decorative substrates 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a plurality of side window decorative members 412 are provided. And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the door frame right side base 411 and a right side reflector 415 that is disposed forward of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left and right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and front and rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. Frame that has a through-hole 417a that extends in a horizontal direction and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three in this case) of side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The decorative portion 410b in the side window of the decorative member 412 in the side window has a front end side formed in a truncated conical cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the rear end side, and a front end of the cylinder formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property.

  The side window decorative part decorative board 413 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window decorative member 412, and is provided on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at the side window decorative member 412. Is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape of up, down, left, and right around the axis of the side window decorative portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decorative portions 410b. Have been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, up, down, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Have been. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that penetrate back and forth, and in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and front and back. The rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

  The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419, and includes a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b. Have been. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can make the door frame right side decorative body 419 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative plate 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end of the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. The body 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending wavy forward such that a 1/4 portion from the top projects most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction within the side window 410a, and emits the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration board 413. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b inside the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be hardly seen through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LED of the side window decoration unit decorative board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration units 410b is turned off. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b at 410a. Therefore, the player who is searching for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity. The player can make the entire game area 5a hard to see from the player, and make it difficult for other players to feel as if viewed by other players, so that the player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decorative portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window decorative portion decorative board 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzling and change the visibility through the side window 410a. Let it. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game area 5a and to make it difficult for another player such as an adjacent player to look inside the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the attention is given to other players. You can prevent discomfort from becoming unable to concentrate on the game as it becomes and feeling that you have lost due to a mistake, and make the game more fun by focusing the player on the game Instead, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 88 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state which carried out. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers both the left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to a front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and a door frame top center decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface; A door frame top left decorative board 456 attached to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. Have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. A top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. A bottom cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a bottom cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top bottom cover 465 from below; Door frame top relay attached near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body 451a extending to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction, and near the left and right ends on the front surface of the main body 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is located upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed to have the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward becomes smaller in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. And extend in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is separated in the left-right direction, connects a front end and a rear end, and extends upward and downward in a flat plate-like shape. A pair of reinforcing ribs 454a penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the cage top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c that penetrate vertically in the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and face the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the central part of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left part of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and extend to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs so as to penetrate forward and backward.

  The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. I have. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91 and the like. FIG. 91 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a half tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, a door frame top center decorative Since the board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, the LEDs on the decorative boards are appropriately illuminated, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated. A light emission effect can be shown to a player as if the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is disposed on the upper surface, and coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. A pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. The two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) and large-diameter dish upper decorative bodies 312a and 312b are attached vertically above and below the dish central part 312a. Door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 41 of door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the dish unit 200, the three operation parts 302 are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302, the two upper decoration parts 312a and the lower decoration part 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the upper left dish decoration 271, the upper right dish decoration 276, and the lower left dish decoration 281, the lower right dish decoration 286, and the lower decoration dish center 312 b arranged below the upper dish decoration body 312 a are cut in half. The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is slightly reduced, and a unit lower cover 311 having a hemispherical shape is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the effect operation unit 300, since it becomes larger upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-down direction, and the rotation operation unit 302, which can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b is made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center Since the decorative body 312a and the dish bottom decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can be largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to appeal to the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, or uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front end on the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. And a body frame upper hinge member 510 rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably mounted with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. A lower frame hinge assembly, which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is mounted on the lower part of the front of the main body frame base unit 500 and a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in a front view. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the inside, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640, which is attached to the rear side of the game board 5 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a single guide passage extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, and a second tank rail 553 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 that is separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view and attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at the position shown in FIG. It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and a game ball guided by the single guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. B, a payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path. A lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 is attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges and also urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and the main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably mounted on a lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and that is rotatable around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction and that detachably holds the game board 5. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ／ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side and penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board forming the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed. The game apparatus includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d protruding upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulating movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  In addition, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting portion. The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side in front view of the unit 501e, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a plate shape in a plate shape, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j rotatably mounted and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left side of the rear surface of the base body 501a when viewed from the front, for mounting the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board placement section 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, thereby enabling the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b to be detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, penetrating back and forth at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame auxiliary relay board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to a side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hingedly attached to the main body frame base 501 (left side). ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are different. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted into a pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main frame 4. (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the hinge is rotated so that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 100 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees. You can add a habit. Accordingly, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the bending habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and to connect the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axis center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and a front surface of the main body frame 4 intersects by 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed smoothly, and the door frame 3 can be securely closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 Is mounted rotatably.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 having a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped rear portion bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extended portion, and has an upper hinge hole 511 a for door frame for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to the door frame with respect to the body frame 4. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. The hinge member 125 below the door frame is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped plate member is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and is used for the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 to be inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower part for the door frame into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower frame member hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 101 and the like. FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 by the game board. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device attaching portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 541 on the right side in a front view and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A shooting rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game balls B are supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544, and the game balls B are supplied to the upper right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544. When the handle 182 is turned in a state where the player is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting hammer 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are used. From there, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below and passes through the foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the front and rear direction with a substantially constant width in the front and rear direction, and a width in the front and rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b which is extended substantially downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction is approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and is shortly extended downward from the right side in front view of the top plate portion 551a. A back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as a rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and a left plate portion 551b. From the front of the lower side to the right to the left of the backboard Includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate, an eave part 551da projecting rearward is formed at a position separated by a predetermined length from the lower side thereof in the left-right direction.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion hole 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate 551a, the left plate 551b, and the right plate 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. In addition, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f in front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 extending left and right and opening upward, and a portion extending right and left of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction. In addition, the front and rear direction is formed to be shorter than the depth of the top plate 551a in the front and rear direction. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 has a left end communicating with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is molded of a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view in which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonally leftward and backward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to extend straight to the left. The tank rail 553 has a bottom surface inclined such that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form one guide passage. Have been. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of one guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a slightly higher height on the left end side than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are disposed substantially on the same plane. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is bent a plurality of downwards from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from becoming wide or narrow due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque white color, and has a second sphere rectifying member at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553. The end on the one rail cover 554 side is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 110). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height decreases, the ball is not clogged.

  The ball stopping member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in opaque red, and is slidably attached to the left and right sides near the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding the tank 553, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed, and the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is disposed is lower downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in the shape of a plurality of bent steps. A part of the plurality of bent steps is formed as a board housing portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground board 559. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from left to right as viewed from behind the payout base unit 550). ＸXCN10 is provided.) The substrate is accommodated such that the dispensing base 551 is viewed from the front and the mounting surface is vertical toward the rear of the dispensing base 551 such that the external terminals are exposed. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are provided) are mounted with the mounting surface facing downward. When viewed from the front, the payout base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate housing portion 551aa, and covered by the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground board 559 is housed in a space formed by the board housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from outside the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  Among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted). In a state in which the frame ground substrate 559 is housed and mounted inside the substrate housing portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate housing portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is provided. Is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558, making it difficult to see, but among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and the pachinko machine 1 can be seen from the back (for example, see FIG. 93). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is 13.4 mm, which is high as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the pachinko machine 1 is hidden by the ball rectifying member 556, and is difficult to visually recognize. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a low height of 7 mm as described above, cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and are hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back. Is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and grounding (earth ground) the island facilities of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The entire configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 104A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back part 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B through the payout apparatus 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies, to the payout device 580, the game balls B arranged in a line by one guide path of the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 includes a single payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the single guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a single ball removal branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In the normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball ejection lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the ball-exiting passage 580b to the upper full-filled ball path unit 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper portion of the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guiding path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 movable by a game ball B flowing in the guiding path 570a, and a game ball B in the guiding path 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence / absence of (see FIG. 110).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the vehicle. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends frontward and rearward at the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude when the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it does not project, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the payout passage of the payout device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a is detected. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. FIG. 106A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotation position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. In FIG. 107, in order to explain the rotational position of the dispensing blade, a dispensing gear member and a part of various gears, which are not visible from the back of the dispensing device, are described so as to be visible, and are to be described. A small circle is attached to the bottom of the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. Here, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described first, and then, the rotation position of the dispensing blade, prevention of ball clogging and prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of Dispensing Device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back part 551e. The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a that is a box-like shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball discharge passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. The dispensing device includes a flat dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be visually recognized from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to a rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotation shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The attached spur gear drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) is meshed with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front cover 583. And the second transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 586, and a spur gear-shaped second gear rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), the spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587 and the dispensing gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) extend outward. A dispensing gear member 588 having a number of detecting pieces 588b and rotatably mounted between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and dispensing between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. A dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is detected. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that performs the operation. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 and driven stepwise. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the payout motor 584 rotates the rotary shaft in a stepwise manner at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in this embodiment). That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing blade 589 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded into an opaque white color.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device The ball removal movable piece 592 is attached to the part branched from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball removal passage 580b can be opened and closed, and can be held at a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded to be opaque white. The ball extraction lever 593 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded in opaque red.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end toward the lower side, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent rightward in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Is formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view from the center of the dispensing blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. As the payout detection sensor 591, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end. A part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension and a rib-shaped ball blocking prevention part 581r is protruded toward the ball ejection path 580b at the branching portion. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a right-downward inclined surface in rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched and where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached, and have the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body-side guide wall 581a that protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from above in a rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in the rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three detecting pieces 588b each having a flattened arc shape and extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending concentrically outward from the rotation axis thereof at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The dispensing blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is depressed toward the center with a circular arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three blade pieces 589a. By forming the ball accommodating portions 589b at equal intervals, three lobe pieces 589a serving as peaks and three ball containing portions 589b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. Accordingly, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted on an axis extending forward and backward at the upper ends of the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Can be projected into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreated outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be vertically slidable near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 on the left side in rear view. A part of the ball-pull lever 593 protrudes rearward through a part of the payout device rear lid 582, and can be slid by operating the protruding part. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can abut on the ball removal movable piece 592, so that the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted, The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 106). In this way, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When the ball removal is performed by raising the ball removal lever 593 to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B is in a state like a rosary connection upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592. Flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589, so that the game ball B is moved from the payout passage 580a side. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the movable ball removing piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the removing ball path 580b, so that the removing ball movable piece 592 protruding into the removing ball path 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end of the payout device vigorously. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force is not applied to the movable ball piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball can be removed by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, so that more game balls B can be discharged to the island facilities downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall.

  Also, when the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through the space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 moves between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball ejection passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B can reliably flow to the downstream side of the ball ejection passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotation position of dispensing blade]
As described above, the dispensing device 580 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 ( The number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), and the dispensing gear 588a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) Z3: 24) and a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588, and the like. When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is driven to rotate, the rotation is performed via the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotation speed of the payout gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotation speed of the payout motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 by calculation based on mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor that is excited by 2-2 phase excitation and has a rotation axis that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (360 degrees after the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps). = 18 degrees × 20 steps). The discharge blade 589 that rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees × reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. Thus, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when it makes one rotation (360 degrees), it becomes 4.5. It will rotate an extra degree.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 is rotated by 364.5 degrees. It is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 by 53.333... (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees) stepwise. The number of steps, which is the number of times, is not an integer.

  That is, in the present embodiment, three ball housing portions 589b are formed at equal intervals in the dispensing blade 589, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step driving, Through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, the dispensing blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees (that is, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is 1). The payout blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees when step-rotated (rotated by 18 degrees), so that the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B every 120 degrees of rotation. In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Thus, in the present embodiment, the payout blade 589 sets the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up to the decimal point, to the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589. By rotating 589 over 120 degrees (actually, rotating 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotations × 6.75 degrees)), the rotation position of the payout blade 589 reaches a position for receiving the next game ball B. Can be rotated.

  The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B each time it makes one rotation (360 degree rotation), but it may pay out only one game ball B, for example, cigarette dust or dust. For example, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 may be erroneously detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Therefore, every time one game ball B is paid out, the process of setting the origin of the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is performed. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation, which is an integer obtained by rounding up the decimal point, as described above. The payout blade 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees rotation (= 18 step rotations × 6.75 degrees)), and the payout blade 589 pays out each time one game ball B is paid out. The process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the blade 589 is performed to improve the accuracy of the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589.

  Further, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not set to an integer as described above. Even if errors accumulate, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, so that one game ball can be obtained. Each time a payout is made, the accumulated error can be reset. Thereby, even if an error occurs every time one game ball is dispensed due to the influence of cigarette dust or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is dispensed. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce an error in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

  Further, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer as described above, so that each time one game ball is paid out. The positioning position differs every time. This makes it possible to disperse the adhesion positions of dust and dust by making the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 different each time. Also, if the speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error accumulates. However, even if the error accumulates each time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 becomes larger. The detection is performed by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 shown in FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, by changing the rotation position of the ball feed rotation unit that receives and sends out the game balls every time the game balls are paid out, the position where the dust and the dust are attached is dispersed, so that the ball and the dust are dispersed. On the other hand, a strong payout device 580 can be provided. Note that the payout device 580 has a single payout passage 580a as described above. Therefore, when the payout speed of the game balls is the same as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having one payout passage 580a in the present embodiment collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 as compared with the payout device having payout blades in the two payout passages. Since the number of times is also doubled, the probability that tobacco tar and dust adhere to the dispensing blade 589 is increased.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, as described above, the payout blade 589 exceeds one rotation, so that one rotation of the payout blade 589 corresponds to 54 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. When the control for determining and managing the set is performed, the angular difference of 4.5 degrees is generated with respect to one rotation of the discharge blade 589 every time the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates 54 steps. In this case, the angle difference eventually builds up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to pay out the game balls B increases by three.

  As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions having a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout control board 633 rotates the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 so that the angle difference described above does not occur. By setting a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as one management range, one game ball B can be used. It can be managed as a payout operation.

  Specifically, among the 120-degree areas in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed. In this state, the light-shielding range corresponds to nine-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 (equivalent to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588). In the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed, the detection axis of the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and thus the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps as a light receiving range. (Corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) of rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the area of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588 is set as a light-shielding area of the area of 60 degrees on which the detecting piece 588b is formed, and the 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is detected. The area of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed is controlled as a light receiving range by an 18-step rotation including the 9-step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584, and the payout of one game ball B is performed. This operation is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates nine steps, the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps). And the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 can be rotated slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, so that a 60-degree area (light-shielding range) in which the detecting piece 588b is formed, It is possible to reliably determine a 60-degree area (light receiving range) where the detection piece 588b is not formed.

  Here, a method of setting the origin of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the payout control board 633 is in a state where the detecting piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 (“the first edge”). The rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side from the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the point A as the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by four steps from the origin as the point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 (referred to as a "second edge detection state"). As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in a region where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 rotating integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from the point A to the origin and the point B, as shown in FIG. Of the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed).

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by nine steps from the point B as the point A again. At this time, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to a downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in a region where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. (A 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed).

  Here, the control of the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control-side power-on processing when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that occurs momentarily). When performing the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting in the payout control-side power-on process, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the regular process. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt processing. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as a payout motor control process, a history creation process, and an origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by performing 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control processing. The payout control board 633 repeatedly checks the presence / absence of a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation processing. The payout control board 633 controls the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms, that is, based on the detection signals from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and the previous time, respectively. The result of confirming whether the detecting piece 588b is in the state of blocking or not blocking the optical axis is determined from the least significant bit of the history information having an 8-bit width from the least significant bit. After shifting one bit at a time toward the bit, if the result of this and previous confirmations indicates that the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or When the result of confirmation is different from the time (for example, one of the confirmation results of the current time and the previous time is a time when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the result of the blade rotation detection sensor When the detecting piece 588b does not block the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  As described above, in the history creation processing, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms when the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation is switched. The payout control board 633 performs an origin setting process of setting the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. The dispensing control board 633 repeatedly executes the dispensing motor control process to rotate the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above. Since the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 becomes the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in a 60-degree area where the above-described detection piece 588b is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588b is set to the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the point A. 0000001B ("B" indicates bit information; the same applies hereinafter) is set because the optical axis has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (first edge detection state). . When the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, since the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width, 00111111B is set, In the origin setting processing, the payout control board 633 performs the first masking process on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B, thereby extracting data from eight times before to five times before from the history information as a calculation result. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000B by the first masking process), and the second determination value of 00010000B is further subjected to the second masking process on the extracted data, thereby obtaining the data five times before the history information. Data is taken out as an operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask processing). If the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotational position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the origin.

  Note that, in the origin setting process, when the rotation position of the ejection blade 589 is set as the origin, the ejection control board 633 rotates the rotation axis of the ejection motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotation position of the ejection blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is set to the point B, and the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is rotated nine steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the rotation shaft exceeds the light shielding range). This process is completed again in a total of 13 step rotations in which the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set to the point A again. In other words, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, until the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates a total of 13 steps elapses. An origin detection prohibition time is provided for prohibiting the origin setting for the dispensing blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing the payout motor control processing. As shown in FIG. 107, the dispensing control board 633 rotates the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotating position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A, and determines the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 as the origin. Is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the origin to change the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 to B. The point time is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the light-shielding range is The time at which the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is again set to the point A is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one ball of the game ball B is performed by the 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Since the rotation is performed by 18 steps of rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 584, 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps) is obtained.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including a payout device that pays out a number of game balls according to a rotation amount of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor (for example, JP-A-2004-041261 (paragraph [0052] and FIG. 4). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees to pay out one game ball by outputting data drive data for four steps. ing. In pachinko machines installed in pachinko parlors, it is inevitable that tobacco tar and dust adhered to the game balls adhere to the inside of the payout device. In addition, since the dispensing device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensing device that is resistant to cigarette dust and dust is required. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees and pay out one game ball by driving the payout motor for four steps. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there has been a problem that the positions where tobacco dust and dust adhere are fixed and are easily deposited.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention]
Next, prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout will be described with reference to FIG. Here, first, prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described, and subsequently, prevention of ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened. I can do it. When removing the ball, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to bring the ball removal movable piece 592 into a rotatable state. At this time, in a state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the discharge passage 580a from the ball housing portion 589b of the discharge blade 589. In this state, a total of four game balls B are parked over a rib-shaped ball blocking prevention portion 581r which has a predetermined distance dimension and protrudes toward the ball ejection passage 580b. As the predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and on the downstream side (that is, the payout blade 589 (The downstream side of the discharge passage 580a). As a result, a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension from the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589, and the rib-shaped ball blocking preventing portion protrudes toward the ball discharge passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B stop in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B to be stopped protrudes toward the ball removal passage 580b in the ball blocking prevention part 581r. In other words, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention portion 581r. The above-mentioned game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention portion 581r. In this case, the length is such that it can flow down to the ball passage 580b. As described above, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stops on the upper surface of the ball blockage preventing portion 581r while protruding toward the ball passage 580b (in other words, the ball blockage prevention). (The length of a portion of the game ball B parked on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball-extraction passage 580b), and the width of the ball-extraction passage 580b is regulated to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down. You can do it.

  In addition, as described above, the ball clogging prevention unit 581r has the upper surface and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a formed in the same plane, and has a slope inclined downward and rightward in rear view.

  That is, in the case where the ball is removed while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if the ball collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has a right-downward inclined surface as viewed from the rear. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention unit 581r is located on the right side and downstream of the left end of the ball blocking prevention unit 581r. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from popping due to a collision and flowing down to the ball ejection path 580b. Be able to Going on. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from being clogged near the left end of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r passes the ball removal path (the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a) along with the ball removal path 580b. As shown by the dashed line in FIG. 108 (a), the flow path of the game ball B on the side (flow path to the side) is regulated to the width of one ball of the game ball B as the width of the ball passage 580b. This can prevent ball clogging. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being clogged when the ball is removed. In the present embodiment, the width of the ball extraction passage 580b is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm, although it varies depending on the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. By the way, ball clogging is likely to occur at a place where the width of each passage is narrowed slightly from twice as large as the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) to twice as small as the diameter of the game ball (for example, 21 mm).

  Next, prevention of a ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described. In a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108A, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is stored in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. At the same time, the subsequent game balls B are connected to the game balls B by a rosary and stopped in the payout passage 580a. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper side by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end to the lower side, and slightly rightward therefrom. After being bent obliquely downward, it is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width, and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589.

  For this reason, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B abutting on the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589 is set at the center (the center of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589). (Center of gravity) position and slightly shifted to the left as compared to the position of the payout blade 589. When the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 follows The rightward force (that is, the clockwise rotation force) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 due to the ball pressure of the game ball B due to its own weight.

  In such a state, when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the dispensing blade 589 naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is stored in the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The game ball B flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and a ball dropout occurs.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by the dispensing The shape of the dispensing passage 580a on the right side of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view is formed so that the dispensing can be stopped by six steps of rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stops. , The game ball B contacting the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589, the point S1 contacting the side wall of the dispensing passage 580a, and the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 having a circular arc-shaped blade piece 589a. Of the surfaces, the ball accommodation portion 589b where the game ball B is accommodated is closer to the ball accommodation portion 589b (that is, the ball accommodation portion 589b where the game ball B is accommodated, and the ball accommodation portion where the game ball B following the ball accommodation portion 589b is not accommodated) Portion 589b and the S2 point of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a connecting the ball piece 589a to the ball storage portion 589b side where the game ball B is accommodated (from the center of the outer peripheral surface). It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a ball pressure can be generated that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the dispensing blade 589, and the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can be rotated six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is stopped by rotating six steps from the origin of the payout blade 589, the payout motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), the point is rotated by two steps in the light-shielding range (9 steps) beyond point B, which has been rotated four steps from the origin, as shown in FIG. 107 (d). However, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 13 steps (as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the rotation proceeds two steps out of the nine steps and proceeds with the remaining seven steps + five steps from the point A), the dispensing blade 589 Is the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and is paid out. It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and stops), the number of balls to be paid out of the game balls B does not occur.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 is used for pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and paying out commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. In response, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), first, the payout motor 584 is controlled so that the operation of returning the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the origin is not performed. As described above, this causes an excessive number of balls to be paid out in the state where the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotated by 6 steps) and stopped. This is to prevent that.

[4-7-3. Top full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the back to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view is vertically extended.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 having an open rear side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and having an open front side. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends rightward as viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the entire width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left and right sides of the upper sphere storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and near the right end in the upper surface on the front view. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 110).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal payout path 600c, an upper full discharge path 600d, and an upper ball discharge path 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side in a front view. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball ejection passage 610c arranged in order from the left in front view, on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball ejection passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operation projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled with the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout path 610a, the lower full fill payout path 610b, and the lower ball emptying path 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper full tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. The downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is open to face a ball guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 that opens to the left.

  In a normal full state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150 in the lower full tank path unit 610. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in a front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B do not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Game ball flow in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  The ball tank 552 that is open upward has a predetermined number based on, for example, a ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570 detects a ball cut from the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Of game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent to the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay at the upstream side of the payout blades 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it is understood that the game balls B are stored in at least the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portions 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is disposed under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at the time.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game balls B paid out from 580 stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B are upstream from the lower normal payout passage 610a. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B begin to flow toward the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and fills the ball receptacle 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  When the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate is dispensed. The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

  When discharging the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the state of the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game balls B are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the falling game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592. Are hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the outside outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facilities).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 111A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111B is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame that covers a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placement portion 501c, and a front side near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to swell from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And a connection portion 621c that is open.

  The main frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and a portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 on the right side from the center in front view, and to arrange the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output backward from the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. In the enclosure 624, since the front recess 621b for the space bulging forward is formed on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes rightward. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space on the right side of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 with the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, the enclosure 624 of a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel panel 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be used without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the main body 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that even if the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small, a loud sound with heavy bass can be output.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Thus, the sound output from the front surface of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker port 211b of the plate unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are output. This allows the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a, which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates back and forth, is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball guide unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that opens upward on the right side when viewed from the front downstream of the ball guide unit 627 and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guiding unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at the upper portion of the left side in front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In a state where the ball-pulling guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream-end opening of the lower ball-pulling passage 610 c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the discharged ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pulling-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wider space on the left side than the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear sounds having richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631. The power supply board cover 631 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the power supply board 630 can be viewed through the power supply board cover 631 without removing the power supply board cover 631 from the rear base 626. I have. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, which steps down a commercial power supply voltage of 100 VAC (100 VAC) to a power supply voltage for a game machine of 24 VAC (24 VAC). 24V AC that is stepped down in the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as +35 V DC, +12 V DC, +5 V DC, etc.) from 24 V AC supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them to the various boards. The power supply board 630 must be supplied with a power supply voltage of 24 VAC for a gaming machine. However, there is a possibility that a commercial power supply voltage of 100 VAC is supplied due to an erroneous connection of a power cord (not shown) and the power supply board 630 is broken. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c is configured to be exchangeable using a Phillips screwdriver, which is a general tool (note that the power supply unit 620c is fastened without using a general tool such as a Phillips screwdriver). It can also be configured so that the tool can be manually attached and detached.)

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (FIG. 115). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball rental button 224 of the ball rental operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board or the like of the game board 5. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not an unauthorized modification has been made or an unauthorized IC is mounted) Is checked from the outside of the payout control board box 632. The dispensing control board box 632 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the dispensing control board box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the payout control board box 632 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the illegal opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrence against illegal actions on the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to a rearmost part of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rear of the main frame speaker 622, and protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600. When the left side of the back cover 640 is mounted on the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-bottle path unit 600, it is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view of a flat plate extending up, down, left, and right is bent forward, and a contact portion 640a that is lowered forward by one step is formed on the upper side. When assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551 (the rear surface of the eave portion 551 da formed on the above-described upper back plate 551 d). I have. When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a comes into contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551, and the contacted portion is , And are covered with an eave portion 551da protruding from the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

  The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically except for the contact part 640a. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651 and depending on a rotation direction, the door frame. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the lock unit 650 urges the hook 652 for the door frame downward and also urges the hook 653 for the outer frame upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of the door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501 to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by engaging with the transmission member 133.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted through the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and 4 is unlocked. In this manner, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, a detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 124. FIG. 117A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 117B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 118 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can be detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward and left in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of an upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to an upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553; a payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the payout base 551 downstream of the tank rail 553 for paying out game balls B to the player side; , Is provided.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape having an open upper side. Have been. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (the right wall 552e), and has a length of about ／ of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left as viewed from the front. Further, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the left in the left-right direction after extending from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side in plan view. It extends obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and is formed in a crank shape extending to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. .

  The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left and right direction at the portion where the upper side is closed, on the bottom surface of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a and on the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a when viewed from the front (in the present embodiment, approximately Three rectangular cutouts 553aa having a width of 30 mm) are formed at predetermined intervals (about 10 mm in the present embodiment). The rectangular cutout portion 553aa allows the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a to have a thickness of approximately 7 mm, which is obtained by adding the thickness of the rear wall (in the present embodiment, approximately 2.5 mm) from the rear wall to the front of the main guiding portion 553a. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom surface (in the present embodiment, upward from the bottom surface of the main guidance portion 553a) is formed on the rear wall of the main guidance portion 553a. , About 2.5 mm), a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and these rectangular holes are connected to each other.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 fall due to the metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as the collision of the game balls B or rubbing. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B becomes attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. , And the payout of the game balls B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, whereby the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guiding portion 553a, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a falls to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a clerk of the game hall, and is caused by wear of the game balls B attached to the main guiding portion 553a. By performing the operation of removing the metal powder, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guide portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b slightly extends at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. The bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b in contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape, and ball clogging (ball ball) easily occurs. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball ball) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in various effect units or the like, it is possible to check the status of the drive motors and the transmission mechanisms such as gears and belts while keeping the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The same operation and effect as the use effect can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 is formed. A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from an upper side of a rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501 m and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and extends in a substantially horizontal manner at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m. The upper end of each of the left and right steps 501n and 501o is higher than the left and right steps 501o and 501o in the left and right directions, and extends in the front and rear direction in a strip shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left step part 501n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step part 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end becomes slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step part 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m. The left end of the right side of the bypass passage 552g coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left and right direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end that is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir portion extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g, the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. From the right to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is assembled with the main body frame 4 such that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end side of a portion extending obliquely to the left and right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in the left and right direction in a crank shape. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is widened at the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Further, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely in the left-right direction such that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the game ball B can be released to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower, by the obliquely extending rear end. By discharging the gas to a wide area, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, a portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from inside the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in a portion of the tank rail 553 behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided backward can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 is a flat plate that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to near the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c is formed in a shape having a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about one third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  The spherical tank 552 includes, in a plan view, a right end of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape, and a straight line connecting the end of the right end to the front wall 552b and the end of the rear wall 552c. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction outward and up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j, when assembled to the main body frame 4, is stepped downward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a stepwise manner toward the rear. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, and then rises to the left along the tank rail 553 above the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555) Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open the grip portion by operating the lever and can grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left stage portion 501n, the right stage portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the right end of the rear end is lower, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined such that the left ends thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow portion 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface 501m, and can be caused to flow out of the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m forward. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface 501m (see FIG. 122). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, and it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball damage) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour path 552g is provided, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour path 552g, as shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from acting strongly on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 so that the main frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side. The clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressures applied to the game balls B are different, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other, thereby preventing the game balls B from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, a game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side, so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are passed downstream through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since it has the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is supplied vigorously in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a and the like. However, there is no problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facilities to the ball tank 552 is used for the ball 552. When the game ball B jumps on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 122) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facilities bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left and right steps 501n and 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 122, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  When the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game balls stacked on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, a space (empty space) on which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

  Further, while the ball tank 552 is molded with a conductive resin, the tank rail 553 and a peripheral control board box of a peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded with a non-conductive resin. In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 is removed from the peripheral control board box having the same polarity. And is not attracted to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Configuration of measures against metal powder]
Next, an electric trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 117 (a), and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for preventing metal powder. In FIG. 125, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only a portion of the game board 5 necessary for description is shown as a cross-sectional view.

  When metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from a plurality of cutouts 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur, causing a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or causing a malfunction. For example, a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes an IC such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, and an SDRAM described later, and a peripheral data ROM board described later includes an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. The pin spacing of these ICs is reduced, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced, and the spacing of various connectors is reduced by increasing the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electric trouble due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of cutouts 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is displaced rearward as compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600) (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by the distance dimension of).

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the back of the top plate portion 551a). ), A plurality of steps are formed in a step shape bent downward. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is to be arranged. In addition, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551. In addition, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa is received and adhered to the top plate portion 551a, or adhered to the convex portion 551da. You can do it. Further, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the payout base 551 are in surface contact protrudes rearward at the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa through the notch portion 553aa, is covered by the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 starts from the contact portion. Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) so as not to fall toward the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501. It has become.

  As described above, the top plate portion 551a and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are formed of the metal of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The powder is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600) is displaced (in the present embodiment, displaced by a distance dimension that is about half the diameter of the game ball B). (I.e., the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the notch 553aa), thereby causing an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553. This is effective for preventing metal powder.

  Also, while a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, upper and left sides of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), Since the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later) because it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, respectively. However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover 1501.

  The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 has a square-shaped FAN mounting recess for mounting an air-cooling fan FAN at the center thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are respectively formed along the slits. The cover body 1501 has seven connector holes provided along a lower side thereof, which are provided on a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume adjustment switch, and Volume adjustment holes are respectively formed, and two connector holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501, A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. In addition, in a state where a liquid crystal output board described later is mounted inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are respectively exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings, thereby controlling the peripheral control unit 1500. Air from outside the unit 1500 is passed through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. And a volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a gap formed in the above-described gap (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501), and a cover. And a sound volume adjustment hole formed in body 1501. During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion of the cover body 1501 (total area) is the same as the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 described above. Clearances (seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on the cover body 1501), a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and formed on the cover body 1501 A volume adjustment hole, a gap formed in the liquid crystal output board, and an area in a gap formed in the two connector holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. It is getting smaller. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in via the, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small. Thus, it is possible to prevent the heavy powder of metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation holes 1501az under the influence of the air flow.

  By the way, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, when the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 via the blade by this rotation, the air-cooling fan FAN is rotated. Since the flow velocity of the air due to the rotation of the wings increases, the probability that the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 under the influence of the air flow increases, and An electrical trouble (short circuit) due to the metal powder causes a failure (failure) in various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover 1501. Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), a protruding portion is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, so that heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. The game ball can be configured to have a function as an eave to prevent the fan from being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protruding portion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501. It can be configured to have a function as an eave for preventing heavy powder called B metal powder from being sucked into the air-cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN is thin. (That is, the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess. When a fan having a short distance dimension is selected) and the air-cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is removed by the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess. It can be configured to have a function as an eave for preventing the air from being sucked into the FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B is taken (hereinafter referred to as a “countermeasure against metal powder according to the second to fifth embodiments”) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 shows the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. In FIGS. 126 to 129, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (hereinafter, referred to as “measures against metal powder according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only a portion of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in a plurality of directions (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are provided. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward a plurality of times as going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and upward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed above the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a and the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same plane. The rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 arranged on substantially the same plane as the tank rail 553 is formed to branch rearward from the portion where the effect display device 1600 is to be attached and to extend rearward.

  Further, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is connected to the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010. Is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, which is in contact with the surface, and the abutted portion is covered by an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. In contrast to the rear surface of the upper plate 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, which are arranged substantially on the same plane, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment. In a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the back face of the tank rail 553 and the back box of the back unit 3000. The difference is that a rear surface 3010d of the base 3010 is arranged on substantially the same plane. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface is in contact with the rear surface, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a mounting recess formed on the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010. It is said that it is in a contact state where it comes into surface contact with 3010da, and this contacted part is covered by an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. It is different at the point.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the notches 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, a contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting concave portion 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact with each other is defined by the upper wall formed by the mounting concave portion 3010da. Since it is covered, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact with the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back unit 3000). Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 (see below).

  As described above, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 have fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in a plurality of directions (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are provided. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is disposed in the front-rear direction is different from that of the top plate 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward a plurality of times as going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the bent top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate 551a is close to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude below the notch 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a are in contact with the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Are arranged on the same plane.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. In contrast to the rear surface of the upper plate 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d being disposed substantially on the same plane, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate unit 551a. The bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially flush with each other. In that they are located in In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface is in contact with the rear surface, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is bent below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a, and the contact portion 6 And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is bent below the tank rail 553. It can be received and adhered on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the rear cover 640. Further, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other is in contact. As a result, since no gap is formed, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact with the game panel of the game board 5 from the contact portion. It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

  As described above, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a to allow the game balls B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a. It is assumed that the metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves that can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  A contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other is in contact. As a result, the gap is not formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is closely sunk under the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Or the positional relationship in a state where the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is closely sunk under the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. A gap is not formed in the contact portion between the formed contact portion 640a and the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. The metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes in close contact with the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (behind the effect display device 1600) cannot fall down toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in a plurality of directions (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are provided. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is different from that of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward a plurality of times as going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the bent top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate 551a extends rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553. And is in contact with a convex portion 551ab formed on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a so as to protrude downward, and the contacted portion is a tank rail 553. Is covered by a rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the top plate 551a.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. In contrast to the rear surface of the upper plate 551d and the rear surface of the upper plate 551d, which are arranged substantially on the same plane, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate unit 551a. In addition, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly project rearward compared to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface is in contact with the rear surface, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is disposed below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with a convex portion 551ab formed so as to protrude downward, and is in contact with the convex portion 551ab. Disposed below the tank rails 553, are different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is bent below the tank rail 553. 551a so that they can be received and attached. Further, a front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and a convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and protruding downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a. Since the abutted portion that is in surface contact is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, the contact portion falls outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. From the part where the metal powder of the played game ball B abuts, it is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). , And also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game balls B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a functioning as an eave disposed below the tank rail 553 is used as a separate member (another structural component). It can also be configured to be attached to

  When the top plate portion 551a is formed as a separate member (another structural component), the top plate portion 551a may be configured to be detachable or move from the mounting position to return to the mounting position for the purpose of removing adhered metal powder. In this case, by making the top plate 551a a color different from that of the peripheral members, a mechanism portion that can be attached or detached or moved from the attachment position to return to the attachment position can be clarified, and the easiness of the operation of removing the attached metal powder is improved. Let it.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in a plurality of directions (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is arranged as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. Are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  In contrast, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is different from that of the top plate 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward a plurality of times as going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). In other words, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the contact portion formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward. The front surface of 640a is arranged in parallel with the front wall of gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and comes into surface contact with the rear surface of top plate portion 551a which is arranged to project downward from the bottom of main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact.

  Further, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a gutter-like main guidance. The top plate 551a, which is arranged parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and protrudes downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a, is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a. The contacting portion is disposed so as to be largely shifted forward from the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. In contrast to the rear surface of the upper plate 551d and the rear surface of the upper plate 551d, the rear surface of the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. In the state where the bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553 and the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent forward to form a contact. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface is in contact with the rear surface, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is in contact with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a that is arranged in parallel and that projects downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a, and is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a. Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a, is disposed on the lower side of the tank rail 553. The side can be received and adhered on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a formed by bending the side largely forward. Furthermore, it is arranged in parallel with the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and protrudes downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. The contact portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in surface contact with the rear surface of the main guide portion 553a is disposed so as to be largely displaced forward from the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a and is in contact with the notch portion 553aa. Are not formed. For this reason, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact with the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the base 3010 cannot fall down toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502.

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 greatly forward is formed from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the dropped game ball B is supplied to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as an eave that can be prevented from falling down, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game balls B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

  Incidentally, a game machine provided with a tank rail for guiding a game ball from a ball tank to a downstream side has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). This tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter falling from the hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board disposed below the tank rail, an electrical trouble may occur, causing the control board to malfunction or malfunction. It was. In recent control boards, as the number of objects to be controlled increases, the pin interval between connectors becomes narrower. As the number of connectors increases, the interval between connectors becomes narrower, and furthermore, the pin interval between ICs becomes smaller. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall structure of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 130 is a front view of a game board in which a game panel is made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 130 viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the gaming board viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board with the game panel made transparent. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the game panel is opaque and the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails are shown. FIG. 137 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of the game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the gaming area 5a. This is for performing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136) in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 and a game carried out by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115 and 185 and the like) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (refer to FIG. 141 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side while the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 includes a panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and various sensors provided on the game board 5, and a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. And a panel drive board 1720 for driving the decorative board and the drive motor provided in the device, and a drive board box 1730 accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 has a left side on the rear view, which is hingedly mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and a right side on the rear view, which is detachably mounted on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first start port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate unit 2003; and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A large winning prize port 2005 that allows the reception of the game ball B in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and right above the lower end of the game area 5a and has a first start port 2002, and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side slope 2300 and a general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 which are attached to the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front. The attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and the game area a, a frame-shaped center role 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a center role 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center role 2500. And a presentation effect unit 2600 attached thereto.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided therein, and a second detecting game ball B received in a second starting opening 2004. A start port sensor 2402 and a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 are provided. The center role item 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a game received in the first starting opening 2002. A first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the ball B and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 185).

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a lower back effect unit 3100 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back upper effect unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. And a back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. .

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 138 is a front view of the front components and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the front components and the game panel viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 is a view of the front components and the game panel viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the front component member and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. An impact portion 1006 which connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and which is in contact with the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by the spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened to the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 has an out port 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guide 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding part 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projection piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 will prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. I have.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. That is, through the front component 1000, a portion overlapping the front and rear of the decorative pattern 1150 described later can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 144).

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes columnar bosses 1020 protruding forward at four corners on the front surface. These four bosses 1020 are for positioning the front components 1000 in an overlapping state when transporting only the plurality of front components 1000 to prevent a load shift.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 145 and the like. FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the game panel with the board cover removed, and FIG. 143 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decorative board in FIG. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative pattern of the gaming panel, the front component, and the front unit. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel.

  The gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to the gaming panel 1100. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The game panel 1100 has a panel decoration board 1130 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are mounted, and a board on which the panel decoration board 1130 is mounted on the panel holder 1120. And a cover 1135. The panel decoration board 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. The board cover 1135 includes an upper left board cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the panel holder 1120, and a lower left board cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative board 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponds to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 and is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 and penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating back and forth, and is separated from the upper edge and the lower edge in the left-right direction, and has a small thickness. And a plurality of engaging step portions 1114. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step 1114 is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw 1125 and the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a) and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center role 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center in front view. The ball B has a wide width that can be lined up, and the upper and right sides have a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

  The panel plate 1110 has a decorative pattern 1150 formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of upper right oblique lines rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines, a horizontal line and an upper right oblique line. , A plurality of horizontal lines, and a plurality of obliquely upward slanted lines rotated clockwise by 60 degrees at the same intervals as the horizontal lines. In other words, the decorative pattern 1150 is a geometric pattern in which the contours of an equilateral triangle formed by a horizontal line, an upper-right diagonal line, and a left-up diagonal line are arranged in a predetermined pattern. The decorative pattern 1150 is, when assembled on the game board 5, two regular triangular contour parts on the left and right sides of the first starting port 2002 and three regular triangular contour parts near the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Inside each of the above, there is further provided a picture composed of two regular triangles having different sizes.

  The decorative pattern 1150 formed by the plurality of linear grooves has a V-shaped cross section having an acute angle. This decorative pattern 1150 indicates the presence of the linear groove even in a state where various LEDs mounted on the game panel 1100 do not emit light (including a state where the power of the game machine 1 is not turned on). It is formed at a depth exceeding a predetermined depth (1 mm in this embodiment) so that it can be visually recognized from the user side, and is formed by a combination of a plurality of linear grooves having different traveling directions, thereby forming an outline of an equilateral triangle. The geometric pattern consisting of is made identifiable from the front player side, and the inside of the game area 5a is decorated. When the panel decoration board 1130 emits the panel decoration LED 1130a to emit light to enter the inside (side surface) of the panel board 1110, the panel board 1110 forms a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of regular triangular outlines. The light is reflected by the plurality of linear grooves (the light is reflected by the surface part forming an acute angle), and the decorative pattern 1150 can be illuminated. In addition, even when the decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is not emitting light, the decorative pattern 1150 allows other light emitted behind the panel plate 1110 from behind or obliquely behind the linear groove. When incident, the light is reflected by a plurality of linear grooves forming a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of contours of an equilateral triangle (light is reflected by a surface portion forming an acute angle), and the light is reflected in accordance with the amount of incident light. The decorative pattern 1150 can be illuminated and decorated in an aspect (emission density, reflection density or luminance). Even if other light emitted behind the panel plate 1110 enters from behind or diagonally behind the linear groove, if the amount of incident light is extremely small, the light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 may be changed by the player. Is difficult to recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are provided behind the panel board 1110. Also, the back left upper decorative board 3311a on which the LED 3311aa is mounted is mounted on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower front decorative board 3321a on which the LED 3321aa is mounted is mounted on the back lower left movable decorative body 3320. The body 3410 includes a back upper right front decorative board 3411a on which the LED 3411aa is mounted, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 includes a back right lower front decorative board 3421a on which the LED 3421aa is mounted.

  Then, when the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa provided on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 emit light, Light is incident on a linear groove located forward or obliquely forward, and light is reflected by a plurality of linear grooves constituting a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of contours of an equilateral triangle (in a plane forming an acute angle). If the amount of incident light is such that the player can recognize the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150, the decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated in a mode corresponding to the amount of incident light. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LEDs 3311aa provided on the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310, the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320, the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 behind the panel plate 1110 are provided. , 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa are provided at positions suitable for light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110, and emit light with a light amount exceeding a specific luminance so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be light-emitting decorated. It has become.

  The position at which the light emitting means such as an LED, which is provided behind the panel plate 1110 and can decorate the decorative pattern 1150, and the distance from the panel plate 1110 (the distance from the back surface of the panel plate 1110), etc. are as described above. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately determined according to the luminance of the light emitting unit, the distance from the groove of the decorative pattern 1150, and the like. In other words, if the luminance of the light emitting means is too high, the light emission of the light emitting means becomes remarkable, and the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 becomes inconspicuous. The distance from the back surface of 1110 is longer). When the player wants to notice the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150, the light emitting means emits light with a light amount not exceeding a specific luminance, and when the player does not want to notice the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. The light emitting means may emit light with an amount of light exceeding a specific luminance or the like, so that the light emitting means emits light.

  The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is mainly composed of a radiating portion 1151 that reflects light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside toward the front, and a light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside. A radiation light guide 1152 that reflects light and guides the light along a line. The radiation light guide section 1152 satisfies at least one of a deeper groove and a longer perimeter in cross section as compared to the radiation section 1151. The radiation light guide section 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) the plurality of radiation sections 1151, and irregularly reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside in the panel plate 1110. Light can be guided in the direction in which the groove extends. That is, the radiation light guide 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiations 1151 connected to itself to the other, so that the arrangement portion and the number of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a are reduced. Among the limitations, the sensitivity (the ratio of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is increased. Specifically, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 143 (a), the radiation light guide 1152 normally emits light from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132. The light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 arranged outside the area of the light region 1103, and the radiating portion 1151 emits light, so that the sensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

  Thus, the radiation light guide 1152 has more light than the radiation pattern 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a region where light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is hard to reach (a region outside the normal light guide region 1103). It is possible to make the radiation section 1151 emit light with a sufficient amount of light by receiving light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152, and from the outlines of the plurality of regular triangles. The decorative pattern 1150 formed in a geometrical pattern can be illuminated with uniform brightness over substantially the entirety.

  The panel board 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N have specific obstacle nails N1 which have an important role in the game. As shown in FIG. 145, the specific obstacle nail N1 is arranged near the warp entrance 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the gate unit 2003. When these specific obstacle nails N1 are distorted or bent by the contact of the game ball B, the probability that the game ball B can be accepted into the warp entrance 2501, the general winning opening 2001, and the like changes. The maintenance is always performed so that there is no distortion or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) around the specific obstruction nail N1 is set as the decoration prohibited area 1104, and the decoration pattern 1150 is included in the range. Of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152 are not formed. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Further, since the grooves of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiation light guiding portion 1152 are not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1104 around the specific obstacle nail N1, the specific obstacle nail N1 is adjusted in order to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the obstruction nail N1 is hit, the force is transmitted from the specific obstruction nail N1 to the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152, and it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 from being cracked or cracked.

  Further, among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N implanted at a portion overlapping with the decorative pattern 1150 is not shown, but the tip is implanted on the panel plate 1110. Protrudes into the groove that forms the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light to enter the inside of the panel plate 1110, the light is irradiated from the groove of the decoration pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N projecting into the groove. Then, the light is reflected at the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be made to shine. Thus, the obstacle nail N can be illuminated, and the player can see a light emission effect which is not available in the conventional pachinko machine. In the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N implanted at a special site, whereby the decorative pattern 1150 and the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 are combined. The special nail N can be illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special nail N, and the game ball B aimed at the special nail N can be driven. Operation can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 composed of linear grooves is formed on the panel plate 1110 by cutting. Further, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed before forming the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent cutting waste discharged by the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 from being clogged in the planting hole, and to plant the obstacle nail N in a favorable state.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in the present embodiment) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1123 that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and has a holding step 1123 that is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and has a front-rear direction. A through hole 1121 is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the notch 1122 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion 1123 and is disposed outside the holding step portion 1123 with a plurality of protruding pins 1124 inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 respectively. The three engaging claws 1125 elastically engaged with the engaging step portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel panel 1110, and the panel projects upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1123. A pair of engagement pieces 1126 respectively engaging with two engagement steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 are provided. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward to move the upper and lower left. By elastically engaging the engaging step 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while housed in the holding step 1123. At this time, the projecting pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel holder 1120 has two substrate mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear at the upper left corner and the upper right corner in front view outside the holding step portion 1123, and the rear side of each of the substrate mounting recesses 1127. And two connector recesses 1128 recessed forward from the front. An upper left substrate cover 1136 to which the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is mounted and a lower left substrate cover 1137 to which the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is mounted are respectively attached to the two substrate mounting recesses 1127 from the front. The upper substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. Further, the lower substrate mounting concave portion 1127 is located behind the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 in the front component 1000. An engagement claw 1125 that engages with the engagement step 1114 at the lower left diagonal part of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the lower board mounting recess 1127 from the boundary side with the holding step 1123.

  In the connector recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connector 1131a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 attached to the board attachment recess 1127 and the connector 1132a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 pass through the rear wall of the board attachment recess 1127. The connection connector 1131a and the connection connector 1132a are formed in such a size that a sufficiently large space is formed so that a finger can enter around the connection connector 1131a and the connection connector 1132a. This makes it easy to connect and disconnect a connection cable (not shown) to and from the connector 1131a and the connector 1132a.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132. The upper left panel decoration board 1131 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 are arranged along an oblique upper left portion of the periphery of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost part facing rightward and the lowermost part facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and so as to irradiate light downward and to the right so that the rest is perpendicular to the oblique upper left portion of panel panel 1110. The upper left panel decorative board 1131 has a connector 1131a protruding rearward attached to the rear surface.

  The lower left panel decoration board 1132 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 143 (b), the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is cut out so as to avoid the lower engaging claw 1125 of the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of cuts are made in a state where the cutout part is avoided. Is mounted so as to emit light upward, to the right, and to the upper right. The lower left panel decorative board 1132 has a connector 1132a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member, and is inconspicuous from the front. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side-view type wide-angle, full-color LEDs, and can emit light forward.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged such that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side-view type panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. Thereby, the dimension of the panel decoration board 1130 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner than the panel board 1110, and the panel decoration board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be illuminated while suppressing an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a size that is too large for the size of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). And the plate surface. In other words, the panel decoration board 1130 has another area where the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a having a size of 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted (excess area). Region). Thereby, the mounting strength of the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be increased, and even if vibrations or shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 act, the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 can be connected to each other. Can be made hard to occur, and the shift of the optical axis of the LED 1130a for panel decoration can be suppressed to prevent a problem in light incidence on the panel plate 1110.

  Further, since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the substrate attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the substrate cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. However, it is difficult to transmit to the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, vibrations and the like acting on the panel decoration board 1130 (the panel decoration LED 1130a) can be reduced, and the durability of the panel decoration board 1130a can be suppressed from being lowered. Can be made hard to occur, and a shift of the optical axis of the LED 1130a for panel decoration can be suppressed to prevent a problem from occurring in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110.

  The panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the rear side of the board cover 1135. The board cover 1135 is formed in a frosted glass semi-transparent shape so that the panel decoration board 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so as to diffuse light from the panel decoration LED 1130a. I have. Thus, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the light emitted (leaked) forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player, causing the player to feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a decorative pattern 1150 having a plurality of regular triangular outlines is formed on a transparent panel board 1110, and is transparent and has a three-dimensional appearance as compared with the conventional decoration using a print sheet. The decoration can be shown to the player. When the LED 1130a for panel decoration of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be light-emitting decorated, and the game ball B in the game area 5a, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines, is displayed. The luminous decoration of the distribution area can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed only in the decoration pattern forming area 1101 in which the game balls B in the game area 5a circulate through various flow paths, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed in the entire game area 5a. As compared with the case where the decorative pattern 1150 is formed, the cost for forming the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 emits light, the function display unit 1400 is turned on. The light can be illuminated from behind, and the player can see a light emission effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit) which is not provided in the conventional pachinko machine is decorated with light emission.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), most (more than half) of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is covered by the function display unit 1400 so as to be invisible. A part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is visible without being covered by the function display unit 1400. That is, not only the upper left substrate cover 1136 attached to the surface of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 but also the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 behind the upper left substrate cover 1136 and a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131. Are also visible without being covered by the function display unit 1400. Thus, the LED 1130a for panel decoration can be visually checked in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and forgetting to install the upper left panel decoration board 1131 can be prevented. Further, in the example of FIG. 146 (A), a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is arranged so as to be visible, so that the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is applied to the decoration of the panel plate 1110. The light can be visually observed through the upper left substrate cover 1136 without the light emitting decoration of the pattern 1150. When the luminance of the panel decoration LED 1130a is adjusted, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be visually observed through the upper left substrate cover 1136.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the side wall of the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the side surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 can be viewed from the side of the game board 5 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. However, the side surface of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is difficult to distinguish due to its small thickness, and the side wall of the upper left substrate cover 1136 makes it difficult to visually recognize the panel decoration LED 1130a. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm that the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a are installed from the side of the game board 5. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a is visible from the front of the game board 5, it is possible to confirm that the panel decoration LED 1130a is securely installed, and to forget to install the panel decoration LED 1130a. Can be reliably prevented. Note that at least a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a may be made visible from the side of the game board 5 by not providing a part of the side wall portion of the upper left substrate cover 1136.

  Further, it is sufficient that at least a part of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is arranged so as not to be covered by the function display unit 1400. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, the function display unit 1400 covers only a part (a part of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 on the side of the end (left end in the drawing) side of the game board 5) that is hardly seen by the player when the door frame 3 is closed. It may not be done. Accordingly, in the manufacturing process, not only the upper left panel decorative board 1131 but also the upper left panel decorative board 1131 attached to the surface of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 can be visually confirmed. In addition to being able to prevent, in a game store, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed, that is, in a state where a player can play, the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131, Further, the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 can be made hard to be visually recognized.

  In addition, since the panel decoration LED 1130a is hard to be seen by a player, when the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a from interfering with the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110. . As described above, in this example, since the panel decoration LED 1130a is of a side view type and irradiates toward the game area 5a, it is possible to suppress the emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a from directly going to the player, and to display the function display unit 1400. (LED, status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display) can be prevented. In addition, since the direct light due to the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is strong against the indirect light due to the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110, the light does not pass through the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110. In a state in which the light is emitted by the panel decoration LED 1130a, the effect of the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 may be weakened by being obstructed by the strong light from the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a. . As described above, the panel illumination LED 1130a and the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a are made hard to be seen by a player through the upper left substrate cover 1136, and thus the panel is emitted through the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110. The light emission of the decoration LED 1130a can be visually observed, and attention can be paid to the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110. In addition, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, at least a part of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 may be visible, and a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 may be partially visible. The state may be such that it can be viewed, or may be such that all of them cannot be viewed. That is, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the plate surface portion of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 that is exposed without any mounted components is visible.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is disposed behind the certificate stamp attaching section 1012, when the panel decorating LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 emits light, The attached stamp (not shown) can be illuminated by illuminating it from behind, and the player can see a luminous effect in which a stamp that is not present in a conventional pachinko machine is illuminated and decorated.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is formed to be large (wide range) with respect to the certificate stamp attached to the certificate stamp attaching unit 1012, and a part of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is not covered by the certificate stamp. It is visible. That is, not only the lower left substrate cover 1137 attached to the surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132, but also the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 behind the lower left substrate cover 1137 and a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 are described. Is also visible without being obscured by a stamp. Thereby, the lower left panel decorative board 1132 can be visually confirmed in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to install the lower left panel decorative board 1132. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 is disposed so as to be visible, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is controlled by the panel board 1110. The light can be viewed through the lower left substrate cover 1137 without the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. When the luminance of the panel decoration LED 1130a is adjusted, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be performed while being visually observed through the lower left substrate cover 1137.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the side wall of the lower left substrate cover 1137 and the side surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 can be viewed from the side of the game board 5 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. However, the side surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is difficult to distinguish because the thickness is thin, and the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to visually recognize because the side wall of the lower left substrate cover 1137 is provided. Therefore, from the side of the game board 5, it is difficult to confirm that the lower left panel decoration board 1132 and the panel decoration LED 1130a are installed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a is visible from the front of the game board 5, it is possible to confirm that the panel decoration LED 1130a is securely installed, and to forget to install the panel decoration LED 1130a. Can be reliably prevented. By omitting a part of the side wall of the lower left substrate cover 1137, at least a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a may be made visible from the side of the game board 5.

  The lower left portion of the game board 5 on which the lower left panel decoration board 1132 is installed is a position that is difficult to be visually recognized in the game, and the panel decoration LED 1130a is of a side view type and is illuminated toward the game area 5a to perform panel decoration. In order to prevent the LED 1130a from emitting light directly toward the player, the strong light generated by the LED 1130a for panel decoration is less likely to be seen by the player, and the LED 1130a for panel decoration is provided through the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110. Of the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be noticed. In addition, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, at least a part of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 may be visible, and the panel decorative LED 1130a is in a state where a part thereof can be visible. Alternatively, all of them may be invisible. In other words, it is sufficient that at least the exposed portion of the plate surface portion of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 without any mounted components is visible.

  As described above, in this example, at least a part of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 attached to the game board 5 and mounted with the panel decoration LED 1130a is visually observed when the game board 5 is viewed from the front. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to visually confirm the LED 1130a for panel decoration in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to install the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132. In other words, even if the upper left panel decorative board 1131 or the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is forgotten to be installed in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine, the presence or absence of a defect can be discovered by visually observing a part that can be viewed from the outside. It becomes early and easy, and it is possible to eliminate factors that lower the interest such as the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 not being illuminated in the course of the game. Further, in a state where the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 are not installed, a space where the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 should be installed is vacant, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Through the panel holder 1120 to be made, its back becomes visible. In addition, in the installation area of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 in the panel holder 1120, at least a portion which is visible without being covered or covered by the function display unit 1400 or the stamp, and At the time of installing the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132, a seal or drawing is drawn on a portion which is covered and hidden by the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 and which draws a character or a graphic for calling attention. This may make it possible to recognize at a glance that the operator has forgotten to install the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132. Further, among the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, the panel decoration LED 1130a which can be visually recognized may be of a top view type. In this case, the front view of the top view type panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated in the player direction. A relaxing cover member may be provided. Thus, when the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, it is possible to prevent the emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a from interfering with the emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, although the side view type LED is used as the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132, a top view type LED may be used. After attaching the substrate cover 1136 to the surface of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 (the surface on which the panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted), the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is perpendicular to the side surface of the panel plate 1110. The upper left substrate cover 1136 may be attached to the panel holder 1120 substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a so as to irradiate light on the surface of the game board 5a, or the lower left substrate cover 1137 may be attached to the surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 (panel decoration). (The surface on which the LED 1130a is mounted) After the lighting, the lower left substrate cover 1137 is placed substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 5a so that the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 irradiates light vertically to the side surface of the panel plate 1110. You may make it attach to the holder 1120.

  Further, in this case, the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the lower left substrate cover 1137 are composed of a bottom portion attached substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a and a side wall portion extending substantially perpendicularly from the end of the bottom portion. Thus, a bottom portion may not be provided in a portion through which light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a passes so that the irradiation light of the panel decoration LED 1130a is not blocked by the bottom portion. In this case, the upper left board cover 1136 and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the lower left board cover 1137 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132 are visible from the front of the game board 5 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Alternatively, at least a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a may be made visible from the side of the game board 5 by not providing a part of the side wall of the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the lower left substrate cover 1137. . When the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the lower left substrate cover 1137 are attached to the panel holder 1120 substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 5a, the upper left side of the game board 5 is assembled in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The back surfaces of the panel decoration substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 (the surface on which the panel decoration LED 1130a is not mounted) become visible, and the panel decoration LED 1130 cannot be viewed. Since it can be visually recognized, it can be indirectly confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130 is installed.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, no condensing lens, diffusion lens, or the like is arranged between the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. Thus, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is directly radiated to the side surface of the panel plate 1110 over a wide range, and the light can be made to enter a wide range inside the panel plate 1110, and the decoration pattern 1150 is formed. Light emitting decoration can be made beautifully. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the wide-angle LED is used so that the condenser lens and the diffusion lens are not disposed, but the condenser lens and the diffusion lens may be disposed. When a diffusion lens is provided, a wide-angle LED or a medium-angle LED may be used without using a wide-angle LED. When the condensing lens and the diffusion lens are not provided, the side of the side of the panel plate 1110 to which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated is formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens, and the panel decoration Light incident on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 from the use LED 1130a may be diffused and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, an uneven diffusion portion 1110a may be formed on a side surface of panel panel 1110 to which light from panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated. In this example, the irradiation position corresponding to each panel decoration LED 1130a is formed in a convex shape, and the light irradiated from the panel decoration LED 1130a is diffused and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110. Accordingly, light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided over a wider range with a small number of LEDs, and light emission decoration of the game panel 1100 can be performed over a wide range.

  In addition, the side surface of the portion irradiated with the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a may be formed in the same shape as the condensing lens. For example, the irradiation position corresponding to each panel decoration LED 1130a is formed to be concave. Then, the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a may be collected and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110. As described above, the light incident on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 from the panel decoration LED 1130a is condensed and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110, whereby the amount of light of the target light emission decoration can be increased. Further, the side surface of a portion of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to which light from some of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a is irradiated is formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens, and the same as the diffusion lens of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. The side surface of a portion irradiated with light from a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a excluding the panel decoration LED 1130a that irradiates light to the portion formed in the shape of (a side surface other than the side surface formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens) All of the side surfaces, or some of the side surfaces other than the side surface formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens) may be formed in the same shape as the condenser lens. That is, a shape similar to a diffusion lens or a shape similar to a condensing lens may be appropriately formed according to the position and range of a decoration pattern to be illuminated, the amount of light for luminous decoration, and the like.

  In addition, the same shape as the diffusion lens formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 can change the degree of diffusion by changing the shape. Specifically, for a convex portion formed with a predetermined amount of protrusion corresponding to the irradiation position of the panel decoration LED 1130a, the degree of diffusion is increased by increasing the amount of protrusion, and the amount of protrusion of the convex portion is reduced. Can reduce the degree of diffusion. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the degree of diffusion can be changed according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be illuminated, the amount of light for illuminated decoration, and the like. That is, although the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided over a wider range by increasing the degree of diffusion, the amount of light is weakened, and the range from which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided by reducing the degree of diffusion is narrowed. Since the amount of light increases, the degree of diffusion can be appropriately set in accordance with the position and range of the decorative pattern to be illuminated, the amount of light used for luminous decoration, and the like, so that luminous decoration in a desired mode can be realized. In addition, the convex portion formed corresponding to the irradiation position of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be formed with a predetermined protrusion amount for each panel decoration LED 1130a. The degree of diffusion can be set for each panel decoration LED 1130a according to the position, the range, the amount of light at the time of light emission decoration, and the like, so that the light emission decoration can be performed in a manner that aims at the decoration pattern.

  Similarly, in the same shape as the condensing lens formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110, the degree of condensing can be changed by changing the shape. Specifically, for the concave portion formed with a predetermined concave amount corresponding to the irradiation position of the panel decoration LED 1130a, the degree of light collection is increased by increasing the concave amount, and the concave amount of the concave portion is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the degree of light collection. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of light collection can be changed according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be illuminated, the amount of light for illuminated decoration, and the like. That is, although the amount of light can be increased by increasing the degree of light collection, the range in which light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided is narrowed, and the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is guided by reducing the degree of light collection. However, since the amount of light can be increased, the amount of light increases, but the degree of light collection is appropriately set according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be luminously decorated, the amount of light when luminous decoration is performed, and the like. Can be realized. In addition, the concave portions formed corresponding to the irradiation positions of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be formed with a predetermined recess amount for each panel decoration LED 1130a. The degree of light collection can be set for each panel decoration LED 1130a in accordance with the position, the range, the amount of light for light-emitting decoration, and the like, and light-emitting decoration can be performed in a manner that aims at a decoration pattern.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the diffusion unit 1110a formed on the panel plate 1110 by the front component 1000 is visually recognized by the player. It is in a difficult state. As described above, the front component 1000 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a function of hiding the diffusion portion 1110a formed on the panel board 1110 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the diffusion portion 1110a.

  Furthermore, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, by providing the panel holder 1120 with the panel decoration board 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110, When changing to a panel board 1110 provided with another different decorative pattern in order to change the model of the game board 5 or to make a minor change in the model, it can be dealt with only by replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component 1000, the panel decoration board 1130, and the board cover 1135 can be used as common parts. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 on which the other decorative patterns 1150 are provided, and aims to suppress the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is mounted via the substrate cover 1135 in the substrate mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 are separately provided. I am trying to install it. Thus, the panel holder 1120 from which the substrate cover 1135 and the panel decoration substrate 1130 are removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel plate 1110 on which the decoration pattern 1150 is not applied. 1120 and front component 1000 can be common components. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 on which the other decorative patterns 1150 are provided, and aims to suppress the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to. When used in a model having a panel board 1110 on which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied, a dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. You may make it use it, with the board cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 attached.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game panel 1100 is formed by a plurality of members of the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120. However, the game panel 1100 may be formed by one member. As shown in FIG. 147 (A), a through hole 1110A1 is formed in a part of the outside of the game area 5a defined by the outer rail 1001 of the flat game panel 1100, and a panel decorative board is formed in the through hole 1110A1. The side surface of the through hole 1110A1 may be irradiated with light from the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 with the 1130 disposed therein, toward the inside of the game area 5a, or as shown in FIG. 147 (B). As described above, at least a part of the outside of the game area 5a partitioned by the outer rail 1001 of the flat game panel 1100 The thickness is made thinner than the other portions to form the stepped portion 1110B1, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged in the portion thinner than the other portions, and the game area is formed from the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130. Light may be applied to the side surface of the step portion 1110B1 toward the inside of 5a. In this manner, an arrangement portion for disposing the panel decoration board 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) at a position which does not disturb the game and is relatively close to the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the game panel 1100 is formed on the game panel 1100 itself. By doing so, light can be incident on the game panel 1100 at a position close to the decoration pattern 1150, and thereby, it becomes possible for the player to recognize a sufficient light-emitting decoration without hindering the progress of the game.

  In addition, a region where the through-hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 are formed (a region having a smaller thickness than other regions) is an opening formed in the center of the game region 5a (the panel plate 1110 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example). (Corresponding to the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity of the center of the game panel 1100), and is formed in accordance with the range of the decorative pattern formed on the game panel 1100. For example, when the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 is formed at least in the vicinity of the center on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a or over a wide range up and down, the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 (the pachinko machine 1 of this example). A through-hole 1110A1 and a step 1110B1 are formed in the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 of the pachinko machine 1 and the lower left (the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example). Is formed only on the upper left side of the center role 2500 in the gaming area 5a, the upper left corner of the gaming panel 1100 (the part where the upper left panel decorative board 1131 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed). A through hole 1110A1 and a step portion 1110B1 are formed, and the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 is located at the center of the game area 5a. When formed only on the lower left side of the object 2500, a through hole 1110A1 and a step portion 1110B1 are formed in the lower left portion of the gaming panel 1100 (the portion where the lower left panel decorative board 1132 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed). The panel decoration board 1130 may be arranged in the through hole 1110A1 or the step portion 1110B1, and light may be emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration board 1130 toward the inside of the game area 5a.

  Further, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as to be inconspicuous from the front. The panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 is a side-view type wide-angle full-color LED, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 is illuminated with light so as to irradiate the side surface (side wall) of the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the panel decoration board 1130 according to the range of the decoration pattern formed on the game panel 1100 and the degree of the luminance of the light-emitting decoration. That is, basically, when the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 is formed over a wide area of the game area 5a, more LEDs are mounted than when the game area 5a is formed only over a narrow area. When the luminance of the light-emitting decoration is increased, the number of mounted LEDs is increased.

  Further, of the side surfaces (side walls) of the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1, the side surfaces (side walls) to which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated are the same as the diffusing portions 1110a and the condensing lenses. May be formed. Thereby, the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection can be set according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be illuminated, the amount of light for illuminated decoration, and the like, and the luminous decoration in a desired mode can be realized. In addition, by appropriately setting the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection, the number of mounted LEDs can be suppressed, and a wide range of light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 can be realized while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the game machine. . In addition, the front component 1000 may be attached to the front of the through hole 1110A1 and the step 1110B1, so that the diffusion portion 1110a formed in the through hole 1110A1 and the step 1110B1 is hidden by the front component 1000, 1110a can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as described above, the panel decoration board 1130 is disposed outside the game area 5a defined by the outer rail 1001 of the flat game panel 1100, and the panel mounted on the panel decoration board 1130 is provided. Although it is configured to emit light from the decoration LED 1130a toward the inside of the game area 5a, in addition to or instead of this, the panel decoration substrate is placed in an opening formed inside the game area 5a. Light may be emitted from the panel decoration LED mounted on the panel decoration board and directed toward the inner wall of the opening (outward of the game area 5a). For example, as shown in FIG. 148, a panel decoration board is arranged inside an opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel board 1110, and the panel decoration LED mounted on the panel decoration board is used to reduce the center of the panel board 1110. Light may be emitted toward the inner wall of the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example has a frame-shaped center role 2500 formed along the edge of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel plate 1110, and a frame of the center role 2500. A rendering unit 2600 attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the inside, a transparent flat light guide plate 2601 for closing the frame of the frame-like center role 2500, and a light guide plate 2601. Light is incident from the right side of the light guide plate 2601 and the first pattern decorative board 2612 on which the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 to be illuminated and decorated by making light incident from the upper surface of the light plate 2601 are mounted. A second pattern decoration substrate 2622 on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 for a second pattern 2620 to be light-emission-decorated are mounted, the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601, and the LED 2621 A plurality of condensing lenses 2623 provided between them and for condensing light from the LEDs 2621, and a panel decoration substrate 2622A on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 2621A for inputting light from the side of the game panel 1100 are mounted. Have.

  In addition, a top-view type full-color LED is mounted on the panel decoration board 2622A and the second picture decoration board 2622, and each is attached to the center role 2500 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a. Have been. In addition, the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 are in opposite directions (the LED 2621 mounted on the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 is located at the center of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel plate 1110). Panel decoration board 2622A, and the panel decoration LED 2621A radiates light toward the outside of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel plate 1110). Are arranged back to back. The panel decorative board 2622A and the second decorative board for pattern 2622 are arranged on the back of the frame portion of the center role 2500. The panel decoration board 2622A and the second pattern decoration board 2622 are provided with side view type connection connectors on the front side (the surface on which the panel decoration LEDs 2621A and the LEDs 2621 are mounted), respectively. The connection cables that are electrically connected to each other are bundled, routed along the frame portion of the center role 2500, and then bent backward to be connected to the panel drive board 1720.

  Thus, instead of arranging the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 such that the mounting surface of the LED (the panel decoration LED 2621A, LED2621) is substantially parallel to the game board 5a, the LED is not used. Since the mounting surface of the (panel decoration LED 2621A, LED 2621) is arranged so as to be substantially perpendicular to the game board 5a, the side surfaces of the thin panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 are formed of the game machine. The panel decoration substrate 2622A or the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 is turned to the front side, compared to the case where the LED (panel decoration LED 2621A, LED2621) mounting surface faces the front side of the gaming machine. Since the installation width in the direction can be narrowed, the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 262 The panel decoration substrate 2622A and the LED 2621A for panel decoration, the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 and the LED 2621, and the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the LED 2621A for panel decoration can be hidden by the frame portion of the center role 2500 provided in front of the , And the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be made difficult to recognize by the player.

  Note that a side view type LED may be mounted on one or both of the panel decorative board 2622A and the second picture decorative board 2622. In this case, the left and right sides of the board on which the side view type LED is mounted Is set so as to fit in the frame portion of the center role 2500 provided in front of the board, and the board on which the top-view type LED is mounted is placed on the back side of the board on which the side-view type LED is mounted. You may make it arrange | position so that it may become substantially perpendicular. Thus, the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the LED 2621A for panel decoration and the frame for the center decoration 2500 provided on the front side (front side of the gaming machine) of the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 and the second pattern The decoration substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be hidden, and the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the LED 2621A for panel decoration, and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be made difficult to recognize from a player.

  Although the panel board 1110 is not shown in FIG. 148, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a part of the frame portion of the center role 2500 is arranged so as to cover the front of the panel board 1110. The panel decoration LED 2621A mounted on the panel decoration board 2622A is provided close to the inner wall of the opening of the panel plate 1110 and irradiates light toward the inner wall of the opening (outward of the game area 5a). It is supposed to.

  Further, the unit such as a prize hole arranged in the game area 5a in addition to or instead of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel board 1110 and to which the center role 2500 is attached. May be provided with a panel decoration board on which panel decoration LEDs are mounted. For example, it is attached to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005. An inner wall of an opening 1112 to which the attacker unit 2400 is attached is provided with a panel decoration board on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs that allow light to enter the attacker unit 2400 from the side surface of the game panel 1100 are mounted. (To the outside of the game area 5a). Further, in this case, the panel decoration board and the LED for panel decoration may be arranged on the back of the outer edge portion (the portion where the mounting portion to be attached to the game panel 1100 is formed) of the attacker unit 2400, whereby the panel The decorative substrate and the LED for panel decoration can be hidden by the attacker unit 2400, and the panel decorative substrate and the LED for panel decoration can be made difficult for a player to see.

  Further, the panel decoration board is arranged in the opening formed inside the game area 5a, and the panel decoration LED mounted on the panel decoration board is directed toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a). In the case of irradiating light, a portion of the inner wall of the opening to which the light from the LED for panel decoration is irradiated may be formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens or the condenser lens. Thereby, the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection can be set according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be illuminated, the amount of light for illuminated decoration, and the like, and the luminous decoration in a desired mode can be realized. In addition, by appropriately setting the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection, the number of mounted LEDs can be suppressed, and a wide range of light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 can be realized while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the game machine. . Also, the inner wall of the opening formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens or the condensing lens is arranged behind the outer edge portion (the portion where the attachment portion to be attached to the game panel 1100 is formed) of the attacker unit 2400. With such a configuration, the inner wall of the opening formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens or the condensing lens becomes difficult for a player to see.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back of the panel board 1110 is configured to be visible by using the transparent flat panel board 1110. However, the cell on which a pattern such as a character, a character, or a figure is drawn is drawn. At least a portion of the panel board 1110 is attached by attaching a sheet to the surface of the panel board 1110 (the surface on which the game balls roll) or the back face, or by printing a pattern such as a character directly on the front face or the back face of the panel board 1110. For some, the back surface may be difficult to see.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, a cell sheet partially having the pattern of the sword 1110b drawn thereon may be attached to the surface of the panel plate 1110. Further, in this example, a translucent cell sheet is used, and it is difficult to visually recognize the back portion even in the picture portion, but the light irradiated from the back portion is not blocked. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back of a part of the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b drawn on the cell sheet is made visible (for example, the target portion is transparent or cut). The decorative pattern is formed on a part of the panel plate 1110 corresponding to this part, and can be visually recognized via a cell sheet or from a cutout part of the cell sheet. The pattern (sword 1110b) drawn on the cell sheet and the decorative pattern formed on the panel board 1110 are combined to represent one pattern.

  Further, the decorative pattern formed on panel panel 1110 is mainly a radiating portion that reflects the light applied to the inside from the peripheral surface of panel plate 1110 forward, and the decorative pattern is applied to the inside from the peripheral surface of panel plate 1110. And a radiation light guide section that reflects light forward and guides the light along a linear shape, and for a decorative pattern formed on a part of the blade 1110ba, even when the panel decoration LED 1130a is not emitting light, It can be seen from the player in front. The decorative pattern formed on a part of the blade 1110ba is combined with a pattern (a sword 1110b in this example) drawn on the cell sheet to decorate the game area 5a. As a result, a part of the sword 1110b (in this example, a part of the blade 1110ba) which is drawn on the cell sheet to decorate the game area 5a by emitting the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, and a part of the blade 1110ba is formed. A luminous decoration that shines can be performed, thereby making it possible for the player to presume that something will happen, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Note that not all regions of the cell sheet need to have a light-transmitting property, and at least a region (a region to be light-emitting decorated) overlapping a decorative pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 has a light-transmitting property. It is sufficient that the light emitting decoration by the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized when the LED 1130a for panel decoration emits light, and is partially non-translucent (such as blocking light from behind). Region).

  Further, the decorative pattern of the panel board 1110 may be formed in an area other than the blade 1110ba. In this case, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is not lit, the decoration of the panel board 1110 is performed from the front player side. Although it is difficult to visually recognize the pattern, the decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 emits light, so that the light emitting decoration by the decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 emerges through the cell sheet. That is, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is illuminated, the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b is illuminated and decorated, and the panel sheet 1110 is illuminated and decorated with a predetermined decoration pattern on the cell sheet.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative pattern is formed on the panel board 1110 so as to constitute a part of a picture such as a character drawn on the cell sheet, and when the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, the cell sheet A part of a picture such as a character drawn in the image can be decorated with light emission. In addition, as a decorative pattern of the panel board 1110 constituting a part of a pattern of a character or the like drawn on the cell sheet, a predetermined portion of the pattern or the like of the character or the like drawn on the cell sheet (for example, the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b or the eye of the character). Etc.), in addition to the contours and shadows of the patterns of the characters and the like drawn on the cell sheet, decorations (patterns representing the sense of depth) for making the patterns of the characters and the like drawn on the cell sheet look three-dimensional, and the like. Is also good.

  The decorative pattern of the panel board 1110 is also formed on the rear portion of the center role 2500, in other words, on the portion of the panel board 1110 that is arranged forward so as to cover the frame portion of the center role 2500. That is, the effect display device 1600 is disposed behind the panel plate 1110 and the decorative pattern is formed up to the vicinity of the opening whose front is closed by the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, it is possible to decorate the display device 1600 or a light guide plate 2601 provided in front of the display device 1600 to be described later. Light emission decoration is performed in association with the effect to be executed (so that the display of the effect display device 1600 and the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 are continuously connected to the light emission decoration outside the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601). be able to. On the other hand, the panel board 1110 provided at a position that does not cover the effect display device 1600 is illuminated to decorate the periphery of the effect display device 1600 with light emission. To make the panel board 1110 emit light with a predetermined decorative pattern.

  Further, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back left lower movable movable body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420, which will be described later, are arranged on the back side of the panel board 1110 in a standby state, and Is difficult to see. The LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa mounted on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are the back left upper movable movable body. The body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can emit light in a standby state, and these panel LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa emit light. The cell sheet can be illuminated and decorated with a decorative pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 by irradiating light from behind the 1110. In this manner, the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa mounted on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are formed on the panel plate 1110. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when used as a backlight of the panel board 1110a, the cell sheet can be luminously decorated with a decorative pattern formed on the panel board 1110. .

[5-2-1. Second Embodiment of Decorative Pattern in Gaming Panel]
Subsequently, in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, a decoration different from the decoration pattern 1150 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “decoration pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment”) illustrated in FIGS. 143 to 145 and the like. Panel panel 1110 on which pattern 1160 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “decorative pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment”) will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 (a) is a front view of a panel board on which a decorative pattern different from that of FIG. 143 is formed, and FIG. 150 (b) is a front view showing the panel board of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the decorative pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment has a V-shaped cross section on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110, similar to the decorative pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment. I have. The decorative pattern 1160 is visible from the front player side even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is not emitting light, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 to emit light and make the light enter the inside of the panel board 1110.

  As shown, the decorative pattern 1160 includes a general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a side slope 2300, a warp entrance 2501 of the center role 2500, A radiating portion 1161 that reflects light that has entered the inside from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 forward is formed in a rear portion such as. Accordingly, when the decorative pattern 1160 (radiating portion 1161) is illuminated and decorated, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the side slope 2300, the warp entrance 2501 of the center role 2500, etc. Can be illuminated from behind to make them stand out.

  Although not shown, the decorative pattern 1160 may be formed with a plurality of radiation light guides for guiding light from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 to the radiation part 1161. Further, the decorative pattern 1160 may be combined with the decorative pattern 1160.

[5-2-2. Adjustment of obstacle nail in game panel]
Subsequently, adjustment of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view showing a nail adjustment film for adjusting obstacle nails implanted in the game panel. FIG. 152 is a front view of the main body frame shown with the game board mounted. FIG. 153 (a) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state before the nail adjustment film is mounted on the game board, and FIG. 153 (b) is an enlarged explanatory view showing the state where the nail adjustment film is mounted on the game board. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 136 and the like, the game board 5 has a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in a predetermined gauge array in a game area 5a. More specifically, the plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 between the inner periphery of the frame of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the frame-shaped center role 2500. Is established.

  By the way, the game is performed on the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in the game area 5a, so that the game balls B driven into the game area 5a frequently come into contact with each other, so that the operating time is long. Indeed, the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases. When the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases, the flow path of the game ball B changes from the state at the time of manufacture, and a winning opening (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large opening opening). (The winning opening 2005, etc.), it becomes difficult for the game ball B to be accepted, or it becomes difficult for the game ball B to pass through the gate portion 2003, so that the player cannot enjoy the game and the interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem. Alternatively, as the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases, the game balls B are more likely to be accepted into the winning opening, and the payout of the game balls B increases, thereby increasing the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine is installed. There was a problem that increases. In addition, when the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, some players recognize that the game ball B is difficult to enter the winning opening just by looking at the board surface of the game board 5, and as a pachinko machine for playing. However, there is a problem that the game with the pachinko machine is avoided and the operating rate of the pachinko machine is reduced.

  In order to solve such a problem, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a hammer that hits the obstacle nail N and a nail adjustment in which a gauge ball having the same diameter as the game ball B is attached to the tip of an elongated rod. The distortion of the obstacle nail N is periodically adjusted by using a gauge for use. However, in the adjustment using the nail adjusting gauge, since the distorted nail N is adjusted by intuition or experience, the adjustment of the nail N is likely to vary. In addition, the adjustment of the obstacle nail N may be performed not only by a skilled technician but also by an inexperienced technician. There was a problem that it took.

  To solve such a problem, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a nail adjustment film 1170 as shown in FIG. The nail adjustment film 1170 is formed by, on a transparent resin film, a front pattern 1171 that is the same as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) and a nail pattern 1172 that is the same as the obstacle nail N. Has been printed. The nail pattern 1172 is drawn in a circle having substantially the same diameter as the head of the obstacle nail N. Further, the nail adjustment film 1170 has an identification unit 1173 indicating a specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role in a game among a plurality of obstacle nails N. The identification portion 1173 is a circle pattern having a diameter slightly larger than that of the nail pattern 1172. As a result, the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn in a double circle with the nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173, and can be identified at a glance. In the identification unit 1173, circles of different line types are drawn according to the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1. Here, the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1 is divided into two of "most important" and "important", and "most important" is drawn by a dotted line (broken line), and "important" is drawn by a one-dot chain line. (See the enlarged view of FIG. 151).

  As a resin film constituting the nail adjustment film 1170, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a polyethylene naphthalate film, a polypropylene film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film, a polyimide film, a polyphenylene sulfide film, a nylon film, an aramid film, a polyethylene film, a celluloid Film and the like. In the present embodiment, as the resin film forming the nail adjustment film 1170, a material that easily generates (charges) static electricity is used. Note that the nail adjustment film 1170 is only one embodiment, and a front picture 1171 equivalent to the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) and a nail picture 1172 same as the obstacle nail N are used. However, if it is printed, a low-flexibility sheet-like or plate-like nail adjusting surface material may be applied instead of the nail adjusting film 1170.

  The nail adjustment film 1170 has a positioning fixing portion 1174 for positioning and fixing to the game board 5. The positioning and fixing portion 1174 of the present embodiment is a hole into which four boss portions 1020 (see FIG. 152) protruding forward from the front surface of the front component 1000 are inserted.

  The positioning and fixing portion 1174 may have any configuration as long as it can support the nail adjustment film 1170, and is not limited to the hole into which the boss 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted. A game board lock member 505, a payout passage opening / closing door 613, a door frame hook 652, an outer frame unlocking lever 656, and the like that are protruded forward in the main body frame 4 to which the front frame 5 is attached may be inserted. . Alternatively, the positioning and fixing portion 1174 is set to the upper portion (upper side) of the nail adjustment film 1170, and is inserted into a gap between the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 and the upper end of the game board 5 to fix and fix the position. Is also good. Further, the positioning fixing portion 1174 is set to the left side of the nail adjustment film 1170, and when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is inserted into the groove 530a (refer to FIG. 152) of the main frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main frame 4 to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1, and positioned. It may be fixed.

  Next, a method of adjusting the obstacle nail N using the nail adjustment film 1170 will be described. In a state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4. In this state, the nail adjustment film 1170 is put on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted through the positioning and fixing portion 1174. The nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned and fixed. In this embodiment, since the nail adjustment film 1170 is formed of a material that is easily charged, the nail adjustment film 1170 is stuck to the front surface of the front component 1000 by static electricity when the game board 5 is charged. Therefore, even with this static electricity, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be positioned and fixed and supported on the front surface of the game board 5. The starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the attacker unit 2400, and the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are substantially the same as the tip (head) of the obstacle nail N on the side not buried. Is provided near the obstacle nail N to enable positioning and fixing by the boss 1020 while keeping the nail adjustment film 1170 straight without bending.

  When viewed from the front in a state where the nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned and fixed on the front surface of the game board 5, the front picture 1171 of the nail adjustment film 1170 can be aligned with the shape of the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000. The displacement of the nail adjustment film 1170 can be confirmed. In this state, the head of the obstacle nail N can be seen through the transparent nail adjustment film 1170. When the obstacle nail N is distorted, the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N are not concentric, and the centers of the circles do not coincide with each other ( FIG. 153 (b)). Thus, the obstacle nail N to be adjusted can be easily determined.

  Then, when adjusting the distorted nail N, the nail adjusting film 1170 is turned over, the relevant nail N is hit with a hammer, the nail adjusting film 1170 is covered, and the circle of the nail pattern 1172 is adjusted. The deviation from the circle of the head of the nail N is confirmed, and this operation is repeated to adjust the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N to be concentric with the circle of the nail pattern 1172. When adjusting the obstacle nail N, since the identification portion 1173 indicating the particular obstacle nail N1 is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the adjustment is carefully performed on the particular obstacle nail N1.

  As described above, according to the nail adjustment film 1170 of the present embodiment, since the same front pattern 1171 as the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 is drawn, the front pattern 1171 matches the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000. By doing so, the positioning of the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 can be easily performed. In addition, since the identification portion 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role in the game is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the position of the specific obstacle nail N1 requiring careful adjustment can be easily determined. Can be determined. Furthermore, since the nail adjustment film 1170 is provided with the positioning fixing portion 1174 into which the boss 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted, it can be easily positioned and fixed to the game board 5. Therefore, by adjusting the obstacle nail N in accordance with the nail adjustment film 1170, the variation in the adjustment of the obstacle nail N can be reduced, and the inexperienced technician can easily adjust the obstacle nail N. In addition, the work time required for adjusting the obstacle nail N can be reduced.

  In the nail adjustment film 1170, the identification portion 1173 is illustrated as a circle with a diameter larger than the circle of the nail pattern 1172. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific obstacle nail N1 is indicated by an arrow. , May be color-coded.

  As shown in FIG. 152, predetermined members provided on the front side of the game board 5 include a plurality of reference portions used to further facilitate the alignment of the nail adjustment film 1170 with the front face of the game board 5. P1 to P4 are provided. The plurality of reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn so as to be numbered inside the star pattern together with the star pattern. As shown in FIG. 151, a plurality of reference patterns R1 to R4 simulating the plurality of reference portions P1 to P4 are printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 along with the same front pattern 1171 as the front view of the game board 5. Have been. The guide patterns R1 to R4 are printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 so as to match the corresponding guide portions P1 to P4 in a state where the nail adjustment film 1170 is put on the game board 5 from the front. In addition, as the reference patterns R1 to R4, all the patterns drawn in the reference portions P1 to P4 are simulated, but the nail adjustment is performed so as to simulate only a part of the patterns drawn in the reference portions P1 to P4. It may be printed on the film 1170.

  According to the above, when the nail adjustment film 1170 is put on the game board 5 from the front, the guide patterns R1 to R4 may be matched with the respective guide portions P1 to P4. On the other hand, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily positioned. In addition, since a pattern having the same shape as the member on which the reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn is drawn on the front pattern 1171, the reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn using the reference portions P1 to P4 as marks. If the front pattern 1171 matches the member, it is possible to more reliably check whether or not the position of the nail adjustment film 1170 has occurred with respect to the game board 5. In addition, according to such a method, when the game board 5 is covered with the nail adjustment film 1170 from the front, whether or not the boss 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted into the positioning and fixing portion 1174 is determined. Regardless, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be aligned with the game board 5.

  The guide portions P1 to P4 are provided on a member fixed to the front side of the game board 5. As a specific example, the guide portion P1 is located at the lower left side (near the warp entrance 2501) of the frame of the center role 2500, the guide portion P2 is located at the first starting opening 2002, the guide portion P3 is located at the special winning opening 2005, and the upper right side of the gate portion 2003. The guide portion P4 is provided on a member provided outside the game area 4a located at the position. Since these members are fixed to the front side of the game board 5, the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a continues to contact the center role 2500, the first starting port 2002, the special winning opening 2005, and the like. Even if the position is not shifted, the position adjustment of the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 can be prevented from becoming difficult. In addition, a member (outside the game area) provided outside the game area 4a located on the upper right side of the gate portion 2003 does not come into contact with the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a in the first place. The guide portion P4 provided at the site does not shift in position, and by using the guide portion P4, it is possible to prevent the difficulty in aligning the nail adjustment film 1170 with the game board 5. When the guide portion is provided on a member (outside the game region) provided outside the game region 4a, the member provided with the guide portion (outside the game region) includes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When closed, the door frame 3 may be provided at a portion covered by a decorative portion (excluding the glass plate 162). In this way, an unauthorized person or the like who has illegally obtained the nail adjustment film 1170 can open the nail adjustment film 1170 from above the glass plate 162 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4 during business hours of a game hall (hall). It is difficult to align the 1170, and some illegal acts (for example, helping to confirm whether the nail is in a state suitable for another fraud) are performed by using the illegally obtained nail adjustment film 1170. Can be suppressed.

  The reference portions P1 to P4 may be provided on a member fixed to the front side of the game board 5, and besides the first starting port 2002 and the big winning port 2005, for example, other winning ports (second starting port) 2004, a general winning opening 2002) or a gate unit 2003. Further, as a member fixed to the front side of the game board 5, for example, guides P1 to P4 are provided on a decorative body (including a light-emitting decorative body that is light-emitting decorated with an LED) provided with a predetermined decoration. You may. In this example, the flat panel plate 1110 is transparent. However, a cell having a predetermined pattern drawn before or after the panel plate 1110 is attached, and a reference position is set at a visible position in the cell. Parts P1 to P4 may be provided. Since such a cell is attached to the panel plate 1110, the position does not shift. Further, it is preferable that the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on at least two or more of the members fixed to the front side of the game board 5. In this way, by using at least two or more members, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of positional deviation of the nail adjustment film 1170 when the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned with the game board 5. it can.

  As described above, the reference portions P1 to P4 may be provided on a member fixed to the front side of the game board 5, but for a windmill capable of changing the flowing direction of the game ball B, the game board 5 However, when the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a abuts, the nail supporting the windmill may bend and the positioning of the nail adjustment film 1170 may be difficult. Therefore, the guide portions P1 to P4 are not provided.

  In addition, the reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn so as to be numbered inside the design of the star together with the design of the star, respectively. It is preferably drawn. Further, as shown in FIG. 152, the reference portions P1 to P4 are preferably drawn in a dark color. In such a case, the guide portions P1 to P4 can be easily found, and the guide patterns R1 to R4 can be easily matched with each of the guide portions P1 to P4. Thus, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily positioned.

  Similarly, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on a member that is a left-right asymmetric body or a vertically asymmetric body, such as a center accessory 2500, a first starting port 2002, a special winning opening 2005, or the like. In addition, the reference portions P1 to P4 are configured such that members such as the center accessory 2500, the first starting opening 2002, and the special winning opening 2005 are painted in dark color, and are darker than other members. It is preferably provided on a member. Also in such a case, the member provided with the reference portions P1 to P4 can be easily found, and the reference patterns R1 to R4 can be easily matched with each of the reference portions P1 to P4. The nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned with the game board 5.

  The guide portions P1 to P4 are provided so as to be located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role in the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5. For example, when the guide portions P1 to P4 are provided at positions separated from the specific obstacle nail N1, even if the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned using the guide portions P1 to P4 as a mark, printing is performed on the nail adjustment film 1170. The set nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173 are likely to be displaced from the regular position of the specific obstacle nail N1. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of such a deviation from the normal position of the specific obstacle nail N1.

  In addition, it is preferable that at least two or more reference portions P1 to P4 are provided. For example, nail adjustment is performed on the game board 5 so that the two reference patterns R1 to R4 match the two reference portions P1 to P4. By aligning the film 1170, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be more reliably aligned with the game board 5. In addition, when the nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned using the two reference portions P1 to P4 as marks, the two reference portions P1 such as a nail pattern 1172 printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 and a pattern of the identification portion 1173 are used. The pattern provided between and around P4 is less likely to be displaced from the normal positions of the obstacle nail N and the specific obstacle nail N1. For this reason, between and around the two reference portions P1 to P4, among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5, many specific obstacle nails N1 which play an important role in the game are provided. Thus, it is preferable that the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided.

  Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on a member having a flat shape with no uneven surface, such as a member such as the center accessory 2500, the first starting port 2002, and the special winning opening 2005. In addition, the reference portions P1 to P4 are substantially flush with the tips of a plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5, such as members such as the center accessory 2500, the first starting opening 2002, and the special winning opening 2005. It is provided on a member having a surface formed as described above. In such a case, only a part of the nail adjustment film 1170 does not abut against the game board 5, and it is easy to match the guide patterns R1 to R4 with the respective guide portions P1 to P4. Thus, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily positioned with respect to the game board 5. The guide portions P1 to P4 are not limited to the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the attacker unit 2400, and the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5, but include the front component 1000 and the like. , May be provided in another part.

  In the present example, the nail adjustment film 1170 is substantially the same as the game board 5 so that the same front picture 1171 as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) can be printed. Although a resin film having a size is used, a resin film having a size smaller than the size of such a game board 5 (for example, A4 size) may be used. For example, in the A4 size nail adjustment film 1170, a nail picture 1172 and an identification unit 1173 corresponding to a specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role in a game among a plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5 are provided. In addition to the pattern, the standard patterns R1 to R4 corresponding to the standard portions P1 to P4 located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1, and the pattern corresponding to the member provided with the standard portions P1 to P4, What is necessary is just to print. Also, for example, the A4 size nail adjustment film 1170 extracts only a portion necessary for nail adjustment so as to include the specific obstacle nail N1, the guide portions P1 to P4, and the member provided with the guide portions P1 to P4. Thus, printing may be performed by dividing into a plurality of nail adjustment films 1170, or may be appropriately arranged and printed on one nail adjustment film 1170. As described above, when a resin film having substantially the same size as the game board 5 is used as the nail adjustment film 1170, it becomes difficult to carry the nail adjustment film 1170, or the nail adjustment film Although it may be difficult to position the 1170, it is possible to prevent such difficulties from occurring by using a compact resin film such as an A4 size nail adjustment film 1170, for example. Further, when extracting only a portion required for nail adjustment, it is preferable that at least two or more guide portions P1 to P4 are provided in the extracted portion. Thus, regardless of whether the number of the nail adjustment films 1170 is plural or one, for example, the nail adjustment films R1 to R4 coincide with the two reference portions P1 to P4, respectively. By aligning the nail adjustment film 1170 with the portion extracted at 1170, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be more reliably aligned with the portion extracted at the nail adjustment film 1170.

  Also, in view of the difficulty in incorrectly aligning the nail adjustment film 1170 from above the glass plate 162 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4 as described above, the door window 101a Upper decorative body 271, upper right decorative body 276, upper central decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, side window decorative part 410b of side window decorative member 412, right side door frame decorative body The body 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 are partially provided with a protruding portion having a shape protruding toward the center side (the center portion of the glass plate 162) of the game area, and the protruding portions are brought into contact with the glass plate 162. Alternatively, they may be provided so as to be close to each other. By doing so, even if the nail adjustment film 1170 is smaller in size (for example, A4 size) than the size of the game board 5, the positioning itself is brought into contact with the projection on the glass plate 162. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, any illegal act (for example, whether or not the nail state is suitable for another illegal use) is performed using the illegally obtained nail adjustment film 1170. Or the like) can be suppressed.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 133 and FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear in a state where the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the back. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 185) for controlling the content of the game and the payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 includes a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently formed, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not an unauthorized alteration has been performed or an unauthorized IC is mounted) Is checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against improper acts on the main control board 1310 is increased.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2506, a second starting port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2403, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a general winning port sensor 2401, a general winning port sensor 3001. , The first starting port sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 130, FIG. 132, FIG. 140, FIG. 142, FIG. FIG. 154 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from the function display unit on the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 that is input to a connector 1400a protruding rearward from an upper side of the back surface, and uses a game state (game state). Or a normal lottery result or a special lottery result.

[5-5-1. Configuration of Function Display Unit]
Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator formed of three LEDs for displaying a game state, and two state displays for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing the game ball B to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display comprising LEDs and a normal reservation display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 are provided.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port 2002. The first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the reception of the game balls B to the game ball B, and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display comprising eight LEDs to be displayed; and a second special reserve number display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 displays a round consisting of five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005. Display.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-5-2. Noise measures]
Here, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other, and a plurality of wires (hereinafter simply referred to as “wires”) for transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 are sometimes used. Will be described in detail.

  As described above, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 132, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When it is turned, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is gathered by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower side is pulled downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. Turned.

  When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the connector MFCN for the function display unit is provided along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After it is routed to the lower side, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a longer wiring length, and particularly, the rear face of the game panel 1100 from the upper right corner of the game board 5 and the back box. The wiring FCBL that is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed vertically along the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010. The main control board box 1320 is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 along the right side of the main control board box 1320 on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Will be arranged.

  Further, behind the function display unit 1400, the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is arranged as described above. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 142, the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131, is bent upward on the rear side of the game panel 1100. Then, it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010, and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close to (or in contact with) the above-described wiring FCBL. Then, it is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and each of the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is collected together and below the peripheral control unit 1500. Then, it is routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, is bent toward the left side at the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and on the upper side of the driving board unit 1700, and along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700. After being routed and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, has a longer wiring length. The wiring FCBL that is routed from the corner to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and moves up and down along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a plurality of directions collectively extend to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Like the wiring FCBL described above, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 115 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Is disposed in front of the payout unit 560 that has been set.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the single guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, A lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  Further, as described above, the game balls B are polished in the island facilities of the game hall or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facilities and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby causing electromagnetic noise. Release. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, in which the game balls B can stay, and the payout unit 560 are installed.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, which will be described in detail later. Have. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit cannot be invalidated by control by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later again. Will be done. In this case, since the main control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, as described later. The contents of the RAM are completely erased (cleared). That is, when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again by the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM is cleared.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is employed as a package of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control board 1310 is in a state of protruding from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a project toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, since the static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are mounted, when the electromagnetic wave noise is emitted by the electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. There is a case where the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is intruded, and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. Invading the wiring UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL. On the contrary, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 temporarily moves in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed linearly from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, on the right side of the main control board box 1320 and approximately from the upper side of the main control board box 1320). It is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320 at a position having a quarter length. When passing over the function display unit connector MFCN disposed closer to the main control board box 1320, After being bent toward the side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, when electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is disconnected. When routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, When passing through the region (in front of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), the electromagnetic noise enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. Under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise, the main control MPU 1310a performs a forced reset by its own reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  Note that, when a wiring accommodating groove is formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL is After being drawn out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is housed not in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but drawn out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is housed and routed along the wiring housing groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of, electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. There is a possibility that the main control MPU 1310a may be forcedly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the penetrated electromagnetic wave noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the functional display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a are represented by a functional display unit. The connector MFCN is arranged closer to the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. . In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the function display unit connector MFCN below a center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. Since the main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  This allows the main control MPU 1310a to be arranged at a distance from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL and the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separated from the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a at a distance from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. On the main control board 1310, or in a space where the connector MFCN for a function display unit and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310, it is possible to attenuate electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring FCBL. ing. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance (hereinafter, referred to as "first wiring separation distance"). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic wave that has entered the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via a space having the first wiring separation distance dimension.

  Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is provided in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. (Or accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200), without being drawn around, on the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. When it is routed downward along the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. The main control board box 132 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter, referred to as "second wiring separation distance dimension"). ) Can be largely secured. The second wiring separation distance dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wiring separation distance dimension. Thereby, the electromagnetic noise entering the wiring FCBL enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via the space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. Can be prevented. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. However, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It is also possible to configure so that the connection is made. In this case, it is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL on the panel relay board 1710 (that is, a plurality of elements that transmit a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise with respect to the wiring FCBL). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be cited. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. If a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  In addition, the panel relay board 1710 detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5 and a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. The special winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the magnetism acting near the first starting opening 2002 provided in the game board 5. The two wirings from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the electric current are electrically connected and collected. That is, in the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wires from the various sensors, the wires FCBL from the function display unit 1400 are also electrically connected and collected. Note that two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 and a second starting port for detecting the game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 The two wires from the sensor 2402 are electrically connected directly to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control board 1310 without going through the panel relay board 1710, respectively.

  The panel relay board 1710 is electrically connected to the wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400 in addition to the two wirings from various sensors to the main control board 1310 via the connector 1710a shown in FIG. I have. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected to each other via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 reduces or reduces electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. By providing an element capable of removing (that is, by providing an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise to a plurality of wirings FCBL that transmit a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400, respectively) ), It is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering the two wires from various sensors.

  In the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length as described above. In particular, the wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, Since a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface are combined and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, wiring is thus performed. In a region where the UPCBL is routed, similarly to the wiring FCBL described above, there is a case where electromagnetic noise enters. As described above, this wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and After being routed above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, so that the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise due to the wiring UPCBL reaches the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a risk.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 182) and the connector provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are described in detail later. CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 182). Various wirings respectively corresponding to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are electrically connected. For this reason, the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL are arranged to cross or contact (straddling), so that electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL jumps out to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When invading various wirings which are electrically connected, the effect of the electromagnetic wave noise which invades the wiring UPCBL causes, for example, the effect image rendered on the effect display device 1600 to be disturbed (for example, a pattern such as a black screen). Disturbance occurs).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 to be separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. I have. Thus, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect or contact (straddle) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not contact in parallel with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and does not electrically connect to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Does not come in contact with some of the various wires connected to the In this embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the above-described built-in reset circuit, various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310 intersect or contact with the wiring UPCBL. Not arranged.

  In the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 As a positional relationship with a mounting position of a peripheral control IC 1510a to be described later shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a Are separated from each other.

  Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the noise of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from the wiring UPCBL routed under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring UPCBL, the wiring UPCBL is not connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 or in a space separating the wiring UPCBL from the peripheral control IC 1510a. To attenuate the electromagnetic noise that enters. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Furthermore, the board between the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 is electrically connected via wiring (not shown), and the wiring and the wiring UPCBL intersect or contact with each other. The electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated in the panel driving board 1720, so that the peripheral control board 1510 passes through the wiring from the panel driving board 1720. It becomes extremely difficult to penetrate into the peripheral control board 1510 due to the electromagnetic wave noise. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the panel drive board 1720 attenuates the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring UPCBL by ground (solid earth). However, an element capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic wave noise is provided. (That is, each of the elements capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic noise from the plurality of wirings UPCBL transmitting the control signal from the panel driving board 1720 to the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 It is preferably provided). This makes it possible to reliably attenuate or remove the electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL in the panel drive board 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  In addition, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be cited. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings UPCBL. Further, when a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into a plurality of wirings UPCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. May be inserted respectively.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a display device (display unit) for performing a normal-figure variation display game, a special figure variation display game, a display of a game state, and the like is arranged on the surface of a game board (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [0014], paragraph [0070], FIGS. 2 and 21). The display of the display device (display unit) is controlled by a CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring that electrically connects the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device passes through this wire. There was a possibility of affecting.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.
The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, and other boards (a peripheral data ROM board, a liquid crystal output board to be described later) and the like. ing. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixing grooves 3010c that are opened on the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting two upper fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130, 131, 133, 134, 136, and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front face of the panel board 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. And project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 which are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open so as to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B; To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game balls B can be received in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate portion 2003. A special winning lottery opening 2005 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a, three on the left and one on the right with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. ing. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side is arranged at a lower part in the gaming area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged near the right end in the gaming area 5a and below the center in the up-down direction. The first start port 2002 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged near the upper right corner in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is located below the right winning opening 2001 on the right side and higher than the first starting port 2002. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004.

  The plurality of general winning openings 2001 (four general winning openings 2001) are winning openings (ball entry openings) having similar uses, and the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate section 2003 have different uses. It is a similar winning opening (ball entry opening). Here, the point that the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate unit 2003 are prize ports (ball entry ports) having similar uses will be briefly described. The first special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the reception of the game ball B. The second special lottery result is obtained by performing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the control unit 1300. The gate unit 2003 controls the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the passing of the game ball B. This is because a normal lottery result can be obtained by executing the lottery by.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having the first start port 2002. Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side slope which is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 in a front view. 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 which are attached to the right of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front. Above the attacker unit 2400, the starter unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, within the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center member 2500 having a gate portion 2003, which is mounted substantially at the center of the front view, and is mounted on the center member 2500 so as to close the frame of the center member 2500. And a presentation effect unit 2600.

[5-8-1. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed just above the out port 1008 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received. The starting port unit 2100 is formed entirely transparent, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is a center to be described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guide path in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 185).

  The first starting port sensor 3002 includes a first starting port sensor main side (hereinafter, referred to as a "first starting port sensor main side 3002a") and a first starting port sensor subordinate side (hereinafter, referred to as "first starting port sensor 3002a"). The first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor subside 3002b are at least erroneous detection prevention distance dimensions (14 mm in the present embodiment). And has a larger distance dimension than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm).) The first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, so that the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port If the sensor ball 3002b and the sensor slave side 3002b are arranged to be smaller than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is moved together with the first starting port sensor main side 3002a to the first starting port. The game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b may be detected by the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b together with the first starting port sensor main side 3002a. This is because there are cases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b are arranged apart from each other by a dimension distance (43 mm in the present embodiment) larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. Thereby, when the first starting port sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection reaches the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b. Thus, the physical structure prevents the first starting port sensor slave 3002b from erroneously detecting that the game ball B has not yet passed through the first starting port sensor slave 3002b. When the game ball B passing through the first starting opening sensor subordinate 3002b is detected by the first starting opening sensor subordinate 3002b, Since the electric influence of the knowledge affects the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, the first starting is performed even though the game ball B has already passed the first starting port sensor main side 3002a. It is possible to prevent the erroneous detection of the mouth sensor main side 3002a by a physical structure. In this manner, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is first detected by the first starting port sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, and the first starting port sensor slave side is detected. After passing through the side 3002b, the first starting opening sensor is detected by the slave side 3002b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors) of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor sub-side 3002b is employed to achieve the first starting port. The game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as the game ball, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Will be described in detail later on a fraud detection process capable of detecting and notifying a fraud by radio wave irradiation using the first opening sensor 3002 including two sensors (double sensors).

[5-8-2. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game balls B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side in the horizontal direction is shifted to the right. Is open upward at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001, and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward and to the left in front view at a position higher than the middle general winning opening 2001. I have.

  The side unit 2200 is formed entirely transparent so that the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 185).

[5-8-3. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 in front view. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lower in a front view. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 to the right. The side slope 2300 is entirely formed to be transparent, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the game area 5a to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed substantially entirely transparent so that the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144). The attacker unit 2400 includes one of the four general winning openings 2001, a general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 136 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 is formed in an L-shape in which the outer shape when viewed from the front is formed such that the upper end on the right side extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward at the upper right corner, and is openable upward at a position closer to the left of the general winning opening 2001 and to the left. Two starting ports 2004 are arranged. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than the game ball B. Also, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and is opened upward, and the large winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is open five times wide upward.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting a gaming ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, And a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 185).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting port door 2411 that can open and close the second starting port 2004, and opens and closes the second starting port door 2411 according to a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate unit 2003. A starting port solenoid 2412, a special winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or second special lottery result.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the attacker unit 2400 includes a right upper left passage 2421, a right upper right passage 2422, and a right upper right passage 2422 through which the game ball B can flow downward on the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 arranged on the upper right. The lower right guide shelf 2423 and the lower right guide shelf 2423 are inclined downward to the left so as to dip below the general winning opening 2001 from the downstream end and join the upper right left passage 2421 so as to merge therewith. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2424 extending to the left so as to be lower toward the second starting port 2004 from immediately below the upper right and left passages 2421, and the left end side of the second starting port 2004 is lower from the left end. A second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 extending to the left and a space leftward from the left end of the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 below the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425. A large winning opening upper guide shelf 2426 extending leftward so as to become lower from the rank toward the special winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening extending leftward from the left end of the large winning opening 2005 so as to be lower. And a lower guide shelf 2427.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 opens leftward on the right end side of the second guide opening upper guide shelf 2424, and guides the game ball B downward from the second start port 2004 and the special winning opening 2005 at the center right. A central left passage that opens upward between the passage 2428, the second starting opening lower guiding shelf 2425, and the special winning opening upper guiding shelf 2426, and guides the game ball B below the special winning opening 2005. 2429.

  The second starting port door 2411 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and backward and having a lower left end, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. Can be opened and closed. The second starting port door 2411 is attached near the upper end of the second starting port 2004 so as to be able to move forward and backward. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 by moving forward, and guides the game ball B, which has been flowing through the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2424, to the left. It can be delivered to the lower guide shelf 2425. The second starting port door 2411 is retracted rearward by driving the starting port solenoid 2412, thereby opening the second starting port 2004 and receiving the game ball B flowing down to the second starting port 2004. it can. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let it.

  The special winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and backward and having a lower left end, and opens and closes the special winning opening 2005 opened upward by moving forward and backward. It is possible. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, guides the game ball B flowing through the special winning opening upper guiding shelf 2426 to the left, and then sets the special winning opening lower guiding shelf. 2427. The special winning opening door 2413 is opened by opening the special winning opening 2005 by retreating by driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the game ball B flowing through the right guide passage 2510 of the center role 2500 is moved to the special winning opening 2005. Can be accepted. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

  When the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located below (slightly leftward from immediately below) an opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center role 2500 described later. The second starting port 2004 is located above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500, and the special winning opening 2005 is positioned below the stage 2503 of the center role 2500. In a state where the nail is attached to the panel board 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are present between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center role item 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 in a state where the gaming ball B is assembled on the game board 5, the game ball B is Even if it is released, it will not be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (the right guide passage 2510) of the center role 2500 may be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510 of the center role 2500, a right upper left passage 2421, a general winning opening 2001, and a right upper right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left. B will enter any of them.

  When the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the right guide passage 2510 of the center role item 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. Is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) at the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, when the game ball B enters the upper right left passage 2421 on the left side or the upper right right passage 2422 on the right of the general winning opening 2001 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second guide opening upper guiding shelf 2424. Then, it flows to the second starting port 2004 side (left side). In a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, the left end side of the second starting port door 2411 is inclined so as to be lower. , And flows through the second starting port lower guiding shelf 2425, and is discharged to the left from the left end of the second starting port lower guiding shelf 2425. When the game ball B passes through the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2424, if the second starting port 2004 is open, the game ball B is accepted into the second starting port 2004 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402. When the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 is not accepted by the second starting port 2004, it is discharged to the left large winning opening 2005 side through the second starting port lower guiding shelf 2425. . When the game ball B released from the upper right left passage 2421 to the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2424 enters the center right passage 2428 from the right end side of the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2424, the second starting port 2004 There is no opportunity to be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002, and the game is discharged out of the gaming area 5a from the out opening 1008.

  The second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 is disposed above the special winning opening 2005 and the first starting port 2002, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are located on the left side of the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425. Has been planted. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second starting port lower guiding shelf 2425 flows down to any of the first starting port 2002 side, the special winning opening 2005 side, and the center left passage 2429 side. Become. If the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the special winning opening door 2413 when flowing down to the special winning opening 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the special winning opening door 2413, and the large winning opening lower guiding shelf 2427 is moved to the left. Released to the left. When the special winning opening door 2413 closing the special winning opening 2005 retreats and the special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B flowing down from the second starting opening lower guide shelf 2425 to the special winning opening 2005 side. Is received in the special winning opening 2005. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the gaming panel 1100.

  The game ball B which has entered the center left passage 2429 from the second starting port lower guiding shelf 2425 and the game ball B which has been discharged to the left from the special winning opening lower guiding shelf 2427 are played through the out port 1008. It is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has flowed down from the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 to the first starting port 2002 side via the obstacle nail N may be accepted by the first starting port 2002. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, the game balls B not received in the first starting port 2002 pass through the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center role]
The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the like, in the game area 5a, substantially at the center in front view, and slightly upward. It is attached to the front of 1110. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and it is possible to visually recognize, from the front, various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. it can. In addition, the center role product 2500 is formed substantially transparent so that the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire periphery excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is positioned inside the frame. To prevent intrusion.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B can enter, and the game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 can be released. There is provided a warp exit 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 in the left-right direction and then into the game area 5a after rolling.

  The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and a position corresponding to immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2503 is inclined such that a portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley) on the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front. The game balls B can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  When the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center role 2500 is located at a position slightly below the upper right corner in the front view (a position immediately below the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5). A gate space forming portion 2505 that forms a space of a predetermined size through which the game ball B can flow between the rail 1005 and the game ball B from the downstream end of the gate space forming portion 2505 along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view. A right guide passage 2510 that is caused to flow down, is guided slightly leftward near the lower end, and then discharges downward.

  In the center role item 2500, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the center of the gate space forming portion 2505, and a gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 is attached. The gate space forming part 2505 is large enough to allow the game balls B to flow on both the left and right sides of the gate part 2003. In the space formed by the gate space forming part 2505, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted above the gate part 2003.

  The right guide passage 2510 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. I have.

  When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the distance between the right side of the center of the upper outer peripheral surface and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is formed so as to be largely apart. Thereby, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center role item 2500 (so-called right-handed), the space formed by the gate space forming part 2505 and the right guide passage 2510 Are always circulated and flow down above the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, in order to pass the game ball B to the gate portion 2003, it is necessary to make a right-handed hit, and by right-handing when the special winning opening 2005 is opened, a high probability of a game ball being sent to the special winning opening 2005 B can be accepted.

  The center role item 2500 includes a sub-function display unit 2520 in a frame in the upper right corner. The sub-function display unit 2520 has a plurality of full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2520 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400. The normal lottery result drawn by passing game ball B to 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game ball B to first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 are displayed. Is what you do.

  Since the center role 2500 is formed substantially transparent, a flange-shaped portion that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is also formed transparent. Therefore, in a state where the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 144, the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear panel plate 1110 is visually recognized from the front through the center role 2500. be able to. Thereby, when assembling to the game board 5, the part where the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 described later are interrupted is made as narrow as possible. Thus, the continuity between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 can be enhanced, and a sense of unity can be given.

[5-8-6. Table production unit]
Next, the table presentation unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158 and the like. FIG. 155 is a front view of the presentation effect unit. FIG. 156 is a front view showing a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated in the display effect unit, and FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state where the second pattern is illuminated and decorated in the display effect unit. FIG. 158 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern of the presentation effect unit different from that of the present embodiment is decorated with light emission.

  The presentation effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The display effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center role 2500 and is a transparent flat light guide plate 2601 that closes the frame of the center role 2500 and allows light to enter from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601. A first pattern decorative board 2612 on which a plurality of LEDs 2611 for a first pattern 2610 to be luminously decorated are mounted, and a second pattern 2620 to be luminous decorated by irradiating light from the right side of the light guide plate 2601. A second pattern decoration substrate 2622 on which the plurality of LEDs 2621 are mounted, a plurality of condenser lenses 2623 provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 and the LEDs 2621 to collect light from the LEDs 2621, It has. The LED 2611 and the LED 2621 are full color LEDs.

  The light guide plate 2601 includes a first pattern 2610 (see FIG. 156) formed by an innumerable upper and lower reflection portions that reflect only light from above in the forward direction, and forwards only light from the right direction. And a second pattern 2620 (see FIG. 157) formed by an innumerable number of right and left reflecting portions having an uneven shape for reflection. That is, when the LED of the first design decorative board 2612 emits 2611 light, the display effect unit 2600 can cause the first picture 2610 to emit light, and when the LED 2621 of the second design decorative board 2622 emits light, The two patterns 2620 can be displayed by light emission.

  In the light guide plate 2601, the innumerable upper reflection portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the innumerable right reflection portions forming the second pattern 2620 are each formed with minute irregularities. In a state where the LED 2611 of the picture decoration board 2612 and the LED 2621 of the second picture decoration board 2622 do not emit light, they appear transparent, and various decorative bodies and effect display devices 1600 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side are provided. Can be visually recognized in an excellent state.

  The plurality of upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the right reflecting portion forming the second pattern 2620 are perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621, respectively. It has a plane that extends and is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate 2601. The upper reflector and the right reflector are recessed in a pent roof triangle. The upper reflector and the right reflector reflect light incident from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 in a direction substantially parallel to a vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, the light incident from the incompatible LED 2611 or LED 2621 is reflected in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 can reach the eyes of the player located in front of the light guide plate 2601.

  The plurality of LEDs 2611 mounted on the lower surface of the first pattern decoration substrate 2612 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and are grouped into four groups of a first LED 2611a, a second LED 2611b, a third LED 2611c, and a fourth LED 2611d. Divided. The first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are arranged in a predetermined number (here, three) from the left so as to make two rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the first pattern 2610 is a pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The first picture 2610 is a picture composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles bounded by respective extension lines of the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upward diagonal line forming the decoration pattern 1150 (see FIG. 172). . The first pattern 2610 is a pattern of six large triangles having substantially the same size as a regular triangle formed by collecting four contours of one regular triangle in the decorative pattern 1150, and a contour of one regular triangle in the decorative pattern 1150. And a plurality of small triangular patterns that fit inside. The six large triangle patterns are arranged in a circle around the center of the game area 5a so that the whole becomes a hexagon, and a plurality of small triangle patterns are arranged so as to surround the six large triangle patterns. Are located.

  The large triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610 is superimposed such that a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes are eccentric to the vertex side near the center of the game area 5a so that the sizes become smaller in order. It is formed in a simple pattern. The small triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610 is formed in a pattern in which contour lines of an equilateral triangle are arranged concentrically.

  The first picture 2610 is composed of a first picture 2610a composed of a plurality of upper reflectors corresponding to the first LED 2611a, and a second picture 2610b composed of a plurality of upper reflectors corresponding to the second LED 2611b. And a third picture portion 2610c composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the third LED 2611c, and a fourth picture portion 2610d composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the fourth LED 2611d. It is configured.

  In the first pattern 2610, a large triangle pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes are overlapped with each other, such that the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c are sequentially reduced in size. , A fourth pattern portion 2610d, a first pattern portion 2610a, a second pattern portion 2610b, and a third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a. On the other hand, a small triangular pattern composed of a plurality of regular triangular contours in the first pattern 2610 has a first pattern portion 2610a, a second pattern portion 2610b, a third pattern portion 2610c, and a The four picture portions 2610d are arranged concentrically.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the second pattern 2620 is a pattern having a guide (message) for the player including characters “CHANCE!”.

  As a second embodiment of the presentation effect unit 2600, a second pattern 2630 as shown in FIG. 158 may be displayed by light emission. The second pattern 2630 is a pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The second pattern 2630 is a geometric pattern in which the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upward diagonal line that form the decorative pattern 1150 are each extended with a large width (see FIG. 176).

  Next, the light emission effect by the display effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED 2611a of the first design decoration board 2612 emits light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front at the first design portion 2610a, and the remaining second design portion 2610b and third design portion are provided. 2610c, the fourth picture part 2610d, and the second picture 2620 are reflected outside the front, so that only the first picture part 2610a appears to be shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. When the second LED 2611b of the first design decoration board 2612 emits light, the light incident into the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second design portion 2610b, and the remaining first design portion 2610a and the third In the picture part 2610c, the fourth picture part 2610d, and the second picture 2620, the light is reflected to other than the front, so that only the second picture part 2610b appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, when the third LED 2611c of the first design decorative board 2612 emits light, the light incident into the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the third design portion 2610c, and the remaining first design portion 2610a and the second In the picture part 2610b, the fourth picture part 2610d, and the second picture 2620, the light is reflected to other than the front, so that only the third picture part 2610c appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the fourth LED 2611d of the first design decoration board 2612 emits light, the light incident into the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the fourth design part 2610d, and the remaining first design part 2610a and the second In the picture part 2610b, the third picture part 2610c, and the second picture 2620, the light is reflected to other than the front, so that only the fourth picture part 2610d appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the first pattern 2610, in the portion of the large triangle pattern, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, and the second pattern portion 2610b and a third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a, and in a small triangular pattern portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c. , The fourth picture portion 2610d, concentrically toward the center in the order of, the first picture 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, the fourth LED 2611d, in order to emit light, the first picture The portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d emit light in this order, and the center from the outside. Towards a like motion to move it can be performed emission effect, such as animation.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted in the order of the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a, the order of the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a is changed. This makes it possible to perform a light emission effect such as an animation in which light is emitted from the center and moves outward from the center side.

  Furthermore, when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d emit light of different colors, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are turned on. , Can emit light of different colors.

  In addition, when the plurality of LEDs 2621 of the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 emit light, the light incident into the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second pattern 2620, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern The part 2610b, the third design part 2610c, and the fourth design part 2610d are reflected outside the front, so that only the second design 2620 appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the second pattern 2620 composed of the characters “CHANCE!” Can be emitted by the plurality of LEDs 2621.

  As described above, according to the presentation effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (the first pattern part 2610 a, the second pattern part 2610 b, the third pattern part 2610 c, the third pattern part 2610 c) are formed by one light guide plate 2601. Since the four picture portions 2610d) can emit light, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each picture in order to perform animation display or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2601, so that other effect units can be arranged in the space, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be enhanced. Can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, the light guide plate 2601 allows the translucent first pattern 2610 to appear in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 to show a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation. It can have a strong impact on players who are familiar with the luminous effect that was used, can surprise and entertain the player, and also make the player think that there is something good Thus, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are patterns related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the inside and outside of the frame of the center role 2500 are continuous. A decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  In addition, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can view the luminous display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 by the light guide plate 2601 satisfactorily, other games distant from the front. From the player, the luminescent display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2601 is being performed, It is possible not only to prevent other players from paying attention, but also to play the game without worrying about the other players, thereby making it possible to entertain the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a second opening unit 2100 provided in the starting opening unit 2100. A first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received at one starting port 2002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 185). .

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a lower back effect unit 3100 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back upper effect unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. And a back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. .

  Further, the back unit 3000 receives the game balls B received at the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, respectively, and And a guide path for discharging into the substrate holder 1200.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall in a rectangular shape, and a flat frame-like shape that projects rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; two fixing grooves 3010c into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; And a notch portion 3010d which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached (see FIGS. 133 and 134).

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 so that the lock mechanism 3020 is slidable left and right on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9-1. Back lower production unit]
Next, the lower back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162 and the like. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the underside movable decoration provided in the underside effect unit in the backside unit, as viewed from the front. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back movable decorative body provided in the lower back effect unit when viewed from behind. FIG. 162 is a front view showing the movement of the lower back movable decorative body. The lower back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

  The underside effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the underside movable decorative body 3110 having an equilateral triangle and a front-pointed triangular pyramid shape, and the effect display device 1600. A lower movable arm 3130 (see FIG. 165 and the like) to which the lower movable decorative body 3110 is attached and both ends in the left and right directions are movably supported in the vertical direction, and a lower movable arm 3130 in the vertical direction. And a back-and-back elevating mechanism 3150 for moving.

  The lower back movable decorative body 3110 includes a disc-shaped decorative body base 3111 attached to the lower back moving arm 3130 and a lower back rotational drive motor mounted to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3111 with the rotation axis protruding forward. 3112; a drive gear 3113 attached to the rotating shaft of the lower back rotation drive motor 3112; a transmission gear member 3114 rotated by the drive gear 3113 and rotatably attached to the ornament base 3111; A rear stage base 3115 rotatably supported by the base 3111 and having a substantially triangular outer shape in a flat plate shape; a rear stage decoration portion 3116 mounted on the front surface of the rear stage base 3115 and rotated by the transmission gear member 3114; It is arranged in front of the portion 3116 and is rotatably supported by the posterior decorative portion 3116. A middle base 3117 rotated by a cage drive gear 3113, a middle decorative portion 3118 mounted on the front surface of the middle base 3117, and a middle decorative portion 3118, a middle base 3117 disposed in front of the middle decorative portion 3118, and A front-stage decorative portion 3119 penetrating the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and having a rear end attached to the decorative body base 3111; A sensor 3120, a lower back decoration board 3121 attached to the front surface of the decoration base 3111 for emitting and decorating the rear decoration section 3116, and a front decoration section 3119 between the middle base 3117 and the middle decoration section 3118. It is attached and makes the middle decorative part 3118 and the former decorative part 3119 emit light. And back under before decorative substrate 3122 of the eye, it has a.

  The lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 at a position eccentric from the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111 so that the rotating shaft projects forward. The transmission gear member 3114 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 such that the center of rotation is eccentric to the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111. The transmission gear member 3114 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear portion 3114a that meshes with the drive gear 3113, and a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 3114b that rotates integrally with the front side of the first gear portion 3114a. . The first gear portion 3114a meshes with a drive gear 3113, and the second gear portion 3114b meshes with a later-stage gear portion 3116d of a later-described decorative portion 3116 described later.

  The rear base 3115 includes a bearing hole 3115a into which the outer periphery of the disc-shaped decorative body base 3111 is slidably inserted, and a detection piece 3115b detected by the lower back rotation detection sensor 3120. The rear base 3115 constitutes the bottom surface of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 having a triangular pyramid shape.

  The rear decorative portion 3116 has an outer shape formed by dividing a triangular pyramid that is pointed forward into three in the front-rear direction, and has three trapezoidal flat plate-shaped side plate portions with a narrowed front side. 3116a and a front plate portion 3116b in the form of a regular triangular plate connecting the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3116a. The rear decorative portion 3116 is formed in a container shape with the rear side opened by three side plate portions 3116a and one front plate portion 3116b, and the rear base 3115 is provided at the rear end so that the open rear side is closed. Is attached. Further, the rear decorative portion 3116 is formed at the center of the front plate portion 3116b with a bearing hole 3116c having a smaller diameter than the decorative body base 3111 and penetrating forward and backward, and at the rear side of the front plate portion 3116b. And a rear gear portion 3116d having a spur gear shape penetrating therethrough. A shaft cylindrical portion 3117b of a middle base 3117 described later is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c so as to be relatively rotatable. The rear gear portion 3116d meshes with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114. The rear decorative portion 3116 is formed to have a light-transmitting property.

  The middle base 3117 is a regular triangular plate-shaped main body 3117a smaller than the front plate part 3116b of the rear decorative part 3116, and penetrates the center of the main body 3117a and has a cylindrical shape rearward from the rear surface of the main body 3117a. It includes a protruding shaft cylinder portion 3117b and a spur gear-shaped middle gear portion 3117c formed at the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft cylinder portion 3117b. The shaft cylinder portion 3117b is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c of the rear decoration portion 3116 so as to be relatively rotatable. The middle gear portion 3117c meshes with the drive gear 3113.

  The middle decorative portion 3118 has an outer shape formed in an intermediate shape when a front-pointed triangular pyramid is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. And a front plate portion 3118b in the form of a regular triangular plate connecting the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3118a. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed in a container shape with the rear side opened by three side plate portions 3118a and one front plate portion 3118b, and has a middle base 3117 at the rear end so that the opened rear side is closed. (Main body 3117a) is attached. The middle decorative portion 3118 has a through-hole 3118c penetrating front and rear at the center of the front plate portion 3118b. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed to have translucency.

  The outer shape of the former decorative part 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape narrowed forward. The front decorative portion 3119 includes a columnar front shaft portion 3119a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the triangular pyramid. The front shaft portion 3119a is inserted into the shaft tube portion 3117b of the middle base 3117 so as to be relatively rotatable, and the rear end is attached to the decorative body base 3111. The former decorative portion 3119 is formed so as to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the lower back decoration board 3121. The lower back front decorative substrate 3122 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that emit light toward the outside in the normal direction, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top-view type) that emit light forward. ) And have been implemented. The lower back front decorative substrate 3122 is attached to the front shaft portion 3119a of the front decorative portion 3119.

  The lower back moving arm 3130 is formed to have a length that straddles the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is attached to the center of the front surface. The lower back arm 3130 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted in a row on the front surface. In order to increase the rigidity of the lower back moving arm 3130, a metal lower back moving arm reinforcing plate (not shown) is provided so as to cover the rear surface side. One of the left and right ends of the reinforcing plate for the underside moving arm, which is disposed in the vicinity of the underside up / down driving motor 3151 (see FIG. 186), is made of a metal that can slide vertically by a predetermined distance. A metal cylindrical bar that is attached to the slide rail 3151ns (see FIG. 264 (a)) for the underside moving arm and is not disposed near the underside up / down drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186) and the other is not shown. (Not shown) that slides along the surface (moves while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical bar along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar). Or may be formed of a non-conductive resin). The left and right ends of the reinforcing plate for the underside moving arm may be attached to metal slide rails 3151ns, 3151ns for the underside moving arm, respectively.

  The lower back elevating mechanism 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the under-bottom elevating mechanism 3150 is a back-and-bottom elevating drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186), and a bar-shaped under-and-back mechanism that rotates around one end by driving the under-bottom elevating drive motor 3151. A lifting arm. The tip of the lower back lifting arm is connected to the lower back moving arm 3130. By rotating the lower back lifting arm by the lower back driving motor 3151, the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved through the lower back lifting arm. Can be raised and lowered.

  Subsequently, the operation of the underside effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the back lower production unit 3100 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the rear decorative portion 3116, the middle decorative portion 3118, and the front decorative portion 3119 of the lower movable movable body 3110. And one vertex of the triangle faces upward. In a normal state, the lower back moving arm 3130 is located at the lower moving end by the lower back lifting mechanism 3150. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is located at substantially the same height as the stage 2503 in the center role 2500, and most of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 Is in a standby position below the effect display device 1600. In this state, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the lower back elevating mechanism 3150 are located behind the lower left lower decorative member 3380 of the rear left producing unit 3300 and the lower right lower decorative body 3480 of the back right producing unit 3400 described later. , Invisible from the front (see FIG. 135 and the like).

  In a normal state, when the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved to the upper moving end by the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151 via the lower back lifting arm, the upper vertex of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 in the front view becomes a game area. The first united position is located near the center of 5a (see FIG. 170).

  The underside production unit 3100 moves the underside movable decorative body 3110 by the underside elevation mechanism 3150 via the underside moving arm 3130 to the standby position (original position) where it has moved to the lowest position, and the second position where it has moved to the highest position. It can be freely raised and lowered between the united position. In the present embodiment, the second united position, in which the distance from the first united position to the standby position is set to 1/7 of the entire moving distance from the standby position to the first united position, is set.

  In the normal state, the back lower production unit 3100 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the rear decorative portion 3116, the middle decorative portion 3118, and the front decorative portion 3119 of the lower movable decorative body 3110. And one vertex of the triangle is directed upward (see FIG. 162 (a) and the like). In this state, the detection piece 3115b of the rear base 3115 is detected by the lower back rotation detection sensor 3120, and the original position (standby position) of the rear decorative portion 3116 and the middle decorative portion 3118 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is determined. Become.

  When the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 in a state in which the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the first united position or the second united position, the first gear unit is added to the drive gear 3113. The transmission gear member 3114 meshed with the 3114a rotates in the opposite direction to the drive gear 3113, and passes through the rear gear portion 3116d of the rear decoration portion 3116 meshed with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114. , The rear decorative portion 3116 rotates in the opposite direction to the transmission gear member 3114. That is, the latter-stage decorative portion 3116 rotates in the same direction as the drive gear 3113. On the other hand, in addition to the first gear portion 3114a of the transmission gear member 3114, the middle gear portion 3117c of the middle base 3117 is meshed with the drive gear 3113, and the middle decorative portion 3118 is connected to the drive gear 3113 via the middle gear portion 3117c. It rotates in the opposite direction to 3113. Since the front decorative portion 3119 is attached to the decorative body base 3111, the front decorative portion 3119 does not rotate even when the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 (see FIG. 162 (b)). reference).

  Accordingly, when the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is driven, the rear decorative portion 3116 and the middle decorative portion 3118 rotate in opposite directions while the front decorative portion 3119 is stopped. In the present embodiment, the respective gear ratios are set such that when the rear decorative portion 3116 makes one rotation, the middle decorative portion 3118 makes two rotations.

  Also, in the underside rendering unit 3100, the LEDs mounted on the underside back decorative board 3121 and the underside back decorative board 3122 of the underside movable decorative body 3110 are appropriately lit to emit the underside movable decorative body 3110. Light-emitting decoration can be performed, and light-emitting decoration can be performed even while the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 are rotating.

  Further, in the underside effecting unit 3100, the plurality of LEDs provided on the underside movement arm 3130 emit light, so that the underside movement arm 3130 can be illuminated and decorated. By causing the LEDs to emit light sequentially toward the lower back movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light flows to the lower back movable decorative body 3110. In addition, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the lower back moving arm 3130 to emit light sequentially so as to move away from the lower back movable decorative body 3110, a light emission effect in which light flows from the lower back movable decorative body 3110 can be performed.

[5-9-2. Uragami production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back upper presentation unit 3200 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the back upper movable decorative body 3210 having an equilateral triangle and a front-pointed triangular pyramid shape, and the presentation display device 1600. An upper movable ornament 3230 (see FIG. 165 and the like) to which the upper movable decorative body 3210 is attached and both ends in the left and right directions are movably supported in the vertical direction. And a rear elevating mechanism 3250 for moving.

  The upper back movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the lower back movable decorative body 3110. Although not shown in detail, the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is attached to a rear surface of the decorative body base with a disk-shaped decorative body base attached to the upper back moving arm 3230 and a rotating shaft protruding forward. The upper back rotation drive motor 3212 (see FIG. 186), the drive gear attached to the rotation shaft of the back upper rotation drive motor 3212, and the rotation by the drive gear, rotatably attached to the decoration base. A transmission gear member, a rear base that is rotatably supported by the decorative body base and has a flat plate-like shape and a substantially equilateral triangle, and a rear decoration part 3216 attached to the front surface of the rear base and rotated by the transmission gear member. And a middle stage which is arranged in front of the rear decoration unit 3216 and is rotatably supported by the rear decoration unit 3216 and is rotated by a driving gear. And a middle decorative portion 3218 attached to the front surface of the middle base, and a rear end which is disposed in front of the middle decorative portion 3218 and penetrates the middle decorative portion 3218, the middle base, and the rear decorative portion 3216, and has a rear end. A front upper decorative portion 3219 attached to the decorative body base, a back upper rotation detection sensor 3220 attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base and detecting the rotational position of the rear base (see FIG. 186); A back-upper decorative board attached to the front surface for decorating the rear-stage decorative portion 3216 with light, and a front-stage decorative portion 3219 mounted between the middle-stage base and the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 to form the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 and the front-stage decorative portion And a back upper front decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the portion 3219.

  The rear decorative portion 3116 has an outer shape formed by dividing a triangular pyramid that is pointed forward into three in the front-rear direction. The rear decorative portion 3116 is formed to have a light-transmitting property. The middle decorative portion 3118 has an outer shape formed in an intermediate shape when a forwardly pointed triangular pyramid is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed to have translucency. The outer shape of the former decorative part 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape narrowed forward. The former decorative portion 3119 is formed so as to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the lower back rear decorative board. On the front side, the front and back decorative boards are a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that emit light toward the outside in the normal direction, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top-view type) that emit light forward. And have been implemented.

  The upper back moving arm 3230 is formed to have a length that straddles the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is attached to the center of the front surface. In addition, a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted in a row on the front surface of the back upper moving arm 3230. In order to increase the rigidity, the back upper moving arm 3230 is provided with a metal upper back moving arm reinforcing plate (not shown) so as to cover the back surface side. One of the left and right ends of the reinforcing plate for the back upper moving arm, which is disposed in the vicinity of the back raising / lowering drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186), is made of a metal that can slide vertically by a predetermined distance. A metal cylindrical bar that is attached to the slide rail 3251 ns for the upper back moving arm (see FIG. 264 (a)) and is not disposed near the back up / down drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186) and the other is not shown. Sliding arm (not shown) that slides along the surface (moves while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical bar along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar). Or may be formed of a non-conductive resin). Note that the left and right ends of the reinforcing plate for the back upper arm may be attached to the slide rails 3251 ns and 3251 ns for the upper back arm made of metal.

  The back lifting mechanism 3250 is mounted above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although the back elevation mechanism 3250 is not shown in detail, a back elevation drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186) and a rod-shaped upper surface that rotates about one end by driving the back elevation drive motor 3251. A lifting arm. The tip of the back up / down arm is connected to the back up / down movement arm 3230, and the back up / down movement arm is rotated by the back up / down drive motor 3251 so that the back up / down movement arm 3230 is moved through the back up / down movement arm. Can be raised and lowered.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back upper presentation unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the back upper presentation unit 3200 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the rear decorative portion 3216, the middle decorative portion 3218, and the front decorative portion 3219 of the upper movable movable body 3210. And one vertex of the triangle faces downward. In this state, since the upper back movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the lower back movable decorative body 3110, a detection strip (not shown) corresponding to the detection strip 3115b of the rear base 3115 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is placed on the upper back. While being detected by the rotation detection sensor 3220, it becomes the original position (standby position) of the rear decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 of the upper back movable decorative body 3210. In a normal state, the upper back moving arm 3230 is located at the upper moving end by the back raising / lowering mechanism 3250. In this normal state, the sharp apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the back upper movable decorative body 3210 is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 Is in a standby position located above the effect display device 1600. In this state, the back upper moving arm 3230 and the back raising / lowering mechanism 3250 are located behind the back left upper decorative body 3370 of the back left producing unit 3300 and the back upper right decorative body 3470 of the back right producing unit 3400, which will be described later. It is invisible from the front (see FIG. 135 etc.).

  In the normal state, when the back upper moving arm 3230 is moved to the lower moving end by the back raising / lowering drive motor 3251 via the back raising / lowering arm, the lower vertex of the upper back movable decorative body 3210 in front view is a game. A state of the first united position located near the center of the region 5a is reached (see FIG. 170).

  The back upper staging unit 3200 moves the upper back movable decorative body 3210 by the back raising / lowering mechanism 3250 via the back upper moving arm 3230 to the standby position (original position) where it has been moved to the uppermost position and to the second position where it has been moved to the lowermost position. It can be freely raised and lowered between the united position. In the present embodiment, the second united position, in which the distance from the first united position to the standby position is set to 1/7 of the entire moving distance from the standby position to the first united position, is set.

  In the back upper presentation unit 3200, when the upper back rotary drive motor 3212 is driven in a state where the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is moved to the first united position or the second united position, the former stage decorative unit 3219 is stopped. In the state as it is, the rear decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 rotate in directions opposite to each other. In the present embodiment, the respective gear ratios are set such that when the rear decorative portion 3216 makes one rotation, the middle decorative portion 3218 makes two rotations.

  Also, in the back-up presentation unit 3200, the LEDs mounted on the back-upper decorative board and the back-upper decorative board can emit light as appropriate, so that the back-upper movable decorative body 3210 can be illuminated and decorated. Even when the decoration section 3216 and the middle-stage decoration section 3218 are rotating, light-emitting decoration can be performed.

  Also, in the back upper presentation unit 3200, by emitting a plurality of LEDs provided on the upper back moving arm 3230, the upper back moving arm 3230 can be illuminated and decorated, and the plurality of upper back moving arms 3230 can be illuminated. By causing the LEDs to emit light in order toward the upper movable ornamental body 3210, a light emission effect in which light flows to the upper movable movable ornamental body 3210 can be performed. In addition, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the upper back moving arm 3230 to emit light in order so as to move away from the upper back movable decorative body 3210, a light emission effect in which light flows from the upper back movable decorative body 3210 can be performed.

[5-9-3. Back left production unit]
Next, the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159, 163, 164, and the like. FIG. 163 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the back left movable decorative body and the like, and FIG. 164 is a front view showing the movement of the back left movable decorative body of the back left effect unit in the back unit. Note that in FIG. 163, some members are represented as wire frames so that the internal structure is easy to understand, and reference numerals related to the internal structures of a plurality of movable decorations other than the back left movable decorative body are expressed in parentheses. .

  The back left production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

  The back left rendering unit 3300 extends in the up-down direction across the triangular pyramid-shaped upper left movable decorative body 3310 and lower left lower movable decorative body 3320 with the tip directed rightward, and the effect display device 1600, and extends vertically upward and downward. The decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are respectively movably attached, and the back left moving arm 3330 and the back left moving arm 3330 which are vertically movably supported at both ends in the left and right directions, respectively. And a back left traversing mechanism 3350 for moving in the direction. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 have an outer shape of a regular triangle in a front view. In addition, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the shape of a triangular pyramid are inclined such that the tips are located forward in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the back left rendering unit 3300 is a flat back left back decoration plate 3360 extending in the left and right direction in front of the vicinity of the upper end of the back left movement arm 3330, and extends in the left and right direction below the back decoration plate. A back upper left decorative body 3370 on which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and a lower back left lower side on which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed extending in the left-right direction in front of the vicinity of the lower end of the back left moving arm 3330. A decorative body 3380.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is a trapezoidal base decoration part 3311 whose shape in a front view narrows to the right, and is rotatably attached to the right side of the base decoration part 3311, and the tip is directed rightward. A triangular pyramid-shaped first-stage decorative portion 3312, a back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 (see FIG. 186) attached inside the base-stage decorative portion 3311 for rotating the first-stage decorative portion 3312, A back upper left base decoration board attached to the interior of the decoration section 3311 for emitting and decorating the base decoration section 3311, and a front decoration section 3312 mounted on the right side of the base decoration section 3311 to emit light. And a back upper left front decorative board 3311a for performing the operation. The base decorative portion 3311 and the preceding decorative portion 3312 are formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration part 3311 to which the base decoration board 3311 is mounted are mounted on the back upper left base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa (in the present embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 are mounted on the back upper left first-stage decorative board 3311a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotating shaft) of the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 is performed by rotating the main gear (not shown) fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 and the rotation of the preceding decorative portion 3312. The first-stage decorative portion 3312 is rotated via a not-shown upper left rear rotation transmission mechanism that meshes with a not-shown driven gear attached and fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3312a having a small columnar shape is arranged and fixed near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3312 on the left side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3311. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is located near the rotation axis of the pre-decoration section 3312 and is positioned on the left side of the pre-decoration section 3312 such that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the pre-decoration section 3312. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the interior, the left side is housed in the internal space of the preceding decorative portion 3312 such that the left side does not project from the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3312 toward the right side of the base decorative portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3312a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3312. This is because the rotation of the first decoration part 3312 by the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 causes the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3312 to undergo a resonance phenomenon. Is a position that does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3312a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 is first performed via the above-mentioned back left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration section 3312 and the preceding step decoration section 3312 starts rotating, the trajectory becomes a circular path.

  Therefore, on the back upper left first-stage decorative substrate 3311a, a Hall element is provided at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (facing the magnetized surface of the small cylindrical magnet 3312a). A rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, which is constituted by peripheral circuits and can detect a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab detects the magnetism of the magnet 3312a fixed to the precedent decoration part 3312, specifies the rotational position of the precedent decoration part 3312, and sets the original position. And a detailed description thereof will be described later. Note that the original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 159, and FIG. 164 (a), and the base decorative portion 3311 and the preceding stage. A state in which the vertices of the respective triangles of the decorative portion 3312 match to form one triangular pyramid can be cited.

  Although not shown in detail, the base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 has a first mounting boss protruding rearward from the center near the bottom (left side) in a cylindrical shape on the rear surface, and a first mounting boss. A second mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion on the right side of the boss in a cylindrical shape; and a third mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion above the first mounting boss in a cylindrical shape. . An upper back left movable decorative body 3310 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The lower back left movable decorative body 3320 has a trapezoidal base decorative part 3321 whose shape in front view narrows to the right, and is rotatably attached to the right side surface of the base decorative part 3321 with the tip directed rightward. A lower-left rotation drive motor 3323 (see FIG. 186) attached to the interior of the base decorative part 3321 for rotating the former decorative part 3322, A lower left lower base decoration board attached to the interior of the decoration section 3321 for emitting and decorating the base decoration section 3321 and a front decoration section 3322 mounted on the right side of the base decoration section 3321 to emit light. And a back lower left first-stage decorative substrate 3321a. The base decorative portion 3321 and the preceding decorative portion 3322 are formed to have a light-transmitting property.

  The bottom left bottom decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative section 3321 to which it is attached. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa (in the present embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3321aa (1) to 3321aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the first-stage decorative portion 3322 are mounted on the lower left lower-end decorative board 3321a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the lower back left rotation drive motor 3323 is performed by rotating the main gear (not shown) attached to and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the lower back left rotation drive motor 3323 and the rotation of the preceding stage decoration portion 3322. The preceding decorative portion 3322 is rotated via a not-shown lower left rotation transmission mechanism which meshes with a not-shown driven gear attached and fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3322a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3322 on the left side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3322 facing the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3321. Specifically, the magnet 3322a is located near the rotation axis of the precedent decoration part 3322 and on the left side of the precedent decoration part 3322 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the precedent decoration part 3322. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the interior, the left side is accommodated in the internal space of the preceding decorative portion 3322 such that the left side does not protrude from the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3322 toward the right side of the base decorative portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3322a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3322. This is because the rotation of the first decoration part 3322 is caused by the rotation of the first decoration part 3322 by the lower back left rotation drive motor 3323. Is a position that does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3322a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3322, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the lower back left rotation drive motor 3323 is performed via the above described lower left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration section 3322 and the preceding step decoration section 3322 starts rotating, the trajectory becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, the back left lower first stage decorative substrate 3321a is provided with a Hall element at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (in opposition to the magnetized surface of the small cylindrical magnet 3322a), and A lower back left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, which is constituted by peripheral circuits and can detect a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The lower left back magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab is a circuit used to identify the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3322 and set the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3322a fixed to the preceding decorative portion 3322. The detailed description will be described later. Note that the original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3322 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 159, and FIG. 164 (a), and the like. The state in which the vertices of the triangles of the decorative portion 3322 coincide with each other to form one triangular pyramid can be given.

  The base decorative portion 3321 of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 is not shown in detail, but on the rear surface, a first mounting boss protruding rearward from a center near the bottom (left side) in a cylindrical shape, and a first mounting boss. A second mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion on the right side of the boss in a cylindrical shape, and a third mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion below the first mounting boss in a cylindrical shape. . The lower back left movable decorative body 3320 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back left moving arm 3330 extends in the up-down direction, and is provided with a moving arm base 3331 to which the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are movably mounted, and which is mounted at the vertical center of the movable arm base 3331. And a back left moving drive motor 3332 for moving the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320.

  Although not shown in detail, the back left moving arm 3330 has a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back left moving drive motor 3332, and a vertical direction above the vertical center of the moving arm base 3331. An upper slider that is slidably mounted on the upper arm and has an upper rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear; and an upper slider that is slidably mounted vertically below the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction. A lower slider having a lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear from the side opposite to the upper rack gear.

  The movable arm base 3331 has an upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 of the upper left movable decorative body 3310 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 slides. An upper second slit that is slidably inserted and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 is slidably inserted are provided. The upper first slit extends linearly in the up-down direction. The upper second slit extends downward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then linearly extends downward. The upper third slit extends downward in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then linearly extends downward.

  The movable arm base 3331 has a lower first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321 of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321. The lower second slit is slidably inserted, and the lower third slit is slidably inserted into the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then linearly extends upward. The lower third slit extends upward in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then linearly extends upward. The lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit are, with respect to a horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back left movement drive motor 3332, the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit. Is formed symmetrically with the line.

  The second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is mounted near the upper end of the upper slider. The second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is mounted near the lower end of the lower slider.

  The moving arm base 3331 has one end disposed in the vicinity of a back left traversing drive motor 3351 provided in a back left traversing mechanism 3350 described later, and is slidable in the left and right directions by a predetermined distance. It is attached to a metal back-left moving arm slide rail 3351ns (see FIG. 264 (b)), and the other, not arranged near the back-left traversing drive motor 3351, is along a metal cylindrical bar (not shown). Sliding portion (not shown) for a back-left moving arm (not shown) that slides (moves while sliding the surface of a metal cylindrical bar along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar). , Which may be molded from a non-conductive resin). The moving arm base 3331 may be configured such that both ends in the vertical direction are attached to metal back left moving arm slide rails 3351 ns and 3351 ns, respectively.

  The back left traversing mechanism 3350 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the back left traverse mechanism 3350 includes a back left traverse drive motor 3351 and a bar-shaped back left traverse arm that rotates around one end by driving the back left traverse drive motor 3351. ing. The tip of the back left traversing arm is connected to the back left traversing arm 3330. By rotating the back left traversing arm by the back left traversing drive motor 3351, the back left traversing arm 3330 is moved through the back left traversing arm. Can be traversed.

  The back left back decoration plate 3360 has a hologram seal attached to the front surface. The back upper left decorative body 3370 is attached at a lower side at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The lower back left decorative body 3380 has an upper side mounted at substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back left back decorative plate 3360, the back left upper decorative body 3370, and the back left lower decorative body 3380 have their respective front ends attached at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and are arranged behind and behind the back effect unit. The lower back moving arm 3130 of the 3100, the upper back moving arm 3230 of the back effect unit 3200, and the like can be hidden invisible from the front.

  In addition, the back left back decorative plate 3360 is located on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in a state where the back left back decorative plate 3360 is assembled to the game board 5, and cooperates with a back right back decorative plate 3460 described later to form a panel. The decorative pattern 1150 formed on the board 1110 is easily seen from the player side (front).

  Subsequently, an operation of the back left rendering unit 3300 will be described. First, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 will be described. In a normal state, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the front decorative portion 3322 of the rear left lower movable decorative body 3320 are in front of the base decorative portion 3311 and the base decorative portion 3321 in a front view. It is in a state of a rotational position forming a triangle. In this state, when the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are driven, respectively, the first stage decorative portion 3312 and the first stage decorative portion are respectively driven. 3322 can be rotated (see FIG. 166).

  Next, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 with respect to the back left moving arm 3330 will be described. In the initial state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 has the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss having the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. Located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 are horizontally arranged, the base side (left side) of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 extends vertically, and the tip is directed to the right. (See FIG. 164 (a)). When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by the driving of the back left movement drive motor 3332 from the initial state, and the upper slider is moved downward through the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 Since the second mounting boss is attached to the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the upper left movable decorative body 3310 rotates clockwise around the first mounting boss. Will be done.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 move the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331 downward. Slides to When the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion of the upper second slit by the upper slider moving downward, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 moves clockwise around the first mounting boss. And the tip is turned to the lower right (second state) (see FIG. 164 (b)). In this state, the lower side of the upper left movable decorative body 3310 extends horizontally.

  When the upper left slider is further moved downward by the drive of the rear left driving motor 3332 in a state where the upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotated 30 degrees clockwise by the downward movement of the upper slider, the upper left movable decorative body is rotated. The body 3310 moves downward while keeping the posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are formed by the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3331. The inside of each is slid to its lower end, and downward movement stops. In this state, the lower side of the upper back movable decorative body 3310 is in a state (first state) in which the lower side approaches the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 164 (c)).

  In this state, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven in the reverse direction to move the upper slider upward through the pinion gear, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 in the first state moves in a direction opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  On the other hand, in the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss include the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331. It is located at the lower end of each of the slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 are horizontally arranged, the base side (left side) of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 extends vertically, and the tip is directed rightward. (See FIG. 164 (a)). When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left movement drive motor 3332 from the initial state, and the lower slider is moved upward via the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 Since the second mounting boss is attached to the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. Will move.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 move the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331 upward. Slides to Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arcuate portion of the lower second slit by the lower slider moving upward, the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. This is a state in which the tip is turned 30 degrees in the direction, and a state in which the tip is directed to the upper right (second state) (see FIG. 164 (b)). In this state, the upper side of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 extends horizontally.

  When the lower left slider is further moved upward by the drive of the rear left movement drive motor 3332 in a state where the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320 is rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction by the upward movement of the lower slider, the lower left lower movable The decorative body 3320 moves upward in a posture in which it is still rotating. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are formed by the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331. The inside of each is slid to the top of each, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 is in a state (first state) in which the upper side approaches the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 164 (c)).

  In this state, when the back left movement drive motor 3332 is driven in the opposite direction to move the lower slider downward via the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the first state moves in a direction opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider are respectively meshed with the pinion gear with the pinion gear rotated by the back left movement drive motor 3332, the pinion gear is rotated by the back left movement drive motor 3332. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in directions different from each other up and down. Thereby, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 by the back left moving drive motor 3332 are performed simultaneously. Therefore, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven from the initial state, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, which are vertically separated from each other and whose front ends are directed to the right, approach each other. After turning in the direction to the second state, they move in the direction in which the whole approach each other and move to the first state.

  Next, the movement of the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left effect unit 3300 will be described. In the back left moving arm 3330, in the initial state, the part to which the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is located at the left moving end. In this state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 in front view. In this state, when the back left traversing arm is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the back left traversing drive motor 3351 of the back left traversing mechanism 3350, the back left traversing arm causes the back left moving arm 3330 to move to the right. It can be moved to the moving end. In the state where the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the right moving end (first state), the part to which the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is the left and right of the effect display device 1600. It is located at a distance of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the direction (see FIG. 170).

  As shown in FIG. 164, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends rightward, and in the first state where the right end is located at the right moving end, the back lower production unit 3100 And it is located at the center in the left-right direction of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper production unit 3200.

  The back left moving arm 3330 can be moved by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 between a position in an initial state, which is a left moving end, and a position in a first state, which is a right moving end. In the present embodiment, the position in the second state, which is moved to the right from the position in the initial state by about ／ of the entire movement distance between the position in the initial state and the position in the first state. Is set (see FIG. 169).

  In the normal state, the back left production unit 3300 has the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in an initial state, and is arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The base sides of the base decoration part 3311 and the base decoration part 3321 are vertically extended, and their respective tips face right. In a normal state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the left moving end in the initial state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350.

  In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, which are the initial states, are located near the left end in the back box 3010, and the respective base decorative parts 3311 and base base The step decoration section 3321 is located near the left end of the effect display device 1600, and the preceding decoration section 3312 and the preceding decoration section 3322 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left movable arm 3330 are in a standby position in which the initial state is set (FIG. 135 and the like). See).

  As shown in FIG. 164, the back left moving arm 3330 has a shape in which the upper end extends rightward, so that the back left moving arm 3330 is moved from the position in the second state to the right moving end (the (The position in one state), it comes into contact with the upper movable movable body 3210 at the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back left moving arm 3330 to the right moving end (second state), it is necessary to move the back upper movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. Also, when the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right moving end in a state where the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are directed rightward (initial state), the back left upper movable movable body 3310 is moved. Abuts on the upper back movable decorative body 3210 moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the tip is directed to the lower right.

  When the back left moving arm 3330 is in the initial position, the bases of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are located near the left end in the back box 3010. When the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 in the initial state are rotated by the drive motor 3332 so as to be in the second state, the respective bases are brought into contact with the left side surface in the back box 3010. Touch Accordingly, when the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are rotated from the initial state to the second state side by the rear left moving drive motor 3332, the rear left moving arm 3330 is moved rightward from the initial state position. It needs to be moved to the direction.

  In the back left production unit 3300, the back left upper base decorative board and the back left upper front decorative board of the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower base decorative board and the back left lower front decorative board of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are provided. By appropriately illuminating the mounted LEDs, the upper back movable decorative body 3310 and the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, and the back left movable arm 3330 are located in the initial state, respectively, when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 are located. Is the standby position. The positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, and the rear left moving arm 3330 are located in the first state, respectively. Is the first united position. Further, the positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, and the rear left moving arm 3330 are located in the second state, respectively. Is the second united position.

[5-9-4. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back right presentation unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

  The back right rendering unit 3400 extends in the vertical direction across the back and upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right and lower movable decorative body 3420 in the shape of a triangular pyramid with the tip directed leftward, and the rendering display device 1600. Movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are respectively movably mounted, and both upper and lower ends are supported so as to be movable in the left and right directions, respectively. And a back-right traversing mechanism 3450 that moves the right and left in the left-right direction (see FIG. 167). The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are formed in an equilateral triangle when viewed from the front. Further, the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are inclined such that their tips are located forward in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the back right rendering unit 3400 is a flat back right back decorative plate 3460 extending in the left and right direction in front of the vicinity of the upper end of the back right moving arm 3430, and extends in the left and right direction below the back decorative plate. A back upper right decorative body 3470 on which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and a back right extending leftward and rightward in front of the lower end of the back right moving arm 3430 to form a three-dimensional truss-like decoration. And a lower decorative body 3480.

  The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is a trapezoidal base decorative portion 3411 whose front view shape narrows to the left, and is rotatably attached to the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3411 with its tip directed leftward. And a back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 (see FIG. 187) attached inside the base decoration part 3411 for rotating the front decoration part 3412. A back upper right base decoration board attached to the interior of the decoration section 3411 to make the base decoration section 3411 emit light, and a front decoration section 3412 mounted on the left side of the base decoration section 3411 to emit light. And a back upper right front decorative board 3411a. The base decorative portion 3411 and the preceding decorative portion 3412 are formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration part 3411 to which the base decoration board 3411 is attached are mounted on the back upper right base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa (in the present embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3411aa (1) to 3411aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the right side of the preceding decorative portion 3412 are mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is controlled by the rotation of the main gear (not shown) attached to and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 and the rotation of the preceding decorative portion 3412. The front decorative portion 3412 is rotated via a rear right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) in which a non-illustrated slave gear attached to and fixed to the shaft meshes. A magnet 3412a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed on the right side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3412 facing the left side surface of the base decorative portion 3411 near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3412. Specifically, the magnet 3412a is located near the rotation axis of the precedent decoration part 3412 and on the right side of the precedent decoration part 3412 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the precedent decoration part 3412. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the first decorative portion 3412, the right surface of the first decorative portion 3412 is housed in the internal space of the first decorative portion 3412 such that the right surface does not project from the right side of the first decorative portion 3412 toward the left side of the base decorative portion 3411. Is fixed. The magnet 3412a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3412. This is because the rotation of the first decoration part 3412 by the rotation drive motor 3413 on the back upper right causes the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3412 to have a resonance phenomenon. Is a position that does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3412a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative section 3412, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the rear upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is performed via the above-mentioned rear upper right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration portion 3412 and the preceding stage decoration portion 3412 starts rotating, the trajectory becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, the back upper right first-stage decorative substrate 3411a has a Hall element at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (facing the magnetized surface of the magnet 3412a having a small cylindrical shape). A rear upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, which is constituted by peripheral circuits and can detect a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab detects the magnetism of the magnet 3412a fixed to the precedent decoration part 3412, specifies the rotational position of the precedent decoration part 3412, and sets the original position. The detailed description will be described later. The original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 159, or the like, and the respective positions of the base decorative portion 3411 and the preceding decorative portion 3412 A state in which the vertices of a triangle match to form one triangular pyramid can be cited.

  Although not shown in detail, the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 has a first mounting boss protruding rearward from the center near the bottom (right side) in a columnar shape on the rear surface, and a first mounting boss. A second mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion on the left side of the boss in a cylindrical shape; and a third mounting boss protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape from a portion above the first mounting boss. . The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is a trapezoidal base decorative part 3421 whose shape in front view narrows to the left, and is rotatably attached to the left side surface of the base decorative part 3421, and the tip is leftward. And a lower right rotation drive motor 3423 (see FIG. 187) attached to the interior of the base decorative part 3421 and rotating the former decorative part 3422. A lower right base decoration board attached to the interior of the base decoration section 3421 for emitting and decorating the base decoration section 3421, and a front decoration section 3422 mounted on the left side surface of the base decoration section 3421. And a back lower right first-stage decorative substrate 3421a for light emitting decoration. The base decorative portion 3421 and the preceding decorative portion 3422 are formed to have a light-transmitting property.

  The lower right base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3421 to which the lower right base decorative board is attached. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3421aa (1) to 3421aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the right side of the first-stage decorative portion 3422 are mounted on the lower right front decorative board 3421a. Have been.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the lower right back drive motor 3423 is performed by rotating a main gear (not shown) attached to and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the lower right drive motor 3423, and a precedent decorative portion 3422. The front decorative portion 3422 is rotated via a not-shown lower right rotation transmission mechanism, which meshes with a non-illustrated driven gear attached to and fixed to the rotating shaft. A small cylindrical magnet 3422a having a cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3422 on the right side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3422 facing the left side surface of the base decorative portion 3421. Specifically, the magnet 3422a is located near the rotation axis of the preceding decoration section 3422 and is positioned on the right side of the preceding decoration section 3422 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the preceding decoration section 3422. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the interior, the right side is accommodated in the internal space of the preceding decorative section 3422 such that the right side does not project from the right side of the preceding decorative section 3422 toward the left side of the base decorative section 3421. Is fixed. The magnet 3422a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the precedent decoration part 3422. The rotation of the precedent decoration part 3422 is caused by the rotation of the precedent decoration part 3422 by the lower right back rotation drive motor 3423. It is a position where no phenomenon occurs.

  Since the magnet 3422a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding-stage decorative portion 3422, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the lower right back rotation drive motor 3423 is performed via the above-mentioned lower right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the precedent decorative portion 3422 and the precedent decorative portion 3422 starts rotating, the trajectory becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, on the back lower right precedent decorative substrate 3421a, a Hall element, at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (facing the magnetized surface of the magnet 3422a having a small cylindrical shape), And a back lower right magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab which is constituted by a peripheral circuit and can detect a change in magnetic pole. The lower right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab is used for detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a fixed to the precedent decoration part 3422 to specify the rotational position of the precedent decoration part 3422 and to set the original position. This is a circuit, and its detailed description will be described later. It should be noted that the original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3422 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 159, or the like, and the respective positions of the base decorative portion 3421 and the preceding decorative portion 3422 A state in which the vertices of a triangle match to form one triangular pyramid can be cited.

  Although a detailed illustration is omitted, the base decorative portion 3421 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 has, on the rear surface, a first mounting boss protruding rearward from the center near the bottom (right side) in a columnar shape, and a first mounting boss. A second mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion on the left side of the mounting boss in a cylindrical shape, and a third mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion below the first mounting boss in a cylindrical shape. I have. The lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is movably mounted on the rear right moving arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back right moving arm 3430 extends in the up-down direction, and is attached to a moving arm base 3431 to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are movably mounted. And a back right moving drive motor 3432 for moving the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420.

  Although not shown in detail, the back right movement arm 3430 is connected to a pinion gear in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3432, and the up and down direction above the center in the up and down direction of the movement arm base 3431. An upper slider slidably mounted on the upper arm and having an upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, and an upper slider slidably mounted vertically below the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction. A lower slider having a lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear from the side opposite to the upper rack gear.

  The movable arm base 3431 has an upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 slides. An upper second slit that is slidably inserted and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 is slidably inserted are provided. The upper first slit extends linearly in the up-down direction. The upper second slit extends downward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then linearly extends downward. The upper third slit extends downward in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then linearly extends downward.

  The movable arm base 3431 includes a lower first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421. And a lower third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 is slidably inserted. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then linearly extends upward. The lower third slit extends upward in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then linearly extends upward. The lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit are, with respect to a horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back right movement drive motor 3432, the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit. Is formed symmetrically with the line.

  The second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is mounted near the upper end of the upper slider. The lower slider has a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 on the lower right movable decorative body 3420 mounted near the lower end.

  In addition, one end of the moving arm base 3431, which is disposed in the vicinity of a back right traversing drive motor 3451 provided in a back right traversing mechanism 3450 described later, is slidable by a predetermined distance in the left and right direction. It is attached to a metal back-right moving arm slide rail 3451 ns (see FIG. 264 (b)), and the other, which is not disposed near the back-right traversing drive motor 3451, follows a metal cylindrical bar (not shown). Sliding part (not shown) for a back-right moving arm (not shown) which slides (moves while sliding the surface of a metal cylindrical bar along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar). , May be molded of a non-conductive resin.). The moving arm base 3431 may be configured such that both ends in the vertical direction are attached to the metal back right moving arm slide rails 3451 ns and 3451 ns, respectively.

  The back right traversing mechanism 3450 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the back right traversing mechanism 3450 includes a back right traversing drive motor 3451, and a rod-shaped back right traversing arm that rotates around one end by driving the back right traversing drive motor 3451. ing. The tip of the back-right traversing arm is connected to the back-right traversing arm 3430. By rotating the back-right traversing arm by the back-right traversing drive motor 3451, the back-right traversing arm is moved through the back-right traversing arm. Can be traversed.

  The back right back decorative plate 3460 has a hologram seal attached to the front surface. The lower right corner of the back upper right decorative body 3470 is attached at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The lower right back decoration 3480 has an upper side mounted at substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back right back decorative plate 3460, the back right upper decorative body 3470, and the back right lower decorative body 3480 have their respective front ends attached at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and are arranged rearward. The underside moving arm 3130 of the unit 3100, the underside moving arm 3230 of the underside effecting unit 3200, and the like can be hidden invisible from the front.

  In addition, the back right rear decorative plate 3460 is located on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5, and cooperates with the rear left rear decorative plate 3360 to form the panel plate 1110. Is easily seen from the player side (front).

  Subsequently, an operation of the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. First, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 will be described. In a normal state, the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in front view with the base decorative portion 3411 and the base decorative portion 3421, respectively. It is in a state of a rotational position forming an equilateral triangle. In this state, when the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 of the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 are driven, respectively, The decorative portion 3422 can be rotated (see FIG. 166).

  Next, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 with respect to the back right moving arm 3430 will be described. In the initial state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 has the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss having the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3431. Located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are horizontally arranged, the base side (right side) of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 extends vertically, and the tip is leftward. It is suitable. When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by the driving of the back right movement drive motor 3432 from the initial state, and the upper slider is moved downward via the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 Since the second mounting boss is attached to the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. Will move.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 move the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431 downward. Slides to Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion of the upper second slit by the upper slider moving downward, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. This is a state in which the tip is turned by 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is directed to the lower left (second state) (see FIG. 168). In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 extends horizontally.

  When the upper slider is further moved downward by the drive of the back right drive motor 3432 in a state where the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise by the downward movement of the upper slider, the back upper right movable The decorative body 3410 moves downward while keeping the rotated state. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are formed by the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3431. The inside of each is slid to its lower end, and downward movement stops. In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is in a state (first state) close to the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 170).

  From this state, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven in the opposite direction to move the upper slider upward via the pinion gear, the back right movement movable body 3410 in the first state moves in a direction opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  On the other hand, in the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss include the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower second slit of the moving arm base 3431. It is located at the lower end of each of the three slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are horizontally arranged, the base side (right side) of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 extends vertically, and the tip is left. Is facing you. When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by the driving of the back right movement drive motor 3432 from the initial state, and the lower slider is moved upward through the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decorative body Since the second mounting boss 3420 is mounted on the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is moved clockwise around the first mounting boss. It will rotate.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 correspond to the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Slide upward. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arc-shaped portion in the lower second slit by the lower slider moving upward, the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is rotated clockwise around the first mounting boss. This is a state in which the tip is turned 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is directed to the upper left (second state) (see FIG. 168). In this state, the upper side of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 extends horizontally.

  In a state where the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 is rotated clockwise by 30 degrees due to the upward movement of the lower slider, when the lower slider is further moved upward by the driving of the rear right moving drive motor 3432, the lower right lower back is moved. The movable decorative body 3420 moves upward with the posture kept rotating. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are formed by the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Are slid inside each of them to their respective upper ends, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is in a state (first state) in which the upper side approaches the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 170).

  From this state, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven in the opposite direction to move the lower slider downward via the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in the first state is in the opposite direction to the above-described movement. Move and return to the initial state.

  Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider are respectively meshed with the pinion gear with the pinion gear rotated by the back right movement drive motor 3432, the pinion gear is rotated by the back right movement drive motor 3432. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in mutually different vertical directions. Thereby, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 by the back right moving drive motor 3432 are simultaneously moved. Therefore, when the back right drive motor 3432 is driven from the initial state, the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, which are vertically separated from each other and whose front ends are directed to the left, have their front ends mutually. After rotating in the approaching direction to be in the second state, they move in the direction in which the whole approach each other, and move to the first state.

  Next, the movement of the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. In the initial state of the back right moving arm 3430, the part to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are attached is located at the right moving end. In this state, the back right movement arm 3430 is located on the right side of the effect display device 1600 in front view. In this state, when the back right traversing arm is rotated clockwise in front view by the back right traversing drive motor 3451 of the back right traversing mechanism 3450, the back right traversing arm moves the back right moving arm 3430 to the left. Can be moved to the end. In a state in which the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the left moving end (first state), the part to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are attached is the position of the effect display device 1600. It is located about 1/3 to the left from the right end to the width in the left-right direction (see FIG. 170).

  Although not shown in detail, the back right moving arm 3430 has an upper end formed in a shape extending leftward, and in the first state in which the left end is located at the left moving end, the lower back effect unit It is located at the center in the left-right direction of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the 3100 and the back upper presentation unit 3200.

  The back-right moving arm 3430 can be moved by the back-right traversing mechanism 3450 between a position in an initial state, which is a right moving end, and a position in a first state, which is a left moving end. In the present embodiment, the position in the second state, which is about 2/3 of the distance from the initial position to the left with respect to the total movement distance between the position in the initial state and the position in the first state Is set (see FIG. 169).

  In the back right production unit 3400, in a normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in an initial state, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, The base side of each base decoration part 3411 and base decoration part 3421 is in a state of extending vertically, and each tip is directed to the left. In a normal state, the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the right moving end in the initial state by the back right traversing mechanism 3450.

  In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, which are the initial states, are located near the right end in the back box 3010, and the respective base decorative parts 3411 and 3411 The base decoration unit 3421 is located near the right end of the effect display device 1600, and the preceding decoration units 3412 and 3422 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are in the standby position in which the initial states are respectively set (FIG. 135). Etc.).

  In addition, since the back right movement arm 3430 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends leftward, the back right movement arm 3430 is moved from the second state position to the left movement end (the first state position). When this is done, it comes into contact with the upper back movable decorative body 3210 at the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back right movement arm 3430 to the left movement end (second state), it is necessary to move the back upper movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. When the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left moving end in a state where the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are directed to the left (initial state), the back upper right movable decorative body is obtained. The tip of 3410 abuts on upper back movable decorative body 3210 moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the tip is directed to the lower left.

  When the back right moving arm 3430 is in the initial position, the bases of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are located near the right end in the back box 3010. When the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the initial state are rotated by the moving drive motor 3432 so as to be in the second state, the respective base sides are the right side surfaces in the back box 3010. Abut. Therefore, when rotating the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 from the initial state to the second state side by the back right moving drive motor 3432, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the initial state position. It must be moved to the left.

  In the back right rendering unit 3400, the back upper right base decorative board and the back upper right front decorative board of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower base decorative board and the back right lower front decorative board of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 By appropriately illuminating the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrate, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back right lower movable movable body 3420, and the back right movable arm 3430 are located in the initial state, respectively. The position of the body 3420 is the standby position. In addition, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the first state, respectively. Is the first united position. Further, when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the second state, respectively, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are located. Is the second united position.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 165 to 171 and the like. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the lower back movable decorative body of the back lower production unit is raised from the standby position from the normal state, and the lower back moving arm is movable back lower left lower decorative unit of the back left production unit and the lower right lower back of the back right production unit. At the same height as the decorative body, the movable decorative body on the back of the back-side production unit is lowered from the standby position, and the back-upper moving arm is movable on the back left and upper movable body of the back left production unit and the back and upper right of the back right production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made into the same height as the decoration. FIG. 166 shows the state in which the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are rotated in the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in.

  FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left moving arm of the back left effect unit and the back right moving arm of the back right effect unit have been moved from the normal state to the second state. 168 is a front view of the gaming board showing a state in which the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body have been moved to the second state from the state of FIG. 167. FIG. FIG. 169 shows that the back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left from the normal state, and that the back upper left movable decorative body, the lower right lower movable movable body, and the lower left lower movable movable body are It is a front view of a game board showing a state where an effect image is displayed on the effect display device after rotating the back upper right movable decoration body so as to face each other. FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are in the second combined position from the normal state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to. FIG. 171 shows a first combination of the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. 170. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to the position.

  The game board 5 includes a panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side slope 2300, an attacker unit 2400, a center role item 2500, and the like, which define a rear end of the game area 5a. Since it is formed substantially entirely transparent, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through them. In the back unit 3000, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 of the lower back staging unit 3100, the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper staging unit 3200, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the back left staging unit 3300, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 , Back left back decorative plate 3360, back left upper decorative body 3370, back left lower decorative body 3380, The back upper right movable decorative body 3410, back lower right movable decorative body 3420, back right rear decorative plate 3460, back upper right decorative body 3470, back lower right decorative body 3480, etc. of the right effect unit 3400 can be visually recognized well. .

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 of the lower back effect unit 3100 is in the standby position, and the lower left lower decorative body 3380 of the back left effect unit 3300, and It faces forward from between the back lower right decorative body 3480 of the right effect unit 3400. Further, in a normal state, the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the upper back production unit 3200 is in the standby position, and the back left upper decoration body 3370 of the back left production unit 3300 and the back of the back right production unit 3400. It faces forward from between the upper right decorative body 3470. In the normal state, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300 are in the standby position, and the tips are lined up and down with their tips directed to the right. In. Furthermore, in a normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right directing unit 3400 are in the standby position, and the leading ends are separated vertically to the left. Lined up.

  In this normal state, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 are vertically symmetrically arranged on the upper and lower ends of the effect display device 1600 at positions closer to the left with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. In addition, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are located at an upper position with respect to the vertical center of the game area 5a. Are arranged vertically above and below, and are arranged symmetrically on the left and right ends of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a favorable state from the player side (front).

  The game board 5 is a back-side production of the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The back lower movable decorative body 3110 of the unit 3100, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper directing unit 3200, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left directing unit 3300, and the back of the back right directing unit 3400 The upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 perform a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, as a movable effect using the underside effecting unit 3100 and the underside effecting unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the underside moving arm 3130 is moved from the normal state by the underside elevating mechanism 3150. The lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are respectively moved to the same height as the front end (apex) facing the center in the left-right direction, and the rear upper moving arm 3230 is moved by the rear elevating mechanism 3250. The upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the upper right movable decorative body 3410 are moved to the same height as the front end (vertex) facing the center in the left-right direction. Thus, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 block the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and are located in front of the effect display device 1600. The movement of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back can be noticed. In addition, the lower left lower back movable decorative body 3320, the lower right lower back movable decorative body 3420, and the lower back lower movable decorative body 3110 are moved by the lower back lower moving arm 3130 by the lower left upper movable movable body 3310, the upper right movable movable body 3410, and the upper rear movable decorative body. The body 3210 can be seen to be connected to each other by the back upper moving arm 3230, and it is possible to remind the player of a feeling that fun will occur.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 166, the rear decorative portion 3116 and the middle decorative portion 3118 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 are moved by the lower back rotational drive motor 3112, and the rear decorative portion 3210 of the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is driven by the rear upper rotational drive motor 3212. The decoration part 3216 and the middle decoration part 3218 are connected by the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 and the back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 to the first decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration 3310 and the first decoration part 3322 of the lower back left movable decoration 3320. The front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front decoration part 3422 of the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 are rotated by the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 and the lower right lower rotation drive motor 3423, respectively. Thereby, the inside of the game area 5a can be made lively, and the player can be entertained.

  At this time, when a plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are turned on, blinking, and extinguished so as to flow toward the center in the left and right direction, the left and right back upper left movable decorative bodies are formed. 3310, the lower back left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420, the energy is injected into the upper back movable decorative body 3210 and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, and it is rotating. The effect can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are turned on, blinking, and extinguished so as to flow outward in the left-right direction, the upper back movable decorative body 3210 and the lower back movable Energy is emitted from the decorative body 3110, and the left and right rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are rotated. Can be shown to others. With such an effect, the player can be made to feel as if the expectation value is increasing, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

  In addition, as a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved from the normal state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 to the second state. At the same time, the back right traversing mechanism 3450 moves the back right moving arm 3430 to the position of the second state. Thereby, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 move to the center in the left / right direction while facing each other. And is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 by intercepting the effect image of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can see the upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the upper right movable decorative body. The movement of the body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 can be noticed, and the movements can be enjoyed.

  Then, from the state of FIG. 167, as shown in FIG. 168, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are moved from the initial state to the second state by the back left moving drive motor 3332, and the back right movement is performed. The drive motor 3432 moves the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 from the initial state to the second state. Thereby, the state where the tip of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the tip of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 face each other and the tip of the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 and the tip of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 face each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game. At this time, the first decorative portion 3312 of the upper back left movable decorative body 3310, the first decorative portion 3322 of the lower rear left movable decorative body 3320, the first decorative portion 3412 of the upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 May be rotated, or the effect display device 1600 may display an effect image that connects the respective tips.

  In addition, as a movable production using the back left production unit 3300 and the back right production unit 3400, as shown in FIG. The upper and lower movable decorative bodies 3310 and 3420, and the lower left and lower movable decorative bodies 3320 and 3410 are rotated from the initial state so as to face each other. Thus, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image that connects the respective tips. Thus, an “X” -shaped effect image is displayed so as to connect the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 facing each other, and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game. At this time, the preceding decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the preceding decorative portion 3322 of the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the former decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410, the lower right movable decorative body 3420 May be respectively rotated.

  Furthermore, as a movable production using the back lower production unit 3100, the back upper production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. The movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the second united position. . Thereby, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are fixed. Since they are arranged so as to be gathered on the hexagonal circumference at intervals, an impact can be given to the player, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage (for example, "big hit game") Can be thought to occur.

  When the state is changed from the normal state to the state of the second united position as shown in FIG. 170, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the upper back left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be simultaneously moved to the second united position. Alternatively, the player may be moved to the second united position in an appropriate order, and by sequentially moving to the second united position, in each movement, the player is determined by whether or not to move to the second united position. In addition to being able to excite and excite, a variety of movable effects can be performed, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  From the state of FIG. 170, as shown in FIG. 171, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is moved to the first combined position. Thereby, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are densely arranged. Because it is possible to collectively form a large hexagonal decoration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn are "big hits". It can be convinced that there is, and can make the game more interesting.

  In addition, when the state of the first united position as shown in FIG. 171 is established, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body The body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be simultaneously moved to the first combined position from the second combined position or from the normal standby position. Alternatively, the player may be moved to the first united position in an appropriate order, and by sequentially moving to the first united position, in each movement, the player is determined by whether or not to move to the first united position. In addition to being able to excite and excite, a variety of movable effects can be performed, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Subsequently, main light emission effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176 and the like. FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board in a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the display effect unit. FIG. 173 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect in which the decorative pattern of the game panel and the first pattern on the light guide plate of the display effect unit emit light. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rendering unit. FIG. 175 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect in which the decorative pattern of the game panel and the second pattern on the light guide plate of the display effect unit emit light. FIG. 176 is a front view of the game board showing the second effect of the rendering unit of the embodiment different from FIGS. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 and a front unit according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. 2000 display effect units 2600 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

  Specifically, as a lighting effect using the game panel 1100, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is light-emission-decorated by the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130. As a result, a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of contours of equilateral triangles is illuminated and decorated behind the area where the game balls B circulate in the game area 5a. The luminous effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  As the light-emitting effect using the display effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 172, a plurality of light-emitting effects mounted on the first design decorative substrate 2612 disposed above the light guide plate 2601 are provided. Of the LEDs 2611, the first LED 2611a is caused to emit light, and only the first pattern portion 2610a constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 is light-emission decorated. Thereby, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600, so that nothing happens to the player. You can make me think. In addition, the second LED 2611b of the first pattern decoration board 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the second pattern portion 2610b constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 is light-emission decorated. Thus, a plurality of equilateral triangular patterns similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and having a size different from the first pattern portion 2610a are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600. It can make the player think that something will happen.

  In addition, the third LED 2611c of the first design decoration board 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the third design part 2610c that constitutes a part of the first design 2610 is made to emit light. Thus, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns that are similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600 and have a different size from the first picture portion 2610a and the second picture portion 2610b. Is displayed, it is possible to make the player think that something will happen. Further, the fourth LED 2611d of the first design decoration board 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the fourth design part 2610d constituting a part of the first design 2610 is made to emit light. Thereby, it is similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600, and has a different size from the first picture portion 2610a, the second picture portion 2610b, and the third picture portion 2610c. Since a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns are displayed, it is possible to make the player think that something will happen.

  Further, on the first design decorative board 2612, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are caused to emit light repeatedly in this order, so that the first design part 2610a, the second design part 2610b, and the third design are performed. The part 2610c and the fourth pattern part 2610d are repeatedly illuminated and decorated. Thereby, in the first pattern 2610, in the portion of the large triangular pattern, the first pattern 2610a, the second pattern 2610b, the third pattern 2610c, the fourth pattern 2610d, the first pattern 2610a, the second pattern The part 2610b and the third picture part 2610c are eccentrically overlapped on the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangular picture part, the first picture part 2610a, the second picture part 2610b, and the third picture part are provided. Since they are concentrically arranged toward the center in the order of 2610c and the fourth picture portion 2610d, it is possible to show a light-emitting effect such as an animation with a movement moving from the outside to the center, Not only can you surprise and entertain the player, but also make them think that something is good, It is possible to heighten a sense of waiting.

  In addition, the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are repeatedly illuminated in this order, and the fourth pattern 2610d, the third pattern 2610c, the second pattern 2610b, and the first pattern 2610a are formed. Light emission decoration is repeated in order. This makes it possible to show the player a light-emitting effect such as an animation that moves from the center side to the outside, so that the player can be surprised and entertained, and at the same time, It can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation of the player for the game can be raised.

  Note that the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d may emit light in different colors. As a result, the luminous decoration that changes to rainbow can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. The switching of the section 2610d can be easily understood, and the animation effect can be more strongly exerted.

  In the first design 2610, after the first design 2610a, the second design 2610b, the third design 2610c, and the fourth design 2610d are simultaneously illuminated and decorated, the first design 2610a, the second design 2610a, 2610b, the third pattern part 2610c, and the fourth pattern part 2610d may be sequentially illuminated. By this, the stationary first pattern 2610 is initially displayed by light emission, so that the player can be made to think that it is a light-emitting decoration by the conventional light guide plate, and thereafter, the first pattern 2610 is displayed. By moving like an animation, the player can be greatly surprised, and the effect of the light guide plate 2601 can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 173 shows a timing chart of an effect example in which the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 perform the light-emitting decoration. In this example, after a variable effect such as a variable display of a symbol (decorative symbol) is started on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative board 3311a at the timing t1 and the upper left back. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3311aa for emitting and decorating the first-stage decorative portion 3312 of the movable decorative body 3310, and the first-stage decorative portion 3322 of the lower-left lower movable decorative body 3320 mounted on the lower-left lower-first decorative substrate 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3321aa for light emission decoration and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a to light and decorate the front decoration portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 ) 3411aa and back lower right movable decoration mounted on back lower right precedent decorative board 3421a A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3421aa that decorate the first-stage decorative portion 3422 of 3420 with the same light-emitting color (for example, red. Note that the light-emitting color may be made different according to the big hit expectation. Alternatively, when the light is emitted in a red light emission color than in the blue light emission color, the probability of the jackpot effect result being derived and displayed may be increased.)

  At this time, there are a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a and emitting and lighting the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower front decorative board 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that are mounted and light-embellish the front decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the front of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3411aa for emitting and decorating the tier decoration portion 3412, and a plurality of luminous decorations for the first-stage decoration portion 3422 of the lower right lower movable movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration substrate 3421a. Game panel by light emission of full color LED (side view type) 3421aa 100 decorative pattern 1150 is a light-emitting decoration.

  Next, at the timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative section 3312 of the back left upper movable decorative body 3310; A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3321aa mounted on the back lower left front decorative board 3321a to emit light and decorate the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the front stage of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the lower right lower front decorative board 3421a A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) All turn off and 3421aa, the.

  Thereafter, at the timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back left upper front decorative board 3311a and emits a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that emits light and decorates the front decorative section 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. At timing t4, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a and illuminating the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are turned off, while the lower left back is turned off. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3321aa mounted on the first-stage decorative board 3321a and illuminating and decorating the first-stage decorative section 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 emit light. Is mounted on the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 While a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for emitting and decorating the step decoration portion 3322 are turned off, the front decoration portion 3422 of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration substrate 3421a emits light. A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa to be decorated emit light, and at timing t6, the plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3421a are mounted on the back lower right front decorative board 3421a to emit light and decorate the front decorative section 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a to emit light and decorate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 while turning off the full color LED (side view type) 3421aa 3411aa emits light, and at the timing t7, the upper right rear It mounted on the substrate 3411a and turning off the plurality of full color LED (side view type) 3411Aa for emitting decorating Sakidan decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the same control at the timings t7 to t11 as at the timings t3 to t7. Accordingly, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that are mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a and emit and decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, are mounted on the back left lower front decorative board 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and mounted on the back right lower front decorative board 3421a and beyond the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3421aa for emitting and decorating the step decoration portion 3422, and a plurality of full-color LEDs for mounting and illuminating the first-stage decoration portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 mounted on the upper right back decoration board 3411a. (Side view type) Rotation to move the light emitting state in order of 3411aa So light control is performed twice.

  That is, the first decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the first decorative portion 3322 of the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the first decorative portion 3422 of the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the upper right movable decorative body 3410 The mode in which the light rotates in the order of the preceding decorative portion 3412 is executed twice. In synchronization with the movement of the light emitting state (the LED among the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa), the area corresponding to the light emitting state in the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is light-emitting decorated, and the game panel 1100 is displayed. Of the decorative pattern 1150 moves in the order of upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right, and the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 rotates.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 comes to the timing t11, that is, when the rotation light emission control of the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa is executed twice, all of them are turned off, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 disappears, and At timing t12 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 during the validity period, the light is mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120 and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be illuminated and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front to irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 And flash, and the back right A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa mounted on the decorative board 3411a and emitting light in the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and mounted on the back lower right front decorative board 3421a and back lower right A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa for emitting and decorating the first-stage decorative portion 3422 of the movable decorative body 3420 are provided with a predetermined light-emitting color (for example, red). And the probability of the jackpot effect result being derived and displayed when the light is emitted in a red light emission color than in the blue light emission color may be increased), and the timing t14. To turn off the light after displaying the result of the fluctuation effect (after all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not only fixed stop but also temporary stop)).

  Thus, the decorative pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 is illuminated. Also, in this example, when the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is to be illuminated with a predetermined luminescent color, a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are illuminated with a predetermined luminescent color. In addition, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa mounted on the back upper right decorative board 3411a and emitting and decorating the front decorative section 3412 of the back upper movable movable body 3410, and a back right lower decorative board A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3421aa mounted on 3421a and illuminating and decorating the first-stage decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and a plurality of panels are synchronized with the emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. By emitting the same emission color as the emission color of the decorative LED 1130a, the game panel Auxiliary light is incident on a portion of the panel decoration LED 1130a that is far from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, or where light emission from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is difficult to reach. (In this example, a notch or a through hole, etc., between the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a even at a position close to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in this example, even at a position close to the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. (Including those at positions where light emission from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is difficult to reach) assists the light emission decoration by the decoration pattern 1150, and makes the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 almost uniformly light emitting decoration. You can do it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the back upper right first-stage decorative board 3411a used in other light emitting effects (light emitting effect when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 are movable) is provided. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3411aa that are mounted and light-embellish the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back right lower front decorative board 3421a And a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa for emitting and decorating the first-stage decorative portion 3422 of the game panel 1100 as auxiliary light emitting means for assisting the light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. A plurality of panel devices in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for light emitting decoration. And emit light in the same emission color and emission color of use LED1130a. Therefore, when the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a emit light to make the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 emit light, the same light emission color as the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is emitted in synchronization with the emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a and emitting light in the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower front decorative board 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3421aa that are mounted and light-embellish the front decorative portion 3422 of the lower right back movable ornamental body 3420 are provided behind the portion that assists the light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1 emitted at the standby position In order to assist the light emission of the game panel 1100, the number of the panel decoration LEDs 1130 a, which is a dedicated light emitting means for decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, is reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine is reduced. Of the decorative pattern 1150 can be realized.

  When the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is light-emission-decorated in a specific mode, the same light emission color as that of the light-emitting means is synchronized with the light emission of the light-emitting means dedicated to light-decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. The auxiliary light emitting means may emit light in color. Further, the specific mode may be a predetermined emission color (for example, red) or a predetermined lighting pattern. In this example, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are mounted on the back upper right upper decorative board 3411 a used in the movable upper and lower movable decorative bodies 3420. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3411aa for emitting and decorating the tier decoration portion 3412, and a plurality of luminous decorations for the first-stage decoration portion 3422 of the lower right lower movable movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration substrate 3421a. A full-color LED (side-view type) 3421aa and a plurality of light-emitting means are used as auxiliary light-emitting means. The number of auxiliary light emitting means is appropriately determined according to the difficulty of light emission from the light emitting means, the range of irradiation of auxiliary light, and the like. For example, when the range for irradiating the auxiliary light is narrow, one of the light emitting units used in other effects may be set as the auxiliary light emitting unit. Further, in the above-described example, the LED is used as the light emitting member provided on the movable member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting member provided on the non-movable member fixed at a predetermined position (e.g., It may be used as a light emitting member for partially emphasizing the decorative pattern 1150). In this case, since the position does not change, the game panel 1100 can be constantly illuminated with a constant light, and the luminous decoration can be performed with a stable luminance. Further, these light-emitting members (light-emitting members for irradiating auxiliary light or partially emphasizing the decorative pattern 1150) may be those capable of irradiating at least a region of the game panel 1100 where the decorative pattern 1150 is formed. Any type of LED, either the side view type or the top view type, may be used.

  Note that, as a dedicated light emitting unit for emitting and decorating the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, an LED having higher luminance than the auxiliary light emitting unit may be used. Thus, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the auxiliary light emitting unit from being more noticeable than the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 due to the luminance of the auxiliary light emitting unit being too high.

  In addition, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d mounted on the first design decoration board 2612 based on the operation of the staging operation unit 301 within the predetermined validity period are performed. The first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion of the first pattern 2610 emit light in the same emission color as the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a and the LEDs 3411aa and 3421aa for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel 1100. 2610c and the fourth picture portion 2610d are simultaneously illuminated. Accordingly, a plurality of equilateral triangular patterns similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and the first pattern portion 2610a have different sizes on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600. A plurality of equilateral triangular designs and a plurality of equilateral triangular designs that are similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and have a different size from the first design portion 2610a and the second design portion 2610b; It is similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and has a plurality of equilateral triangular patterns different in size from the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c. Since it is displayed, the game panel 1100 around the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600 are wide. It is possible to perform the light-emitting decoration associated with over the circumference, it is possible to think that it would be happen something to the player.

  In addition, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d mounted on the first pattern decoration board 2612 and emitting and decorating the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 display the result of the fluctuation effect. It is extinguished before (before all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (before the temporary stop as well as the final stop)). As described above, when displaying the result of the fluctuation effect that the player pays the most attention to, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, and the second LED 2611b that are mounted on the first pattern decoration board 2612 and light-emission decorate the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 are displayed. Since the third LED 2611c and the fourth LED 2611d are turned off, it is possible to prevent the display content of the effect display device 1600 from being difficult to view due to the light-emitting decoration of the first pattern 2610 on the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, the LEDs 1130a, 3411aa, and 3421aa for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 display the result of the fluctuation effect (after all the decorative symbols are stopped (not limited to fixed stop but may be temporarily stopped)). Therefore, even if the light emission decoration of the first pattern 2610 on the light guide plate 2601 is stopped, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 formed over a wider area than the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 is continued. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the production and a decrease in the entertainment of the game.

  A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the panel holder 1120 in front view A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a and movable on the back upper right A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa for emitting and decorating the preceding decorative portion 3412 of the decorative body 3410, and the preceding decorative portion 3422 of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the lower right lower decorative substrate 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3421aa that emit light and decorate The imming is not limited to the above, but is performed after the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 are turned off and before the next variable effect is executed (for example, after the result of the variable effect is displayed, a predetermined time is displayed. After a period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, or after derivation and display of the effect result of the variable effect (after confirmation stop), a command from the main control board 1310 (a variable pattern command for instructing the start of the next variable effect, The light may be turned off at the timing when a command for instructing the execution of the demonstration is received. Further, the light guide plate 2601 may be turned off before reaching the reach effect in the fluctuation effect performed by the effect display device 1600. In this case, the light effect of the light guide plate 2601 may be used to achieve the reach effect. Of the game panel 1100 is continued even after the reach, so that a reduction in the effect of the effect and a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at least in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110; A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 emit light over a plurality of fluctuation effects. You may do so. For example, in a normal state, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110; And a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, emit blue light, and decorate the game panel 1100. The game area 5a is decorated with a blue light by decorating the pattern 1150 with a blue light, and is mounted on an upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in a front view in the time saving state, and is mounted on the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Panel decoration LED 1130a for irradiating light toward panel holder 1120 A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 by emitting red light. The gaming area 5a may be decorated with red light by decorating the 1150 with red light. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the state is advantageous to the player by the light-emitting decoration of the game panel 1100, and it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the player who recognizes that the advantageous state is being executed.

  Further, in a state where a left-handed game is recommended, a plurality of panel decorations mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 arranged at the upper left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are provided. Blue LED 1130a and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner in front view of panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of panel plate 1110. The game area 5a is illuminated in blue by decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 with blue light, and is arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view in a state where a right-handed game is recommended. A plurality of panel decorations mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 The LED 1130a and the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 emit red light. The decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 may be decorated with red light so that the gaming area 5a may be decorated with red light. Thereby, the player can be made to recognize whether the right-handed game is recommended or the left-handed game is recommended, and the player is not disadvantaged.

  Also, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 for each of the fluctuation effects, and a panel holder. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner in the front view of the panel 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 may switch the emission color. For example, the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light with a blue emission color in a variation effect, and the emission color of the panel decoration LED 1130a is switched to green when the variation effect ends and the next variation effect starts. Is also good. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the switching of the variable effect has been performed. Note that the switching timing of the emission color is at least the timing before the next variable effect is executed (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the result of the variable effect was displayed) or the effect of the variable effect result. After the derivation display (after confirmation stop), a command (a timing at which a command such as a fluctuation pattern command instructing start of the next fluctuation effect or a command instructing execution of a customer waiting demonstration) from the main control board 1310 may be used. .

  Further, in this example, the game panel 1100 for decorating the effect display device 1600 with light emission and the light guide plate 2601 for decorating the front of the effect display device 1600 with light emission are formed as separate members. Light incident on one side can be prevented from being illuminated and decorated, and not only can the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 be simultaneously illuminated and decorated, but also each can be individually illuminated and decorated. Therefore, various light emission effects can be performed, such as making the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2600 emit light at the same time, or make only one of them emit light.

  Further, the above-described light emission effect is an example, and the light emission mode such as the light emission color, light emission timing, light emission period, light emission pattern (flashing interval) is not limited to the above. That is, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a to emit and decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and mounted on the back left lower front decorative board 3321a A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the front stage of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3411aa for emitting and decorating the decoration portion 3412, and a plurality of light-emitting decorations for the first-stage decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration substrate 3421a. Full color LED (side view type) 3421aa and light from the upper surface of light guide plate 2601 By appropriately combining the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610, which are illuminated and decorated by being shot, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to be bored. Since the player can be entertained, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  As a light emitting effect using the display effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 174, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on a second pattern decorative substrate 2622 disposed on the right side of the light guide plate 2601 emit light. Then, the second pattern 2620 is illuminated. As a result, a guidance (message) for the player including the characters “CHANCE!” Is displayed as the second picture 2620 in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the guidance gives the player a chance. Can be suggested, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  FIG. 175 shows a timing chart of an effect example in which the decorative pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 are different from those in FIG. In this example, after a variable effect such as a variable display of a symbol (decorative symbol) is started on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view at timing t1 '. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 have a predetermined luminescent color (for example, red. The luminescent color is changed according to the expectation of a big hit). It is also possible to increase the probability that the big hit effect result is derived and displayed when the light is emitted in a red light emission color than in the blue light emission color.) At timing t2 ', the panel holder 1120 is mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner in the front view, facing the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. While the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light are turned off, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120 and emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be made to emit light of a predetermined light emission color (for example, red. Note that the light emission color may be made different depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability that the jackpot effect result will be derived and displayed when the light is emitted at the same time. Also, the light emission color may be the same as the panel decoration LED 1130a or a different light emission color.) At time t3 ', the panel holder 1120 is mounted on the lower left panel decorative board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner in front view and the panel plate 1110 is mounted. Toward the periphery turns off the LED1130a for multiple panels decorative irradiating light.

  The peripheral control board 1510 performs the same control as the timings t1 'to t3' at timings t3 'to t5'. Accordingly, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 arranged at the lower left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are provided with a predetermined emission color. Thus, the alternate light emission control for alternately emitting light is performed twice.

  When the alternate light emission control is performed, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110a And a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on a lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the front view of 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and a game panel in synchronization with emission of light. The area corresponding to the light emission state of the decoration pattern 1150 of the 1100 is light-emission-decorated, and the light-emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 moves alternately to the upper left and lower left. That is, the upper left corner of the game panel 1100 is mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. The decorative pattern 1150 of the part is illuminated and decorated, and the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged at the lower left corner in the front view of 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are illuminated. Thereby, the decorative pattern 1150 at the upper left of the game panel 1100 is illuminated and decorated.

  At timing t5 ', that is, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and irradiates the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 with light. And a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the front view of 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 execute alternate light emission control. Then, all of them are turned off, the luminous decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 disappears, and the upper left of the panel holder 1120 in the front left at the timing t6 ′ based on the operation of the staging operation unit 301 within the predetermined validity period. Peripheral surface of panel board 1110 mounted on upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged at a corner A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light toward the front and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that are mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a and emit and decorate the front decoration section 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. 3311aa and a predetermined emission color (for example, red. Note that the emission color may be made different according to the jackpot expectation, and the emission is performed in a red emission color than in the case of emission in a blue emission color. In such a case, the probability that the performance result of the big hit may be derived and displayed may be increased. Also, a light emission color different from the light emission color before the operation of the effect operation unit 301 may be emitted. Is turned off after displaying the result of (2) (after all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not only fixed stop but also temporary stop)).

  Thereby, the decorative pattern 1150 at the upper left of the gaming panel 1100 is illuminated. In this example, when the decorative pattern 1150 at the upper left of the game panel 1100 is to be decorated with a predetermined luminescent color, the panel is mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. Not only does the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light toward the peripheral surface emit light in a predetermined emission color, but also the front decorative portion of the rear left upper decorative movable member 3310 mounted on the rear upper left front decorative substrate 3311a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3311aa for emitting and decorating 3312 are mounted on an upper left panel decorative board 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view as an assisting light emitting means and directed toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. The plurality of panels are synchronized with light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light. By emitting light in the same emission color as that of the decoration LED 1130a, it is mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 arranged at the upper left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120, and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. The decorative pattern 1150 provided on the upper left of the gaming panel 1100 which is illuminated and decorated by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a promotes the luminous decoration, and the decorative pattern 1150 on the upper left of the gaming panel 1100 is illuminated with a higher light quantity. You can do it. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the back left upper first stage decoration A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3311aa, which are mounted on the substrate 3311a and emit light to decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the upper left movable decorative body 3310, have the same light emitting mode (lighting / flashing period and interval, light emitting color). ), The decorative pattern 1150 at the upper left of the game panel 1100 is cooperatively luminously decorated, and the light amount of the decorative pattern 1150 to be luminously decorated is increased, so that the decorative pattern 1150 to be luminously decorated is partially emphasized. Thus, a clear light-emitting decoration can be realized in the portion.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second pattern decoration board 2622 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined validity period, and a plurality of panels for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. Light is emitted in the same emission color as the decorative LED 1130a and the LEDs 3411aa and 3421aa, and the second pattern is illuminated and decorated. Thereby, the guide (message) for the player, which is composed of the characters “CHANCE!”, Is displayed on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600 by light emission, so that the light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 around the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Light emission display can be performed on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600 in combination, and it is possible to make the player think that something will happen.

  In addition, the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second design decorative board 2622 to emit light and decorate the second design 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are displayed before displaying the result of the fluctuation effect (stop display of all the decorative designs (to confirm stop). The light is turned off before the temporary stop is performed. As described above, when displaying the result of the variation effect that the player pays the most attention to, the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second pattern decoration board 2622 and illuminating and decorating the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are turned off. The luminous decoration of the second pattern 2630 on the light plate 2601 can prevent the display content of the effect display device 1600 from becoming difficult to see. On the other hand, the LEDs 1130a and 3311aa for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 are turned off after displaying the result of the fluctuation effect (after all the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed (not only fixed stop but also temporary stop)). Therefore, even when the light emission decoration of the second pattern 2630 on the light guide plate 2601 is stopped, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 formed over a wider area than the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be continued. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the production and a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and a back left upper first stage decoration substrate The timing of turning off a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3311aa mounted on the 3311a and emitting and decorating the first-stage decorative portion 3312 of the upper back movable decorative body 3310 is not limited to the above-described one, and at least the What is necessary is just to turn off the lights after the plurality of LEDs 2611 for one picture 2610 are turned off and before the next fluctuation effect is executed. Further, the light guide plate 2601 may be turned off before reaching the reach effect in the fluctuation effect performed by the effect display device 1600. In this case, the light effect of the light guide plate 2601 may be used to achieve the reach effect. Of the game panel 1100 is continued even after the reach, so that a reduction in the effect of the effect and a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the game panel 1100 for decorating the effect display device 1600 with light emission and the light guide plate 2601 for decorating the front of the effect display device 1600 with light emission are formed as separate members. Light incident on one side can be prevented from being illuminated and decorated, and not only can the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 be simultaneously illuminated and decorated, but also each can be individually illuminated and decorated. Therefore, various light emission effects can be performed, such as making the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2600 emit light at the same time, or make only one of them emit light.

  Further, when the decorative pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100 is light-emission-decorated in a specific mode, the same light-emitting color as the light-emitting means is used in synchronization with the light-emitting means dedicated to light-emission decoration of the predetermined area of the game panel 1100. The light emitting means may emit light. The specific correspondence may be a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) or a predetermined lighting pattern. Further, in this example, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a as a promoting light emitting means for promoting the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 at the upper left of the gaming panel 1100. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3311aa to be decorated are used, and as a facilitating light-emitting means for promoting the light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 at the lower left of the game panel 1100, mounted on the back lower left first-stage decorative board 3321a and the back lower left movable decoration It is configured to use a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for emitting and decorating the first-stage decorative portion 3322 of the body 3320. However, the range of the area which promotes the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 in the gaming panel 1100 and the luminous decoration The number of assisting light emitting means is appropriately determined according to the amount of lightFor example, when promoting the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern on the left side of the game panel 1100, a plurality of full colors mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a and luminously decorating the front decorative section 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are provided. A plurality of light emission from an LED (side view type) 3311aa and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa mounted on the back left lower front decorative board 3321a to emit light and decorate the front decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 The means may be set as the promoting light emitting means.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the back upper left first-stage decorative board 3311a used in another light emitting effect (light emitting effect when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are movable). A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3312 of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the front stage of the rear left lower movable decorative body 3320 mounted on the rear left lower front decorative substrate 3321a A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3321aa for emitting and decorating the decorative portion 3322 are used as promoting light emitting means for promoting the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100, and in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 for light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 Synchronization of the emission is made to emit light at the same light emission color and emission color of LED1130a for multiple panels decoration. Therefore, when the decorative pattern 1150 in a predetermined area of the game panel 1100 is illuminated and decorated by causing the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to emit light, the emission colors of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are synchronized with the emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3311aa and back lower left first-stage decorative boards 3321a that are mounted on the back upper left upper-stage decorative board 3311a in the same emission color and emit and decorate the front decorative section 3312 of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3321aa that are mounted on the back and the lower left movable decorative body 3320 to emit light and decorate the preceding decorative portion 3322 are provided in a standby position behind a portion that facilitates light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. The game panel 110 In order to promote the luminous decoration of the predetermined area in the above, while reducing the number of installation of a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a which are light emitting means dedicated to luminous decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100, while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, A luminous decoration that emphasizes the decorative pattern 1150 in a predetermined area of the game panel 1100 can be realized.

  In addition, as a dedicated light emitting unit for emitting and decorating the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, an LED having a higher luminance than the promoting light emitting unit may be used. Thus, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the promotion light emitting device from being more noticeable than the light emission decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 due to the luminance of the promotion light emission device being too high.

  Further, in addition to the light emission of the dedicated light emitting means for decorating the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 with the light emission, the auxiliary light emitting means and the promoting light emitting means may emit light in cooperation with each other. For example, when the entire area of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is to be illuminated and decorated, the light emitting unit dedicated to illuminating and decorating the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is illuminated with a predetermined luminescent color, and the auxiliary light emitting unit is illuminated. When the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light in the same color as the emission color of the exclusive light emitting means for light emitting decoration, and only the decorative pattern 1150 on the left side of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light, the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is changed. The light emitting means dedicated to light emission decoration emits light of a predetermined light emission color, and the promotion light emission means emits light of the same light emission color as the light emission color of the light emission means dedicated to light decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. Is also good. Accordingly, in addition to being able to make the entire area of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 almost uniformly light-emitting decoration, it is possible to realize light-emitting decoration that emphasizes only the decoration pattern in a predetermined area of the game panel 1100.

  Further, the above-described light emission effect is an example, and the light emission mode such as the light emission color, light emission timing, light emission period, light emission pattern (flashing interval) is not limited to the above. That is, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that are mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a and emit and decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and mounted on the back left lower front decorative board 3321a A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3322 of the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the front stage of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 mounted on the rear upper right front decorative board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) 3411aa for emitting and decorating the decoration portion 3412, and a plurality of light-emitting decorations for the first-stage decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back lower right first stage decorative board 3421a. A full color LED (side view type) 3421aa and a light guide plate 2601 on the right side are disposed. By appropriately combining the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the decorated second pattern decoration substrate 2622, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, and the player is hardly bored. Since the player can be entertained, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, as a light emitting effect using a display effect unit 2600 different from those in FIGS. 172 and 174, for example, as shown in FIG. 176, the light emitting effect is mounted on a second pattern decorative substrate 2622 arranged on the right side of the light guide plate 2601. The plurality of LEDs 2621 emit light, and the second pattern 2630 emits light. Thereby, the horizontal pattern, the upper right diagonal line, and the left diagonal diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 are each extended with a thick width, and the second pattern 2630 is a geometric pattern. However, since the decoration is illuminated, the player can see the decoration having a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center role 2500, and can entertain the player.

  The light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the light-emitting decoration of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 may be simultaneously performed. This allows the player to show a light-emitting decoration with a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center role 2500, and to entertain the player.

  Subsequently, an effect that combines the movable effect and the light-emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. FIG. 177 shows that the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rendering unit, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back left upper movable movable body, the back left lower movable movable body, the back upper right movable decorative body, It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower right lower movable movable body has been moved to the second united position. FIG. 178 shows that the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rendering unit, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back left upper movable decorative body, the back left lower movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower right back movable decorative body has been moved to the first combined position. FIG. 179 shows that the second pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rendering unit according to the embodiment different from that of FIG. 178, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back left upper movable movable body, and the lower left lower movable movable decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body moved to the first united position.

  The game board 5 has the above-described movable effect and light-emitting effect according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Is performed by appropriately combining the above. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 177, the light guide plate 2601 of the rendering unit 2600 is illuminated with the first pattern 2610 to emit light, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable The decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the second united position.

  Thereby, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are forwardly moved. Since six large triangular pattern portions in one pattern 2610 are located, depending on the large triangular pattern portion of the first pattern 2610, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the back left upper movable movable body 3310 The back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be decorated, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the lower left upper movable movable body 3310 can be decorated. The appearance of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be changed. Therefore, since a different impression can be given to the player from the state of FIG. 170, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be hardly bored, and the state of FIG. As compared with, it can be made to think that a better thing will happen, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  In addition, as an effect obtained by appropriately combining the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the first combined position. Thereby, the large triangle pattern of the first pattern 2610, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and Since the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 overlaps the front and back, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the lower left upper movable movable body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the lower right upper movable are possible. The decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be decorated to change their appearance. Therefore, since the player can be given an impression that is clearly different from the state of FIG. 171, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn. Can be convinced that the game is a "big hit" and the interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, as an effect obtained by appropriately combining the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 179, the light guide plate 2601 of the display effect unit 2600 of the embodiment different from the above is caused to emit the second pattern 2630 by light emission decoration. At the same time, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are combined into a first united body. Move to position. Thus, in front view, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 The horizontal pattern, the upper right diagonal line, and the left diagonal diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 are formed by extending the thick line geometric pattern 2630 in front of the adjacent pattern 2630. Because of the luminous decoration, the second pattern 2630 makes it difficult to see between them. The lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 , It is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the decoration mode formed by the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the movable effect is assisted. More dramatic effect and it can give enhanced.

  In a state where the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 (the second pattern 2630) of the light guide plate 2601 are luminously decorated, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 which are moved to the rear thereof are moved. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be appropriately illuminated. Thereby, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 decorated with light emission are provided. Since the light from the light reaches the player's eyes through the light guide plate 2601, it is possible to show the player a high-luminance decoration that cannot be achieved by the light guide plate 2601 alone, and to entertain the player. it can.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect can be appropriately combined, and can also be combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. it can. This makes it possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining the light-emitting effect, the movable effect, the display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Although the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is. For example, similar to the invention in which at least a part of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 or the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is visibly arranged so as to prevent forgetting to install the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 or the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132, At least a part of the first decorative board 2612 and the second decorative board 2622 may be visibly arranged so as to prevent forgetting to install the decorative board 2612 and the decorative board 2622 for the second picture. .

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. FIG. 180 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 181 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 182 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 183 is a line XX of FIG. 184 is a sectional view taken along the arrow A in FIG. 182. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a transparent cover 1501 having a box shape that is open at the rear and is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control for controlling the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the liquid crystal display board, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the liquid crystal output board 1530; A conductive material attached to (adhered to) a predetermined portion of a metal shield plate 1540 A sexual member 1545 includes a transparent base member 1502 for closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield board 1540 in the internal space of the cover body 1501, so that the shield board 1540 is provided. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510 on the various boards attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501 There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged such that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape in the remaining approximately one-third area of the cover On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape twice larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is molded transparent, and covers the upper, left, lower, and right sides of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above and to the right of the center when viewed from the front thereof and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave part 1501aa, at the positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape, a columnar predetermined shape inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 is provided. Guide projections 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (a distance dimension shorter than a depth dimension of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. In addition, by forming the slit holes 1501aaa in an arc shape, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of illegally removing various electronic components and the like provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

  A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pressed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) having a unified head and flat washer is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan screw having a seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension is provided between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  In addition, the cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. ), A wiring extraction recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted and fixed in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wire drawing recess 1501ab.

  When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is located at a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back surface of the cover plate 1501a along its lower side. The connector recess 1501ac is formed as one closed substantially horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area having the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as an upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as a lower part). It is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). I have. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies a lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It is a position that does not interfere with the hole 1501ac8, and two vertically extending reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 become connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And from the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover flat plate 1501a even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, metallic powder, or the like attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls off the cover side wall 1501b, the dust adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has one closed rectangular area along the lower side corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The opening of the cover body 1501 is located at a position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. . At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper surface of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover flat plate 1501a even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover plate 1501a. Accordingly, even if dust, metal powder, or the like attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It has become.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for connecting the wiring cover 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape which can communicate with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is smaller than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503a at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension of the wiring cover 1503 in the depth direction). A projection 1501afa having a dimension (dimensions) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting hole 1501afb1 is formed at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring cover opening 1501ae is closed, and a plurality of wirings (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting the plurality of wirings from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a non-conductive resin, and is molded transparently.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c and protrude outward at upper and lower sides at a predetermined center interval. In addition, a hinge hook 1501cc disposed above the guide 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd disposed below the guide 1501cb and protruding outward are formed, respectively. A chamfer is formed on the rear side of the left end of each of the guides 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control. On the back side of the substrate 1510, copper solder foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 each having a circular shape are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed on the peripheral control board. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the mounting surface formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. So that Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to match with the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 respectively correspond. At the same time, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (thread portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a.

  Thus, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate The circuit 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. .

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside (i.e., do not protrude outside the open side end faces).

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 project diagonally from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are formed. Have been. Around the four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520; Copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, the land 1520rf4 of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 respectively. It will be in contact. Also, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby being grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. Become.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end faces on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The fixed back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear, so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At a position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed diagonally and project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530; Copper solder foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1530.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) at 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Is electrically connected, the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, thereby being grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. .

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. And is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, in addition to being placed inside the side end surface (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e). The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted together with a metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 is attached to the cover body 1501. In a state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is sandwiched and fixed between the peripheral control IC 1510a and the various substrates, a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa. (In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the space inside the cover 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. For this reason, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. In addition, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the above-described ventilation holes 1501az, and the above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gap formed in the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Two connectors CN8 provided And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 , A gap formed in a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. For this reason, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in a plurality of shield plates 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is molded transparent, and has a horizontal rectangular base plate 1502a on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side when viewed from the front. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the front (the rear side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Thus, when the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are provided inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

  When viewed from the front, the base flat plate 1502a is arranged at predetermined intervals along the lower side, at a position not interfering with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, for wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7. Vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from warping due to the force at the time of inserting the connector for connection and breaking the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510. Then, a force for inserting a connector for connecting a wiring to the connector CN1 and a force for operating the volume control switch 1510d at a position not interfering with the connector CN1 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  Further, the base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through hole 1502ab that is longer in the vertical direction and has a shape slightly larger than the back surface of the ground piece 1540d is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engagement portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502cae, 1502caf. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In the center of the right base side wall 1502e, a base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is formed. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 that can reduce (suppress) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent rearward by a predetermined distance (in the present embodiment, 12 mm from the back of shield flat plate 1540a) at the upper center on the left side and the lower center on the left side of flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Are formed respectively.

  Further, when viewed from the front, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (upper right side and lower right side) of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) (in the present embodiment, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed respectively, and are located at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, an L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance (in the present embodiment, 25 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a) is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed therearound so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring drawing concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Accordingly, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover plate 1501a and Wiring leading recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting opening 1540aa of shield plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the surface of the shield plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 protrude from the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. It is one mounting boss hole of a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. One of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540 so that the shield plate 1540 is attached. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and the various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this embodiment). In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  The two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having a thickness of 12 mm (in this embodiment, see FIG. 183) is provided between a front surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 and a back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (a peripheral control IC 1510a, a control ROM 1510b described later, an SDRAM 1510c described later, a real-time clock IC not illustrated, a backup power supply 1510e described later, a power supply creation circuit not illustrated, A resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), LEDs ML1 to ML4 (described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 described later), various electronic components provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520 (a peripheral data ROM 1520a described later, a resistor (not illustrated), a capacitor (not illustrated), A special connector SCN3 to be described later) and various electronic components (a resistor, a capacitor not shown, a capacitor not shown, a special connector SCN4 to be described later) provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are accommodated. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing the first space 1505a. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

  In the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, like the ventilation hole 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. I have. When the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. Thereby, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1545a, It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c stuck to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be given. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by a peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape having a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
A peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover 1501 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, an advanced ATA controller (hereinafter, referred to as an “SATA controller”), and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an O interface and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs and progresses of the effects that can control the progress and demonstration of the game effects (demonstration performed while waiting for the player). Various control information (peripheral data) stored in a control ROM 1510b for preliminarily storing prescribed schedule data and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be transferred and stored. To supply power even when power is cut off to a not-shown real-time clock IC, an SDRAM 1510c composed of a DRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown). Power supply circuit 1510e, a power supply generating circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have a smaller IC pin interval and various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. To CN7, the pin interval between the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, so that the interval between the connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the interval between the connector CN7 and the special connector SCN2 is also narrowed. ing.

  The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is employed as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side There is also a method that employs SPI communication or I2C communication as a communication method for transmitting control data to (a communication is performed via a corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6 and CN7).

  In the present embodiment, for example, by using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in various effect units, and communicates via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7). And an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 and an operation button elevating drive motor 367 provided in the rendering operation unit 300), and communicate via the connector CN3. ) Is transmitted to the drive control IC for driving the game board 5, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in various effect units, which communicate via the connector CN6). From various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300). , And the and receives signals from communicating through the connector CN3.) As the detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer speed by the SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed by the I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is a GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the object to be controlled and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the object to be controlled (not shown) provided on the game board 5 are transmitted from the GPIO (to the connector CN6). And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. In the present embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from the GPIO, and data is output from the GPIO one bit at a time based on the clock signal. Can create serial data. By using such a GPIO so as to function as serial communication, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)) (Communicating via the connector CN1), the emission data can be output as a plurality of game board side serial systems, and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. ) Can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to the connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to the connector CN6 (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to the connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various kinds of control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed in accordance with an instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting between the peripheral control board 1510 and the board. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. The plurality of types of video signal systems include, for example, an RGB system, an LVDS system, a Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI) system, an embedded display port (eDP) system, and a clockless system. In this system, four systems (a total of four systems) are used: one system for RGB system, two systems for LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, the eDP system instead of the MIPI system, and uses one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system for the eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. Although described later, various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) a state in which DC +5 V is supplied, and maintains the lighting state in a state in which DC +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 confirms (monitors) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, and keeps a lighting state in a state where DC +12 V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +35 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +35 V is supplied. The LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540 so that the shield plate 1540 is attached. As described above, in a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the base plate and various substrates, a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. The distance between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of 2 and a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 1.6 mm).

  As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the like. ing. The first space 1505a thus formed can be brightly illuminated by turning on the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Each of the connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing in a plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move vertically when viewed from the front when they are fitted.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets, respectively.

  When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ), A floating mechanism is provided that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the user pushes in by moving through a predetermined distance range toward () direction. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 may be attached to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mounted and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even when the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not contact the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is oriented in the front-back direction (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1) when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. ) Is provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the push-in operation is performed by moving a predetermined distance range toward). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mounted on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mounted and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, a special (so that the front (upper surface)) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not contact the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. As various types of control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a design image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the vehicle, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, and notification sound, and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided can be given.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is inexpensive, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed as compared with a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to suppression of power consumption, and read out various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is not adopted in which the boards between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 and the control board 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise that enters the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided therein to the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. After pushing in, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 along with the peripheral control board 1510 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism is adopted. By connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be absorbed. Prevent damage to the surrounding The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of connection, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, for a player). An image that informs that a big hit gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image that conveys that the big hit gaming state does not occur, and a state that the big hit gaming state occurs although the big hit gaming state does not occur This is an important substrate for drawing an image, such as an image indicating that the user is approaching, as an image. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the connector 1515 is electrically connected to a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission line is reduced.

  The procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 included in the peripheral control substrate 1510. After being pushed, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism described above is employed. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be absorbed. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably formed. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Since the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced as compared with the case of performing the three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large effect unit (operating a movable effect Electric drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operation position) It can contribute to ensuring the depth direction of the distance dimension of fit.

[6-6. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are connected to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover plate 1501ag4. Arranged to match the hole 1501ah2 and made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in the first and second holes.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. To fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. Thus, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is attached. The liquid crystal display substrate 1530 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 can be directly or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a so that the shield plate 1540 is covered. The body 1501 and the various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the cover flat plate 1501a. The insertion in the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side restricts the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the upper, lower, left and right directions. When fixed to the back side of 1501a, absorption is performed by the respective dimensional tolerances of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. You can do it.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are formed. The guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab. It is inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 abut against the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is turned around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502, and covers the base body 1502 as it is. When the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d is placed on the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. Metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 by entering. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. And the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact). Also, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d extends from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the cooling fan FAN are inserted into the wiring drawing recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. And the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Thus, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) 1515 adhesive tape 1545c.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that accommodates the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it into a mounting hole that forms a mounting portion formed on the back side of the device.

  As described above, effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side thereof, and electrically connects to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. To the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit grounding piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 184d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. 184, contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545. It is in a state of contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in this embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that a dimensional deviation due to a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error is caused. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected. Since it is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 and can be set to the same ground (GND), an environment that is strong against electromagnetic wave noise is established for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its periphery. Can be.

  In the above-described assembling method, in the procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 is inserted. The through-hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 to be formed, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is attached to the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side of the cover body 1501). The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a cover body viewed from the back side of the cover body 1501). After being fixed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. The special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned at the above-described predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is (It is arranged on the left side.) Also in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of pushing, the plug and the socket can be connected. Of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the periphery can be formed. A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines having different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. Are stored depending on the game specifications of the game board by storing peripheral data corresponding to the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specification of the game board and is not dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As a method of a video signal input to a display device such as an effect display device, for example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of systems such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types are electrically connected by the above-mentioned board-to-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is one of the two LVDS systems as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-described inter-board connector.

  In the present embodiment, the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are molded transparently, and a peripheral control board is provided in the internal space of the cover 1501. Various boards such as a peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. Therefore, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is guided to circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) serving as circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can be.

  Here, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 are provided. Will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az have a function of air-cooling the inside space of the cover body 1501 and a function of confirming whether there is any illegality.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 182, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa are connected to the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number) , Pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are checked from multiple angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . The LED ML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in the lighting state when DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing (for example, , Connector pin count, IC (Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, silk printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Are distributed so as to form a large area where the contents can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the content printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are displayed. In addition to the corresponding relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 keeps the lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the connector between boards by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. The visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be confirmed. The area between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board is larger than the area of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530). 1530 and the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the like) printed on the silk screen 1530 are separately arranged. Thus, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are displayed. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, since the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is kept in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally checked (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a function as a spotlight for brightly illuminating an inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The visibility of the contents printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is improved. , Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa are provided with the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pin 1510c2 and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are dispersed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, respectively, so that the directions can be confirmed from various angles. Are located. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be. Further, since the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept lit in a state where DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight for illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) , The visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN, a clearance between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades by rotating the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN by an inspector). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, since the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have a weak directivity, Also suitable for lighting applications. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540 so that the shield plate 1540 is attached. As described above, in a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the base plate and various substrates, a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. The distance between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of 2 and a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 1.6 mm). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the like. ing. The first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and a region on the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In addition, it also has a function as a reflection unit that can reflect light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 and return the light to the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a glossy colored paint.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby serving as a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the influence of electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are molded transparently as described above. In addition, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. In this case, the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to grounds (GND) of various substrates, thereby providing a circuit ground. In the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. (GND) line, which is electrically connected to the same ground (GND).

  Thereby, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 is guided via a metal shield plate 1540 to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that serve as circuit grounds. Can be removed. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) serving as a circuit ground via a metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is provided. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A board-to-board connector provided by a special connector SCN3 provided on the ROM board 1520 and a board-to-board connector provided by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. By doing so, it should be placed away from the tank rail 553 It has become possible way. As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. By arranging the inter-connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game balls B in the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, an inter-board connector composed of a special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The board-to-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In FIG. 182, as shown in FIG. 182, the arrangement can be made longer in the vertical direction, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres can be minimized. In the case where the above-described inter-board connector is arranged to be long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres is extremely increased. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 182, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left and right direction, so that dust and some metallic property are reduced. Although the area to which the powders and the like have become extremely large, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac is formed by a projecting wall called a cover flat plate 1501a. Even if the plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a Dust, dust having some metallic property, etc. adhered to the cover side wall 1501 It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. As described above, the direction of arranging the above-described inter-board connector and the direction of arranging the connectors CN1 to CN9 so that dust, powder having any metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a ROM in which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and characters are stored, and an effect control board or the like on which a CPU or the like that controls a display device that displays various images is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify and produce the effect control board in accordance with the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

  Conventionally, a ROM for storing image data of patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board (effect control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted, and the like (For example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the gaming machine are charged with static electricity by rubbing the game balls when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the gaming machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the battery.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine, FIG. 186 is a block diagram schematically showing a connection relationship with a panel drive board, and FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. As shown in FIG. 115, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. And each control is shared. The main control board 1310 can control a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that can control the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b that can control the firing of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182. I have.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 185, the main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed at the time of power-on and a game executed after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs such as a main control program for controlling the operation and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various sensors are input. A main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors for signs of a momentary power failure, and a built-in main control MPU 1310a. A RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM that is provided with a. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing impropriety, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by a manufacturer that manufactures the main control MPU 4100a is added. Since the once assigned ID code is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten by using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that is not consistent, the main reset MPU 1310a is forcibly determined to be affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later again. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, as described later, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Clear). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is kept in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Random number circuit ”). The hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical value range from a minimum value of 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is set). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a to a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. Is completed, once again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. Is set as

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various sensors at its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, since the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, the main control input circuit 1310b outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. A main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, a main control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function having no reset terminal, It is composed of The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with the reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset, and thereby outputs a signal based on the information. Are configured as circuits that do not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit without a reset function outputs a signal based on the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  A first starting port sensor 3002 (the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b described above) for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004 The second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the game, the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and detecting the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003 The detection signals from the gate sensor 2506 to be activated, the special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005, and the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, The signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Note that the respective detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control input circuit 1310b. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control MPU 1310a. In contrast, respective detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001, the gate sensor 2506, the special winning opening sensor 2403, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are transmitted through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly through the main control. The signal is input to the board 1310 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on these detection signals, so that the main control output circuit with reset function outputs the main control solenoid. By outputting the control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, the respective drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, the status display, the normal symbol display, and the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control output circuit with reset function. Hold indicator, first special design indicator, first special Pending number indicator, the second special symbol display device, the second special reserved number indicator, the respective drive signals to the round indicator, without passing through the other substrate, that is directly or outputs.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control with reset function by outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function The output circuit outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In this embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002 (the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b), the second starting port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the special winning port While a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2403, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are used. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first startup port sensor 3002, the second startup port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is used. The detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the special winning opening sensor 2403 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function, so that the main control output circuit without reset function outputs the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. , Various commands are transmitted as serial data. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. A signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with the reset function to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function as serial data, Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without the reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. This is described below.) BC0 (see FIG. 189 and the like). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is triggered to be completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. I have. The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is output from the main control output circuit without reset function to the payout control board 633.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors the DC + 12V and DC + 35V for signs of power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of DC + 12V and DC + 35V, and the power failure warning signal is output to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. While being input to the input terminal, the main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110. Is input to The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. The power failure notice signal may be configured to be input to a board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power lines: a power line to which DC + 12V is supplied (+ 12V power line) and a power line to which DC + 35V is supplied (+ 35V power line). By monitoring the voltages respectively, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of a power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure as compared with the case where the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 35V power line is monitored. Is available.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, a payout control board 633 that performs a firing control, a ball feeding control, and the like of the game ball B performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and performs a firing control by the firing solenoid 542. A launch control unit 633b for performing ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error LED display 633c for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 633c. An error cancel switch 633d.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 185, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 controls power-on processing executed at power-on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from power-on. A payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs including a payout control program for controlling a payout operation of a game medium and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, A payout control input circuit 633ab to which a detection signal from a sensor is input, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to a payout motor 584 of a payout device 580. And a payout motor drive circuit 633ad.

  The payout control MPU 633aa has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( A watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also built-in.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various sensors, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, the payout control input circuit 633ab outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals by not resetting the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the output information, a payout control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function not provided with a reset terminal, It is composed of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit with the reset function is configured to output a signal based on the information when the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by the dispensing control system reset. Are configured as circuits that do not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without the reset function outputs a signal based on the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the dispensing control system reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, and the dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580. The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  A detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 and a detection signal from the main frame opening switch for detecting opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output from a payout control input circuit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

  Various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received via a payout control input circuit 633ab at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa in a serial data system. Further, an operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data is completed, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby outputting the payout control output without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the circuit to the main control board 1310 as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The dispensing control MPU 633aa outputs a drive signal for driving the dispensing motor 584 from an output terminal of the predetermined output port to the dispensing control output circuit with a reset function, thereby driving the dispensing control output circuit with a reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, and a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display 633c. By outputting a drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with reset function, a drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED display 633c.

  The error LED display 633d is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following contents are displayed and notified by the error LED display 633d. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball ball” (concrete). Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged with each other and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the number “3” is displayed. When the "Counter switch (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, "retry" is performed. (Specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. Specifically, based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the lower plate 202 is notified that the game ball B is full with the stored game balls B), and when the number “7” is displayed, “CR” is displayed. Not connected "(electric connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the numeral" 9 "is displayed. When displayed Is in stock (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present) "(specifically, the number of game balls B not paid out has reached a predetermined number). I have.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out as a prize ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to a payout control output circuit with a reset function. The output circuit outputs the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown).

  The payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with built-in infrared LED and photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game hall (a hall). ), The number of balls of the game balls B and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of the game balls or the fact that there is an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer. The external terminal board 558 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hole computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hole computer to operate. The main control board 1310, which allows the computer to proceed with the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, does not malfunction or break down, and controls the payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can perform the control and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect, so that the malfunction control or the failure does not occur. The hall computer grasps the number of game balls B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as prize balls, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, and thereby, the payout information of the game balls B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called , Pitching information) and the player's game.

  A ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent out in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the payout control MPU 633aaa via a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown). Input is made to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of the lent game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. The information is input to and displayed on the ball lending display unit of the lending operation unit 220.

  Note that various kinds of voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor BC0 (see FIG. 189 and the like) serving as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. See). With this capacitor BC0, the payout control MPU 633aa in addition to the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even in the power-off process. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output from the payout control input circuit. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control MPU 633aa, and is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 633aa.

[7-2-2. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid driving circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing reference. A ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number, and outputs the pulse to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of the game ball B to be launched toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to a firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182 based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received in the ball feeding unit 140 by one ball, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an interface and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b in which various programs and various schedule data for defining the progress of the effect are stored in advance, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in a peripheral data ROM board 1520 are stored. 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of controlling the volume, and a real And backup power source 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the time clock IC, and includes a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs various types of control information (periphery) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as one process of the initial setting process when the power is turned on (including a case where power is restored from a power failure). ) Is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. As described above, since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps, control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transfers at high speed. As described above, as the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as a background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, a character image, a design image, etc., and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, turning off, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games It is drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided on the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information accompanying processing and delete the information. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the activation of its own system, it reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and proceeds with the effect. .

  In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has completed the startup of its own system and has received various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and reads the various schedule data. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read, control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and the various LED light emission modes are adapted to the various effects. In such a manner, various effects are performed by performing control in such a manner as described above, or performing control such that sounds such as music and sound effects matched with the various effects are played.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 in the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is ready to receive screen data defining the screen configuration, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify the CPU.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads and generates sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs the read sound data. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and the like. When the slide volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume control signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side and the top side speaker Outputs an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the 464 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sound effect (sound production) with a more realistic feeling than before.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands, and reads the read schedule data. Along with, the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is read and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or is driven to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 Game board side drive data for outputting signals to SDRAM Read from 510c1 and 1510c2 and transmit as commands from various serial I / O ports to panel drive board 1720, or drive to operation ring drive motor 342 provided on door frame 3 and operation button up / down drive motor 367 Door-side drive data for outputting a signal, and a door-side for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 The door-side drive light-emitting data composed of the light-emitting data is read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side. When receiving the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a), the panel drive board 1720 is provided on the game board 5 based on the received game board side drive data (that is, the command). A drive motor control circuit (not shown) capable of outputting a drive signal to various drive motors provided in the various effect units is provided.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to the panel drive board 1720 and the periphery. The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the control input circuit. In addition, a detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348 Are received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. In addition, signals from the air-cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply creation circuit (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC +12 V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Types are created and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer), not shown, and the peripheral control IC 1510a diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control using the external WDT.

[7-3-1. Panel drive board]
Here, a brief description will be given of a panel drive board 1720 which is a subordinate board of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the relationship between the game board 5 and each decorative board will be described, and subsequently, the relationship between the various effect units and the various drive motors and the relationship between the various effect units and the various detection sensors will be described.

[7-3-1a. Relationship with each decorative board of game board]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 as described above. Of the game board 5 is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to the decorative boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided with one or more LED constant current drive circuits capable of flowing a predetermined constant current to the LEDs.

  As each decorative board of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for a first pattern 2610, which are illuminated and decorated by irradiating light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 of the table unit 2000, are mounted. A second pattern on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 for a second pattern 2620 to be illuminated and decorated by allowing light to enter from the right side of the light guide plate 2601 in the display unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 are mounted. And a decorative substrate for use 2622.

  In addition, as each decoration board of the game board 5, an upper left panel decoration is provided with a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. There is a substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 that is arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted.

  Further, as each decorative board of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs for illuminating and decorating the movable backside decorative body 3110 in the backside effecting unit 3100 of the backside unit 3000 are mounted on the backside and underside of the decorative board 3121. There is a decorative substrate 3122 and a not-illustrated underside moving decoration board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the underside moving arm 3130 in the underside rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  Also, as each decorative board of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the upper movable movable body 3210 in the upper rear effecting unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 are mounted, respectively, on a rear upper rear decorative board or a rear upper board. There is a front decoration board and a back-up moving decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back-up movement arm 3230 in the back-up rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  In addition, as a decorative board of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 are mounted. There is a substrate 3311a and a back left lower first stage decorative substrate 3321a on which a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3322 of the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320 in the rear left effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 187, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa for illuminating and decorating the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are mounted as the decorative boards of the game board 5. Back upper right front decorative board 3411a and a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are mounted. And a step decoration substrate 3421a.

[7-3-1b. Relationship with various drive motors of various production units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads, from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, game board-side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5. The command is transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720 as a command. As described above, the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by a drive motor control circuit (not shown), and the drive motor control circuit (not shown) Based on board-side drive data (that is, a command), a drive signal is output to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5.

  Returning to FIG. 186, as the various drive motors provided in the various effect units, the underside rotation drive motor that rotates the rear decorative portion 3116 and the middle decorative portion 3118 of the underside movable decorative body 3110 in the underside effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. 3112, and a lower-bottom lifting drive motor 3151 that raises and lowers the lower-side movable decorative body 3110 by rotating the lower-bottom raising / lowering arm of the lower-back rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to raise and lower the lower-bottom moving arm 3130. is there.

  In addition, as various drive motors provided in various effect units, a rear upper drive motor 3212 that rotates a rear decorative portion 3216 and a middle decorative portion 3218 of a rear upper movable decorative body 3210 in the rear upper effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000; A back-up / down drive motor 3251 that rotates the back-up / down arm in the back-up presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 to raise / lower the back-down movement arm 3130 and the back-up movement arm 3230, thereby lifting / lowering the back upper movable decoration 3210. There is.

  In addition, as various drive motors provided in various effect units, a rear upper left rotation drive motor 3313 that rotates the preceding decorative portion 3312 of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the rear left effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000, and a rear surface of the rear unit 3000 A lower left lower rotation drive motor 3323 that rotates the front decoration portion 3322 of the lower left lower decorative unit 3320 in the left rendering unit 3300, and a rear upper left movable decorative unit 3310 and a lower left lower decorative unit in the rear left rendering unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000. A back left moving drive motor 3332 for moving the 3320, and a back left traversing drive motor 3351 that turns the back left traversing arm of the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 and traverses the back left moving arm 3330 are provided. is there.

As shown in FIG. 187, as the various drive motors provided in the various effect units, a rear upper right rotation drive motor 3413 for rotating the front decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the rear right effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000. And a lower right lower rotation drive motor 3423 that rotates the front decoration section 3422 of the lower right lower movable unit 3420 of the rear right rendering unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000, and a rear upper right movable of the rear right rendering unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 The back right moving drive motor 3432 for moving the decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right traversing arm of the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are rotated to traverse the back right moving arm 3430. And a rear right traverse drive motor 3451 to be driven.
[7-3-1c. Relationship with various detection sensors]

  As described above, the detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are, as described above, panel driving. The signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the board 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510.

  As shown in FIG. 186, as various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, as shown in FIG. The optical lower back rotation detection sensor 3120 for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rear decorative portion 3116 and the middle decorative portion 3118 of the 3110, and the lower back elevating arm of the lower back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are rotated. The lower back moving arm 3130 is moved up and down to detect the waiting position (original position) where the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the lowest position. The lower back movable arm 3130 is moved up and down by rotating the lower back raising / lowering arm in the lower back production unit 3100 to move the lower back movable unit. And back under the moving position detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the position moved the body 3110 to the most upward, there is.

  In addition, the standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 are determined by detection signals from the lower back standby position detection sensor and the lower back upper movement position detection sensor. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the basis of this.

  As the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, the rear decorative portion 3216 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 in the rear upper effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 An optical back upper rotation detection sensor 3220 for detecting a standby position (original position) with the middle decorative portion 3218, and a back raising / lowering arm of the back upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, and a lower back moving arm 3130. The upper back movable arm 3230 is raised and lowered to detect the standby position (original position) at which the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is moved to the uppermost position. The back raising / lowering arm of the upper effect unit 3200 is rotated to raise the lower back moving arm 3130 and raise the upper back moving arm 3230. And back vertical movement position detection sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the position moved the back on a movable decorative body 3210 to the most downward by, there is.

  In addition, the standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 described above are based on detection signals from the back upper standby position detecting sensor and the back vertical moving position detecting sensor. This is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  As the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, the front decorative portion 3312 of the rear left upper movable decorative body 3310 in the rear left effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 , A magnetic back-upper-left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back-upper upper-front decorative board 3311a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the back-up position; A magnetic lower back left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab mounted on the back lower left front decorative board 3321a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3322 of the decorative body 3320, and a back unit 3000 Light for detecting an initial state in which the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left rendering unit 3300 is located at the left moving end. Back left initial state detection sensor (not shown) and an optical back left movement (not shown) for detecting a state where the back left moving arm 3330 of the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the right moving end. The state detection sensor, the state where the base side (left side) of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 extends vertically and the tip is directed to the right, and the base of the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 An optical back-side upper / lower initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a state in which the side (left side) extends vertically and the tip is directed rightward (see VR creation drawing V135 (a)), and a back unit 3000 The state in which the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left production unit 3300 is close to the vertical center of the moving arm base 3331 and the back left lower movable And back left vertical approaching state detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type upper side of Kazaritai 3320 detects a state close to the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3331, there is.

  Note that the standby position (original position) of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is based on a detection signal from the magnetic back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back left upper front decorative substrate 3311a. The standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a and the magnetic back lower left magnetic pole change detection mounted on the lower left lower front decorative substrate 3321a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the circuit 3321ab.

  The initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back left moving arm 3330 described above are set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the back left initial state detection sensor and the back left movement state detection sensor. In addition, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are determined by the back left upper and lower initial state detection sensor and the back left upper and lower approach state detection sensor Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal. Accordingly, the standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are detected in the back left initial state. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signals from the sensor, the back left moving state detection sensor, the back left up / down initial state detection sensor, and the back left up / down approach state detection sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 187, as the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, as shown in FIG. 187, the back upper right movable decorative body in the rear right effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 A magnetic back-upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab mounted on the back-upper right-front decorative board 3411a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front-stage decorative portion 3412 of 3410, and the back right of the back unit 3000 A magnetic back lower right magnetic pole mounted on the back lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3422 of the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the effect unit 3400. The change detection circuit 3421ab and the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are located at the right moving end. An optical back-right initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an initial state, and an optical system for detecting a state where the back-right moving arm 3430 in the back-right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the left moving end. And a state in which the base (right side) of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 extends vertically and the tip is directed to the left, and the back right An optical back-right upper / lower initial state detection sensor (not shown) that detects a state where the base side (right side) of the lower movable decorative body 3420 extends vertically and the front end faces leftward, and a back-right rendering unit of the back unit 3000. The state in which the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in 3400 is close to the vertical center of the moving arm base 3431 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 And back right vertical approaching state detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the state in which the lateral sides close to the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3431, there is.

  The standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 is based on a detection signal from a magnetic rear upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab mounted on the rear upper right front decorative substrate 3411a. In addition to being set by the peripheral control IC 1510a, the standby position (original position) of the first decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is determined by the magnetic back right lower right mounted on the lower right lower front decorative substrate 3421a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab.

  The initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back right moving arm 3430 described above are set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the back right initial state detection sensor and the back right movement state detection sensor. In addition, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are a back right upper and lower initial state detection sensor and a back right upper and lower approach state detection sensor. Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the CPU. Accordingly, the standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are set to the back right initial state. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the detection sensor, the back right moving state detection sensor, the back right up / down initial state detection sensor, and the back right up / down approach state detection sensor.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 can collect electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places once and ground it (earth ground) to the island facilities of the game hall. Here, a grounding line system using the frame grounding board 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 188 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 188 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. FIG. 188 (c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 188 (d) is a table showing the description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the frame ground board 559 is in a state in which the mounting surface faces downward (that is, in a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 face downward, respectively). It is accommodated and mounted inside a substrate accommodating portion 551aa formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 102 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the frame ground board 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. The ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 188 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 serves as an interface ground and is provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The connection terminal is electrically connected to the earth terminal via an interface ground wire. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire as the island equipment ground. The ground terminal ECN3 is shown as a ball tank ground in the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 102B (specifically, outside the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodating portion 551aa). Attach one end of the ball tank ground wire with a metal screw The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN4. The ground terminal ECN4 serves as a metal ground for the main body frame, and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. (Specifically, one end of the body frame metal ground wire is attached to a metal screw (not shown) on the upper side of the body frame reinforcing frame 530, and the other end of the body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to a ground terminal provided on the power board 630 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 113 as a power ground via a power ground wire.

  In the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), a ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of a resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serves as a power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. The other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 serving as a power supply ground, a ground terminal ECN2 serving as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 serving as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  The electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed therefrom. The electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground ground of the island facilities of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facilities ground and the island facility ground wire, and is removed therefrom. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire is guided to the earth ground of the island equipment in the game hall and removed therefrom. The electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is Via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire It is guided to the earth ground of the island capital of the gaming hall is adapted to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the ball tank 552, the payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with game balls B from the island facilities of the game hall, and the ball tank 552 is supplied with game balls B to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, in which the game balls B can stay, and the payout unit 560 are installed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is arranged near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as a result of the static electricity being easily accumulated. In the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground, and the main body frame metal are connected to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the unit 560. The ground terminal ECN4 and the ground terminal ECN2 are gradually connected to the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground terminal and the ground terminal ECN2 is connected to the ground terminal ECN2. It is now possible to lead to the earth ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the ground wire That. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates is transferred from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 to a frame ground called a frame ground. By guiding to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 serving as the main frame metal ground are, as described above, in a region that is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise. Therefore, a large-sized ground terminal is employed, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, as described above, transmits the electromagnetic noise flowing into the frame ground substrate 559 to the game hall. A large earth terminal is used because it is guided to the earth ground of the island facility for removal. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 employing the large-sized ground terminals are square having a cross section of 1.14 mm on a side, rated current: 7 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 18 is used), and rated voltage: It has general specifications of 250 V (AC / DC) and applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 serving as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 serving as the power ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. For the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are employed. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 employing the small-sized ground terminals are square having a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on a side, rated current: 3 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 22 is used), and rated voltage: As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the height is 7 mm (the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22). When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, the respective ground wires (the island facility ground wire, the ball tank ground wire, and the body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to the electromagnetic noise is larger than the respective ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), the respective ground wires (island facility ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4. The thickness of the ground wire (main body frame ground wire) is larger than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, as the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559, 1.6 mm is adopted as shown in FIG. 188 (a).

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is once collected in the frame ground substrate 559, the electromagnetic noise can be guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed therefrom. The ground substrate 559 has a function of exhibiting a static elimination action.

  In addition, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in each place is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall from the frame ground substrate 559, the pachinko machine 1 can be removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 disposed on the upper side of the pachinko machine 1 is routed to the power supply board 630 disposed on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic wave noise is once aggregated in the power supply board 630 to provide the game hall island facility. The arrangement of the ground wire (wiring) is extremely simple as compared with the configuration in which the ground wire is guided to the ground for removal.

  Further, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 are configured to be arranged in the substrate accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 are provided. Terminal 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in the present embodiment, there are ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a line from left to right as viewed from behind the payout base unit 550). ) And a hall computer provided in the game hall, and a work for electrically connecting the computer to each other by wiring, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground in the frame ground board 559, and a ground connection terminal provided in the island facility of the game hall. , And the work of electrically connecting the island equipment ground wire (wiring), and can be performed as a series of work Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  In addition, since the frame ground board 559 is configured to be able to be disposed in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island facility of the game hall are provided. Various control boards provided on the game board 5 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game) are provided with island facility ground lines (wirings) for electrically connecting the provided ground connection terminals. Control board 1510 that can control the progress of the display, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like). It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) provided in the device.

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball frame 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, and the body frame 4 near the payout unit 560. In contrast to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the body frame base unit 500, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground on the frame ground substrate 559 are respectively provided. The length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) to be electrically connected is made extremely short, and the electromagnetic noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall to be removed. be able to.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the frame earth substrate 559 which exhibits a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) depends on the length of the body frame metal ground wire (wiring) for electrically connecting the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground board 559 that exhibits the static elimination action, and The length of a power supply ground wire (wiring) for electrically connecting the substrate 630 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the charge eliminating function, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the charge removing effect. It can be configured to be the shortest as compared with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball frame 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, and the body frame 4 near the payout unit 560. In contrast to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the body frame base unit 500, the frame ground board 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a body frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, the resistance is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected. Guide to the earth ground of the island facilities of the game hall through the ground wire to remove It is possible.

By the way, conventionally, each ground is temporarily integrated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side below the main body frame so that the power supply of the AC power supply of the CR unit can be easily supplied, and connected to the earth ground of the island facility via the power supply board. There has been proposed a gaming machine that touches and grounds (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIGS. 84 and 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often placed below the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device on the upper part of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board. By laying the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way and may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs on the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the earth ground of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it may be troublesome because it is necessary to route the ground wire gathered on the power supply board from below to above and connect it again.
[8-1. A conductor floating on the ground]
Next, with reference to FIG. 264, a description will be given of members provided on a game board as handling of a conductor floating on the ground. FIG. 264 is a schematic diagram of handling of a conductor floating on the ground provided in various effect units provided in the game board.

  As described above, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5, and the payout unit 560 is arranged beside the game board 5. In the ball path, the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

  In the game board 5, various effect units are provided in the back unit 3000. These various effect units include a structure used for improving rigidity, a mechanical part of a drive mechanism, an electric part (including a housing of the electric part), and a conductive plating applied to a decorative structure. And a plurality of conductors such as a structure molded with a conductive resin (including a structure for decoration). Further, the game board 5 is provided with various substrates, and these various substrates and various effect units are arranged close to each other. In addition, the influence of these conductors on the electric circuit when electrostatic discharge occurs varies depending on the size of the surface area. When the surface area of the conductor is small, the amount of charge that can be stored is small and the effect of the electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit can be ignored, and it is not necessary to remove the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge. On the other hand, when the conductor has a large surface area, the amount of charge that can be stored is large, and the effect of the electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit cannot be ignored, and it is necessary to safely remove the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge. .

  In a state where these conductors are floating with respect to the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the above-described electromagnetic wave noise, so that the conductors are affected by the electromagnetic wave noise to cause electrostatic induction. Then, when the electrostatic discharge is generated from the conductor floating on the ground, there is a possibility that various substrates provided in the game board 5 may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors of the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, when at least the electrostatic discharge is performed, it affects various boards provided in the game board 5 and malfunctions. A structure that does not float on the ground was adopted for objects that might be damaged or that might be damaged.

[8-1-1. Handling of conductors in underside production units and underside production units]
The underside production unit 3100 (upside down production unit 3200) will be described. As described above, the underside movement arm 3130 (upside down movement arm 3230) is illustrated so as to cover the back side in order to increase its rigidity. A metal lower back moving arm reinforcing plate is provided, and one of two ends of the lower back moving arm reinforcing plate in the left-right direction, which is disposed in the vicinity of the lower back moving motor 3151, has a predetermined vertical direction. The other is attached to a metal bottom slide arm slide rail 3151 ns (slide rail 3251 ns bottom slide arm) that is slidable by a distance dimension, and the other not arranged near the bottom bottom lift drive motor 3151 is not shown. Slide along a metal cylinder (slide the surface of the metal cylinder along the length of the cylinder) Reluctant moving) back under the moving arm sliding unit (not shown) (which may be molded of a conductive resin, a non-conductive resin may be molded.) It is attached.

  In the present embodiment, of the plurality of conductors provided in the underside production unit 3100 (upside down production unit 3200), when at least electrostatic discharge occurs, it affects various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunctions. For conductors whose surface area is larger than the predetermined surface area as conductors that are likely to be damaged or damaged, they are selected as objects that do not float on the ground, and each is structurally It is in a state where it is brought into contact and fixed to conduct electricity. For example, a metal lower back moving arm reinforcing plate, a metal lower back moving arm slide rail 3151 ns, and a metal lower back moving arm reinforcing plate and a back upper moving arm slide rail 3251 ns are attached. It is in a conductive state in which it is structurally contacted and electrically connected.

  The lower back moving arm 3130 (upper lower moving arm 3230) is, as shown in FIG. The metal housing of the slide rail 3151 ns for the lower back moving arm (sliding rail 3251 ns for the upper back moving arm), which is slidable only, and the metal of the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151 (back raising / lowering drive motor 3251). Of the pair of mounting holes 3151n, 3151f (3251n, 3251f) provided in the housing made of a plastic product, the mounting hole 3151n (3252n) which is closer to the slide rail 3151ns for the lower back moving arm (slide rail 3251ns for the upper back moving arm). And the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 nc for the underside production unit (underside production unit And a mounting hole 3151f (3251f) and a panel which are electrically connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3251nc), and which are farther from the slide rail 3151ns for the underside moving arm (slide rail 3251ns for the underside moving arm). The drive substrate 1720 is electrically connected to the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc for the lower effect unit (the second conductor potential variation prevention wire 3251fc for the upper effect unit).

  Wiring terminals are crimped to both ends of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc for the underside effecting unit (first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251nc for the underside effecting unit), and the wiring terminal at one end moves underneath. The arm slide rail 3151 ns (back upper slide arm slide rail 3251 ns) is screwed and fixed to a metal housing, and the other end of the wiring terminal is connected to the lower back elevation drive motor 3151 (back elevation drive motor). 3251) is screwed and fixed to a mounting hole 3151n (3251n) provided in a metal housing of (3251). At this time, the metal housing of the lower back up / down drive motor 3151 (back up / down drive motor 3251) forming the mounting hole 3151n (3251n) is fixed to the lower back effect unit 3100 (upper back effect unit 3200).

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc for the underside effecting unit (the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc for the underside effecting unit) has a wiring terminal crimped at one end thereof and a connector provided at the other end thereof. Are fixed by being screwed into mounting holes 3151f (3251f) provided in a metal casing of the lower back elevation drive motor 3151 (back elevation drive motor 3251), and the other end connector is connected to the panel. It is inserted into a corresponding connector on the drive board 1720 and fixed. At this time, the metal casing of the lower elevating drive motor 3151 (back up / down drive motor 3251) forming the mounting hole 3151f (3251f) is fixed to the lower back effect unit 3100 (back upper effect unit 3200). The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc for the underside effecting unit (the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc for the underside effecting unit) is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via the resistor Rs0. Rs1), and ground (GND). The ground (GND) line of the panel drive board 1720 is connected to the ground of various boards such as the power supply board 630, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards, and various decorative boards. (GND) line.

  A plurality of electrical wirings (harnesses) for driving the lower elevating drive motor 3151 (back elevating drive motor 3251) are provided with connectors, and the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc for the underside effecting unit (backside effecting unit The connector of the two-conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc) is inserted into a corresponding connector on the panel driving board 1720 different from the connector into which the connector is inserted.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the underside production unit 3100 (upside production unit 3200), when at least electrostatic discharge occurs, it may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction. For those that have a certain surface area or that may be damaged, the surface area of the conductor alone is larger than a predetermined surface area, and each is structurally brought into contact and fixed to conduct, for example, metal And a structural contact is made by attaching a metal back-side moving arm slide rail 3151 ns and a metal metal back-side moving arm slide rail 3151 ns. These conductors are electrically connected to each other to be in a conducting state, and these conductors are connected to the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc for the underside effect unit, The metal housing of the drive motor 3151, the second conductor potential prevention wiring 3151fc for the underside effect unit, and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720 are grounded to the ground (GND) (these conductors are The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251 nc for the back side effecting unit, the metal casing of the back up / down drive motor 3251, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251 fc for the back side effecting unit, and the resistance Rs 1 of the panel drive board 1720 Grounded to the ground (GND)).

  Thereby, among the plurality of conductors provided in the underside production unit 3100 (upside production unit 3200), when at least electrostatic discharge occurs, there is a possibility that various substrates provided on the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction. Since the conductor is configured so that the surface area of the conductor alone becomes larger than a predetermined surface area as a certain thing or a thing that may be damaged, these conductors are not floated from the ground. Even if electromagnetic noise enters these conductors, the electromagnetic noise is guided to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) which serves as a circuit ground via the resistor Rs0 of the panel driving board 1720, and is safely transmitted. Can be removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and damages of various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic noise).

  Also, as described above, even if the electromagnetic wave noise enters these conductors, the invading electromagnetic wave noise is used to prevent the electric circuit portions of the various boards provided in the game board 5 from being affected by malfunction or failure. The pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and the impact due to the electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit game state, and the occurrence state of the probability change Discomfort of the player such as disappearance can be prevented.

[8-1-2. Handling of conductors in back left production unit and back right production unit]
Describing the back left production unit 3300 (back right production unit 3400), the moving arm base 3331 of the back left production unit 3300 (the moving arm base 3431 of the back right production unit 3400) is the back left One of the metal back left and right disposed near the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) provided in the traverse mechanism 3350 (back right traverse mechanism 3450) is slidable by a predetermined distance in the left and right direction. The other is not mounted near the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) and is attached to the slide arm 3351 ns for the movement arm (slide rail 3451 ns for the back right movement arm). Slide along the cylinder (the surface of the metal cylinder is A sliding portion (not shown) for the back-left moving arm (moving while sliding along the longitudinal direction) (which may be formed of a conductive resin or may be formed of a non-conductive resin). Installed.

  In the present embodiment, of the plurality of conductors provided in the back left production unit 3300 (back right production unit 3400), when at least electrostatic discharge occurs, it affects various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunctions. A conductor which has a larger surface area than a predetermined surface area as a conductor or a conductor which is likely to be damaged is selected as an object which does not float on the ground. For example, a slide rail 3351 ns for the back left movement arm made of metal (slide rail 3451 ns for the back right movement arm).

  As shown in FIG. 264 (b), the moving arm base 3331 of the back left rendering unit 3300 (the moving arm base 3431 of the back right rendering unit 3400) is near the back left traversing drive motor 3351 (back right traversing drive motor 3451). A metal housing of a metal back rail 3351 ns (slide rail 3451 ns for back right movement arm) made of metal and slidable in the left and right direction by a predetermined distance, and a back left traverse drive motor 3351 Of the pair of mounting holes 3351n, 3351f (3451n, 3451f) provided in the metal casing of the (back right traversing drive motor 3451), the back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns (the back right moving arm slide rail 3451ns). And the mounting hole 3351n (3452n) closer to Electrically connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351nc (the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451nc for the back right effecting unit), and the back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns (the back right moving arm slide rail). 3451 ns) and the relay board 3351 a provided in the back left production unit 3300 (the relay board 3451 a provided in the back right production unit 3400) and the second conductor potential prevention for the back left production unit. The wiring is electrically connected via a wiring 3351fc (back conductor 2nd conductor potential variation preventing wiring 3451fc for the effect unit).

  The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 nc for the back left effect unit (the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451 nc for the right rear effect unit) has a wiring terminal crimped at both ends thereof, and the wiring terminal at one end thereof moves back and left. The arm slide rail 3351 ns (back right moving arm slide rail 3451 ns) is fixed to the metal housing by screws, and the wiring terminal at the other end is connected to the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor). 3451) is screwed and fixed to a mounting hole 3351n (3451n) provided in the metal housing of (3451). At this time, the metal housing of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) forming the mounting hole 3351n (3451n) is fixed to the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400).

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3351fc for the back left effect unit (the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3451fc for the back right effect unit) has a wiring terminal crimped at one end thereof and a connector provided at the other end thereof. Are fixed by being screwed into mounting holes 3351f (3451f) provided in a metal casing of the back left traversing drive motor 3351 (back right traversing drive motor 3451), and the connector at the other end is fixed to the back. It is inserted and fixed to the corresponding connector on the relay board 3351a provided on the left effect unit 3300 (relay board 3451a provided on the back right effect unit 3400). At this time, the metal housing of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) forming the mounting hole 3351f (3451f) is fixed to the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400). The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit (the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3451fc for the right rear effect unit) is provided on the relay board 3351a (the back right effect unit 3400) provided on the back left effect unit 3300. When electrically connected to the relay board 3451a), it is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2 (via the resistor Rs3). The ground (GND) line of the relay board 3351a provided in the back left rendering unit 3300 (the relay board 3451a provided in the back right rendering unit 3400) includes a panel drive board 1720, a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board 1510. , A peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards, and various decorative boards.

  A plurality of electric wirings (harnesses) for driving the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) are provided with connectors, and the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for the back left dramatic effect unit (for the back right dramatic unit). The connector of the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451fc) is inserted into a corresponding connector on the relay board 3351a provided on the back left rendering unit 3300 (the relay board 3451a provided on the back right rendering unit 3400) different from the connector into which the connector is inserted. . The relay board 3351a provided on the back left rendering unit 3300 (the relay board 3451a provided on the back right rendering unit 3400) is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via electric wiring (harness). This electric wiring (harness) is provided with connectors at both ends thereof, and is inserted and fixed into the corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left production unit 3300 (back right production unit 3400), when at least electrostatic discharge occurs, it may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction. For example, when the conductor has a large surface area as compared with a predetermined surface area as a conductor that may be damaged or is likely to be damaged, for example, a conductor of a slide rail 3351 ns for a back left moving arm made of metal has a back left effect. Unit first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351nc, metal housing of back left traverse drive motor 3351, second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351fc for back left production unit, and relay board 3351a provided in back left production unit 3300 Is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2. (The metal conductor of the slide rail 3451 ns for the back right movement arm is the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451 nc for the back right effect unit, the metal housing of the back right traverse drive motor 3451, and the second conductor for the back right effect unit. This is grounded to the ground (GND) via the conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3451fc and the resistor Rs3 of the relay board 3451a provided in the back right rendering unit 3400).

  Thus, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left production unit 3300 (back right production unit 3400), at least when the electrostatic discharge is performed, it may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and cause a malfunction. Since the conductor is configured so that the surface area of the conductor alone becomes larger than a predetermined surface area as a certain thing or a thing that may be damaged, these conductors are not floated from the ground. Even if the electromagnetic wave noise enters these conductors, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered enters through the resistor Rs2 of the relay board 3351a provided in the back left production unit 3300 (the resistance of the relay board 3451a provided in the back right production unit 3400). Rs3), and lead to circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates), which serves as circuit ground, to safely remove It can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and damages of various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic noise).

  Also, as described above, even if the electromagnetic wave noise enters these conductors, the invading electromagnetic wave noise is used to prevent the electric circuit portions of the various boards provided in the game board 5 from being affected by malfunction or failure. The pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and the impact due to the electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit game state, and the occurrence state of the probability change Discomfort of the player such as disappearance can be prevented.

  As described above, the electromagnetic noise generated at various points in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 is temporarily collected on the frame ground substrate 559, and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall for removal. Therefore, the frame ground board 559 has a function of exhibiting a static elimination action. That is, a path is formed for guiding electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall to safely remove the noise. On the other hand, among the plurality of conductors of the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, when at least electrostatic discharge occurs, the various boards provided on the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction. In order to prevent any objects that may or may be damaged from floating above the ground, they can be safely removed by leading them to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) that serves as the circuit ground. it can. In other words, among the plurality of conductors of the various effect units in the game board 5, when at least the electrostatic discharge is performed, it may affect various boards provided in the game board 5 and cause malfunction or damage. A path is formed in which electromagnetic wave noise can be guided to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) serving as a circuit ground and safely removed. In this way, independent paths for safely removing electromagnetic noise are formed in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the game board 5, respectively, and are not affected by each other. Therefore, also in this respect, malfunction or damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented.

  As described above, the effect of a conductor on an electric circuit when electrostatic discharge occurs depends on the size of its surface area. In addition, the easiness of electrostatic discharge of the conductor varies depending on the distance between the conductor and the electric circuit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by taking into account the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance dimension between the conductor and the electric circuit, among the plurality of conductors, the electromagnetic noise is guided to the earth ground of the island facility in the game hall for safety. The conductors that need to be removed are individually selected (the conductors that are dropped to earth ground are individually distinguished), and the electromagnetic noise is used as the circuit ground. )), The conductors that need to be safely removed are individually selected (whether or not the conductors are dropped to circuit ground).

[9. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 190 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 191 is a view taken in the direction of arrow B in FIG. 190, and FIG. 192 is the power supply board. 193 is silk-screen printing of an electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (No. 1), FIG. 193 is silk-screen printing of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (No. 2), and FIG. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of. Here, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described first, followed by a method of identifying electronic components having the same shape, the confirmation of the fusing of the fuse, the capacity of the capacitor, and the countermeasures against the discontinued electronic components.

  As described above, the island facility of the game hall includes a transformer (not shown), which steps down the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 V to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC 24 V. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is inserted into a power supply outlet of 24 VAC, which is a power supply voltage for a game machine of an island facility in a game hall, 24 VAC is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 generates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from 24 V AC supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and supplies the power supply board 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1. are doing.

[9-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 189, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor improvement circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  24 VAC from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) (The supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal), and are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via a type B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a is supplied with the line 24 of AC24V (hereinafter, described as “AC24V1” (may be described as “L side”)). The line 2 of AC 24 V (hereinafter, described as “AC 24 V 2” (may be described as “N side”)) is input to the input terminal 1 of 630 a. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise suppression circuit 630b.

  When a staff such as a store clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b is started. Thus, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by the ON operation of the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power substrate 630. The supply is cut off, and the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically non-conductive, so that the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thereby, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In addition, while the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is kept ON, the staff such as the game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be turned off all at once by turning off the breakers in the game hall.

[9-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, and a choke coil L1, and the output of the power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise suppression circuit CMC includes capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. This ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 of a frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 188 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via a power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via a power switch 630a.

  AC24V1 output from the output terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC and the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and is also input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24VA, AC24V2 output from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and also to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. . The choke coil L1 is a component for preventing common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbance. The power supply line connector DCN2 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power supply line for an interface board (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and a power supply line for a CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown), and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to a CR unit (not shown).

  The AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

  The AC24V1 having the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2 and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminals of the power generation circuit 630f, respectively.

  The AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 and are output from each of them. The types of packages of the FET Q1, the FET Q2, the Schottky barrier diode D1, and the Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and are fixed to the heat radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 190). ing. The radiation fin HS1 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6 in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. And output to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

  The rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor improvement circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

  The direct current whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Respectively. To the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4, a power-factor improvement circuit gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit is input via the peripheral circuit 630da. Source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The DC with the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 suppresses generation of harmonics by switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Is output from each. The package types of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (the above-described TO-220F). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 190). The radiation fin HS2 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e includes a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, respectively, and the positive terminals of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors are supplied with DC whose power factor is improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e smoothly (smooths) the pulsating current from the DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d, outputs the pulsating current to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and outputs the fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment). In the form, it has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, through a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and through a type B blow specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. The power is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 as +35 V DC. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE3 is a + 35V power supply line for each board in the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates DC + 12V and DC + 5V from the input DC. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the created DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to output the created DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 to the pachinko machine. 1 to each substrate. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is the + 12V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is + 5V of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. Power supply line.

  The power supply creation circuit 630f controls switching of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor improvement circuit 630d by performing control to output a power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power supply creation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power supply generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island equipment in the game hall, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC +35 V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  The power supply generating circuit 630f determines the magnitude of the power supply voltage based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal (threshold: this embodiment). In this case, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), a power supply destruction circuit gate signal can be output to the power destruction circuit 630g.

  When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a power destruction circuit gate signal to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters a short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g enters the short mode, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied to the power supply via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By flowing at a stretch toward the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply destruction circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter, referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 have one end electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal.

  When a power supply destruction circuit gate signal is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the power supply destruction circuit 630g activates the FET Q5 to switch from the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal. When a large current flows toward the drain (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, and the state of the short mode in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 conduct is maintained. Is done. The FET Q5 has the same package type (TO-220F as described above) as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. , Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, are arranged at positions not in contact with the radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged between the radiating fins HS1 and HS2, and is not fixed to the radiating fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 190 and 191). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the heat through the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent), the FET Q5 is short-circuited by heat. This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  That is, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the gaming facility, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the gaming machine. When inserted, the power supply generation circuit 630f determines the magnitude of the power supply voltage to be a predetermined value (threshold) based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In the present embodiment, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), the power supply destruction circuit gate signal is output to the power destruction circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to self-destruct. This maintains a short-circuit state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. In the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 causes the power generation circuit 630f to pass through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short mode in the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal at a stretch, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown. A which is the power supply voltage Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island equipment of the game hall, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. In a state where the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is broken by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones that have not been blown, and the plug of the power supply cord is AC24V which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet, since the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the rectification circuit 630c , And the power destruction circuit 630g When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode, a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will blow again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord must be replaced at the island facility in the game hall. Even if the player is plugged into a power outlet of 24 VAC, which is a power supply voltage for a gaming machine, the game cannot be started.

[9-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of power supply generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is connected to capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the plus (+) terminal. The minus (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main power supply line serving as a backup power supply line from the terminal between the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310a provided on main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A wiring pattern for extracting the VBB and the payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. I have.

  That is, the negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main VBB serving as a backup power supply line to a main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 from a terminal between a cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and a plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, and a payout control. The payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 is a circuit divided into two systems, a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes a Schottky barrier diode D20. And supplies it to the capacitor BC0 to charge the capacitor BC0, and supplies it to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM Then, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 supplies the payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control unit 633a and holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In this case, DC +5 V by the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f by the Schottky barrier diode D20, while providing the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. The information is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a and holds various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Then, various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

  That is, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including a case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In this case, even if DC +5 V by the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630 f is not supplied to the capacitor BC 0, the discharge of the capacitor BC 0 causes the main control board 1310 to serve as the main VBB. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided are held and stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Various information is stored.

[9-2. Method of identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky transistors of the power factor correction circuit 630d. The package types of the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g are the same (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length). Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  Although the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and the FET Q5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, the only electronic components that are mounted on the power supply board 630 and have the same shape are those that are destroyed. In order to make it easy to identify the components, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has characteristics different from those of the other components.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are non-destructive electronic components, as shown in FIG. The line and the white thick line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are silk-printed, and the silk-printed TSLK1 to 4 for the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 and the silk-printed for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. Thus, TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The thick white line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 190, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other to fix the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 such that the silk print of the white outline on which the HS2 is arranged and the thick white line portions of the silk prints TSLK1 to 8 are connected.

  On the other hand, as for the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), a white outline and a plurality of white oblique lines arranged at equal intervals in the outline. ad1 and a white bold line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 by silk printing TSLK9 as silk printing. That is, the white oblique line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  As described above, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 can be used. By observing the white hatched line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among the TSLKs 1 to 9, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is more closely watched than other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether the electronic component should be used. Accordingly, it is possible to very easily specify which electronic component among the different types of electronic components having the same shape is the only electronic component to be destroyed.

  When the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the amusement hall to the FETQ5 by telephone, the silk print TSLK9 having the white hatched ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for, the clerk such as a game hall clerk can accurately grasp the position of the FET Q5, so that the service center clerk can easily communicate with the clerk such as the game hall clerk. Become.

  Accordingly, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the amusement hall to perform the FETQ5 by telephone, the clerk such as the clerk of the game hall is instructed by the person in charge of the service center. The noticeable FET Q5 can be specified among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, the notable FET Q5 among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the other electronic components, ie, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different electronic components as described above, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power supply outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the game hall island equipment, and the commercial power supply voltage is 100 VAC, which is higher than the 24 VAC power supply voltage for the game machine As described above, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short-circuit mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to cause one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Is blown. That is, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC100V which is a commercial power supply voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE2 are destroyed and become electronic components. I have. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, the electronic components to be destroyed are easily printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so as to be easily identified. The silk printing used has a different characteristic from the others.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), for the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is a commercial power supply voltage, as shown in FIG. Is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk print.

  On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components whose power cord plugs are accidentally destroyed as traces of being plugged into a commercial power supply voltage of AC100V, are shown in FIG. 193 (b). As described above, the white outline and the region ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLKs 2, 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. That is, the area ad2 solid-colored in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply board 630, support fittings (not shown) are respectively solid-filled with white in the area inside the white outline and the periphery of the support fittings. The area ad2 can be viewed, and the area ad2 that is solid white and corresponds to a transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is an area inside the white outline, is transparent. It can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  As described above, even when the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLK1-3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the solid-colored area ad2, it is possible to identify which of the same type of electronic components having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. This makes it extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is the electronic component indicating that the plug of the power cord has been accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage. Can be identified.

  When the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the amusement hall to specify the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone, the white solid area shown as a characteristic pattern is used. By instructing to search for the silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 having the ad2, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Communication with clerks such as clerks becomes easier.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall such as the clerk of the game hall to use the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the person in charge of the staff of the game hall and the person in charge of the service center Of the electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be distinguished from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component.

[9-3. Confirmation of blown fuse]
Next, a description will be given of how to confirm the fusing of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 mounted on the power supply board 630 and having the same shape. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). Soot adheres to the inside. Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show a trace in which the plug of the power cord is erroneously inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of AC100V which is a commercial power supply voltage, the power cord is blown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk printing FSLK2, 3 described above is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk printing on the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 so that the state of the blown fuse line can be easily checked. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 correspond to transparent glass tubes excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the solid white area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern as described above. By visually observing the solid white region ad2 through a transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  Thereby, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) inserts a plug of a power cord for supplying a power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 with a power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by mistakenly plugging it into an AC 100V power outlet which is a commercial power voltage and turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Of these, the fuse wire housed in one or both transparent glass tubes breaks and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Even if the plug is inserted into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on and it is an initial failure. " Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, the silk print FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as the silk print on the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green color is adopted as the resist for the power supply substrate 630. Further, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly applied to a region of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk print FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (that is, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the region, no wiring pattern is formed in this region.) This is because the transparent wire of the fuse FUSE3 and the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the fuse are visually observed through the transparent glass tube so that the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 can be obtained. In this case, the visibility of the fuse line can be improved and the presence or absence of the disconnection of the fuse line can be confirmed.

  Also, in the area of the solid glass resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, even if all the wiring patterns are laid out, as in the case where no wiring pattern is laid out, the transparency of the fuse FUSE3 is changed. The region of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube is visually observed through the transparent glass tube, thereby improving the visibility of the state of the fuse line accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3. Thus, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

  As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function as a means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown) in addition to a function as a means for relaying various signals. The interface board 635 is formed by a fuse FUSE (not shown) (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a type B blowout specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). 193 (a) is printed on the mounting surface of the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 described above. The area of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solid-coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the solid-colored green resist area corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) (that is, the solid-filled area corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of the green resist, no wiring pattern is formed in this area.) This is because the area of the solid-colored green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) is visually observed through the transparent glass tube and is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE. The visibility of the state of the fuse line is improved so that the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be confirmed. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 may be provided in one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or may be provided in both. You can also.

  Also, in the solid-colored green resist area corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), even if all the wiring patterns are laid out, as in the case where no wiring pattern is laid out, it is not shown. The area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE is visually inspected through the transparent glass tube, so that the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE is reduced. The visibility can be improved, and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be easily checked.

[9-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the capacitor BC0 is connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. Line), DC + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be charged. The power supply supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs when the power supply of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning OFF the power supply. The discharge is performed in response to the DC +5 V from the line (that is, +5 V power supply line) not being supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  Due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including a case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is turned off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), a power failure or the like. When a momentary power failure occurs, backup power is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is held. In addition, the backup power supply is supplied as the payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, so that various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held. It has become.

  When the operation of the game hall is completed, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall turns off the breaker of the game hall, thereby simultaneously turning off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. Then, when starting the next business (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is kept in the ON state), a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall changes the breaker of the game hall. Is turned on, the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is turned on all at once. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the discharging of the capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the business of the gaming hall to the start of the next business, so that the main control board 1310 has Various types of information of the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. With this, when a clerk such as a game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall at the start of business, when the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned on all at once, the RAM clear switch is turned on. Regardless of whether the operation is performed or not, the main control MPU provided on the main control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in the power-on processing and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification for notifying that the game has been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines sounds in the game hall. In this case, in all the pachinko machines, the dispensing control MPU provided on the dispensing control board judges the checksum (sum value) error of the dispensing control built-in RAM in the processing at the time of turning on the power, and completes the contents of the dispensing control built-in RAM. Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not performed even when the game hall is closed and the next business is started. Specifically, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about three days (about 72 hours) after the business of the gaming hall ends. Various kinds of information which are supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held and supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. A memory having a capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM is selected. The selection of the capacity depends on the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310, and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633. Is also about 10 times larger than the power consumption of the payment VBB supplied to the power supply. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Power consumption is large.

[9-5. Discontinued Electronic Components Measures]
Next, a countermeasure against the discontinued electronic component will be described. First, due to the circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a mounting surface, which is a front surface side, of a substrate treated as a main substrate such as a power supply substrate, a main control substrate, and a payout control substrate. It is necessary to solder on the soldering side which is the side. However, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines. A so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, production may be stopped due to a decrease in the production number of lead-type electronic components. Even if a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued and a replacement is searched for, there is a high probability that another electronic component manufacturer will also discontinue production. This leads to the use of a lead-type electronic component with a time limit, which makes it difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on a substrate that will eventually be treated as a main substrate.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, and a lead type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate. . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a at a position corresponding to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb serving as terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. SMD land patterns D20da, D20db are formed at the positions where one ends of the leads D20ea, D20eb corresponding to the SMD land patterns D20da, D20db are arranged, and lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb are formed at the positions where the SMD land patterns D20da, D20db are arranged. , D20db and wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb for electrically connecting the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb.

  SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of substrate D20a are arranged and soldered so as to correspond to anode side D20ca and cathode side D20cb serving as terminals of SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. The anode D20ca and the cathode D20cb are soldered to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db, and one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb, respectively. Then, the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the substrate D20a is molded by wrapping it with epoxy resin to form an SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and an electronic component body D20h covering one end of the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component body D20h. As shown in FIG. 194 (b), a symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h. Although not shown, a manufacturer name and a product number (a number listed in a catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h.

  As described above, since the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, even if the production of the lead type electronic component is reduced and the production is stopped and it becomes difficult to obtain it, This can be achieved by using SMD type electronic components used by electric manufacturers.

  In the above-described embodiment, the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described. However, the present invention can be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Further, the same SMD type electronic components can be arranged in an array in which a plurality of the same SMD type electronic components are arranged in a line, thereby forming a lead type electronic component.

  Next, a countermeasure is taken against a commercial power supply voltage when a plug of a power supply cord for supplying AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is erroneously inserted into a power outlet of a commercial power supply voltage (100 V AC). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, described as “configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against a commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 195, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 189 (hereinafter, described as “configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the power supply destruction circuit 630g includes the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power supply destruction circuit 630f receives the power supply destruction from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. When a circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates to cause a large current to flow from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are connected to each other). When the FET Q5 is destroyed due to the current, the short-circuit mode in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 conduct is maintained.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit as described above. And the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. I have.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the AC24V1 and the AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and the diode D5, as described above. The signals are input to the anode terminal of D6, respectively, output from the cathode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via the power cord (not shown) as described above, the fuse FUSE1 , FUSE2 to the input terminals 3, 1 of the power switch 630a. As described above, for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the white outline and the area ad2 obtained by solid-filling the outline in white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. Printed on the surface. That is, the area ad2 solid-colored in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630, as described above, the support fittings (not shown) are white in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support fittings. The solid-filled area ad2 can be viewed, and is a solid white area corresponding to a transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is an area inside the white outline. ad2 can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, 24 VAC from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input directly to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. Is done. As described above, for the fuse FUSE1, a white outline and an area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and a silk-printed FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. ing. That is, the area ad2 solid-colored in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630, as described above, the support fittings (not shown) are solidly painted white in the area inside the white outline and the periphery of the support fittings. The area ad2, which has been solid-filled in white, is the area inside the white outline and corresponds to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1. It can be surely seen through the glass tube.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is omitted from the 24 V AC from the island facility of the game hall. Briefly describing this, in the configuration of countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are connected to both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side ( AC24V2)), but no problem occurred even if one (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted in a test conducted by the applicant. As a result, in the configuration of countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, one of the AC 24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. The cost can be reduced by inputting it as is.

  Further, the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment employs the same power switch 630a as the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. This is because the power switch 630a needs to be reliably disconnected / connected to both the L side and the N side of the 24 VAC from the island facility of the game hall. Thereby, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected / connected simultaneously.

  In the configuration of countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, the N side of AC24V (AC24V2) from the island facility of the game hall and the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a are connected. It is electrically connected to one of the micro gap type arresters AL1. The other of the micro gap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. When a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) intrudes into AC24V from the island facility of the game hall due to a lightning strike, the surge voltage is applied to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing as a current, so that a surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a, or a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on / off the power switch 630a is supplied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing a surge current to the frame ground FG2 to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, a worker passes by the micro gap type arrester AL1, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b). If the terminal and the ground connection terminal of the game hall island facility are electrically connected to each other via the island facility ground wire, the electromagnetic wave noise is used as security and the N side of AC24V from the game hall island facility (AC24V2 ), The noise immunity can be increased.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, a choke coil L1 and a surge absorber SA1 forming a power supply destruction circuit 630g '. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are connected to a common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, a normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and a power supply destruction circuit. 630g ', and input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'has a higher reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). One end thereof is electrically connected to the L side of AC 24 V (AC 24 V 1) via the power switch 630 a, and the other end is connected to the N side of AC 24 V via the power switch 630 a. AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, causing a short circuit and a short mode.

  A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, or the like) is used. The silicon surge absorber is capable of absorbing a surge voltage having a sharp rise compared to a normal varistor, and utilizes an avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a pn junction of silicon. This silicon surge absorber has characteristics that it has a very quick response to a surge, has a very good control voltage characteristic, and has a very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type is used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47 V which is about twice the input voltage may be selected.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , Is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and is also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. Four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to ground (GND), and a first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). The thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. The characteristic of the thermistor TH1 is that as the vertical axis indicates the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis indicates the AC voltage, as the AC voltage value increases. Therefore, a capacitor having a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor becomes small and which is not destroyed even when a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 V is applied is selected.

  The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, and is input to the power source creation circuit 630f and also to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630 generates an operating voltage (+24 V) that can operate the coil of the relay RL1, and supplies the operating voltage to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

  The rectified DC output from each of the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is generated when the power switch 630a is turned ON due to insufficient power from the relay drive circuit 630i (the relay drive circuit 630i). Because the coil of relay RL1 is not operating (because the power supply by + 24V from 630i is insufficient), relay RL1 cannot be turned ON (that is, relay RL1 remains OFF). The second terminal (COM) and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are input to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 in a non-conductive state. You. Thus, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively flows toward the thermistor TH1 only, and when the DC starts to flow through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value Is high and a weak current flows through the load subsequent to the thermistor TH1, but when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually increases due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly. Apply a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on to switch from a state in which the coil of the relay RL1 does not operate to a state in which the coil of the relay RL1 operates by power from the relay driving circuit 630i (by power supply at +24 V from the relay driving circuit 630i), the relay RL1 Is turned on, the terminal No. 2 (COM) and the terminal No. 3 of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, respectively. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current flows between the terminals of the relay RL1 between the No. 2 (COM) terminal and the No. 3 terminal (that is, between the contacts) and flows therethrough, and is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Is done. As a result, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively flows between the terminals of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, whereby the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are connected. The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) increases.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature increases, and the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively. When the current flows to TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance value decreases, so that the current to the load subsequent to the thermistor TH1 increases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island equipment in the game hall, and the power supply of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage for the game machine, 24 VAC If the plug is erroneously inserted into the outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 greatly exceeds the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) before the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, and a large current flows through the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 is destroyed, and the short mode can be set.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode in the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is turned off. It will be blown. In addition, when the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1. It can be prevented from being destroyed in the open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the power cord is erroneously inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 is destroyed. This can be reliably prevented.

  In the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. The circuit configuration does not become complicated because it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for a power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for flowing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island equipment of the game hall, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with a fuse which has not been blown, and the plug of the power cord is connected to the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility at the gaming hall. Even if it is plugged into a 24V AC power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1 and fuse FUSE1 is restarted. So that the blown. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is already broken is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not broken down, Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into a power outlet of 24 VAC, which is a power supply voltage for a gaming machine of an island facility in a gaming hall, the game cannot be started.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a power supply unit capable of creating various power supplies required for the gaming machine based on an external power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-008221). In the official gazette (FIG. 2), when a person in charge of a service center of a game machine manufacturer instructs a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall to specify a specific part of the power supply means by telephone, the person in charge of the service center is instructed. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify a notable component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply unit.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including a power supply unit that creates various power supplies based on the power supply from the gaming island facility and supplies the power to the board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The game island facilities convert a commercial AC power supply (AC 100 V) to a step-down gaming machine AC power supply (AC 24 V). However, if the power cord for supplying power from the island facilities to the gaming machine is inserted into the AC outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the AC outlet of the gaming machine, the commercial AC power supply Because of the high voltage, there is a possibility that abnormal power is output from the power supply means and various substrates inside the gaming machine are destroyed.

[10. Circuit of main control board, circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuits and the like of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 197. FIG. 196 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 197 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control board, and FIG. 198 is a perspective view illustrating an outline of wiring to a board treated as a main board. FIG. First, the power supply and input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[10-1. Power supply and input signal in circuit of main control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with +5 V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 and is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The supplied backup power is supplied as the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 196, first, as shown in FIG. 196, the DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal applied with +5 V DC from the power supply generating circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, its second terminal grounded to ground (GND), and its third terminal. DC + 5 V from which noise components have been removed is output from the terminal. The DC +5 V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), thereby first removing a ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). Has been smoothed.

  The DC + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Ripple is further removed and smoothed by the connection. The smoothed DC +5 V is applied to a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a after the momentary power failure occurs. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is connected to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the substrate 630. Thus, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a via the resistor MR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, and a detection from the general winning opening sensor 2401. The signal, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the like are input to the main control input circuit 1310b via the panel relay board 1710, and the first start-up. The detection signal from the mouth sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control input circuit 1310b without passing through the panel relay board 1710.

  A detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is a vacant terminal, is grounded to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, there are four general winning ports 2001, and the general winning port sensors 3001 detect the game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 included in the side unit 2200, respectively. Are input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the game ball B received in one general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400 is detected. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal PB5 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first starting port sensor 3002 is constituted by two sensors (double sensors) of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor sub-side 3002b. I have. The detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), while the first starting port sensor The detection signal from the slave side 3002b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first starting port sensor sub side 3002b. Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PB is composed of 8 bits, like the input port PA. Although not shown, a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are also supplied to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input terminals that are input to the respective predetermined input terminals and become vacant terminals are grounded to ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

[10-2. Power supply and input signal in circuit of payout control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with +5 V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as the power supply VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 197, first, +5 V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 has a first terminal to which +5 VDC from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is applied, a second terminal thereof grounded to the ground (GND), and a third terminal thereof. DC + 5 V from which noise components have been removed is output from the terminal. The DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded and connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0. Has been smoothed.

  The DC + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Ripple is further removed and smoothed by the connection. This smoothed DC +5 V is applied to a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa after the momentary power failure occurs. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in the present embodiment) is larger than the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the embodiment, a value larger than the capacitance (180 microfarads (μF)) is selected. Thereby, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each of the charged electric charges is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power failure occurs.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is connected to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the substrate 630. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa via the resistor PR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a signal from the payment detection sensor 591 The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are: The signals are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. The input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are empty terminals, are each grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

  A power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to an input terminal PB0 of an input port PB (not shown) via a payout control input circuit 633ab, and a detection signal from another sensor. The input terminals which are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become the vacant terminals are, as in the case of the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA, the ground ( GND).

[10-3. Wiring to board treated as main board]
The board handled as the main board includes a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, and the like. If the wiring to the board treated as the main board is fraudulently modified, the operation of the board treated as the main board will be uneasy, and a large amount of game balls will be paid out as prize balls, and the illegal game balls will be illegally When the wiring to each of these boards is illegally modified, it is necessary to find the modified wiring at an early stage because there is a possibility of being acquired by an actor.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), for the wiring to the power supply board 630, a connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG includes a manufacturer name and a product number (a number described in a catalog). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier on the covering portion of each wiring connected to)). Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from a first pin to a 22nd pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: XXX as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on a covering portion of the wiring SCBL1. And the product number: ABC123 (a number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has a manufacturer name: XXX as the fraudulent identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL2, and the product number: ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) Is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the power supply board 630 must be at least as large as the manufacturer's name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) as the fraudulent identifier SLAB in the wiring's coating. Has a length in which the fraudulent identifier SLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion, and is a fraudulent identifier SLAB as a manufacturer name: XXX, and a product number: ABC123 (a number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to the other pins may be of another color different from white (a single color (for example, red or gray) or a plurality of colors). (E.g., red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (e.g., a single color or a plurality of colors). ), The manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (number posted in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier SLAB.

  As for the wiring to the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the connector MHG (not shown, but the connector MHG is connected to a manufacturer name and a product number (a number described in a catalog)). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the covering portion of each wiring as an unauthorized identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from a first pin to a thirty pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: YYYYY as an unauthorized identifier MLAB on a covering portion of the wiring MCBL1. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturer name: YYYYY as the fraudulent identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL2, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) Number is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 should be at least as long as the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB in the covering portion of the wiring. Has the length in which the unauthorized identifier MLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  The covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and the color of the covering portion is easily visible (for example, black), and the manufacturer name: YYYYY, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number listed in a catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be of another color (monochrome (for example, red or gray) different from white. Or, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and colors that are easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), A manufacturer name: YYYYY, and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number published in a catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB.

  As shown in FIG. 198 (b), the wiring to the payout control board 633 is connected to a connector HHG (not shown, but the connector HHG has a manufacturer name and a product number (a number described in a catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from a first pin to a 30th pin, and the first pin is provided with a fraudulent identifier HLAB on a covering portion of the wiring HCBL1, and a manufacturer name: YYYYY, And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer name: YYYYY as the fraudulent identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL2, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (posted in the catalog) Number is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 must be at least as long as the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the fraudulent identifier HLAB on the wiring covering portion. Has the length in which the fraudulent identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion. DEFXYZ-1 (a number listed in a catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be of another color (monochrome (for example, red or gray) different from white. Or, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and colors that are easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), A manufacturer name: YYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number published in a catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier HLAB.

  In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is tampered with, the name of the manufacturer and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to discovering the modified wiring at an early stage. In addition, as wiring to the board treated as the main board, wiring that is difficult to obtain is preferable even if it is listed in a catalog.

  In the present embodiment, two of the first starting port sensor main sides 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 are provided. The wiring and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 provided on the game board 5 are respectively connected to the main control board via connectors (not shown). 1310 is electrically connected directly. On the other hand, the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b that constitutes the first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5 is provided on the game board 5. A gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball B received in a special winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5, and a general winning provided in the game board 5 Two sensors from various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2001, and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5. Are electrically connected and aggregated in the panel relay board 1710 via respective connectors, and are also connected via one connector. , It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  For this reason, the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 that constitute the first starting port sensor 3002 are incorrectly transmitted to the main control board 1310. There is a risk of electrical connection. Therefore, in the present embodiment, one of the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 is yellow and the other is pink, and the covering portion of each wire is a wire identifier as an unauthorized identifier. Are repeatedly printed, respectively. As the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, one is white and the other is black, and the covering portion of each wire has a wire manufacturer name and product number as an unauthorized identifier (catalog) Are printed repeatedly. This allows the manufacturer to identify the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, respectively, at the manufacturer. In addition, in the gaming hall, a clerk such as a clerk of the gaming hall identifies the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, respectively. You can do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 is used. Is selected, and a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. Thus, two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 correspond to themselves. Since it is possible to have a physical structure that can be electrically connected, the manufacturer of the line requires the operator of the line to perform the first starting port sensor 3002 constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error of incorrect insertion) between two wirings from the 3002a and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402, and in the game hall, A clerk such as a clerk at the game hall checks the first starting port sensor 3002 when confirming the presence or absence of impropriety, and when temporarily removing and returning the wiring for maintenance. A work mistake (wiring error of incorrect insertion) between two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 is reliably prevented. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in each of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200, and one general winning opening 2001 provided in the attacker unit 2400 are received. Connectors having the same shape are selected as connectors for electrically connecting two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710. In the present embodiment, although there are four general winning openings 2001, no matter which general winning opening 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball with the entering ball. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change of the production. Further, even when adopting a configuration in which two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 are directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710, the general winning is achieved. Connectors having the same shape are selected as connectors for electrically connecting the two wires from the mouth sensors 2401 and 3001 to the main control board 1310. This is because, as described above, although there are four general winning openings 2001, no matter which general winning opening 2001 receives a game ball, a predetermined number of game balls will be paid out as a prize ball with the entering ball. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change of the production.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various entrances in an advantageous area of a game board, and provided with each sensor (detection means) at each entrance to detect the passage of a game ball ( For example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraphs [0014] to [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4). However, if the wiring from the detection means passing through the entrance with similar application is erroneously electrically connected, there is no problem in terms of electrical specifications, so damage can be avoided but the detection signal of the entrance is erroneously received It will affect the progress of the game. However, there is a problem that, in particular, there is a possibility that the user may not notice the erroneous connection immediately because the applications are similar.

[11. Decorative boards for door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 199 is a block diagram illustrating electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame, FIG. 200 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. FIG. 202 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including two constant current driving circuits. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram illustrating an arrangement method of LED constant current driving circuits. FIG. FIG. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board including the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current. A method for arranging the driving circuits will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, so that the upper left decorative member 271, the upper right decorative member 276, the upper central decorative member 312a, the left side decorative door member 404, The side window decoration part 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged, respectively, and the dish upper left decoration body 271, the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the plate. Below the upper middle decorative body 312a, a lower left decorative body 281, a lower right decorative body 286, and a lower middle decorative body 312 b are arranged, respectively.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 is provided with a dish upper left decorative board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper left decorative body 271 behind the dish upper decorative body 271. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (six in this embodiment). The dish upper right decorative body 276 is provided with a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276 behind the dish upper right decorative body 276, and is mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (five in this embodiment). The dish center upper decoration body 312a is provided with a dish center upper decoration board 314 formed in an elongated band shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a behind the dish center upper decoration body 312a. The light emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (ten in this embodiment) mounted on the 314.

  The left side door decorative body 402b and the left side lower decorative board 402b are formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending up and down along the door frame left side decorative body 404 behind the door frame left side decorative body 404b. And a plurality of full-color LEDs (in the present embodiment, left upper decorative substrate 402a) mounted on left upper decorative substrate 402a and left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. 5 and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has 10). The side window interior decoration portion 410b is provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and a rear side of the side window formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412. The decorative portion decorative board 413 in the window is disposed, and the light emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in the present embodiment) mounted on the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419 on the rear side thereof. The upper right side decorative board 418a and the lower right side decorative board 418b are formed. A full-color LED (in the present embodiment, the upper right side decorative substrate 418a is mounted on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the lower right side decorative substrate 418b, respectively). And the right side lower decorative substrate 418b has 10).

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is provided with a door frame top central decorative board 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 at the rear thereof. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. Door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in the shape of a long narrow strip is arranged, and a plurality of door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457 are respectively mounted in plural numbers. Light-emitting decoration by full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top center decorative board 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative board 457) It is.

  In the lower left dish decoration 281, a lower left decoration board 283 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the lower left decoration 281 is arranged behind the lower left decoration 281, and a plurality of lower left decoration boards 283 are mounted on the lower left decoration board 283. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (six in this embodiment). On the lower right of the dish, the lower right decorative board 288 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the lower right of the dish 286 is disposed behind the lower right decorative board 288. Are illuminated and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment) mounted on the LED. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided with a dish center lower decorative board 316 formed in an elongated band shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b behind the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Light-emission decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 316.

  The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided on the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided back and forth as described above, The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in a long strip shape having a front semi-circular shape, and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in a long strip shape having a rear semi-circular shape. , Is composed of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (nine in the present embodiment) mounted on the front decorative board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in the present embodiment) mounted on the rear decorative board 352b. In the present embodiment, the light-emitting decoration is 9).

  As described above, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. Thus, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distances of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, and the like can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, or the like can also be provided.

[11-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub relay board]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side disposed on various decorative bodies and decorative portions provided in door frame 3 Decorative part decorative board 413 in the window, upper right decorative board 418a, lower right decorative board 418b, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish lower left decorative board 283, the lower right plate decorative substrate 288, the lower central plate decorative substrate 316, the front decorative substrate 352a, the rear decorative substrate 352b, etc., and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the provided door frame sub relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 180 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, and the light emission data SDAT2, the clock signal SCLK2, which is the second serial system on the door frame side, which are serially output from I have. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power board 630 shown in FIG. 189 via the interface board 635 to input DC + 12V and to connect the ground ( (GND) line and grounded to ground (GND).

[11-1-1. Door frame first serial system]
The door frame first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the plate unit relays of the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the board 214 and is input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate unit relay board 214 are the lower left decorative board 283, the lower right decorative board 288, 70 are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the lower left plate decorative plate 283 are input to the upper left plate decorative plate 273, respectively. That is, the lower left dish plate 283 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left dish plate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the upper left decorative plate 273 are electrically connected in a rosary. In the figure, the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the lower left decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board. And an unshown input connector for outputting the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left plate 273. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left plate decorative substrate 283 electrically connected to the lower left plate decorative substrate 283 (that is, the latter stage of the lower left plate decorative substrate 283 and the last stage) is illustrated by the lower left plate decorative substrate 283. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors which are not used, are provided. .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the lower right plate decorative plate 288 are input to the upper right plate decorative plate 278, respectively. That is, the lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board that transmits the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the upper right decorative board 278 on the door frame side. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a rosary. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay substrate 214 are input to the lower right decorative substrate 288 serving as a bridge substrate. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and an illustration is provided for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper right plate decorative substrate 278 electrically connected to the lower right plate decorative substrate 288 (that is, the latter stage of the lower right plate decorative substrate 288 and the last stage) includes the lower right plate decorative substrate. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame-side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) which are respectively output from the output connector 288 (not shown) are provided. ing.

  The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate and the plate. The information is input to the lower center decorative substrate 316 and the front decorative substrate 352a of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, respectively.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative board 352a are input to the rear decorative board 352b. In other words, the front decorative board 352a serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. And the rear decoration substrate 352b are electrically connected in a rosary. On the pre-decoration board 352a serving as a bridge board, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the staging operation unit 300 are respectively provided. An input connector (not shown) for inputting is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decoration board 352b. (Not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative board 352a is provided on the rear decorative board 352b which is electrically connected to the front decorative board 352a in a daisy chain (that is, a rear stage and a final stage after the front decorative substrate 352a). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), respectively, which are respectively output from.

  Here, for example, the lower left decorative board 283 to which the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. Then, the bottom left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs, sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current of the current that flows to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat distribution circuit 283c.

  In addition, for example, the upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the lower left decorative board 283 will be briefly described. The upper left dish decoration board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 273x that can supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls the supply of a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative board 283. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x can be distributed by part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x by the heat distribution circuit 273c.

[11-1-2. Door frame second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. While being input to the substrate 402b, the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the right side lower decorative substrate 418b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Are entered respectively.

  DC + 12V and ground (GND) input to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the upper left side decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top right decorative board 457 is a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top center decorative board 455. Thus, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board includes a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. (GND) is provided, and an input connector (not shown) is provided. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are connected to the top center of the door frame. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative board 455 is provided. The door frame top right decorative board 457 is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, the door frame top right decorative board 457). And an input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from output connectors, are provided. , An output connector (not shown) for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 is a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a rosary. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455 (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 is a rear stage and a final stage) is provided with a door. Door frame-side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connector (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455, are respectively input. Only the connector for the device is provided.

  Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay board 105 are input. The lower left lower decorative substrate 402b will be briefly described. The lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273, and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. And a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current flowing through the hdLED1 to the hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay board 105. Perform control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273. The sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx, which can supply a constant current to the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, and the hdLED9, hdLED10, and the left And a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper side decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, and is used for mounting the board (left side lower decorative board 402b). Control is performed to supply a constant current to the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat distribution circuit 402bc. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a. ing.

  As described above, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dissipated by only the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted (the lower left side decorative board 402b). On the other hand, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board on which it is mounted (the lower left side decorative board 402b). Heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left upper decorative board 402a, which is the succeeding substrate, across the board on which it is mounted (the lower left decorative board 402b). Have been. For this reason, an operation for electrically connecting the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a is always involved. The worker who performs this operation may use the finger of the connector of the lower left decorative board 402b, the connector of the upper left side decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left lower decorative board 402b, or the heat of the upper left decorative board 402a. In order to touch the distribution circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the lower left decorative board 402b and the upper left decorative board 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dissipating circuit 402bc of the lower left decorative board 402b and the heat dispersing circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, It also has a function that can prevent electronic components from being damaged by the electronic components.

  As described above, the upper left decorative board 402a receives DC + 12V and ground (GND) from the lower left lower decorative board 402b, and also has five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Lines through which current flows are input. As described above, the upper left side decorative substrate 402a includes the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[11-1-3. Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for specifying a light emission mode, and include ID information and floor information. Key information. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current driving circuits to be designated among the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

[11-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Therefore, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the dish left lower decorative board 283 will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and sets the maximum current that flows to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283y.

[11-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output a current for each channel. In this embodiment, an output channel LR is provided for an LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green light (G), and an LED element that emits blue light (B) that constitute one full-color LED. , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. Can be done.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[11-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of receiving an input of + 12V DC from a + 12V power supply line and generating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (in this embodiment, + 5V DC) used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. 283xi, and a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. Is supposed to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189, and independently generates + DC 5V as the internal power supply Vreg and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. I have. This is because if a + 5V power line from the power supply board 630 is used, the + 5V power line is used by routing electric wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power line supplying DC + 5V becomes longer and noise is reduced. Easy to invade. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED may flicker under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the + 12V power supply line has a very high noise resistance compared to the + 5V power supply line. In the linear power supply 283xa, a configuration in which DC + 5V is independently created as the internal power supply Vreg is adopted.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. This stabilizes the internal power supply Vreg, thereby contributing to preventing flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise. In addition, the input electric wiring and the external transmission electric wiring for the + 5V power supply line become unnecessary, which can contribute to downsizing of the connector.

[11-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs the signal to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The operation of the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi is started.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive, for example, a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 180, and independently generates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. I have. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as a “reset signal transmission line”) is used, the reset signal transmission line may be used by routing electric wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes longer, so that noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current driving circuit 283x, the constant current driving circuit 283x may be reset under the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current driving circuit 283x, and the reset unit 283xb of the constant current driving circuit 283x independently generates the reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current driving circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current driving circuit 283x. By using this, external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise. In addition, the need for the input electric wiring and the external transmission electric wiring for the reset signal transmission line is eliminated, which can contribute to downsizing of the connector.

[11-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line that transmits serial data (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter, referred to as a “data line”). Is a circuit capable of shaping the waveform of a signal to which serial data is input and transmitting the serial data, and outputting the waveform to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd transmits a clock signal (here, a clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter, referred to as a "clock line"). Is a circuit that can receive a clock signal, shape the waveform of the clock signal, and output it to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of both the data line and the clock line are increased, so that noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current driving circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current driving circuit 283x is provided. In such a way that the waveform is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. As a result, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise.

[11-2-1d. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa by using three ID resistors (not shown). You can do it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283xe by a hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not set appropriately by receiving data by software.

[11-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg outputs serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. The shaped clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address which is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. In some cases, the gradation information is fetched from the serial data, and the gradation of the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on a signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the fetched gradation information is obtained. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in the serial data is not taken in and set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control is performed to maintain the current content.

[11-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from off to lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 levels from 0 (zero) to 127. The gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation controller (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh individually includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation is set, each of the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 controls the constant current driving unit 283xi so that a current having the set gradation is passed.

[11-2-1 g. Constant current driver]
The constant current drive unit 283 xi is provided with one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation is set to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the PWM unit 283 xh. The current driver allows a constant current to flow through the LED elements constituting the full-color LED. That is, the constant current driver 283xi includes the constant current drivers 1 to 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 include one end of a resistor Rr for setting a maximum current flowing through a red (R) light emitting LED element constituting a full-color LED in eight output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 include one end of a resistor Rg for setting a maximum current flowing through a green (G) light-emitting LED element forming a full-color LED in eight output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 have one end of a resistor Rb for setting a maximum current flowing through a blue (B) light emitting LED element forming a full color LED in eight output channels LB1 to LB8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element which constitute full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line, and receives a direct current of + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 1 to a constant current driver 8) so that a constant current flowing through a red (R) LED element constituting a full-color LED can be drawn into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side, respectively. Has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16), so that a constant current flowing through the green (G) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), so that a constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively draw constant currents flowing through the individually set red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED, thereby forming the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively absorb the constant current flowing through the individually set green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED, thereby forming the green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively absorb the constant current flowing through the individually set blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED, and thereby the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED Can emit light.

  As described above, the LED constant current driving circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. Thus, it is possible to perform turning off, lighting with one gradation, blinking with one gradation, and the like.

[11-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the resistor Rr for setting the maximum current flowing through the red (R) light-emitting LED element constituting the full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8 and the output channels LG1 to LR8. A resistor Rg for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green (G) light, which constitutes a full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8, and a full-color LED in eight output channels, LB1 to LB8. And a resistor Rb for setting a maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  One end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). I have. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). I have. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). I have.

[11-3. Decoration board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate including an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-described LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. For this reason, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS.

[11-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, a lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a heat sink. A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. Light emission data SDAT1, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, and a clock signal SCLK1 are input. As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 to input DC +12 V, and also to connect the ground ( (GND) line and electrically grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the dish bottom lower decorative board 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the dish unit 200 from the door frame sub relay board 105. It is input via the plate unit relay board 214. The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and constitutes sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, an anode terminal of a red (R) LED element, an anode terminal of a green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. Drivers 1 to 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. Driver 9 to constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts the light emission data SDAT1. The gradation information is fetched, and the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c. Thus, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  Note that the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x). While being input to the substrate 273, DC + 12 V and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decorative plate 273 via the lower left decorative substrate 283. This prevents noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x) from being transmitted to the upper left dish plate 273 that is the subsequent substrate. The waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd included in the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x).

  The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes a full color LED, suLED1 to suLED6, an anode terminal of a red (R) LED element, an anode terminal of a green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. Driver 1 to constant current driver 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. Driver 9 to constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-described constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts the light emission data SDAT1. The gradation information is fetched, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6 that constitute the heat dispersion circuit 273c. Thus, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

  In addition, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the dish left lower decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish lower right decorative board 288, a dish upper right decorative board 278, and a door frame top left decorative board 456 , And a door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[11-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the lower left lower decorative board 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, hdLED1 which is 10 full-color LEDs. To hdLED 10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

  As described above, the door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. Light emission data SDAT2 and a clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 to input DC +12 V, and also to connect the ground ( (GND) line and electrically grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay board 105. I have. The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and constitutes the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element. , And blue (B) LED elements.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba to emit light, and the remaining two LEDs are used. The light emission mode of the hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, which is a succeeding substrate across the substrate on which the LED itself is mounted (that is, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

  Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are the same as the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, respectively. The heat-dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (the above-described constant current drivers 1 to 8) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the above-described constant current drivers 9 to 16) via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. It is electrically connected to the above-described constant current drivers 17 to 24).

  Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are the same as the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, respectively. The heat dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above). The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 1) via heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ), And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. LB1 and LB2 (the constant current driver 17 and the constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

  Also, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 ( The cathode terminal of the R) LED element is connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRr1a to huRr5a on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the above-described constant current drivers 3 to 7) and constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are respectively Decoration on left side The output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current drivers 11 to LG7) via the heat dispersion resistors huRg1b to huRg5b on the plate 402a and the heat dispersion resistors huRg1a to huRg5a on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements electrically connected to the driver 15) and constituting the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the heat dispersion resistors huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left, respectively. It is electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the constant current drivers 19 to 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a in the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. Note that the output channels LR8, LG8, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  When the ID information of the emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (the emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts the emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is fetched, and among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402ba constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and the gradation information is set so as to be the fetched gradation information. Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting, and the left side, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. Upper decorative substrate 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. I do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. As a result, heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, it draws a constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and Heat is generated by drawing in a constant current flowing through the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the lower side decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The five heat dispersion resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a which is a substrate subsequent to the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b For the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRg5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc in the lower left decorative board 402b, and the upper left side The heat dissipating resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dissipating circuit 402ac in the decorative board 402a, serve as the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current driving circuit 402bbx). The heat can be dissipated.

  Further, as described above, the heat dissipating circuit 402bc of the lower left decorative board 402b and the heat dissipating circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a are, as described above, an LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, a constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the device, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  Note that, in addition to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower decorative substrate 316, a side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, and a right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition, as a decorative substrate having no LED constant current driving circuit, there is a right side upper decorative substrate 418a in addition to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a.

[11-4. Arrangement Method of LED Constant Current Drive Circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, a description will be given as an electronic component in which the constant current driving circuit configuring the LED constant current driving circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). ), So-called VQFN. Of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is an input side, and the remaining three end sides are output sides 1 to 3, respectively. In FIG. 203, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for clarity of the drawing.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in a vertically elongated strip-shaped plate having two LED constant current drive circuits is provided. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[11-4-1. Decorative board under the left side]
As shown in FIG. 202A, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are Are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the upper left side decorative board 402a to the electric wiring is mounted on the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, and the LED on the left side lower decorative board 402b is not mounted. A connector LDLCN for connecting the electric wiring to the door frame sub-relay board 105 is mounted on the lower side of the surface 402by.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectivity of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Can be enhanced.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. In addition, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a white resist character on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b due to the emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is reduced by the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. Is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on the LED mounting surface 402bx from being lowered due to the emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  The door frame left side decorative body 404 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a translucent milky white as described above, but is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player moves his / her head (face), his / her line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404. Even if it is possible to do so, in the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged. Since the area indicating the position is not printed at all as silk printing, the player has no relation to the game at all with full color LE. Corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player and. Therefore, a number specifying the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10) and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a full color LED) An area indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged) can be made difficult for the player to see.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the component number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN has a white color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a character (that is, copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). The characters are formed as a pattern, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a blank character). The white character is solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the foil-cut character is formed. Covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. It should be noted that the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is obtained by replacing the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with foil-cut characters (that is, the wiring pattern). May be formed in a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form a character. On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a character with a foil pattern (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern of copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)). Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by extracting a copper foil. The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is determined based on a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed). Instead of a solid character formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and a solid earth on the LED non-mounting surface 402by, the character is formed as a non-character on one or both surfaces. May be.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, various dispersions Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are arranged are printed by silk printing as solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed near these areas as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is to be arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 203A) as a silk print, and the lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 203 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b near and above the area LSLKa. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 203A). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and near the regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 203 (a)) corresponding to and are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. I have.

  On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is a yellow dashed line as silk print. (Or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 203 (a), only the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5, and only the corresponding dashed lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 are shown), and these areas are also printed. Part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 near and above or below LSLK1 to LSLK10 (FIG. 203 (a) shows LED4, LED corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED4, hdLED5 Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged is indicated by a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (Or black dashed line), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing near this area.

  In addition, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  Further, lighting inspections of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, are individually performed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, (One LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green light (G), and an LED element that emits blue light (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk print near the plurality of check pins. Printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface was reduced, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. However, of the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating a position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line) (not shown). The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid ground, which grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of electronic components and connectors to ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). I have.

  As described above, since the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, as viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b The width from the left end 402beg1 to the right end 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width from the left end to the right end of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. For this reason, if the ends of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the lands of the constant current driving circuits 402bax, 402bbx Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, it is necessary to draw a wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension between adjacent wiring patterns are limited, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative board 402b. The configuration was adopted.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is input. By arranging it near the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b so as to be the terminal on the left side, the input side terminal is connected to the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and resistors Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left side, the upper left side, and the upper right side are mainly terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 201, and output terminals LR1 to LR8 and LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which the ground (GND) is input. I have.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being arranged in a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, from the respective lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension are restricted to the interval between adjacent wiring patterns. Also, all the wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 among eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hdLED5 and the hdLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, its length is reduced. Can be formed uniformly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing of the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened unbalanced to either the group 1 or the group 2. Efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in a work can be improved.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be provided in the vertical center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in FIG. In addition, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be disposed on the lower non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in the vertical center portion (FIG. 202 (a)). (The portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed) is closer to the upper side, and can be disposed above the hdLED 8 which is a full-color LED configured in the group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . Thus, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 can be secured on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx The area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the five upper left-side decorative substrates 402a shown in FIG. 402b.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (2012 by name, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). : 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one ends in the longitudinal direction on the left side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and one end in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, as described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is such that the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 degrees with respect to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative board. The door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453, which are arranged in an inclined state and are almost the same, are doors. Unlike the other decorative substrates of the frame 3, when the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, Since the width from the upper edge to the lower edge is large, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is divided into the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top center decorative board 455 includes, in addition to the eleven full color LEDs provided therein, another center decorated board on which five full color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. Two LED constant current drive circuits (a first LED constant current drive circuit (a first constant current drive circuit, a first maximum current setting circuit), a second LED constant current drive circuit (a second constant current drive circuit, Illustrated by one LED constant current driving circuit (here, a second LED constant current driving circuit (second constant current driving circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Two self-distribution circuits provided therein (a first constant-current drive circuit is a first heat-distribution circuit (heat-distribution resistance), and a second constant-current drive circuit is a second heat distribution circuit (heat-distribution resistance)) Light emission control directly through the door frame top The left decorative substrate 456 includes, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, another left decorative substrate on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted, and one LED constant current drive circuit (constant) provided therein. The light emission is directly controlled by a current driver circuit, a maximum current setting circuit) through one heat dispersing circuit (heat dispersing resistor) provided therein, not shown, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 includes six full color LEDs provided therein. In addition, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is connected to oneself (not shown) by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided for itself. Light emission is controlled directly via one provided heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance). The other central decorative board is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is formed on the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative board is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat spreading circuit (heat spreading resistor) on each of the other central decorative boards, other left decorative boards, and other right decorative boards. As described above, the heat dispersing circuit (here, the second heat dispersing circuit (heat dissipating resistance)) provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455 itself and the heat dispersing circuits of the other central decorative boards are different from each other. In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided in the center decorative substrate 455 itself, it also prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has the ability to do it. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit provided on the other left decorative board itself are the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself). Has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit) and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit provided on the other right decorative substrate 457 are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 itself). Has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit) and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and ten full-color LEDs are provided. When viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are closer to the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. When the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, they are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. L of lower left decorative substrate 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (sink) type, and generate heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, also in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are separated from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 by separating them. Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less likely to be affected by the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  In addition, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged such that the edges of the land patterns are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, so that the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined. One in which the end sides of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in parallel with the left end side and the right end side of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) Compared with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate is used. Can be further reduced in width from the left end side to the right end side. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[11-4-2. Decorative board on plate center]
As shown in FIG. 202 (b), the dish center decoration board 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, which is the upward side of the rendering operation unit 300, whereas the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is on the upper side of the effect operation unit 300. In addition, when the decoration plate 314 above the plate center shown in FIG. 202 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees (that is, the decoration substrate 314 above the plate center is actually arranged along the decoration body 312a above the plate center). On the right side along the upper end side 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and electric wiring is mounted.

  A white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314. In the present embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is solid-coated with a white resist, so that the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, emit light forward (i.e., toward the upward side of the rendering operation unit 300). Can be increased in reflectance.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are the full-color LEDs, are arranged, are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 due to the emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reduced by the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. Is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from being lowered due to the emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  Further, as described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a translucent milky white as described above, but is located in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player sitting on the head moves his / her head (face), his / her line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even if the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 initially has a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. And hLED1 to hLED10 indicating the position where the hLEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, so that the player has no relation to the game at all. It has not full LED with the corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED is prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, a number (that is, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED) that specifies hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED and an auxiliary line that indicates a mounting position of hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED (that is, a full color LED) (A region indicating a position where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged) can be made difficult for the player to see.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing a part number corresponding to the connector HCN that has no relation to the game and a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a resin of white (color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing of white (also called natural color, white). Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  Also, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is a foil-cut character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. It is formed as a character formed by patterning and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the foil-cut character is formed by a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration board 314 on the center of the plate. Covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is obtained by replacing the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with foil-cut characters (that is, the wiring pattern). May be formed on a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form a character. On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314 on the center of the plate, a character with a foil pattern (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern of copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by extracting a copper foil. The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is determined by using a foil-cut character (that is, forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of a solid character formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and a solid earth on the LED non-mounting surface 314y, the character is formed as a character with a character cut out on one or both surfaces. It may be.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersions Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) with a solid yellow line (or black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the electronic component is printed near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

  On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, is not shown as a silk-screen yellow. (Or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 are yellow (or not shown) as silk printing. , Black).

  Note that, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is arranged is shown by a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (Or a black dashed line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing near this area.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of full-color LEDs is reduced.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, (One LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green light (G), and an LED element that emits blue light (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk print near the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314 and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). I have.

  In the present embodiment, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED decreases. Electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, emit light of the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectivity of the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating a position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line) (not shown). The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  Since the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape as described above, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. When viewed (that is, the state in which the decorative plate 314 on the center of the plate is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate), the upper edge 314eg1 to the lower edge 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Is only about 1.78 times the width from the left end to the right end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. For this reason, if the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is extremely short, let's draw the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension between adjacent wiring patterns are limited, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end 314eg1 and the lower end 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The configuration was adopted.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 above the plate center, the lower left end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input. By arranging it near the upper end side 314eg1 of the upper plate 314 on the plate center so as to be the terminal on the side, the input side terminal is connected to the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end, the upper right end, and the lower right end are mainly the terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 3, the output side 1 to the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which ground (GND) is input. I have.

  Also, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. In addition to being arranged in a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decoration substrate 314 above the dish center. As a result, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension from the respective lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are limited. Also, all the wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular shape.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 among eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 including the hLED5 to the hLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, its length is reduced. Can be formed uniformly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing of the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened unbalanced to either the group 1 or the group 2. Efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in a work can be improved.

  Also, by employing such an arrangement, when the decorative plate 314 above the plate center shown in FIG. 202B is rotated to the left by 90 degrees (that is, the decorative substrate 314 above the plate center is In a state where the LED is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a), the constant current drive circuit 314ax is connected to the semi-circular center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (the full-color LED in FIG. 202B). The hLED 6 can be disposed closer to the right side than the hLED 6 is disposed, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx is provided at the semi-circular center portion (FIG. 202 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. ) Is closer to the left side than the portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed, and the light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thereby, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative board 314, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx An area for routing wiring patterns to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (2012 by name, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). : 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb have one end in the longitudinal direction at the upper end of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2, and one end in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to the upper side 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 so that they are not parallel to each other.

  In addition, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end 314eg1 and the lower end 314eg2 of the plate 314. When viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, hLED1 to hLED10 are closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 and have a semicircular shape of the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In contrast, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are located closer to the upper edge 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which the plate is arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink (sink) type, as described above, as in the case of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left decorative board 402b. Fever. For this reason, even in the upper center decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are separated from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 by separating them. Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less affected by the hLED1 to hLED10, which are the ten full-color LEDs.

  In addition, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged such that the edges of the land patterns are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper plate 314. One in which the ends of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be parallel to the left end and the right end of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate is used. Can be further reduced in width from the left end side to the right end side. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300. Therefore, the large effect operation unit 300 can be provided on the door frame 3 and the effect operation unit can be provided. A luminous effect can be performed by 300.

[11-4-3. Generic pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the IC packages of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left decorative board 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  A metal pad FP is exposed at the center of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. This IC package is configured to be able to improve heat dissipation and bonding by being soldered to a substrate.

  The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with an EPad land pattern EP having a square shape in addition to each lead pad. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid ground on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation lattice. With these thermal vias TV, the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected. For this reason, it is impossible to draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad into the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transmitted from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, it is possible to dissipate heat throughout the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction region where the constant current drive circuit EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP has a constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. Thereby, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current driving circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered is not too large to prevent the occurrence of voids, and the junction area is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain an improved bonding strength. The land pattern EP for EPad may be formed by dividing it into a lattice shape. However, in this case as well, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current driving circuit (The metal pad FP) must be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Also, in contrast to the case where the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx In the case where the edge of the land pattern is arranged at 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax against heat is high. Become. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is similarly set to the left side. In the case where the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and to be inclined by 45 degrees. , EPad land patterns EP are also arranged in a state inclined at 45 degrees. When the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b The distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 or the right end side 402beg2 and the distance dimension to the substrate end side is shortened, in other words, the room for heat radiation on the substrate is reduced. . On the other hand, the left side edge 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative board 402b when the end side of the land pattern EP for EPad is arranged at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the left side edge 402beg1 and the right side edge 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Alternatively, the distance between the right end side 402beg2 and the vertex of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate are shorter, but the two sides in contact with the vertex are non-parallel to the edge of the substrate. Since the room for heat dissipation on the substrate is large, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate are parallel.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and has one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided with two LED constant current driving circuits and formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, and a semicircle The upper plate center decoration plate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape will be described, and a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged will be described. A part number corresponding to a full-color LED that can prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing and has no relation to the game for the player at all. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, another configuration of the present invention in which a measure such as a decrease in reflectance is taken (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of a measure such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the second to fourth embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 shows a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, FIG. 205 shows a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 207 is an enlarged view of a portion D ″ in FIG. 205 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. FIG. 207 is a configuration of a measure for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a portion where no LED is mounted. In FIGS. 204 to 208, those having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 202 and 203 (hereinafter, described as a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment) will be described. Are denoted by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 206, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for clarity of the drawing. Further, in FIG. 208, various electronic components are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to second embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The region indicating the positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, as described above. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And an area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper decorative board 314, as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204A, the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. , The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED10, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk-screen printing, respectively. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with silk solid printing with solid yellow lines LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are yellow on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b as silk print. Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), and a region corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. Are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN has a white color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed in yellow near the plurality of check pins as silk print. It is printed in. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistances are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 206A) as a silk print, and the lower left lower decorative substrate. In addition to being printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, IC1 (see FIG. 206 (a)), which is the part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed in the vicinity of the area LSLKa and above. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed as a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 206A). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 206 (a)) corresponding to and are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. I have.

  In addition, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, a white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Accordingly, the reflectance of the LED mounted surface 402bx of the lower left side lower decorative substrate 402b solidly applied to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist. You can do it.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 includes hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. Corresponding part numbers and areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 as silk printing, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration board 314 on the center of the plate in yellow in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. Have been.

  A region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed as a silk print on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with a solid yellow line (not shown), and the region corresponding to the connector HCN is located near this region. Are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a resin of white (color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing of white (also called natural color, white). Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed in yellow near the plurality of check pins as silk print. It is printed in. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like are provided. Areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of full-color LEDs is reduced.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are solid-coated with a white resist. As a result, the solid color white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 above the plate center has components corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. While the numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment has the left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decorative substrate 402b has a -The part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, and the area (solid yellow line) indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed as silk printing, respectively. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are provided. An area (a yellow solid line) indicating an arrangement position is different from that in that the area is printed as silk printing.

  The white resist solid-filled on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b can increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. Further, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate allows the reflectance of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be emitted forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk print, the silk-printed black print is used, The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided in various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there is a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the measures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed. An auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be disposed) is printed on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface by printing in a light yellow color different from black. ) Or a number specifying a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) can be made difficult.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed, which is different from black and light yellow. By performing the printing, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment can also provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment. In other words, the number specifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) are made difficult for the player to see. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED from decreasing.

  Note that, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is silk-printed, and is different from black and light-colored). (When printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color have a low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED. However, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface was reduced. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is provided near this area. Are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The region indicating the positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, as described above. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And an area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper decorative board 314, as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. -HdLED10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil ( In FIG. 205 (c), only the foil-colored character LED7 is shown as a part number corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED.)), And an area indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is shown. A foil-cut area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed In the (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, only the foil-leaved region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED in the region formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 205 (c)). )), And the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are respectively covered with a white resist that is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b as left characters. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively covered with a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position at which the connector LDLCN is arranged has a foil-cut region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown near this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN has a white color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins. In other words, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is a copper foil. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistances are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 206A) as a silk print, and the lower left lower decorative substrate. In addition to being printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, IC1 (see FIG. 206 (a)), which is the part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed in the vicinity of the area LSLKa and above. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed as a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 206A). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 206 (a)) corresponding to and are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. I have.

  In addition, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, a white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Accordingly, the reflectance of the LED mounted surface 402bx of the lower left side lower decorative substrate 402b solidly applied to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist. You can do it.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205 (b), hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil-cut character (that is, a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, a region indicating a position at which hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is a terminal area (not shown) and a foil-cut region excluding a wiring pattern (not shown). And the wiring pattern, excluding the copper foil). WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, regions indicating positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 as foil removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 as blank characters. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are respectively covered with a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil-cut region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown near this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a resin of white (color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing of white (also called natural color, white). Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components (not shown) such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins in a foil-cut character (not shown). In other words, characters are formed on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like are provided. Areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the third embodiment, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of full-color LEDs is reduced.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are solid-coated with white resist. As a result, the solid color white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish substrate 314 above the plate center has components corresponding to the hLED1 to the hLED10 which are the full color LEDs. While the numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment has the left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decorative substrate 402b has a -The part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, are foil-cut letters (that is, letters are formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. In addition, a region where the positions of the hdLED1 to the hdLED10, which are the full-color LEDs, are indicated as a blank character excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) excluding a wiring pattern (not shown). (Copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, a region formed by removing the copper foil), and is a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The foil area and the foil letters are covered by On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is a character without foil (that is, a character with a copper foil wiring pattern in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). And a region where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be disposed, is a foil removal region excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). (That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, except for each terminal and the wiring pattern, it is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil). The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively formed by a white resist solid-coated on the surface 314x. They differ in that they are covered.

  The white resist solid-filled on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b can increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. Further, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate allows the reflectance of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be emitted forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk print, the silk-printed black print is used, The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided in various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there is a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the measure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player and a corresponding part number is formed as a foil-cut character, and the game is completely for the player. By forming an area indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relationship is arranged as a foil-cut area, and covering the foil-cut character and the foil-cut area with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface, respectively, An LED wiring pattern, a foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED), Is made of copper foil to make the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By being covered with the dist, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is found, or a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) ) Can be difficult to find.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game for the player and a corresponding part number is formed as a foil-off character, and the game is completely for the player. By forming an area indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relationship is arranged as a foil-cut area, and covering the foil-cut character and the foil-cut area with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface, respectively, It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the emission of the LED.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment can provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number specifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted, so that the substrate cost can be reduced by reducing the printing cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing steps of the substrate. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). Alternatively, a polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors not having a white color and the connector which does not have a white color, whose reflectance is reduced on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, emit light of the full-color LED. However, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface was reduced. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating a position where electronic components and connectors are to be disposed is a foil-cut region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer on which a wiring pattern is formed (copper plane). ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a copper foil-extracted area), and near this area, a part number corresponding to an electronic component or connector is indicated by a foil-cut character (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, a character is formed from a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the character is formed as a cut character formed by removing the surrounding copper foil.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to fourth embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The region indicating the positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, as described above. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And an area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper decorative board 314, as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG.レ ジ ス ト hLED10, the part number corresponding to hdLED7 is a white resist removal character using a double-coated white resist (FIG. 207 (c) shows only the white resist removal character as the part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. ), And a region indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged is a white resist-removed region using a twice-coated white resist (FIG. 207 (c) shows a full-color LED hdLED7). And only the white resist removal region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to. It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-coat white resists, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed of a white resist. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with white resist (that is, as the first of the twice-coated white resists). The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is the second time) of the white resist applied twice. As shown in FIG. 207 (c), in the white resist removal area LSLK7, the fifth pin arrangement of the full color LED hdLED7 is included as the area corresponding to the full color LED hdLED7. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the indicated notch mark.) Is masked as white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and is near the white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and leftward. Or hdLED1 to hd, which are full color LEDs above In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. Thus, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist is formed. The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a concave portion, and the areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. Because of the adoption, shading occurs between the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist, and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the second layer white resist. Looking at the underlayer (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the first layer of white resist looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, characters without white resist in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. The numbers are formed as white resist-cut characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. Shading occurs between the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer. When the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer is formed. The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. Thus, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, a white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. Has become.

  Further, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-exposed character and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer white resist and the second resist are formed. The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the entirety of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN has a white color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b at all. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins, and a white resist removal character (not shown) It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, as shown in FIG. An area indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are to be arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, in the vicinity of these regions, the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the twice-coated white resists, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. The resist is covered with the resist (that is, the white resist is solid-painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the twice-coated white resists). The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is to be disposed (the predetermined pin number arrangement) In the white resist removal area LSLKa as an area corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 208, the first pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax are provided. A cutout portion is formed at a position corresponding to the cutout mark indicating the arrangement.) Is masked as white resist cutout region LSLKa, and a constant current is provided in the vicinity of these white resist cutout regions LSLKa and upward. IC1 (see FIG. 208A), which is the part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax, is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. Thus, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The entire area is covered with the white resist and the entire area is covered except for the area masked with the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. In addition, a white resist removal area LSLKa is formed as an area to be performed, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a white resist (not shown) in which the area indicating the position where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. In the vicinity of this area, parts numbers corresponding to the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b and the corresponding part numbers (not shown) are white resist removal characters R1, R2. R3 is formed, and a part number corresponding to electronic parts such as various resistances and capacitors (not shown) and capacitors not shown is formed as white unregistered characters (not shown). On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. It is formed as a white resist cut character (not shown).

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. , The shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the 402-by underlayer (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the first layer of the white resist looks pale. Accordingly, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the characters without white resist formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. And a white resist removal area can be identified.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist are used. The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  In addition, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are solid-coated with white resist. Accordingly, the reflectance of the LED mounted surface 402bx of the lower left side lower decorative substrate 402b solidly applied to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist. You can do it.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist, and a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the double-coated white resist. It is formed as a white resist removal area. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is the first of two coats of white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is made of white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish as the first of the twice-coated white resists). The LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is the second time) of the twice-coated white resist. For example, in the white resist removal region HSLK7 as a region corresponding to the hLED7 that is a full-color LED, a notch mark that indicates the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 that is a full-color LED is included. Notches are formed at corresponding positions.) Are masked as white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED near these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right. LED which is a part number corresponding to hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. As a result, although a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the entire surface is covered with the first-layer white resist and the second-layer white resist is formed. The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Besides, the LED1 to LED10, which are the part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Because of the adoption, shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer, the white resist of the first layer looks faint. That is, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the characters without white resist in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is provided near this region. The number is formed as a white resist-cut character (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. Shading occurs between the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer. When the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer is formed. The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. Accordingly, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, a white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. Has become.

  Further, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist and the second resist are formed. The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. Thereby, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a resin of white (color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing of white (also called natural color, white). Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components (not shown) such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements emitting red (R), the LED emitting green (G), and the LED emitting blue (B), which constitutes one full-color LED) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is located near the plurality of check pins, and a white resist removal character (not shown) It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersion resistors not shown. Similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the area indicating the position where the electronic components are arranged is formed as a white resist removal area using a twice-coated white resist. In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist, similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate are the same. , The shading occurs in the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist, and the LED non-mounting surface of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is passed through the second layer white resist. Looking at the underlayer 314y, the white resist of the first layer looks faint. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the characters without white resist formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. And a white resist removal region can be identified.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are used. The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin. As described above, the electronic components such as the resistor and the capacitor having no white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are solid-coated with white resist. As a result, the solid color white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 above the plate center has components corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. While the numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment has the left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decorative substrate 402b has a -The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, are formed as white resist-exposed characters using a twice-coated white resist, and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is twice. It is formed as a white resist removal area using a painted white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is coated twice with the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. And a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged is formed as a white resist-exposed region using a twice-coated white resist. Are different in that .

  The white resist solid-filled on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b can increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. Further, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate allows the reflectance of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be emitted forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk print, the silk-printed black print is used, The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided in various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there is a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist in which a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all and a corresponding part number is applied twice. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player at all is formed as a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist, a mounting position of the full-color LED is formed. It is difficult to find a white resist removal area indicating the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) or find a number specifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED). Can be.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist in which a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all and a corresponding part number is applied twice. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relation to the game is arranged for the player as a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist, the light emission of the full-color LED It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, a number specifying a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) or a white resist-extracted area using a twice-coated white resist indicating a mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged) ) Can be made difficult for a player to visually recognize, and the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED can be prevented from lowering.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the steps of silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface can be omitted. The reduction in the number of steps can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  In the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color have a low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, or connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, a region indicating a position where electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface and a connector are arranged is formed as each terminal (not shown) and a white resist removal region (not shown). Then, a component number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface and a connector is formed as a white resist-extracted character (not shown).

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, but the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist. The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where a full-color LED or connector is arranged is formed as a white resist-exposed area. Although the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LED and the connector are formed as white resist-exposed characters, other methods may be used to form white resist-extracted regions and white resist-extracted characters. . For example, after the white resist is solid-coated one or more times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, before the white resist is dried, a region indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is arranged. A method of forming as a white resist removing area by pressing a plate, and forming a white resist removing character by pressing a plate indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector, an LED mounting surface of a decorative board and After the white resist is solid-coated only once or a plurality of times on the LED non-mounting surface, the white resist is dried, and then, by laser irradiation, an area indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is arranged is defined as a white resist removal area. Form the part number corresponding to the full color LED and connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there have been proposed gaming machines provided with various substrates that can be supplied with power from a power supply substrate and control illumination (for example, JP-A-2006-1921989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in a gaming machine, a line for transmitting power and a line for transmitting a control signal to various boards are routed, and the length of the lines may cause the various boards to be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine having a front frame configured to cover a window which is opened frontward and rearward with a see-through protective plate on a game board (for example, JP-A-2006-1921989 (paragraph [0014]). , And FIG. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, and the decorative board accommodated in the left and right sides also has a strip shape. In addition, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board is increased, so that the decorative board provided on the game board also has a strip shape. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emission means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory device that is arranged in a standby state in front of and below a display screen of an effect display device and that operates during an effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058064). Gazette (Paragraph [0040], FIGS. 4, 8, and 9). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting unit facing the back surface of the light emitting unit (lens) on the design surface is mounted. However, there is a possibility that the player may visually recognize the number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board, which has no relation to the game, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, or the like through the light emitting unit.

  In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting unit is mounted is attached (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). A variety of effects using the light emitting effect by such light emitting means are provided to the player. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative board, the reflectivity is reduced due to the number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, and the like. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[12. Decorative boards for game boards]
Next, among the decorative boards provided on the game board 5, a decorative board on which a magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including a magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like.

  First, among the decorative boards provided on the game board 5, as the decorative board on which the magnetic type magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted, as described above, the back upper left movable decorative body in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, as described above. A back left upper front decoration board 3311a on which a magnetic back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decoration section 3312 of 3310 and a back left effect of the back unit 3000 are mounted. A back lower left front pole decorative substrate 3321a on which a magnetic back lower left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab for detecting a standby position (original position) of a rotation position of the front decorative portion 3322 of the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320 in the unit 3300 is mounted; , The rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 The back upper right front decorative board 3411a on which the magnetic back right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab for detecting the standby position (original position) is mounted, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 There is a back lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421a on which a magnetic back lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3422 is mounted.

  In this embodiment, the back left upper front decorative board 3311a, the back left lower front decorative board 3321a, the back upper right front decorative board 3411a, and the back right lower front decorative board 3421a have the same circuit configuration and the LED mounting surface. And the arrangement of the LED non-mounting surface is the same (the type of electronic components and the package are the same), and the countermeasures such as the reduction of the reflectance on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface are also the same. The upper left front decorative substrate 3311a will be described.

  The back left upper first decorative board 3311a receives, via the panel drive board 1720, the light emitting data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1, which are the door frame side serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. ing. Further, the upper left back decorative board 3311a is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 through the panel driving board 1720, and receives a direct current of + 12V, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. ) Is electrically connected to the line and grounded to ground (GND). The upper left back decorative board 3311a may be directly electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189 so that DC + 12V is input. You may comprise so that it may be electrically connected directly with a ground (GND) line and may be grounded to ground (GND).

  The back upper left decorative board 3311a includes a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat distribution circuit 3311ad, and eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8).

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab can detect a change in magnetic pole, and mainly includes a linear power supply 3311aba, a hall element 3311abb, an amplifier circuit 3311abc, a Schmitt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abe, and an FET 3311abf. Configured as open drain output.

  The linear power supply 3311aba is a circuit to which DC + 12V from a + 12V power supply line is input to create and supply an internal power supply to be used in the rear left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab. This internal power is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and can operate. Source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to a ground (GND) line.

  The Hall element 3311abbb is capable of detecting the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311abc. The amplifier circuit 3311abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311abbb and outputs the signal to the Schmitt circuit 3311abd. The Schmitt circuit 3311abd adjusts the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 3311abc and outputs the signal to the gate terminal of the FET 3311abf that is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from its drain terminal according to a signal from the Schmitt circuit 3311abd input to its gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311abbe.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the Hall element 3311abb becomes larger than the operating point (Bop). When the magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged such that the Hall element 3311abb is located in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on a single semiconductor chip. It is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a height of 0.9 mm and a vertical length of 1.6 mm, and is a so-called SOT. Since the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back left upper front decorative board 3311a of the front decorative section 3312 attached to the right side of the base decorative section 3311 shown in FIG. The distance between the magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3311ab (the surface of the IC package) and the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3312, which is the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid-shaped preceding decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the length is about 1.5 mm.).

  In addition, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (the same applies to the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420) is a small movable decorative body. An optical underside rotation detection sensor 3120 or the like for detecting a standby position (original position) between the rear decorative section 3116 and the middle decorative section 3118 of the movable underside decoration 3110 in the underside rendering unit 3100 of the underside unit 3000 shown in the drawing. As described above, a large-sized optical sensor is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the movable decorative body 3312 (also the movable decorative parts 3322, 3412, and 3422). This is structurally difficult.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a small electronic component (back-upper-lower first-stage decorative substrate 3321a, back-upper-right-upper-stage decorative substrate 3411a, and back-right-lower-first-upper decorative substrate 3421a) is also used in the present embodiment. A magnetic sensor) is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the movable decorative part 3312 (also the decorative parts 3322, 3412, 3422). Although the magnetic sensor has a greater variation in detection than the optical sensor described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative portion 3312 (the first decorative portions 3322, 3412, and 3422), which is a movable body, is also the same. )), Even if the standby position (original position) is displaced and displaced, the dislocation is small, and the probability of giving the player a sense of discomfort is low.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (the same applies to the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420.) Since the step decoration part 3312 (first-stage decoration parts 3322, 3412, and 3422) rotates, such a back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right lower part) During the operation of the movable decorative body 3420), the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the lower left lower first decorative board 3321a, the upper right upper decorative board 3411a, and the lower right lower decorative board 3421a). In some cases, light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 may be incident on the LED mounting surface from multiple directions.

  For this reason, the LED mounting surface of the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the back left lower front decorative board 3321a, the back upper right front decorative board 3411a, and the back right lower front decorative board 3421a). When the sensor of the formula is mounted, light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 may be erroneously detected as disturbance light (light pollution).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor described above is employed for such a reason. Therefore, an erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the preceding decorative portion 3312 (the preceding decorative portions 3322, 3412, 3422) due to the light emitted from various light emitting sources (plural light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is provided. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the optical sensors provided in the various effect units described above are configured such that light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or disturbance light). (Light attenuation) so that there is no possibility of erroneous detection due to the light.

  The LED constant current driving circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 200, and supplies a constant current to the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). And a maximum current setting circuit 3311ac capable of setting the maximum current of the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1, control is performed to supply a constant current to the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). As described above, the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is a sink (suction) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current driving circuit 3311ac can be distributed by part of the heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 3311ac by the heat distribution circuit 3311ad. The heat distribution circuit 3311ad is the same circuit as the heat distribution circuit 283c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and includes ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current driving circuits to designate from among the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  As described above, the LED constant current driving circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 200, and thus the detailed description is omitted here.

  In addition, the rear left upper front decorative board 3311a has eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8), a rear left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, and the like on its LED mounting surface. An LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The back upper left first-stage decorative substrate 3311a has the above-described configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the first embodiment, the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the second embodiment, and the reflectivity according to the third embodiment. Either of the configuration of the countermeasure such as reduction and the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine in which the production operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by a production control device (control means) has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [ 0071], FIG. 3, and FIG. 22)). By the way, the game board has an environment that is strongly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise. Due to the structure of the game board, the environment that is affected by the electromagnetic wave noise among the various wirings connected to the effect control device (control means) is present. When electromagnetic noise enters other wirings through the routed wiring, the effect control device (control means) may malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic noise from the other wirings.

  Further, conventionally, a gaming machine having a movable body in a gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0067], FIGS. 18 and 19)). The movable body has a protruding detection piece, and the position of the movable body is specified by detecting the detection piece by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body. By the way, when the movable body is provided with an optical detection switch to detect a specific position of the movable body, the light is emitted by a plurality of light emitters provided on the game board while the movable body is operating. There is a possibility that the light becomes disturbance light and enters the optical detection switch, and the detection switch erroneously detects the light.

[13. Brightness setting of indirect light and direct light]
The light guide plate such as the light guide plate 2601 in the panel plate 1110 in FIG. 143 and the display effect unit 2600 in FIG. 155 has a plurality of LEDs (toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 in FIG. 143) arranged in a line from the end face. 155, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that are illuminated and decorated by irradiating light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in FIG. 155, and light from the right side of the light guide plate 2601. The plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620 that are light-emission-decorated by making light incident thereon. There are times when the LEDs are referred to as “LEDs used as indirect light”.) Is irradiated.

  Various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side such as the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 in FIG. Other LEDs that are not used in the light guide plate, such as various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side, such as the underside production unit 3100, the underside production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3400 provided in the panel 5. (Hereinafter, it may be described as “LED used as direct light”) is irradiated as direct light. Therefore, if the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as the direct light are the same, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. The player wants to adjust the current brightness of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 to be dark when the current brightness is too bright, and to adjust the brightness bright when the current brightness is not too dark.

  Meanwhile, various LEDs are mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits are mounted thereon. As described above, this LED constant current drive circuit controls the brightness (gradation) of the LED from the extinguishing to the lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 steps of gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. Is what you can do.

  As described above, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are data for designating the light emission mode, and include ID information and gradation information. I have. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  Also, as described above, the light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and includes ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current driving circuits to designate from among the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  The gradient specified in the above-described gradation information is used in the effect operation unit monitoring process in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a and the lamp pallet setting process in the received command analysis process. Is set. In this lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on a lamp pallet setting table including a specified brightness value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value. , Respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes a lamp pallet setting process. Then, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during the demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state of the player) or during the progress of the production ( For example, during a predetermined period in a specific effect), the above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated by executing the lamp pallet setting process.

  Here, a brief description will be given of the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value that constitute the lamp pallet setting table. As the specified luminance value, one specified luminance value may be set in a range of 32 steps from a specified 0th (zero) luminance value which is the minimum luminance (unlit) to a specified 31st luminance value which is the maximum luminance. The normal pallet value and the special pallet value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value. The player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to set the 31st luminance which becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance designated value. One specified luminance value can be set up to the specified value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise, and the 0th (zero) luminance designation in which the current luminance temporarily becomes the minimum luminance (extinguished). When the brightness is set to the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is next higher than the value, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear formula) from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value which is the maximum brightness is set. Along with the tone curve or the spline curve-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher, while the rotation operation unit 302 is moved in reverse. When the clockwise rotation operation is performed and the current luminance is set to the maximum luminance, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, from the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance to the first luminance designated value) Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In the present embodiment, a case is provided in advance where a player (or a clerk such as a store clerk in a game hall) can set the luminance during a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) or a production is in progress. At this time, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the demonstration or the effect, the first luminance designated value to the By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the 31 luminance designated value, the desired luminance of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) is visually indicated as an image. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourteenth luminance designated value is set as an initial value (default).

  Normally, the pallet value is a value in which the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side irradiated as direct light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. is there. As the normal palette value, one of 17 levels is selected from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, in steps of 5%. In a range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is a designated value, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is determined by a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is a maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which is the above-mentioned luminance specification value. (100%) is a value of 20%, and the values (%) described in parentheses of the other pallet values are the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. Within the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance specification value, the value is for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance specification.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is previously selected as the normal pallet value for various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated directly as light. Among various decorative boards provided on the game board side which is set as the above-mentioned gradation information and is radiated as direct light, a specific decorative board (LED which is dazzling to the player) which is not shown is a pallet. The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

  In the special pallet value, the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. The special pallet value, unlike the normal pallet value, exists in only one step and is one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (0th) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special pallet value instead of the normal pallet value set for the luminance of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light by setting the first luminance designated value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value that is the minimum luminance (extinguished). The lowest possible luminance is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and ranges from the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. Among them, the pallet value corresponding to one specified luminance value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, based on the lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are determined. And the luminance of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the luminance of the LED used as the direct light. While being set along the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) controls the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light. The value is set according to the special pallet value corresponding to the specified luminance value by the operation of step 303. Accordingly, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling and reduces the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the LED is used as the direct light. The luminance of the LED used is set to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance specification value at which the minimum luminance (extinguishes)) and the luminance is increased. Therefore, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance specification value that is the minimum luminance (extinguished)). Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emitting mode individually adjusts the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side is set. , The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more effective rendering effect), and other pallet values are set. By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emitting mode can be changed very easily. In other words, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303) to change the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance. Even if one brightness specification value up to the brightness specification value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness specification value is set for a specific decorative board. Since one luminance designation value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set for the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark) is set. ) Can be very easily adjusted without breaking the relationship.

  Further, although the brightness of the indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust than the direct light, the special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) is used for the LED used as the indirect light. Can set the luminance. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually controlled by the pallet value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a directing member provided on a game board is provided with a light emitting means so that light emitting decoration can be performed using light of the light emitting means as direct light (for example, JP-A-2006-154676). (Paragraph [0021], FIGS. 2 and 5). However, when the light of the light emitting means provided on the production member is used as indirect light, it is darker than when the light of the light emitting means provided on the production member is used as direct light. There is a problem that it is difficult to adjust the brightness between the device and the light emitting device used as direct light.

[14. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the balls are rotated in the clockwise direction, the more powerfully they can be hit. That is, the game ball B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nail N. Thus, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B, so that the movements can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side in front view of the outermost surface of the center role 2500 from the highest portion, the game ball B abuts on the plurality of obstacle nails N, It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp exit 2502.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located right above the first start port 2002, and is accepted with high probability in the first start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the side slope 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like is accepted. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed). , Enters the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 of the center role 2500, and passes through the gate portion 2003 arranged in this space with a certain probability. The game ball B flowing in the space where the gate portion 2003 is arranged is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 to an upper portion of the attacker unit 2400.

  Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, a general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

  By the way, when the right-playing game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the normal lottery result obtained is “normal hit”. The closed second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. . Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0). .01 to 60 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time elapses.

  Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of reserves of the ordinary lottery result is limited to four, and if it is more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “per probability change (probability change)” and “period of time reduction (time reduction)” is performed. In addition, the special lottery result obtained by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 includes “losing”. , "4R jackpot", "16R jackpot", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", "probability change time reduction", and the like.

  The special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are used as the special lottery results for generating the advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is opened so that the game ball B can be received, or a predetermined winning When any one of the conditions of accepting the number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls B in a non-acceptable closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) Repeat a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, four rounds for "4R big hit" and 16 rounds for "16R big hit" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed ("Time savings").

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, it is possible for the special winning opening 2005 to generate ST (special time) as an advantageous game state after enabling the game ball B to be received in a predetermined pattern. The ST is to maintain the state of the probability change and the time saving during the predetermined number of changes.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the reception of the special lottery result indicated by the acceptance of the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The upper limit of the number of the reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510 based on a control signal from the main control substrate 1310. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns is displayed in a state where three pattern rows are arranged in the left-right direction, and each pattern row is changed, and the pattern row that is variably displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the image sequence fluctuates and the final image is displayed). (The time until it is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520 are set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, an effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected. A player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, inhibit the rotation operation, and operate the operation button elevating drive motor. With 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and the lower and lower production unit 3100 of the display unit 2600 and the back unit 3000, It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using the directing unit 3200, the back left directing unit 3300, the back right directing unit 3400, and the like. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when a player makes a mistake in an operation to be performed or does not perform the operation, a correct operation is performed. To the player. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration is caused by the vibration speaker 354. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the display effect unit of the table unit 2000 in the gaming board 5 in accordance with the special lottery result selected by lottery. 2600, back-side production unit 3100, back-up production unit 3200, back-left production unit 3300, back-right production unit 3400 of back unit 3000, etc., can be used to perform luminous production, movable production, display production, and the like. It is possible, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[15. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 185 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 210. FIG. 212 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and then, the operation of an initial value updating type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[15-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Reach judgment random number to be used for determination, and a variable display pattern for use in determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number, a jackpot symbol random number for use in determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 when generating the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot Big hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of symbol random number, function display unit when generating small hit game state 400 small hit symbol random numbers for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of 400, for use in determining the initial value of this random number for the small hit symbol A random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open or close a movable piece capable of accepting a game ball in the second starting port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination The random number for determining the initial value of the symbol hit determination for use in determining the initial value of the random number for use and the normal value for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number for a symbol variation display pattern and the like are prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The other values within the predetermined numerical range are successively extracted, and after all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control is performed. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. Is set as

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for the symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control-side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. The counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various types of information stored in the main controller and calculating the sum thereof is the checksum value stored in the main control-side power-off processing (when the power is turned off) When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, for example, when it does not match the (sum value), the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination is usually read from the built-in nonvolatile RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. The same fixed value is always taken out of the fixed numerical value range of the counter which takes out the ID code and updates the random number for symbol hit determination based on the taken out ID code. Perform initial value derivation to output a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated as the random number for determining the initial value for symbol hit determination. As described above, the value set in the random number for the initial value determination for the symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is provided by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code is not rewritten when an external device is used to store the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the second security measure prevents the analysis from being performed by taking two-stage security measures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for a normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who intends to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassemble the game board 5, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the counter value obtained by illegally acquiring and updating the normal symbol hit judgment random number and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is assigned, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5 ′, that is, in another pachinko machine 1 ′, so that it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each obtained predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to open the game ball to the second starting port 2004. Can not generate a gaming state in which the game can be accepted.

[15-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a has a circuit configuration such that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. For example, it indicates an address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control-side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as a “Dock”) built in the main control MPU 1310a for setting an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. WDT control register ”).), Sets the timer setting value, starts the main control built-in WDT, and starts the time measurement until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and a watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a) (until the measured time reaches the time set by the timer set value). If the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register” below, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time starts, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of electric power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM clear switch 1310f is determined to be operated.

  When determining in step S16 that the main control MPU 1310a has operated the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, in the determination of step S16, when determining that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state where a RAM clearing process for initializing a RAM (that is, a main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is used as the game information and the other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag indicates whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter is erased. The flag is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased and a value of 0 when various information is not erased. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on the power failure notice signal. When determining in step S24 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timing is started again. , The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control-side power-on processing again. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is for calculating the sum of various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM, assuming them as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various types of information, game sum information such as a checksum value (sum value) and a value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 1; if the main control-side power-off process has not been normally completed, the value is set to 0. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after production for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described in detail later.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, A work area is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, if a fraudulent person The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device) is applied to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself, and thereafter return to the original state.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various types of information, checksum values (sum values), and the like are changed by performing various types of processing thereafter, so that the main control-side power-off processing, which will be described later, is completed normally, and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, or in the determination in step S30, When the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0). That is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. The main control MPU 1310a is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs the RAM clear to delete various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side If the power-off process has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is extracted, and the random number for symbol-per-symbol determination is updated based on the extracted ID code. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and uses this fixed value to determine the initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination described above. Set to random number for decision.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value of 0, for example.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310 a are described. The transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is also used to perform initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing machine of the gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various kinds of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) or the like when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the random number for the jackpot determination used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot game state is updated in the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hard random number setting register is set to activate a main control built-in hard random number circuit. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is started by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted without duplication based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the predetermined values are determined one after another. When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted. Are extracted one after another without duplication. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and outputs the latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) in order to inform that the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are divided into a power-on state command and a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. To memorize. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information and various kinds of commands corresponding to the various kinds of information are stored. is there. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, a main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. Is done. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit random number updating process (step S56). In the non-hit random number updating process, the above-described reach determination random number, variation display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-described random number for normal symbol hit determination, random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notification signal has been input. If the power failure notification signal has not been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs non-hit random number update processing in step S56. Steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs the interrupt disable setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of various information including game information and other information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops driving signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated as the sum of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM except for the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting for prohibiting RAM access (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. Since the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control-side power-on processing again. Note that the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control-side power-off processing”.

  As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control-side power-off process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and executes the main control-side power-on process again. . That is, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main-control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control-side power-off process when the power is turned off and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the power is reset by the built-in reset circuit and restarted. The value (sum value) cannot be matched, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and performs the main control-side power-on processing by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be described. First, regarding a problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, in the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent process is advanced. Will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 196 when a power outage or an instantaneous power outage occurs and the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off. The charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or instantaneous power failure. In other words, even when the power from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the charged electric power is applied as DC +5 V to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, thereby causing the island of the game hall to lose its power. The main control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of time of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs and the game hall island facility is operated. When the power supply from the power supply is shut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as a very rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 upon power recovery, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, a system for performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). 2.5 seconds is set), and immediately before the standby time is reached, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware component such as an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated due to timer interrupt processing, the main control side power supply is turned on. It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the main control-side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control-side power-on process is started at the time of power recovery this time, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are determined to be the same. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a clerk or the like at the game hall when the power is restored and there is no intention to display the RAM clear by the clerk or the like at the game hall. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timing is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notification signal is input (that is, step S24). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby processing in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. The game information and other information (for example, the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter is not displayed. Various information including the information) can be prevented from being updated, so as never change occurs in the checksum calculation result. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum of step S64 when restarting. Therefore, the game information stored immediately before the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure or the power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the game while the pachinko machine 1 is in progress. Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a allows the game information on the progress of the game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). For storing various information including information indicating the value of an information output determination counter). Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control MPU 1310a of the main control side power-off processing constituted by the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a When the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculation result of the checksum in the backup process (that is, the value stored and calculated in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power outage stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM by the main control built-in WDT. Can be restarted again without any updating of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be surely completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, a case where a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs during power-on processing at the time of power recovery and the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is interrupted, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the power-off process on the main control side cannot be completed within the “shortage of blackout or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the process immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has been input, it is determined in step S24. As long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to set the timer clear in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12. By setting the value and clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT and starting the time measurement again, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by such software, so that the steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then, in step S52, The content of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) is prevented by preventing the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process described later by setting the interrupt permission and starting the control flow. Various kinds of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated. When the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to the power outage or the instantaneous blackout, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination And other information including the information indicating the value of the counter for the main control) and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and The other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is divided into two parts: a part covered by hardware so as not to be changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating a value of a main award ball number information output determination counter)) are reliably prevented from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power is restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. To convey, the power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are divided into power-on, and the main control is built as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating a driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information indicating a driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, a problem in a case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, Next, a description will be given of a problem in a case where the power-on main control return destination command does not perform reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  For example, while the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen of the big hit game state (for example, the screen of the big hit game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and the power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the gaming state is restored to a state immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the attacker solenoid 2414 starts to be driven to open and close the special winning opening 2005. The state will be shifted from the state closed by the member to the state opened.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the user, the screen can be displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, and the big hit game state can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round. That is, for example, a game winning ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and a special winning opening 1 count display command for transmitting the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 2005 is transmitted to the main control board. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round (that is, what round) in the jackpot game state.

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving of the attacker solenoid 2414 when, for example, ending the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to open the big winning port 2005 from the state where it is closed by the opening and closing member. (That is, the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the five rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and is in a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a message indicating that the movable piece is open is displayed by the player) The main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece while the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the display area on the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the second starting port is being controlled. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the state in which the main control built-in RAM is opened is set in step S34 and the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the one immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the starting port solenoid 2412 starts driving and the movable piece is closed. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and can return, the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state that is advantageous to the player is obtained. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen to be conveyed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is restored to a game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as a game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the game is played. There is also a problem that the player does not know what game to play.

  As described above, in the above two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine system appears to be in a frozen state, or a so-called frozen state, when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then power is restored. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on as well as when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power-on state command). In step S50, in order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command A counter notification command for determining output of the number of main prize balls is generated and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-described example, the peripheral control board 1510 When a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and power is restored after that, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening and closing member. Since the transition to the state can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies a screen indicating that the round is the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen indicating the number of the round). Cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is in the jackpot game state and the attacker solenoid 2 The screen that informs the driver of the start of drive 14 that the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member (for example, "Big hit. The big winning opening is open. A screen telling the player to play the game as if it were a ball) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is returned to the special winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. In the above-described example, for example, in the above-described example, the game state is such that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. In this state, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored, the drive of the starting port solenoid 2412 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310 to open the movable piece. Screen that informs the user that the second starting port 2004 has been opened (for example, "The movable piece is open. Please play a game so that a game ball enters the second starting port.") Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. It is possible to instruct the player to play the ball.

  Accordingly, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 in detail where the peripheral control board 1510 should return. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, that is, a so-called frozen state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described processing of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup processing, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison judgment, the values of the checksums cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

  Thus, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information which are classified as power-on A power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball are generated by creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control timer interrupt processing described later, these commands are first transmitted with a power-on state command, subsequently with a power-on main control return destination command, and subsequently with a power-on main prize ball count. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  The power-on state command is obtained by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on and when the power is restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure). The information for instructing the RAM clear and the power-on (when power is turned on, and also when power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and power is restored) are described above. Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the low-probability time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the high-probability non-time-saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine And the information shown. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of the work. What kind of game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether the game specification (such as a ST machine)) in which a probability variation occurs in the performed state)).

  In a manufacturing line of a maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line determines which one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, B, D, C, D, and F) is the main copyright for any of the works. In order to manufacture the control board 1310, it is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line.

  For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of works is mixed at the time of manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the worker of the manufacturing line can It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is also impossible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

  Thus, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the works of a plurality of types is mixed. While the 1310s are mixed, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery, and also when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the model code of the pachinko machine is included). In step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining output of the number of main prize balls is generated and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thus, the operator of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited Based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the detailed information on the model displayed on the inspection monitor can be visually checked, so that the main control It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the probability fluctuation occurs.

  Thus, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 13 The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually checking the inspection monitor, and separates the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the subsequent main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[15-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to that of the register tank. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to the special symbol and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric accessory control process, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits the time in which the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the ordinary symbol variation display pattern determined by the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing described later. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that the various commands are normally received by the payout control board 633 is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. More specifically, the main control MPU 1310a includes, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, and a detection from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002. Signal, a detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 2401 , The detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), and the fact that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys the Is stored in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM. When the detection signal from the first start-up sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start-up sensor 2402 are read, respectively, the start-up prize command corresponding to the other is transmitted as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, a starting port winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, a starting port winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state is input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including the case where the vacant terminal processing is performed). First, each is read as a first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as a second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. Those not having the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those in which the unused terminal processing is performed) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for comparison and the reading twice for the second to fourth times, erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, or the like can be avoided. Because it is possible to detect, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002, the first A detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the starting port sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, The detection signal from the sensor 2403, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), the prize ball transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is performed based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an unused terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the vacant terminal process among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Perform based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing has been performed is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is divided into a notification display for notifying that a peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a has a problem. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for a jackpot symbol initial value determination, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination), and therefore each time the counter is incremented, each time the counter is counted up. The above-described random number for determining a normal symbol hit and the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit are also updated by the hit random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining a symbol hit is a counter of an initial value update type, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a minimum value to a maximum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol determination random number, the hit random number updating process updates the random number for determining the initial value for large hit determination. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are set in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine. If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area to create a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on the input information, or the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the like. Or a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the substrates. Then, the created award ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey this effect, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, When a payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control processing in step S108, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 balls. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other sections, is created to convey that effect, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above and based on the input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided on the game board 5. , A second starting port 2004, a special winning port 2005, and other various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as "various winning ports provided in the game board 5"). The number of game balls to be put out is counted, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control processing in step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. Is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is 10 Is exceeded (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey that effect, and the The value stored in the output information storage area and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is used as the value of the main prize ball information output determination counter as the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 of that is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, And the frame state 2 command)), and are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b. If the logic is different, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball of approximately the same diameter as a game ball or a metal ball of approximately the same size) attached with a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a string, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. It is determined that fraudulent acts (hereinafter, referred to as "radiation irradiation goto") due to radio wave irradiation using a synthetic resin ball having a diameter are being performed, and the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). I do. The value of the radio wave goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraudulent activity detection process. When the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process). A radio wave irradiation goto notification command, which is classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, is created and stored as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Here, a brief description of the radio wave irradiation goto is as follows. An illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as a game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. A ball or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as the ball) is driven from the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and is caused to enter the first starting port 2002 and to perform the first starting. Radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is parked in an area for detecting a game ball passing through the mouth sensor (a ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor). Accordingly, when the radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is parked in the ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned ON), the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor is changed. While the logic is that no game ball is detected, the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor becomes logic that the game ball is detected when radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, when radio wave irradiation is turned off). . That is, while the game ball is parked in the ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor, the radio wave irradiation is turned on and the radio wave irradiation is turned off, so that the ball passing detection of the first starting port sensor is repeated. A signal indicating that a plurality of gaming balls have passed through the area can be generated in a pseudo manner and output from the first starting port sensor to the main control board 4100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor subside 3002b are dimensioned to be larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension so that such a radio wave irradiation goto can be found. They are spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, an illegal ball having a flexible string-like operation line attached thereto is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and enters the first starting port 2002. Then, an area for detecting a game ball passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a (a ball passing detection area on the first starting port sensor main side 3002a) or a game ball passing the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b Even if a stopped state can be formed in the area where the ball is detected (the ball passing detection area of the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b), the player performing the misconduct turns on the radio wave irradiation or radiates the radio wave. The logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002b are always different by repeatedly turning off and on. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit, a radio wave irradiation goto notification command that is divided into a notification display that indicates that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created, and the transmission information is described above. It can be stored in the transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff such as a clerk of a game hall can discover the radio wave irradiation goto at an early stage. It has become.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (the special winning opening) For example, when a game ball enters 2005) or the like, a prize abnormal display command that is classified as an abnormal state and displayed as an alert is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and a random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main signal. It is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. (It is determined whether or not a big hit game state is to be generated (referred to as "special lottery")), or the value of a counter for updating the random number for the big hit symbol is taken out, and the probability change hit stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM is determined. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value (determination as to whether or not to cause the probability fluctuation).

  Here, the “probability variation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) that is set higher than that at a normal time (a low probability). In the present embodiment, as a range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set in the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value is read in the high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. When determining whether or not the stored big hit determination value matches, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the big hit determination range. It depends on whether it is done.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are based on the second starting port sensor 2402. If it is caused by the special figure 2, various commands related to the tuning effect are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern so that the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Further, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is set, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 close display command, big win opening 1 closing display command) A winning port 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 is operated to open and close the opening and closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (large round) in which the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two, the round display of the function display unit 1400 is set to two. To turn on the round display lamp, Setting the power and storing it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is fifteen, a lighting signal to the fifteenth round display lamp so as to light the fifteenth round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400 The output of the function display unit 1400 is set to output the lighting signal to the status display of the function display unit 1400 so that the output is stored in the output information storage area as the output information, and whether or not the probability variation has occurred is lit in a predetermined color. It is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and a gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port based on the result of the determination, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned ordinary symbol hit determination random number is extracted and the gate information of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. Store in parcel.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, if the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the normal reservation indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on by using the total number of the stored gate information as the reservation ball. Based on the obtained gate information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and a random number for a normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read out gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as “normal lottery”). It is determined whether or not the movable piece is to be opened and closed based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed according to this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that the second starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be received, and a game state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified into the ordinary figure synchronizing effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as the transmission information is performed. In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol. In the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric winning effect are created and transmitted. While the information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described ordinary symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create a variety of commands that are classified as related to the public figure synchronizing production, and store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as the output information To memorize.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payment ACK signal when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in the gaming state, and a driving signal is output to a starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to the above, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, hourly information output signal, starting opening prize Various information (game information) signals relating to the game, such as information output signals, are sent to the payout control board 633. A force to or.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are created in the main-control-side timer interrupt process that is the main routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and big hit-related. (For example, a special winning opening one count display command corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands that are classified as power-on, various commands that are generally related to synchronizing productions, various commands that are normally classified as directing, various commands that are classified as information displays, and various types that are classified as status displays Commands, various commands related to tests, and other various commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is A main prize ball number information output signal is output as main prize ball number information each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize holes reaches 10 balls. And a main prize ball number information output command instructing to transmit the information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558). In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. More specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as a direct current +5 V when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, At least the main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. Is available. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the power is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main power serial data includes a power-on state command, a status, a mode, and a sum value in the order of: The status, mode, and sum value that are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequently constitute a power-on main control return destination command Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information, and according to the various kinds of information. There are cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT does not have to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing has been executed, as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electric driving sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, in the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 211, the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on for notifying that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area. A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, a power-on state command is configured as main serial data, The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the power-on main control return destination command, which is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, Subsequently, the power supply is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, which constitute a counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination at power-on.

  Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Can be effected and displayed. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game and the power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or the power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. And the effect of the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to notify the user of the return destination of the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a malfunction as seen by the player. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, FIG. In step S38 in the main control-side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. 211, if the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, a status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, As the serial data, configure the power-on state command, send to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, then configure the power-on main control return destination command, The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitute a counter notification command for output determination of the main prize ball number information at power-on. The signals are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection step in order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying any of the above-mentioned Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating a model type, a copyright code for specifying a copyright of a work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, and the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., based on the game specification code for identifying the It has become.

[16. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 illustrated in FIG. 185 will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 216. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit in FIG. 213. FIG. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[16-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 under the control of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. . When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interrupts of the payout control MPU 633aa. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is performed with priority.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In the input / output setting of the I / O, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. You. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage during the period from when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  When determining in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633aa is in a state in which the RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, award ball information storage area). And the state of the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. This flag indicates whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the current PRDY signal output setting information) is to be deleted. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, for example, to write (store) or read out payout information.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates an address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not deleted (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM assuming that the payout information is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (when the power is turned off) described later. (Step S526). If the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S526 that they match, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and a checksum value is stored and held in a payout control built-in RAM in a power supply cut-off process to be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off processing has been completed normally and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

  In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been completed normally, the payout control built-in RAM Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU 633aa, The information is set in a work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thereby, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes not only a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is turned off, but also a state where power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (is a value of 1), that is, determines that the payout information is to be erased, When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, If it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). Thereby, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is transmitted from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Is entered. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa has determined that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is performed every 2 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and to 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the power failure notice signal It is determined whether or not it has been performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value of the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and the payout is performed based on the output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as a prize ball number information output signal. And outputs to the terminal plate 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing in step S550 described later. Is stored and updated in a prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the game.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball information output determination counter stored in a prize ball information storage area of a payout control built-in RAM is used. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing in step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and the storage is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the read value of the prize ball information output determination counter exceeds the value 10, ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls that have exceeded that number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as a value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit , A BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later have been normally received, as input information. It is stored in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when determining whether or not a ball bleeding state has occurred due to the discharge blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is transmitted, a ball bleed determination time set as a criterion, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the determination condition is set when determining whether the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls or not. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball disconnection detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as a ball-out determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual A determination is made as to whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not payout of inconsistent game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeatedly performed. At this time, time management of the mismatch determination counter reset determination time set with the determination condition is performed. For example, when the ball dust determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball dust determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is a value. By setting the value to 0, the ball judge judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit have been input. judge. The payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the processing of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, and the like at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. With this, even when the payout device 580 is performing the payout operation of the game balls, the payout operation cannot be continued due to an instantaneous blackout or power failure, and the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. As a result, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess and deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit and, when paying out the game balls to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, causes an instantaneous blackout or power outage and the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, when the power is restored, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage stored as the payout backup information, Recovery of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage or power outage is restored. It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous stop or stop when the power is restored, even if the instantaneous stop or stop occurs. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, upon power recovery, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read-out PRDY signal output setting information is set to, for example, the state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a lending ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out control. It outputs to the CR unit from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the following formula. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not less than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. Is determined, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, As an output setting of the error status to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. As described above, for example, if the operation of paying out the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the instantaneous stop, the state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit. Can be notified that the payout operation of the game ball due to is abnormal. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, in the pachinko machine, When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is sent to inform that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible. The logic state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The state of the logic of the EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. A CR connection signal for notifying whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the game ball is full, or the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 based on the detection signal from the ball breaking detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Or not. For example, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 202 is full of the stored game balls by using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms in the current full and full ball detection process using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms. When the detection signal is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full and ball exhaustion check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the timer for the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the full tank determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out of ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information notifying that the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. I do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information notifying that the lower plate 202 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  The determination of whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also performed by using the timer interrupt cycle 2ms, and checking the current full tank and running out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 becomes When the state transits from OFF to ON, the timer update processing of step S552 starts counting the above-mentioned ball out determination time. When the time-out-of-ball determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer updating process, that is, when the time-out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball determination process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball is informed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The ball breaking information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command receiving process (step S558). In this command reception processing, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, payer ACK information notifying the fact is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands cannot be received normally, a connection error that indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an error has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting processing, operation settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal, ball removal, etc. are performed, retry operation determination is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and the above-described output information storage area is written as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. The display data (in the present embodiment, the display value 1 (the number “1”)) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, and various commands (frame status 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame status 2 command) classified into status display are created based on the various types of information. And sends it to main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the frame state 1 For example, a command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

  Subsequent to step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, where the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether a power failure notice signal has been input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 is performed. Sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, performs port output processing in step S548, performs port input processing in step S550, and performs step S552. The timer is updated at step S5. In step S556, a full or missing ball check process is performed, a command reception process is performed in step S558, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, and a main operation setting process is performed in step S562. LED display data creation processing is performed in S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. I have. As a result, the payout control MPU 633aa secures a processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination at step S540, when it is determined that the power failure notice signal has been input, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of the payout information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU 633aa sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU 633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 633aa is reset, and thereafter, the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "dispensing control unit power-off processing".

  The pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633aa) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a power up process of the payout control unit by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the pay-out backup information stored in the pay-out control built-in RAM is normal. Has been inspected. As described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is double-checked to check whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

[16-2. Dispensing control section timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the processing at the time of powering on the payout control unit shown in FIGS. 213 to 215.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to prohibition and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 216 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[17. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 185 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 219 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 220 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 221 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the priority of the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[17-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a peripheral control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 217 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a process for determining hot start / cold start, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, a process for transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is extremely short. Can be initialized. With this, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, and for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, a command related to control of a game effect output from the main control board 1310. And a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the year, month, and day and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. The current calendar information and the current time information are set in the RAM.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process executed in response to the execution. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it determines to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 are provided. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382. Various kinds of information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotary operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the staging operation unit 300) obtained by acquiring operations and the like of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing operation Operation history information of the unit 303) is set based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table including the above-described specified brightness value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And are set respectively. During the demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state of the player) or during the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) performs the production operation section 301 (rotation operation). When the user operates the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to set one specified luminance value from the first specified luminance value to the 31st specified luminance value which is the maximum luminance, the set luminance is set. The above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so as to have the specified value.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates the image data on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC 1510a, output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. I have. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but a so-called frame drop occurs, but the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later. A mechanism is provided in which various loudspeakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as “various loudspeakers”) can prioritize an effect by music, sound effect, or the like in accordance with various effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in a sound data creation process described later, a sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs sound to various speakers from the set output channel. Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct what number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a among the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. To update the pointer.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the order of the emission data from the first emission data among the emission data arranged in time series that constitute the emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in chronological order constituting the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data from the command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the order of the drive data from the first drive data is set as the output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in a time series and constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid driving process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the driving data indicated by the pointer, and the next driving specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the update is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. The random number (for example, the random number used for the effect related to the prefetching on hold) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes the various commands performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands ( (Extracted) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table including the above-described specified brightness value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) emission schedule generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes a lamp pallet setting process. Then, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum luminance from the first luminance designated value. When one specified luminance value up to 31 specified luminance values is set, the above-described gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to have the specified specified luminance value. It has become.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of a start opening winning effect, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start-retention changes, a special winning opening It analyzes whether or not it is a special winning opening 1 count display command output every time a game ball is accepted in 2005, and recognizes which game state is currently in play.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the reception command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Performs analysis of various commands. The various commands include various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning production-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning production-related, various commands classified in the jackpot-related, various commands classified in the power-on state, and various commands. Various commands classified in the synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the normal electric role production-related, various commands classified in the notification display, various commands classified in the status display, various commands classified in the test-related and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Thus, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the display is set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for electric drive source are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after one abnormality has occurred but before the abnormality is resolved. Can be.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed from the control ROM 1510b among the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and among the sound instruction data arranged in time series that constitute the sound generation schedule data, the sound instruction data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and outputs sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data. At the same time, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation processing, each time the sound data creation processing is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is performed), the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d is controlled based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the sound volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the sound data output process of step S1018 sets the sound data in this sound data creation process. The sound data is output from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matched with various effects are played from various speakers.

  The notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the sound volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff such as a store clerk of a game hall slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music and sound effects from various speakers is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction has occurred or when the player is performing wrongdoing, a notification sound set at a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk such as the clerk of the game hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the illegal act of the player by the notification sound. Also, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to disturb music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is adjusted. There is a possibility that the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be rendered as a more powerful one in addition to the music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, or the game state may shift to a game state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up in a regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied. The data is copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in 1510c2.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the routine processing is started by setting a value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. , And steps S1014,..., And step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process (to be described later) that is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[17-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. 218 (step S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (is 1), that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the CPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050), and end this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in the determination of step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. When the process is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit is performing the regular processing. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed assuming that the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process), the value of the steady process flag SP-FLG is set to 1 in step S1008 to indicate that the peripheral control unit regular process is being executed. In step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process) in FIG. 217, the value of the normal process flag SP-FLG is set to 0 in the peripheral control unit regular process. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of the present routine, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of the present routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit cannot perform the normal processing until the V blank signal is input and then the next V blank signal is input.

  As a result, in the present peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit regular process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is performed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing has failed, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is not performed, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

[17-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 217 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in FIG. 219 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer starting process in the 1ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and then the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, and the second,..., And 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, that the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is assigned to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in the determination of step S1100, the CPU adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN by 1 (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process in the process of turning on the peripheral control unit in FIG. 217. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, a motor and solenoid driving process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the pointer is designated by the pointer of the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric driving source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and the solenoid drive process are executed. I do. Thereby, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, electric drive sources provided on the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5) ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In the movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby obtaining history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original information). Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, based on the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5. The movable position is grasped by setting the moving position and acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in effect operation unit 300 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit) The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the 302 and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303 are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 by operating the performance operation unit 301. And the brightness of various LEDs (LEDs 1130a, 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied. The data is copied and backed up in a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set to different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1 , 1510c2 are set to different areas from the 1ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

  As described above, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the effect of the effect within the period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. I have. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since the routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[17-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a transmits the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a by one byte (8 bits). ) Is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 220 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information can be received in main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control If it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented). Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1; When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the third byte of the main serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the reception counter SRXC has a value other than 3, that is, the mode in which the status is the first byte of the main serial data and the second byte of the main serial data is still present. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the mode as the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value as the third byte of the main serial data is received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the status of the first byte of the main circumference serial data is followed by the second byte of the main circumference serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in a reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is under a file environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Has been determined. Accordingly, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has been changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. When the determination is made, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), And terminate this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the time period has elapsed since the information can be received, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, the routine ends.

[17-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates a 2-microsecond timer as shown in FIG. 221 (step S1300), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the CPU ends this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has not elapsed for two macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If it is determined, the routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal has been input for two microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started, the CPU performs the power saving processing. Performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. Thus, even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the command being transmitted. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal has not been input, or returns to step S1312 again after step S1314, and determines whether the power failure notification signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when it determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input in the determination of step S1312, While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 217 is restarted.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. So that it does not start. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not performed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically returning from reset.

[18. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 are not displayed by light emission, and the gaming panel 1100 In a state where the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is not illuminated and decorated by the LED 1130a for panel decoration of the panel decorative substrate 1130 (normal state), the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is formed so as to be always visible from the front. The visibility is assisted by the back left back decoration plate 3360 of the back left production unit 3300 and the back right back decoration plate 3460 of the back right production unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the panel plate 1110. , For the player within the game area 5a. It is possible to recognize that the decorative pattern 1150 is formed outside the frame-shaped center role 2500 and the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect display device 1600 or the like that can display the effect image arranged rearward in the inside in a good state. At this time, since the frame-shaped center role 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 is made transparent so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be viewed from the front, the decoration pattern 1150 can be seen through the center role 2500. The part located behind the center role 2500 can also be visually recognized, and the entire decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized.

  Since the decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and can be illuminated and decorated by light incident from the side of the panel plate 1110, light from other than the side is also directed in an appropriate direction. Since the light can be reflected, the light from the LEDs of the decorative body and the movable decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1, the light of the lighting in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like Depending on the light from the other installed pachinko machines, the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, the appropriate portions of the decorative pattern 1150 can be seen to shine, and thus the decoration can be performed. The appearance of the pattern 1150 will change in various ways, which is clearly different from a conventional pachinko machine in which a decorative sheet is attached to a game panel (panel board). The pachinko machine 1 can show the player in the game area 5a of the elephant (atmosphere), can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can appeal to the player. The decoration of the board 1110 can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In this normal state, light is emitted from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 by the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 provided at the corner (upper left corner and lower left corner) of the panel holder 1120 having a square outer shape. When the decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated, the entire decorative pattern 1150 looks shining, so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be conspicuous, and the appearance of the portion outside the center role 2500 in the game area 5a can be improved. At the same time, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 is made to emit light, the appearance of the decorative pattern 1150 can be made different from when the light pattern is not made. Therefore, the decoration of the panel plate 1110 which cannot be seen with the conventional pachinko machine. , The decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated, so that the player can think that something is good, such as the arrival of a chance. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated, and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 is illuminated and displayed, the outside of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in the game area 5a. The part is illuminated and decorated by the decorative pattern 1150, and the part in the frame of the center role 2500 is illuminated and displayed (luminous decoration) by the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601. Since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are patterns of a design that is continuous with each other, the whole of the game area 5a is a single pattern (here, a geometric pattern formed by a plurality of contours of regular triangles). Since the luminous decoration is performed by the decoration of the learning pattern, the entire appearance in the game area 5a is displayed. It is possible to improve, it is possible to entertain the decoration in the game area 5a to the player. At this time, since the portion of the center role 2500 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed transparent, the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 forms the center role 2500 Since the portion located behind the portion in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized from the front through the center role 2500, the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern of the light guide plate 2601 can be seen. The interruption between the pattern 2630 and the pattern 2150 can be made as small as possible. For the player, the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are continuous and integral decorations. The recognition can be made easier. Therefore, the giant luminous decoration can be shown to the player by the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, so that a strong impact is given to the player. This makes it possible for the player to be convinced that something good will happen, thereby further increasing the sense of expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest.

  Further, a panel decoration board 1130 is arranged at the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 having a square outer shape, and an LED as a back light emitting means is mounted at a position behind the panel board 1110 and far from the panel decoration board 1130. Since the back upper right base decorative board and the back right lower base decorative board of the back right effecting unit 3400 are arranged, the decorative pattern 1150 extends from the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative board 1130 to the side of the panel board 1110. Since it is possible to illuminate and decorate the part where the incident light is difficult to reach by the back light emitting means, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the entire decorative pattern 1150 with uniform brightness, and to achieve the above-described operation and effect of the pachinko machine. 1 can be surely embodied.

  Further, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are emitted to the center role 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 with respect to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110. Since the transparent light guide plate 2601 that can be displayed is provided, the positions of the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the front-rear direction can be made as close as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity when the light emitting decoration is performed together with the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and it is possible to more easily achieve the above-described effects. .

  Further, a transparent light guide plate 2601 capable of emitting and displaying the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 is provided in the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. When the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated and displayed, a member (for example, displayed on the effect display device 1600) arranged in the frame of the center role 2500 (behind the opening 1112). The effect image, the underside movable decorative body 3110 of the underside effecting unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the underside movable decorative body 3210 of the underside effecting unit 3200, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the backside effecting unit 3300, and the lower left underside Movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420) of back right production unit 3400 are derived. The first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the plate 2601 makes it difficult to see, and the player can be made aware of the luminescent display of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and the interest of the player can be increased. The decoration of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 can be enjoyed by being attracted to the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601.

  In addition, as described above, the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a can be illuminated and decorated by the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and the center role in the game area 5a. Since the decoration outside the frame of 2500 can be decorated with the decorative pattern 1150, the timing for emitting and decorating the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 and the timing for emitting and decorating the decorative pattern 1150 are appropriately combined. This makes it possible to show a variety of light emitting effects to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, making the player entertain and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since a portion of the center role 2500 that is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed transparent, compared with a case where a notch is provided so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be viewed from the front, Since the surface (front surface) of the part can be made smooth, it is possible to make it difficult to affect the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a, and to prevent the game balls B from moving unintentionally. The movement (flow) of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the panel holder 1120 is formed in substantially the same shape as the front component 1000 having a square outer shape and a substantially circular inner shape, the width between the inner circumference and the outer circumference of the panel holder 1120 is reduced to four corners. Is the widest. Since the panel decoration board 1130 is mounted on the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the four corners of the panel holder 1120, a space for mounting the panel decoration board 1130 can be easily secured, and it is probable. Since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is located outside the panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is held by the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not seen in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The appearance in 5a can be improved.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the front of the panel decoration substrate 1130 provided on the panel holder 1120 can be covered with the front component 1000. Side), the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be made hard to see, and the appearance outside the game area 5a can be improved. In addition, since the panel decoration board 1130 can be made difficult to be seen from the player side by the front component 1000, it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the panel decoration board 1130, so that the player The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is hardly assumed to be light-emitting decoration, and when the decoration pattern 1150 is light-emitting decorated, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the light emission of the decoration pattern 1150 can be provided. The decoration can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back movable decorative body 3110 of the back lower production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper production unit 3200, The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are respectively located near the outer periphery of the game area 5a. Are in a standby position where they are separated from each other and dispersed, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body The body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 make it possible to decorate the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a, In 2000, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 of the rendering unit 2600 are not displayed by light emission, the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state, and is arranged at the center of the game area 5a. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In this standby position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable decoration are provided. Since the bodies 3420 are separated from each other, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable are provided. The player determines that the decorative bodies 3420 are gathered at the first united position or the second united position as the specific position to form a predetermined decorative mode (a hexagonal first decorative mode or an annular second decorative mode). Can be made hard to recall, and the impact when assembled can be increased. In this normal state, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are removed. When moving from the standby position to the first united position or the second united position, the first decorative mode or the second decorative mode is formed in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a to form the first decorative mode or the second decorative mode. The appearance can surprise the player, and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

  Then, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are placed in the first combined position. When the first pattern 2610 as the specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 is caused to emit light in a state where the light guide plate 2601 has been moved to the second combined position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the upper left back are formed by the first pattern 2610. The decorations of the movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 can be changed, and the light emitting portion (first By changing the design part 2610a, the second design part 2610b, the third design part 2610c, and the fourth design part 2610d), the lower back movable decorative body 311 is changed. The first decoration mode and the second decoration formed by the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 Since the decoration of the mode can be changed in various ways, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back The effect pattern by the lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made various, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to give a strong impact to the player. It can be assumed that there is a good thing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In the light guide plate 2601, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d of the first pattern 2610 emit light in order, thereby emitting a moving pattern. Since the first pattern 2610 can be displayed, the player can be made to feel strange by moving the first pattern 2610, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are combined into a first united body. When the second pattern 2630 is emitted as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 in a state where the second pattern 2630 is moved to the position or the second united position, the second pattern 2630 causes the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the upper left back. The outer peripheries of the movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be emphasized, so that the second decorative pattern 2630 makes the movable decorative body larger. In addition to being able to show, the second pattern 2630 allows the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the lower left upper movable movable body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be connected to each other, so that the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable decoration are provided. The body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 and the second pattern 2630 form one large decoration, which can give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by assuming that there is something good.

  The lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in a standby position. At the time, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are caused to emit light as the specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601, and the first combination position and the second combination position are set near the center of the game area 5a. Decorate the lower back movable decorative body 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 at the second united position. Since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 to be light-emitting displayed near the center of the game area 5a, the first pattern 210 and the second pattern 2630 are displayed from the player side (front). 10 or the second pattern 2630 can be visually recognized in a good condition, it is possible to entertain the first pattern 2610 and second pattern 2630 to the player. Then, with the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 illuminated, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body When the body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved from the standby position to the first combined position and the second combined position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the back left upper movable movable body 3310 The lower back movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can show the player an effect that is integrated with the first picture 2610 and the second picture 2630. In this way, a strong impact can be given to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are placed in the first combined position. In the state where it is moved to the second or lower position, the lower back lower decorative substrate 3121, the lower back lower decorative substrate 3122, the lower back upper decorative substrate, the upper back upper decorative substrate, the lower left upper base decorative substrate, the lower left upper first decorative stage Substrate, back left lower base decorative board, back left lower front decorative board, back upper right base decorative board, back upper right front decorative board, back right lower base decorative board, back right lower front decorative board When the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are illuminated and displayed, while the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are indirect light, the LED is a light close to direct light. Because there is, the first pattern 26 Since the brightness of the portion of the LED becomes higher in the 0 or the second pattern 2630, the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 and the LED allow the player to see a light emission effect that could not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine. Can have a strong impact on the player, and can also make the player think that there is something good, and increase the expectation for the game to suppress the decline in interest. Can be.

  In addition, the back lower back decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper back decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back left upper base decorative board, the back left upper front decorative board, the back left lower base decorative board, the back By lighting the LEDs mounted on the lower left front decorative board, the back upper right base decorative board, the back upper right front decorative board, the lower right lower base decorative board, and the lower right lower front decorative board, Since the movable decorative body 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be illuminated, The lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 glow brightly. Lower movable decoration 3 10, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made to stand out. Similarly, the light emitting decoration of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the upper right lower movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 is played. People can be entertained.

  In addition, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies that move from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position are provided, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are provided. And a plurality of movable decorative bodies consisting of a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are separately moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position. Because, after moving one movable decorative body to the first combined position or the second combined position, depending on whether the next movable decorative body moves to the first combined position or the second combined position, It is possible to excite the player and excite the player, to entertain the player, and to appropriately combine the timing at which each movable decorative body moves to the first united position or the second united position. The movable effects by a plurality of movable decorative body can be made more versatile, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  Further, as described above, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 Movement, light emission of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 by the light guide plate 2601, and the back lower back decorative board 3121, the lower back front decorative board 3122, the back upper back decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back left upper base Decorative board, upper left upper decorative board, lower left lower decorative board, lower left lower decorative board, upper right lower decorative board, upper right upper decorative board, lower lower lower decorative board, lower right lower Various effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the light emission of the LED mounted on the first-stage decorative board, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, by the light-emitting display of the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And since it is made to complement between the back lower right movable decorative bodies 3420, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, the back Even if there is a gap between the upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 without abutting each other, the gap can be hidden by the second pattern 2630. The upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the upper right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are mutually in contact. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the movement accuracy of each, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and The moving accuracy of the lower back right movable decorative body 3420 can be made low, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the moving mechanism of the decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pair of first movable decorative bodies, a lower back movable decorative body 3110 of the lower back effect unit 3100 and a rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper effect unit 3200, and a pair of first movable decorative bodies The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300 as the second movable decorative body and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are: Each is in a standby position, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 face each other in the vertical direction around the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view. In addition, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the upper right movable movable body 3410 and the lower right lower back Since the moving decorative bodies 3420 face each other in the left-right direction around the effect display device 1600, the moving decorative bodies 3420 are separated and dispersed from each other. The body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 decorate the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the periphery of the gaming area 5a. In addition, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized by the player in a favorable state, and the effect image can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the standby position, the pair of back left moving arm 3330 and back right moving arm 3430, and the pair of back lower moving arm 3130 and back upper moving arm 3230 are separated from each other, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is separated. The game area 5a in front view together with the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 (the effect display device) 1600), the back left moving arm 3330, the back right moving arm 3430, the back lower moving arm 3130, and the back upper moving arm 3230 display the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 easy to see from the player side (front) without obstruction. It is possible to entertain an effect image in the state.

  Then, the pair of lower back moving arms 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are moved closer to each other to move the pair of lower back movable decorative bodies 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 to a first combined position as a predetermined position. The back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 are moved closer to each other, and a pair of back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved downward. When the movable decorative body 3110 and the upper movable decorative body 3210 are moved to the first united position as a position connecting the movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210, they are densely gathered with each other in front of the effect display device 1600 in the center of the game area 5a in front view. Form one large first decorative aspect. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable so as to block the effect image displayed on the performance display device 1600. Since the decorative body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 move to form a large hexagonal first decorative mode, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body are provided to the player. 3210, the upper back movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 can be noticed. Of the decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 (a plurality of movable decorative bodies) In addition to being able to entertain, the player can be surprised by the appearance of a large first decorative mode in the center of the game area 5a in front of the effect display device 1600, and can do something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by assuming that there is a game.

  Also, the pair of lower back movable decorative bodies 3110 and 3210 are moved by the pair of lower back movable arms 3130 and upper back movable arms 3230 between the standby position as a predetermined position and the first combined position. At the same time as being moved to the union position, a pair of back left upper movable ornaments 3310, a lower left lower movable ornament 3320, a rear upper right movable ornament 3410, and a lower right movable ornament are provided by a pair of back left moving arms 3330 and a back right moving arm 3430. By moving 3420 to a second united position between a standby position as a position for connecting the pair of lower back movable decorative bodies 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 to each other and a first combined position, the lower back movable decoration Body 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 342 Are formed in a ring shape along the hexagonal periphery, so that the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310, and the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 are formed. , The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be shown to the player a decoration that is clearly different from the large hexagonal first decorative mode densely assembled. A variety of effects can be achieved by different decoration modes using the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the upper right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420. Can be made harder to get tired, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, from the state of the standby position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420, in an effect of moving to the first united position via the second united position, whether to move from the standby position to the second united position, or to move from the second united position to the first united position, In each scene, the player can be thrilled and throbbed, and the multi-stage effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in the standby position. When moving from the to the first united position or the second united position, in the standby position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, Since the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are separated from each other, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 are provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recall that the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 gather to form the first decorative mode or the second decorative mode. . Also, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the upper right lower movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are moved from the standby position to the When moving to the one united position or the second united position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 move without changing their directions, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are changed in direction and move, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body In the standby position and the first united position, the orientation of the lower decorative back body 3410 and the lower right back decorative ornament 3420 is different. The decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 move to the first united position to form the first decorative mode. Can be hardly recalled to the player.

  More specifically, in a normal state, one vertex is directed upward in the lower back movable decorative body 3110, and one vertex is directed downward in the upper back movable decorative body 3210. In the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, one vertex (tip) is directed rightward, and in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, one vertex (tip) is directed leftward. Then, in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210, in the same posture, they move upward and downward, respectively, and are located at the first combined position and the second combined position, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 And in the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the front end facing the right moves to the first combined position or the second combined position while changing the posture so as to face the lower right and the upper right, and the back upper right movable decorative body In the 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, the respective tips facing the left move to the first united position or the second united position while changing their postures so as to face the lower left and the upper left. The movable decorative bodies arranged vertically, horizontally, and in different directions move to the first united position so that their vertices converge at one point, or move to the second united position so as to be arranged in a ring, and form one large decoration. body That is intended to form, it can be difficult to occur to the player.

  Accordingly, the six lower back movable decorative bodies 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body are provided. When the 3420 is moved from the standby position to the first united position or the second united position, they move unexpectedly, which can surprise the player and have a strong impact on the player. In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in each of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420, respectively Is a movement different from the movement between the standby position and the first united position (a second movement, specifically, a movement of rotating about an axis extending forward and backward in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210). The upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 can perform a rotation around an axis extending left and right. Lower movable decorative body 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 34 0, at an appropriate position between the standby position and the first united position, by performing the second movement, to show the player the first decorative mode of the first united position and the second decorative mode of the second united position. An effect different from the effect can be shown, and the various effects can make it difficult for the player to be bored, and can also make the player more entertaining and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are each defined as a triangular pyramid. Specific vertex of an acute angle (the vertex facing upwards of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the vertex facing downwards of the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable Since it has a vertex (tip) facing the right of the decorative body 3320 and a vertex (tip) facing the left of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420), The lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the upper back left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are in the standby position. When moving between the united position and performing the second movement, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable for the player. The decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be easily recognized as being moved, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable can be recognized. It is possible to entertain the movements of the decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, a back lower right movable decorative body 3420, a lower back movable decorative body 3110, and a rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are formed as a pair of back left and right movable decorative bodies. Since the moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 and the pair of the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are provided respectively, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration are provided. When the body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 can be moved separately when assembled at the first united position or the second united position. Lower back movable decorative body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3 By appropriately selecting the order of moving (moving) the 10 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, the variation of the movable effect can be made more versatile, and it is difficult to get the player bored by the various movable effects, and it is interesting. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 132 as the lottery result by the lottery means. The game can be advanced based on the above, various light-emitting sources (a plurality of light-emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 of FIG. 135 as a plurality of light-emitting bodies, and a precedent decoration portion of FIG. 163 as a movable body. 163, a bottom left bottom pole change detection circuit 3321ab, a bottom right top pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and a bottom right bottom pole change detection circuit 3421ab as the magnetic detection unit. ing.

  Various light-emitting sources (a plurality of light-emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 can emit light. The first decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are magnet bodies as the magnet 3312 of the first decorative portion 3312, the magnet 3322a of the first decorative portion 3322, the magnet 3412a of the first decorative portion 3412, and the first stage in FIG. It has a magnet 3422a of the decorative part 3422. The back upper left magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3311ab, the lower left lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3321ab, the upper right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab are formed of the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312 and the preceding decorative portion 3322. The magnet 3322a, the magnet 3412a of the preceding decorative portion 3412, and the magnet-bearing surface of the magnet 3422a of the preceding decorative portion 3422 are disposed separately from the preceding decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422, respectively. Detecting the magnetic poles of the magnet 3312 of the step decoration part 3312, the magnet 3322a of the step decoration part 3322, the magnet 3412a of the step decoration part 3412, and the magnet 3422a of the step decoration part 3422, the step decoration parts 3312, 3322 and 3412 are detected. , 3422 standby position as a specific position It is capable of detecting the original position).

  Lights emitted from various light-emitting sources (plural light-emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 while the decoration units 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are in operation are output from a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab and a back left lower magnetic pole change detection. The circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3411ab, and the back lower right magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab can be made incident.

  As described above, while the first-stage decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are operating, light emitted from various light-emitting sources (a plurality of light-emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is transmitted to the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab and the back. Although the lower left magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3321ab, the upper right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab can be incident on the lower left magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab, this light is not affected at all by disturbance light. The magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3311ab, the lower left lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3321ab, the upper right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab use the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312, the magnet 3322a of the preceding decorative portion 3322, The magnet 3412a of the preceding decorative portion 3412 and the magnet of the preceding decorative portion 3422 Tsu is the specific position standby position by detecting the magnetic poles of bets 3422a Sakidan escutcheon 3312,3322,3412,3422 (original position) can be detected. Therefore, erroneous detection of the standby position (original position), which is a specific position of the preceding decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, 3422, by light emitted from various light emitting sources (a plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is prevented. can do.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, an effect is produced based on a command from the main control board 1310 included in the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as a main control board capable of controlling the progress of a game. As an effect control board capable of controlling the progress, a peripheral control board 1510 included in the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 13 is provided. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM board 1520 shown in FIG. 180 as a ROM board, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 shown in FIG. 180 as a video signal output board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 180 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) related to effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can output to the effect display device 1600 a signal that is compatible with the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 130 as a display device.

  As a first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 180 and a special connector provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 180 are provided between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It is electrically connected to the socket of the SCN 3 by a board-to-board connector that can be connected between the boards. As a second connector different from the first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 180 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 of FIG. 180 are provided between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. And a socket of the special connector SCN4, which is provided in the connector, and is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector capable of connecting between the boards.

  The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect by the control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and can output video signals to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in a plurality of types. . Examples of a plurality of types of video signal systems include an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. In the present embodiment, four systems (a total of four systems) of one system of RGB system, two systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system are used as a system of a plurality of types of video signals. ) Has been adopted.

  The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 in FIG. 180 as the same board box.

  As described above, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specification is stored in advance is provided on the dedicated substrate, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 which is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the effect display device. A board that outputs a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to 1600 is provided on a dedicated board called a liquid crystal output board 1530 which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510. That is, if the peripheral control board 1510 is not modified and newly manufactured according to the control information (peripheral data) related to the production based on the game specifications, the peripheral control board 1510 conforms to the method of the video signal input to the production display device 1600. Since it is not modified and newly manufactured, it can be configured as a common substrate that does not depend on the game specifications or the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. This eliminates the need to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specifications and the method of the video signal input to the staging display device 1600, and reduces costs by manufacturing only the same peripheral control board 1510. Can be contributed to. Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 of FIG. 93 in which one payout passage 580a to which the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. 93 are supplied is formed. ing. The dispensing device 580 includes at least the dispensing motor 584 in FIG. 105 and the dispensing blade 589 in FIG. 105 as a ball feed rotating unit. The payout motor 584 can rotate the rotation axis by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle in response to the step driving. The dispensing blade 589 rotates via a drive gear 585, a first transmission gear 586, a second transmission gear 587, and a dispensing gear 588a of a dispensing gear member 588, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 constituting a rotation transmitting member. As a result, a plurality of ball receiving portions 589b are formed at equal intervals as ball receiving recesses that can receive and send out the game balls B one by one (three are formed at equal intervals every 120 degrees). .

  The reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 does not become an integer. Specifically, the reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 by calculation based on mechanics. The rotation angle of the dispensing blade 589 can be detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 in FIG. 105 as a light shielding piece provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  In this manner, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, and the reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is not an integer. Each time the ball is dispensed, the positioning position is different each time. This makes it possible to disperse the adhesion positions of dust and dust by making the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 different each time. Also, if the above-described speed reduction ratio n of the rotation transmitting member is set to cause such a positioning error, the error accumulates, but even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 does not move. The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 shown in FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, by changing the rotation position of the ball feed rotation unit that receives and sends out the game balls every time the game balls are paid out, the position where the dust and the dust are attached is dispersed, so that the ball and the dust are dispersed. On the other hand, a strong payout device 580 can be provided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the progress of the effect is based on the ordinary lottery result, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. 180 is provided as an effect control means capable of controlling the image processing. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a metal shield plate 1540 shown in FIG. 180 is used as a first shield, and a metal back cover and a conductive coating part in the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 184 are used as a second shield. 184 conductive elastic members 1545. The metal shield plate 1540 is formed of a metal as a conductive member. The metal back cover in effect display device 1600 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The conductive elastic member 1545 is formed by covering the surface of the foam 1545b shown in FIG. 184 as a conductive material with a conductive covering portion 1545a shown in FIG. 184 as a core material formed of the elastic member.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically conductive. They are electrically connected via an elastic member 1545.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 formed of the conductive member and the metal back cover of the effect display 1600. At the same time, the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced. With the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. 126, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 126, and the tank rail 553 of FIG. 126 are provided. The game board 5 is provided with a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 126 on the rear side as a box body to which the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 126 is attached as a board box. The ball tank 552 can store game balls. The tank rail 553 allows the game balls stored in the ball tank 552 to flow downstream.

  The effect control unit 1500 as a board box is housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. In the tank rail 553, a cutout portion 553aa in FIG. 126 is formed as a hole through which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the flowing game ball B can drop. The game board 5 has an upper wall 3010 a disposed below the tank rail 553 as an upper surface of a back box 3010 of a back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 when attached to the pachinko machine 1. In this pachinko machine 1, foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received on the upper wall 3010a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. .

  As described above, foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5, so that foreign matter can be received. Even if it falls from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the falling foreign matter from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. Thus, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to a foreign object falling on the effect control unit 1500 as a board box housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189 is provided as a power supply means capable of generating various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall outside the game machine. I have.

  The power supply substrate 630 includes a plurality of components having the same shape, and the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 of FIG. 189 having the same package type (TO-220F). , D10. On the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, among a plurality of components having the same shape, the silk-printed TSLK9 of FIG. 189 is silk-printed so that it can be distinguished from the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  Specifically, as the silk printing of the FET Q5, which is a specific component, the silk printing TSLK9 of FIG. 192 (b) is silk-printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 of FIG. 189 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 of FIG. 189 are silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8 of FIG. Silk printed. In the silk print TSLK9, a white oblique line ad1, which does not exist in the silk prints TSLK1 to TSLK8, is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  As described above, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, Even if D10 is provided on the power supply board 630, among a plurality of components having the same shape, the silk-printed TSLK9 for the FET Q5, which is a specific component, is replaced with FETs Q1, Q2, which are other components excluding the specific component. Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are silk-printed so as to be distinguished from each other. Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. There. Therefore, a notable part can be distinguished from other parts among a plurality of parts.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The game can be advanced based on the like, and it is possible to perform light emission control on ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 provided on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 201 as light emitting means. As a possible light emission control means, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba provided on the lower left decorative board 402b of FIG. 201 and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are provided. As a strip-shaped decorative substrate formed in a predetermined shape, the left side of the door frame in FIG. And a left side under the decorative board 402b which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the Id decorative body 404.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and each side thereof extends along both ends in the longitudinal direction of the belt-shaped lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. They are arranged to be non-parallel. Specifically, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. 203 are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end 402beg1 and the right end 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Is arranged as.

  As described above, the strip-shaped lower left side decorative substrate 402b includes the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx having a substantially rectangular planar shape, and includes the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bax. Each side of the current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be non-parallel along the both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower left decorative substrate 402b. Accordingly, compared to a case where the sides of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are arranged in parallel along both longitudinal sides of the strip-shaped lower left decorative substrate 402b. Since a region sandwiched between the both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower side lower decorative substrate 402b and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be formed large, Wiring can be drawn out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx, and can be electrically connected to ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Therefore, in the strip-shaped lower left decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring is drawn out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The game can be progressed based on the above, etc., and LED mounting in which hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs provided on the lower left decorative board 402b of FIG. 202 (a) having a surface 402bx and an LED non-mounting surface 402by on which the light emitting means is not mounted.

  The left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist as a white coating film, and dashed lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 in FIG. 203 (a) as mounting auxiliary symbols (in FIG. 203 (a), dashed lines corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full-color LEDs). Only the LSLK4 and LSLK5 are shown respectively) and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 203A (FIG. 203 (a) shows the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are the full-color LEDs) Only certain LEDs 4 and 5 are shown). The white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and the entire surface of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The mounting auxiliary symbols specify the chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. A part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, corresponds to a predetermined color different from the white resist on the white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b. Or black).

  As described above, the auxiliary lines (that is, the chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. The number specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full color LEDs of 203 (a) (that is, the part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is the full color LED) is the LED non-display of the lower side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. On the white resist on the mounting surface 402by, a paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist is formed in yellow (or black). That is, a white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a), and the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. The auxiliary lines shown (that is, the yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) and the numbers identifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 203A (that is, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and No corresponding yellow (or black) part number) is formed. Therefore, the numbers specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 203A (that is, the yellow (or black) part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full-color LEDs) and the full color in FIG. Auxiliary lines (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, can be made difficult for the player to see.

  Further, the white resist formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a) is formed by the light emission of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs in FIG. 202 (a). ), The reflectivity of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b can be increased. 203 (a), and auxiliary lines (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. LSLK10), the full color shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance in the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a) of light emitted hdLED1~hdLED10 is ED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a) from decreasing due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 202 (a).

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 13) 1510) is provided with a power supply board 630 shown in FIG. The power supply board 630 includes the fuse FUSE1 of FIG. 195 as a fuse, the surge absorber SA1 of FIG. 195 as a surge voltage absorbing element, the rectifier circuit 630c of FIG. 195 as a rectifier circuit, and the power supply creating circuit 630f ′ of FIG. 195 as power supply means. I have. The fuse FUSE1 can receive an AC power from an island facility in a game hall as an external device of the game machine. The surge absorber SA1 is capable of absorbing a surge voltage of an AC power supply input via the fuse FUSE1. The rectifier circuit 630c can rectify an AC power input through the surge absorber SA1 into a DC power. The power supply creation circuit 630f 'can supply power to various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 based on a DC power supply input via the rectifier circuit 630c.

  When a commercial power supply voltage (100 V AC) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for a game machine (24 V AC) is input as an AC power supply from the island facilities of the game hall via the fuse FUSE1, the surge absorber SA1 reduces the surge voltage to an allowable voltage. When the fuse FUSE1 is broken, the circuit is short-circuited and a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1, thereby forming a circuit for blowing the fuse FUSE1.

  As described above, when the commercial power supply voltage (100V AC) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for the game machine (24V AC) is input to the surge absorber SA1 through the fuse FUSE1, as the AC power supply from the island facility in the game hall, the surge voltage is increased. Is broken when the voltage exceeds the allowable voltage, so that a short circuit occurs and a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1, thereby forming a circuit for blowing the fuse FUSE1. As a result, even if the power cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (100 V AC), the power supply board 630 is destroyed. However, it is possible to reliably prevent various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply substrate 630 from being broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed when a commercial power supply voltage (AC 100 V) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for gaming machines (AC 24 V) is supplied.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The game can be advanced based on the like, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 provided on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 202A as light emitting means are provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx. There is provided a left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) to be mounted.

  The lower left lower decorative substrate 402b has a solid white resist as a white coating film and a connector LDUCN of FIG. 202A as a connector. The white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs having a package of the same color as the white coating or a color that can be determined to be the same color, and the same color or the same color as the white coating And a connector LDUCN having a housing of a distinguishable color. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-painted with a white resist, and the packages of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are white (the color is recognized to be the same color as white). The connector LDUCN is made of a white resin (also referred to as a natural color, a color recognized to be the same color as the white (natural color)). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-painted) are mounted, and are white. An electronic component such as a resistor or a capacitor (not shown) that does not have a connector or a connector that does not have a white color is not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b at all.

  In this manner, a white coating (that is, a white resist) is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. Has a package of the same color or a color that can be identified as the same color as the hdd1 to hdLED10, and a housing of the same color as the white coating film (that is, the white resist) or a color that can be identified as the same color. Since the connector LDUCN and the connector LDUCN are respectively mounted, hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and even if the connector LDUCN is mounted, the LED of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b The entire surface of the mounting surface 402bx is a white paint film (that is, a white resist) It has the same color or colors that can be identified as the same color. This can contribute to making the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b a bright light emitting surface. Therefore, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can be a bright light emitting surface.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gate portion 2003 of FIG. 130 in the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 of FIG. 130, four general winning openings 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting. A gate sensor 2506, a general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, etc. And a game can be advanced based on a detection signal from the detecting means.

  Among the plurality of entrances, for example, the first initiation opening 2002 and the second activation opening 2004 as the entrances having similar uses are a first activation opening sensor 3002 and a second activation opening sensor 2402 which are detection means corresponding to the second activation opening 2004. Are provided differently. Specifically, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. In addition, a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. As described above, the gate sensor 2506, which is a detection means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 as an entrance similar in use to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, is provided on the game board 5 as described above. A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball B received in the winning opening 2005, a general winning opening sensor 2401 and 3001 for detecting a gaming ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the game board 5. Along with various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided in the panel relay board 1710, they are electrically connected and aggregated, and are connected to the main control board via one connector. 1310 is electrically connected.

  As described above, among the plurality of entrances, for example, as the entrances having similar uses, the first starting port 2002, the first starting port sensor 3002 which is the detecting means corresponding to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port Since the connectors of the starting port sensor 2402 are provided with different shapes, for example, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port which are detection means corresponding to the second starting port 2004 as entrance ports having similar uses. The erroneous connection of the connector of the sensor 3002 and the connector of the second starting port sensor 2402 can be prevented. The gate sensor 2506 which is a detection means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 as a ball entrance similar in use to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 includes a large winning port sensor 2403, a general winning port sensor 2401, Along with the various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3001 and the magnetic sensor 3003, they are electrically connected and integrated in the panel relay board 1710, and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector. That is, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 which are the entrances having similar uses, and the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 which are the detecting means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 and the gate Misconnection of the connector of the sensor 2506 can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous connection can be prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 132 as the game control means, the ball tank 552 in FIG. 13 as the ball tank, and the ball guide path in FIG. The ball guiding unit 570 includes a payout device 580 shown in FIG. 13 as a payout device.

  The main control board 1310 is mounted with the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 154 as a game control microprocessor, and the main control MPU 1310a is configured based on a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result as a lottery result by lottery means. In addition, the game can be advanced, and the function display unit 1400 can be displayed and controlled as a display unit provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 5 in FIG. is there. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, and the main control MPU 1310a executes the main control timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing of step S114 in step S114, when the lottery result is based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created as the first special lottery result. If the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 2402, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created as the second special lottery result, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the special symbol is displayed. Is determined based on the random number for the variation display pattern described above, and the variation display pattern of the determined special symbol is determined. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the following. Is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

  The ball tank 552 is arranged above the game board 5 and can store game balls. The ball guiding unit 570 is arranged near the game board 5 and can guide the game balls stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side via the tank rail 553 in FIG. The payout device 580 is arranged near the game board 5 and based on a payout instruction (an instruction to pay out game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633) guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Can be paid out.

  The wiring FCBL shown in FIG. 154 is a ball tank 552 as a wiring for electrically connecting the connector MFCN for the function display unit shown in FIG. 154 as a connector provided on the main control board 1310 and a connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400. , A ball guiding unit 570, and a payout device 580. The game balls are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 in which game balls can stay, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 and the surrounding area. That is, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the connector MFCN for function display unit provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is under an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise. .

  The main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 and the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance. More specifically, the main control MPU 1310a arranges the function display unit connector MFCN below a center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is provided in an environment that is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 and the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance dimension (that is, as described above). Although the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged above this center line). May be attenuated so as not to affect the main control MPU 1310a. It has been cut way. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 132 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the press operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 300 in FIG. As the effect members, the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 of FIG. 23, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, etc. The underside production unit 3100, the underside production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3 provided in the game board 5 As a first-type light-emitting means used for light emission of various units on the game board side such as 00, a rendering operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 in FIG. 23, a door frame left side unit 400, a door frame right side unit 410, and a door Various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side such as the frame top unit 450, the underside production unit 3100, the underside production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3400 provided in the game board 5 in FIG. The various LEDs provided in the various units on the game board side, and other rendering members different from this rendering member are used for light emission of the light guide plate 2601 in the panel plate 1110 of FIG. 143 and the rendering unit 2600 of FIG. As two kinds of light emitting means, a plurality of panel decoration LEs for irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 in FIG. 143. 1130a, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first picture 2610 that are illuminated and decorated by making light incident from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2621 for the two patterns 2620, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a as the second kind light emitting means, a plurality of LEDs 2611, and various types provided in the door frame side various units as the first kind light emitting means and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs 2621. Brightness adjustment means that can adjust the brightness of the LED and the various LEDs provided in the various units on the game board side based on the operation by the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303) as the operation means. The operation of step S1014 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. And an output operation unit monitoring process and a lamp pallet setting process performed as one process of the received command analysis process in step S1022.

  The lamp pallet setting process, which is a brightness adjusting unit, is a demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state of a player) with the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), which is the operation unit, within a predetermined period. And during the production of the effect, as a plurality of specified luminance values, based on the operation performed on the first specified luminance value to the thirty-first specified luminance value, corresponding to one specified luminance value, as a normal luminance set value Various LEDs provided for door frame side various units as first type light emitting means and various types of LEDs provided for game board side various units by selecting a normal pallet value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. Of the LED used as indirect light as a special brightness setting value different from the normal brightness setting value. Select special pallets value of the second kind light emitting means is a plurality of panels decorative LED1130a, thereby making it possible to set the brightness of the plurality of LED2611, and a plurality of LED2621.

  Specifically, in the lamp pallet setting process, for example, a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise, and the current brightness temporarily becomes the minimum brightness ( When the brightness is set to the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is the next highest after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is turned off, the first brightness specification value is shifted to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light are increased along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve). On the other hand, when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the current luminance is set to the maximum luminance, the first luminance is changed from the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance to the first luminance. The luminance of the LED used as the indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as the direct light are calculated according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve) toward a constant value. Change to lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303), which is the operation means, is operated during a demonstration (demonstration effect performed in a waiting state for a player) or during an effect in a predetermined period. Based on the result, the brightness of the LED used as direct light, which is the normal brightness setting value, corresponding to one of the first to 31st brightness specifying values, which is the plurality of brightness specifying values, The normal pallet value set for is selected and set as the brightness of the various LEDs provided in the door frame side various units as the first type light emitting means, and the various LEDs provided in the game board side various units, A special pallet value set for the luminance of the LED used as indirect light, which is a special luminance setting value, is selected and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 11 as the second kind light emitting means are selected. 0a, is adapted to be set as the luminance of the plurality of LED2611, and a plurality of LED2621. Thereby, the player operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) as the operation means within a predetermined period of time (demonstration performed in a waiting state of the player) and progress of the effect. By operating the inside, the various types of LEDs provided in the door frame side various units, which are the first type light emitting means, and the various types of LEDs provided in the game board side various units, so that the desired brightness is obtained, The brightness of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, the plurality of LEDs 2611, and the plurality of LEDs 2621, which are seed light emitting units, can be set. Therefore, the brightness can be easily adjusted.

[19. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment at all, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body Although the shape of each of the front views 3420 is shown as an equilateral triangle, the shape is not limited to this, and for example, “square”, “hexagon”, “octagon”, “sector”, “star” Shape ", etc.

  Also, in the above-described embodiment, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are each provided with one movable decorative body. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of movable decorative bodies may be provided on the upper back moving arm 3230.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the back left movement arm 3330 and the back right movement arm each include two movable decorative bodies are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the back left movement arm 3330 and the back The right moving arm 3430 may be provided with one or three or more movable decorative bodies.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative bodies (the lower movable decorative body 3110 and the upper movable decorative body 3210) of the lower back effect unit 3100 and the upper back effect unit 3200 are in the standby position and the first union with the same posture. Although it is shown that it moves between the positions, the present invention is not limited to this, but in the lower back production unit 3100 and the back upper production unit 3200, the movable posture changes between the standby position and the first united position. It may be a decorative body.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative bodies of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right rendering unit 3400 (the upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable unit) The decorative body 3420) changes the posture and moves between the standby position and the first united position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the back left production unit 3300 and the back right production unit 3400 may be used. Alternatively, the movable decorative body may be moved between the standby position and the first combined position without changing the posture.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with plugs for the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a socket for the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a socket for the special connector SCN4. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals can be correspondingly a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, since various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector serving as a plug (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, a peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector serving as a socket (or a special connector serving as a plug). Special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signals are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, a liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) when serving as a socket. Special connector).

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin. It may be formed by molding opaque black as a resin, or may be formed by translucent coloring if the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 are made of a conductive resin. It may be. Even with such a configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the above-described peripheral control board is provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as the 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with pan head screws made of metal, as described above, the circuit ground is established to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. Can be configured. As a result, noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can flow to the ground (GND) of various substrates as circuit ground to remove the noise.

  In the above-described embodiment, the dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. May be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 222 is a cutaway rear cross-sectional view of a dispensing device provided with a dispensing blade 589 having four arcuate blade pieces 589a and provided with a radio wave sensor, which is a modification of the dispensing device. FIG. 222 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing unit of the dispensing unit corresponding to FIG. In the case where the discharge blade 589 has four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, not shown in FIG. 222, the above-described discharge gear member 588 is a flat plate-like detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. Four 588b are provided at 90 ° circumferential intervals in the circumferential direction, and a 90 ° circumferential area of the dispensing gear member 588 is defined as a 45 ° area where the detecting piece 588b is formed as a light-shielding range. It is managed by a total of 18 step rotations including the 9 step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and the 9 step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 45 ° area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range. Thus, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the payout of one game ball B is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps. In other words, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission gear 585 can rotate the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 by 90 degrees when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the number of teeth of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 has the payout detection sensor 591 attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a and detecting the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor for detecting a radio wave may be provided near the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, and detects the passing of the game ball B. However, when affected by radio waves, the game ball B actually passes. Nevertheless, it is possible to make it appear that the gaming ball B has not passed due to malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633, to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input, determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and By performing control to rotate the rotation axis of 584 excessively, a large amount of game balls B are paid out. As shown in FIG. 222, the payout device 580 includes a radio wave sensor 594 in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591 in order to detect such a fraudulent act of acquiring the game ball B illegally (referred to as “radio wave goto”). Can be provided. The detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633. When the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is emitted based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, The rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit radio wave goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 changes the radio-wave goto notification command from the 8-bit width to the 16-bit width and sets the radio-wave goto warning sound to the maximum volume. At the same time, various LEDs are set to be in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that flashes red), and the signal is shaped so as to be able to notify the radio wave goto and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the radio wave goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message, "An abnormality has occurred," and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode. I do.

  Note that, instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passing sensor 594 'which is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch may be used. The detection signal from the contact type ball passage sensor 594 'is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 outputs the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the detection signal from the contact type ball passage sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of balls that have paid out the game balls B does not match, it can be determined that some kind of fraud has been performed. When the payout control board 633 determines that any wrongdoing has been performed, the payout control board 633 urgently stops the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the goto notification command having an 8-bit width from the payout control board 633, the goto notification command is changed from the 8-bit width to the 16-bit width, the goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume, and various types of speakers are used. At the same time, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that blinks red), and the LED is shaped to indicate that a goto can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When receiving the goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a large message “An abnormality has occurred” on the effect display device 1600 and controls the various LEDs to the warning notification light emission mode. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is step-rotated at a predetermined angle of 18 degrees according to the step drive. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is connected to the drive gear 585, the first transfer gear 586, the second transfer gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, which constitute a rotation transmitting member. , The rotation of the payout blade 589, but the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated at a low speed so that the rotation transmitting member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, The second transmission gear 587 ′, the payout gear 588a ′) of the payout gear member 588) may be configured to increase the speed and rotate the payout blade 589. In this case, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is determined in advance so that the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmitting member is not an integer. Each time one ball is paid out, the positioning position is different each time. This makes it possible to disperse the adhesion positions of dust and dust by making the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 different each time. When the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmitting member is set such that such a positioning error occurs, the error accumulates. However, even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is dispensed, the dispensing blade 589 does not. The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the dispensing gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game balls is changed every time the game balls are paid out, and the dust and dust are changed. By dispersing the positions where the particles adhere, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust and dust.

  In the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the predetermined distance is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. Space is the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate. A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) between the bottom surface of the shield plate 1540a and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540; And a second space 1505b having a second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the present embodiment) between itself and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension at the second predetermined height. A case where a large effect unit (an electric drive source or a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effector and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5 and is in a depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height and the distance dimension at the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension at the predetermined height, The distance dimension at the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension at the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against the electromagnetic wave noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by the electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, and to prevent heat in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components and the like that emit light, heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal shield plate 1540d, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. And the model (or management number), the state of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the contents (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized. Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, Part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data ROM The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. (For example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) of the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540d. Note that, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. . In addition, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A rectangular opening may be provided at a position of a metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to an area larger than the area formed by the special connector SCN3, or a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. The position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening in.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed singly or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side. . Even with such a configuration, a foreign substance (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling on various substrates in the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed via the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B falls toward the inside of the game device, the foreign matter that falls on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505 is electrically connected to the board. This is because the probability of occurrence of a trouble increases.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this way, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a rise in the temperature of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) falling toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and entering, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to drop onto various substrates. This is because the probability that an electric trouble due to a foreign matter will occur increases.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage on which the game ball B rolls, similarly to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 shown in FIG. 110 having a single guide path 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, the metal of the game ball B in the guide path 570a A notch, hole, or groove capable of removing powder from the guiding passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 of the guiding unit 570 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 110, a payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 has a board on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 has a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 111, and various boards are arranged. For this reason, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates disposed below the guidance unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed by projecting rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear cover 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. 103, and can be formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be formed and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be shifted, and both can be adopted. It can also be configured. In addition, the eave-shaped member is moved rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. The power supply board cover 631, the dispensing control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be formed by protruding the power supply board cover 631, the positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. And the position can be shifted, or both can be adopted. It should be noted that the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the dispensing control board box 632 of the dispensing control board 633, and the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635 shown in FIG. This can also prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310 disposed below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 is disposed at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 becomes an eave, By arranging an eave-shaped member corresponding to 1300 or not forming a ventilation hole in a cover side wall provided on the upper side of main control unit 1300, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of game ball B from adhering.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g are provided on one power supply board 630. Although various electronic components and the like have been provided, it may be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 illustrated in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , Fuse FUSE3 and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages, such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V, created on the second power supply board 630 </ b> B are supplied from the second power supply board 630 </ b> B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630 </ b> A. You.

  Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 195 in the above-described embodiment may be configured by being divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the micro gap type arrester AL1, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B mainly includes the connector A, and the circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, the relay drive circuit 630i, and the relay RL1 shown in FIG. It mainly comprises a thermistor TH1, a choke coil L2, a fuse FUSE3, and a wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages, such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V, created on the second power supply board 630 </ b> B are supplied from the second power supply board 630 </ b> B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630 </ b> A. You.

  In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 203, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is A configuration is adopted in which the left side edge 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into a group 1 and a group 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can be applied to a slender plate-shaped decorative board provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 include a decorative board provided in various effect units of the game board 5.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by flowing a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green and the like. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

  In the above-described embodiment, the DC terminal +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the provided linear power supply (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 200) is used for LED lighting within the allowable current range of the linear power supply. May be used. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, at most one single-color LED (for example, within the allowable current range of the linear power supply for one output channel) (for example, When an LED (excluding a red LED) is electrically connected, an internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by a linear power supply is configured to be input to the anode terminal of the single-color LED. The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat spreading resistor of the heat spreading circuit described above. Further, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, When the red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last-stage LED is connected. It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat distribution resistor of the above-described heat distribution circuit. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, DC +12 V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 of the constant current drive circuit are input. ~ LG8, LB1 ~ LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full-color LED is electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the above heat dispersion circuit. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is two or three. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, instead of +12 V DC from the power supply board 630, +35 V DC from the power supply board 630 is used as a voltage for lighting the LED. May be. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door. In the state where the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative board is large. The land pattern is arranged such that the side edges of the land pattern are parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Of the frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, any one decorative board and any two decorative boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. The door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of the other right decorative board on which, for example, two full-color LEDs are mounted, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein, in addition to the full color LED provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may be directly connected to another left decorative board on which one full-color LED is mounted, for example, by an LED constant current drive circuit provided therein, in addition to the full color LED provided therein. Light emission may be controlled.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED frame is provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are solid-coated with a white resist, but may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates are entirely printed by white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged, are used as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various decorative boards provided on the decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided. On the non-LED mounting surface, the areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates were printed as silk prints with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively. (I.e., when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line)), add the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the auxiliary line. It may be configured to specify the mounting orientation.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 is provided. However, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged at least separated by the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensors). In this case, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402 including two sensors (double sensors) of the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b. , The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as the game ball, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and reported in the fraud detection processing of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt processing of FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a game hall clerk can perform radio wave irradiation. Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor subside. After passing through 2402b, it is detected by the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), while the second starting port sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  As described above, this panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 in addition to the detection signal from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b. A first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting one starting port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B passing through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a special winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 are provided. A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general winning opening sensor 2401 or 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, and a second game port provided on the game board 5. Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near one start port 2002 are connected via respective connectors. While being aggregated is connected, via one of the connectors is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b to the panel relay board 1710, and the second starting port sensor slave is used. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710. Thereby, the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b can be electrically connected to their own counterparts. In the manufacturing process, the worker of the line needs two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) between two wirings from the 2402b and an incorrect wiring. In the case of confirmation, when the wiring is temporarily removed and returned by maintenance, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b Two and wiring al, miswiring that operational error (wiring that insert mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 provided in the attacker unit 2400 are provided. The connector for electrically connecting each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710 has been selected to have the same shape, but there are four general connectors. In the case of contributing to the progress of a game or a change in performance due to a ball entering the winning opening 2001, a general winning opening sensor 3001a for detecting a game ball B received in each of three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200. , 3001b and 3001c, and two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401. General winning hole sensors 3001a, 3001b, respectively and two wiring from 3001C, connector shape may be respectively different. By doing so, it is possible to provide a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the corresponding wiring. In the manufacturing process, the line operator ensures that the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are erroneously wired (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall checks the presence / absence of impropriety, and when the wiring is temporarily removed and restored by maintenance, the general winning opening sensor 2401, An operation mistake of incorrectly wiring two wirings from each of 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c. Wiring errors) that inserted mistake can be reliably prevented. In the case where a configuration is adopted in which two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710. Are different from each other in the shape of the connector. As described above, this is a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the corresponding wiring. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the line operator may make an error in the manufacturing process such as erroneous wiring of each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c (wiring error such as incorrect insertion). ) Can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall receives a general prize when checking for fraud or when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to its original state. Incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the mouth sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, 3001c Cormorant work miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2506. However, similar to the first starting port sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor subside 2506b May be configured with two sensors (double sensors) that are arranged at least apart from each other by the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. In this case, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, by adopting the gate sensor 2506 composed of two sensors (double sensors) of the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor subside 2506b, the gate unit 2003 is provided. The game ball B that has passed through can be detected reliably. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as the game ball, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and reported in the fraud detection processing of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt processing of FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a game hall clerk can perform radio wave irradiation. Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2506a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2506a, and is detected by the gate sensor subside 2506b by passing through the gate sensor subside 2506b. Will be done. Further, detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor slave side 2506b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). Has been). The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2506b is input to the main control input circuit 1310b. Is input to an input terminal PC0 of an input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a (this input port is composed of 8 bits).

  Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the detection signal from the gate sensor subside 2506b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. Therefore, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a to the panel relay board 1710, and two connectors from the gate sensor slave side 2506b. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring to the panel relay board 1710. Accordingly, a physical structure in which two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b can be electrically connected to the corresponding one of itself. In the manufacturing process, the line operator may incorrectly connect two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b in the manufacturing process. Work mistakes (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, staff at the game hall, such as clerks at the game hall, temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. When returning to the original position, two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2506a and two wirings from the gate sensor slave side 2506b are mistaken. Work that line Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector has a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. Although a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310, the first starting Four wires, which are a combination of two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, are configured as one connector. Alternatively, a single connector composed of the four wires may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310. In this case, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310, and a connector from the second starting port sensor 2402 Since the connector that electrically connects the wires to the main control board 1310 and the connector that electrically connects the wires to the main control board 1310 can be configured as one connector composed of four wires without being provided separately, In the manufacturing process, the worker of the line has two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402. In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion), and at the game hall, staff at the game hall and other staff members confirm whether there is any fraud. In the case where the wiring is temporarily removed and returned by maintenance, two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) due to erroneous wiring between the two wirings.

  Further, by adopting this aspect, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 is provided. However, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged at least separated by the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensors). In this case, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402 including two sensors (double sensors) of the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b. , The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as the game ball, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and reported in the fraud detection processing of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt processing of FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a game hall clerk can perform radio wave irradiation. Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor subside. After passing through 2402b, it is detected by the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. Also, two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a forming the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a forming the second starting port sensor 2402. And four wirings are configured as one connector, and one connector composed of the four wirings is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), while the second starting port sensor The detection signal from the slave 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  As described above, this panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 in addition to the detection signal from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b. A first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting one starting port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B passing through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a special winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 are provided. A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general winning opening sensor 2401 or 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, and a second game port provided on the game board 5. Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near one start port 2002 are connected via respective connectors. While being aggregated is connected, via one of the connectors is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Further, by adopting this aspect, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. Are electrically connected to each other, so that a total of four wires including two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are used. The connector may be configured as one connector, and one connector including the four wires may be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. In this case, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b forming the first starting port sensor 3002 to the panel relay board 1710 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are formed. A connector that electrically connects the two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710 is not a separate entity, but a single connector composed of four wires. In the manufacturing process, the line worker needs two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) due to incorrect wiring between a book wiring and a staff of a game hall in a game hall. In order to confirm the presence or absence of fraud, when the wiring is temporarily removed and returned by maintenance, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) due to erroneous wiring between the two wirings.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400, respectively. The connector for electrically connecting each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710 has been selected to have the same shape, but there are four general connectors. In the case of contributing to the progress of the game or a change in the performance as the ball enters the winning opening 2001, a general winning opening sensor 3001a that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200, respectively. , 3001b and 3001c, and two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401. And two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c, respectively, to constitute eight wirings as one connector (single connector). One connector may be configured to be electrically connected to panel relay board 1710. In this case, the physical structure is such that the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are not separated from each other but are one connector composed of eight wires. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can make an error in the manufacturing process, such as incorrect wiring of the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c (wiring error of incorrect insertion). In the amusement hall, clerks such as clerks at the amusement hall may use the general winning opening when checking for fraud or when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to its original state. Work of incorrect wiring of each of the two wires from the sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c Vinegar (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented. It should be noted that eight wirings including the two wirings from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, 3001c are combined into one connector (single connector). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one connector composed of these eight wires is electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710. Even with such a configuration, as described above, one connector composed of eight wires without using the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c separately. In the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line refers to the incorrect wiring of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c in the manufacturing process. Work mistakes (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, staff at the game hall, such as clerks, temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. In the case of returning to the original state, two of each of the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, Mis task of wiring errors of wiring (interconnection of cuttings mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected from the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When it is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of vertical lines are formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When they are routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, they are bent from the upper side to the left side. And is bent downward again on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is vertically bent along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by being gathered by the formed wiring processing pieces. When it is drawn downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, and the connector MFCN for the function display unit along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. May be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-described first wiring separation distance dimension. Of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the main control MPU 1310a to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a. Because, in the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the game board 5 is located below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. With this arrangement, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are mounted, and when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to the electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are removed. This is because the wiring may intrude into the wiring FCBL that is disposed below and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310.

  Note that, in a case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected to each other through the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform, it has been found that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above. It is designed to pass signals having a waveform width.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, as described above, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can be given. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. If a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected from the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When it is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of vertical lines are formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Although the wiring FCBLs collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent toward the left side at the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, the lower sides of the peripheral control unit 1500 are temporarily wrapped. The game panel 1 is routed along the side and gathered by the lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The main control unit 1300 is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the lower side of 00 and is moved downward along the left side of the main control substrate box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. When it is routed toward the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the right side, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. When electrically connected to the connector MFCN, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may affect the peripheral control unit 1500.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, as shown in FIG. 182, connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged. . Various wirings respectively corresponding to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are electrically connected. For this reason, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL intersect or contact with each other (straddling arrangement), so that electromagnetic noise entering the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. , The effect image is drawn on the effect display device 1600 under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise that intrudes into the line FCBL (for example, the disturbance of the pattern such as a black screen is caused). Occurs).

  Therefore, the wiring FCBL does not cross around the wiring FCBL so that the wiring FCBL does not run along the lower part of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500) (various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9). It is preferable to configure so as not to be in a contact arrangement (a straddling arrangement). For example, as a method of laying out the wiring FCBL in which the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL do not intersect or come into contact with each other (a straddling arrangement), an illustration provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is shown. When the wiring FCBL electrically connected through a connector which is not connected is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, the wiring FCBL is bent from the upper side to the left side, On the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent again downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is combined with a plurality of wiring processing pieces vertically formed along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 to play the game. Before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the panel 1100, the substrate holder 1200 is bent and When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the 1200 is pulled downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and is bent. After being routed below the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side, it may be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-described first wiring separation distance dimension. Through the space having the distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Because, in the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the game board 5 is located below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. With this arrangement, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are mounted, and when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to the electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are removed. This is because the wiring may intrude into the wiring FCBL that is disposed below and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310.

  Note that, in a case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected to each other through the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform, it has been found that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above. It is designed to pass signals having a waveform width.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, as described above, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can be given. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. If a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, but above the center line. Although the main control MPU 1310a is arranged in the above, the positional relationship is reversed, and the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged above the center line. In this case, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310. Even with such a configuration, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged at a distance from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. The connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a can be prevented from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via a space separated from the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is connected to the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When it is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed in a plurality of vertical directions along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 and assembled on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 is gathered by the respective wiring processing pieces 3011. It was routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Had been placed. As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a single guiding path for the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out game balls B guided by the payout control board 633 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward. And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. In other words, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed in this manner is located in front of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full tank path unit 610 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Had been arranged. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which the electromagnetic noise can enter, in addition to the wiring of the wiring FCBL, the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 , So as not to be routed in a wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 (or formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200). After being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN, the electric power is transferred to the function display unit connector MFCN so as not to be housed and routed along the wiring housing groove. It may be configured to be connected to each other.

  In the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, but a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided in this area instead of the function display unit 1400. A decorative board to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “wirings”) that are electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the decorative substrate, for example, with reference to FIG. 132. To be more specific, when the game board 5 is routed from the upper right corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side are combined together, bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and connected to the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). After the wiring is drawn down to the bottom, the wiring can be electrically connected to this connector. When it is routed from the upper corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. And bent together toward the right side below the peripheral control unit 1500 by the plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. After the wiring is routed below the connector of the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) to be connected, the wiring is electrically connected to this connector.

  In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring is routed by such a wiring routing method is the payout attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Since it is arranged in front of the unit 560 or in the vicinity (below) of the ball tank 552, as described above, there is a possibility that electromagnetic noise enters the wiring.

  Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 arranges the connector below the center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, whereas the center control line 1510a By disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a above, the peripheral control IC 1510a is separated from the connector on the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged at a distance from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the peripheral control IC 1510a through the space separated at 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. On the control board 1510, or in a space where the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510, electromagnetic wave noise that enters through this wiring can be attenuated. Also in this regard, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Although the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are directly and electrically connected by wiring, the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It is also possible to configure so that the connection is established. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710 be provided with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring (that is, a plurality of wirings that transmit a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the decorative board). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise.) Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring from affecting the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  In addition, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be cited. Are inserted so as to be connected in series, respectively, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings. When a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into a plurality of wirings, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. Circuits configured in combination may be inserted respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL electrically connected via the connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131. 132, as shown in FIG. 132, when it is bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, it is bent toward the rear surface of the rear box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the rear box 3010, and becomes close together with the above-described wiring FCBL ( (Or in a contact state), when it is pulled up to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and formed in a plurality in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Each of the wiring processing pieces 3011 is collected, but from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and the back box 3010 When it is routed to the upper side of the surface, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and is bent again below the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 When they are gathered by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the side and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 moves to the right side. After being bent toward the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and being routed to above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector. You may make it. In this case, various wirings electrically connected to connectors CN2 to CN9 shown in FIG. 182 are routed along the lower side of peripheral control unit 1500, not shown, to be separated from the upper side of drive board unit 1700. . As a result, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect or contact (straddle) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 As a positional relationship between the mounting position of the IC (the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 154) and the mounting position of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged above the center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. . In other words, by disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other. can do. Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the noise of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the above-described embodiment, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left lower front decorative board) serves as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front decorative section 3312 (first decorative sections 3322, 3412, 3422). By using small electronic components (magnetic sensors) such as a 3321a, a back upper right decorative board 3411a, and a lower right front decorative board 3421a), a movable decorative body 3312 (first decorative section 3322, 3412, 3422) is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position), and the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312 (the magnet 3322a of the preceding decorative portion 3322, the magnet 3412a of the preceding decorative portion 3412, the preceding decorative portion). By detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a of the 3422, the preceding decorative portion 3312 (the preceding decorative portions 3322, 34) is detected. Identify and standby position the rotational position of 2,3422) (but had set situ), it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the approach of a magnet by the magnet Goto. This is because a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) such as a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left lower front decorative board 3321a, back upper right front decorative board 3411a, back right lower front decorative board 3421a) is first. In a situation where the step decoration section 3312 (first step decoration sections 3322, 3412, 3422) is continuously rotated, the magnet 3312 of the first step decoration section 3312 (the magnet 3322a of the first step decoration section 3322, the first step decoration section) intermittently. Although the magnets 3412a of the magnet 3412a and the magnet 3422a) of the preceding decorative portion 3422 should be detected, if the magnetism is continuously detected, the approach of an illegal magnet can be detected as a magnet. is there.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring UPCBL shown in FIG. 132 and the peripheral control board 1510 as wirings for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 as a specific rendering means among the plurality of rendering means. The wiring UPCBL among the wirings (not shown) for electrically connecting the substrate and the panel driving substrate 1720 is located near the ball supply means (at least one of the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580). I was going through. The wiring UPCBL of the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 is a decorative means other than the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and other decorative boards 184, 273 on the door frame side as other effect means. The wiring is formed so as not to intersect or contact the wiring forming the transmission path between the etc and the like and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, such a configuration can be adopted for various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310. For example, among various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310, a wiring passing in an environment strongly affected by electromagnetic noise and other wirings other than this wiring are arranged so as not to cross or contact with each other. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310) that can be operated by the high-frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator from being forcibly reset by the above-described built-in reset circuit. Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 as the ball supply means are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 200, which are reception ports provided in the game area 5a formed in the game area 5 and the game board 5 A ball collection device having a collection port for collecting game balls collected together with an out port 1008 provided in an out-port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a is provided, and the game balls collected by the ball collection device are sent to a ball launching device 540. A ball transport device for transporting the game ball toward the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 without paying out the game balls, the hitting ball launching device 540 and the game board 5 are divided. It is also possible to form a circulation path of the game balls by the game area 5a, the ball collection device, and the ball transport device to be configured to circulate a predetermined number of the game balls in a closed manner to play the game. .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back left upper base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which the back left upper base decorative board is attached. 3311a has a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the preceding-stage decorative portion 3312. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa to be mounted on the back upper left decorative board 3311a may be selected to be a side view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted to the back upper left base decorative board may be selected. A plurality of full-color LEs to be mounted on the back left upper front decorative board 3311a are selected as well as the view type. A top view type 3311aa may be selected, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back left upper base decorative board may be selected as a top view type and a back left upper front decorative board 3311a may be mounted. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa to be used may be of a top-view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs to be mounted on the back left upper base decorative board may be of a top-view type, and A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the decorative board 3311a may be of a side-view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower left back base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative section 3321 to which the back lower left base decorative board is mounted. Although the plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3322 are mounted on the 3321a, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower back left base decorative board are side-view type. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa mounted on the back lower left front-end decorative board 3321aa may be selected to be of a side view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back left lower base decorative board may be side-mounted. A plurality of full-color LEs to be mounted on the back left lower first-stage decorative board 3321a are selected as well as the view type. A top-view type 3321aa may be selected, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower back left base decorative board may be selected as a top-view type and a lower left lower front decorative board 3321a may be mounted. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa to be used may be of the top-view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back bottom lower-stage base board may be of the top-view type, and A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa mounted on the decorative board 3321a may be of a side-view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back upper right base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative section 3411 to which the back base right upper decorative board is attached. 3411a is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa that irradiate light toward the right side of the preceding decorative portion 3412. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the back upper right decorative board 3411a may be selected as a side view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right decorative board 3411a may be selected. A plurality of full-color LEs to be mounted on the back upper right decorative board 3411a are selected. 3411aa may be selected as a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decorative board may be selected as a top view type and mounted on the upper right front decorative board 3411a. The top view type may be selected as the plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa to be displayed, or the top view type may be selected as the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decorative board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3411a may be of a side-view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower right back base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3421 to which the back right lower base is mounted. The decorative board 3421a has a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa that emit light toward the right side of the preceding decorative section 3422 mounted thereon. And a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the back lower right front-end decorative board 3421a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the back right lower base decorative board may be selected. Of the side-view type full-color LED, and a plurality of full-color LEs mounted on the back lower right first-stage decorative board 3421a A top view type 3421aa may be selected, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back lower right base decorative board may be selected as a top view type and a back lower right front decorative board 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa to be mounted on the back side may be selected as a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower right bottom base decorative board may be selected as a top-view type. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the lower-right first-stage decorative board 3421a may be of a side-view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 as a specific rendering means of the plurality of rendering means (the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to each other). The wiring UPCBL shown in FIG. 132 and the wiring (not shown) for electrically connecting the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel driving board 1720 were used as the wiring forming the transmission path for the electrical connection). A wiring UPCBL ′, which is a connection cable electrically connected via a connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131, is routed so as to be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is also good. In this case, the wiring UPCBL ′ is a wiring that forms another transmission path that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (except for the upper left panel decoration board 1131, and as various effect means, various decoration boards 184 and 184 on the door frame side). 273, etc, etc., and a wiring forming a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510). Thereby, the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, that is, the connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are directly electrically connected. The wiring that forms the other transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 when the electromagnetic wave noise that has invaded the wiring UPCBL ′ to be connected (the transmission path between the other production means except for the specific production means and the control means) is formed. It is possible to prevent intrusion into the wiring to be formed (various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 of the peripheral control unit 1500). Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the underside rendering unit 3100, at least one of the plurality of conductors that, when electrostatically discharged, may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction. If the conductor has a large surface area compared to a predetermined surface area as a thing that may be damaged or damaged, it is brought into a state in which each is structurally contacted and fixed to conduct, for example, a metal backside The reinforcing plate for the moving arm and the metal sliding rail 3151 ns for the underside moving arm are attached to each other so as to be structurally in contact with each other and electrically connected to each other. One conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc, a metal housing of the lower back elevation drive motor 3151, a second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc for the lower rear production unit, The ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720, but instead of the metal casing of the lower back drive motor 3151, a metal screw is provided. Alternatively, the operation may be performed through a single metal screw, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal is fixed to an insulating substrate) may be provided, and the operation may be performed through the lug plate. Good. That is, these conductors are the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc for the underside effecting unit, the metal screw (or lug plate), the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc for the underside effecting unit, and the panel drive board 1720. It may be a path grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0 of FIG. A plurality of conductors provided in the back upper presentation unit 3200 can be similarly configured.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left rendering unit 3300, at least one of the plurality of conductors that, when electrostatically discharged, may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction. For example, the conductor of the back rail left arm sliding rail 3351 ns is made of a conductor for the back left effect unit, whereas the conductor has a larger surface area than the predetermined surface area as a conductor that may be damaged. One conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351nc, metal casing of back left traverse drive motor 3351, second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351fc for back left production unit, and resistance Rs2 of relay board 3351a provided in back left production unit 3300 The path is grounded to the ground (GND) via the. Alternatively, a metal screw may be provided, and the operation may be performed via the metal screw alone, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal is fixed to the insulating substrate) may be provided. You may make it perform through this lug board. In other words, the conductor of the metal back left moving arm slide rail 3351 ns includes the back left effect unit first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351 nc, the metal screw (or lug plate), the back left effect unit second conductor potential. The path may be grounded to the ground (GND) via the fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc and the resistor Rs2 of the relay board 3351a provided in the back left rendering unit 3300. A plurality of conductors provided in the back right presentation unit 3400 can be similarly configured.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left rendering unit 3300, at least one of the plurality of conductors that, when electrostatically discharged, may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and may malfunction. For example, the conductor of the back rail left arm sliding rail 3351 ns is made of a conductor for the back left effect unit, whereas the conductor has a larger surface area than the predetermined surface area as a conductor that may be damaged. One conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351nc, metal casing of back left traverse drive motor 3351, second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351fc for back left production unit, and resistance Rs2 of relay board 3351a provided in back left production unit 3300 The path is grounded to the ground (GND) through the relay board 3351a. When the resistor Rs2 is not provided and the resistor Rs2 is not provided, the resistor Rs2 ′ is provided on the panel drive board 1720 which is the upper board of the relay board 3351a, and one end of the resistor Rs2 ′ is connected to the ground (GND) of the panel drive board 1720. And the other end of the resistor Rs2 'is provided as a part of an electric wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the third conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring for the back left effect unit (the relay board 3351a and the panel driving board 1720). May be electrically connected to each other. In this case, the conductors of the metal back rail moving arm slide rail 3351ns are the first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351nc for the back left effect unit, the metal housing of the back left traversing drive motor 3351, and the back left effect unit. The panel drive board 1720 via the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351fc, the relay board 3351a provided on the back left production unit 3300, the third conductor potential variation prevention wiring for the back left production unit, and the resistance Rs2 'of the panel drive board 1720 Is a path grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal of the rear left / right moving drive slide motor 3351 is connected to the metal of the rear left / right moving arm slide rail 3351 ns via the back left effect unit first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3351 nc. Although it was electrically connected to the housing made of metal, the conductor of the slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm made of metal and other conductive members (for example, a structure used for improving rigidity, a drive mechanism) Mechanical parts, electric parts (including the housing of electric parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and structures molded with conductive resin (including decorative structures) Among the plurality of conductors may be electrically connected to each other by another crossover wiring. That is, a configuration in which two or more crossover wirings are used for electrical connection may be adopted. In this case, a plurality of conductors may be electrically connected to each other in a daisy chain with a crossover wiring, a plurality of conductors may be connected in series and in parallel by a crossover wiring, or a metal screw may be provided. The relay of the crossover wiring for electrically connecting one conductor to the other conductor may be performed via the metal screw alone, or a lug plate (metal lug terminal may be connected to the insulating substrate). May be provided through the lug plate. It is preferable that each of the plurality of crossover wirings is configured to have a shorter length.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, various drive motors provided in various rendering units such as the front rendering unit 2600, the back lower rendering unit 3100, the back upper rendering unit 3200, the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back right rendering unit 3400 are stepping. As the motor, a motor (servo motor) including a rotation detector such as an encoder may be used. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the servomotor is detected by a rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. Thus, the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the servomotor can be set to a predetermined rotational speed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the drive to various drive motors provided in various effect units such as the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, the back upper effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400. A power supply line (for example, a + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or a + 12V power supply line from the power supply board 630) is a board to which wiring from various drive motors is directly connected (for example, a back-and-forth elevation of the under-surface effect unit 3100). In the drive motor 3151, the panel drive board 1720, and in the back left traverse drive motor 3351 of the back left effect unit 3300, in the relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300, a fuse (which may be a chip fuse) or a poly. A switch may be provided, or In the substrate 630, a fuse (which may be a chip fuse) or a polyswitch is provided for a drive power supply line (for example, a +35 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 or a +12 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630). May be provided.

[20. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 224, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting port sensor 3002 On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the above random number counter, and this is obtained from the RAM. A first opening opening passage process, such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area, is executed (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second starting port passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S239) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “16R big hit”, the 16R A process of controlling opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 according to the jackpot gaming state is executed. Further, when the mode suggesting “4R big hit” is reached, a process of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005 according to the 4R big hit game state is executed.

  In the big hit control process (step S241), after performing the opening control of the special winning opening 2005, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is a big-hit game state based on a big-hit (16R big-hit, 4R big-hit) which is controlled to a high-probability state (high-probability-time-saving state) after the big-hit game state ends. Set when finished. Then, when the high probability flag is set, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the game is in the time saving state, and ends the big hit game state based on the big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) which is controlled to the time saving state (high probability time saving state) after the big hit game state ends. Set when you do. Then, the time saving flag indicates the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 235 to be described later or the second special symbol stop (not shown) when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes “0”. Reset by processing.

  The time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times of the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state. When the big hit game state based on the big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) controlled to the time saving state is ended, the continuation number of the time saving state is set. Then, the time saving counter is counted down every time the special symbol change display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes “0”. In some cases, the counter is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 235 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S236), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (Step S237), and the second special symbol holding storage area is stored. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S236), a second special symbol including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process is executed (Step S238). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first starting port passage processing (step S232).

  Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 225. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) “4” (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S243 are performed to newly set the variable display control of the first special symbol to the suspended state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing effect pre-judgment processing for judging pre-judgment information (type of fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display corresponding to the starting winning (step S245), the processing is ended.

  However, if it is determined in the processing of step S242 that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  In addition, when the number of first reserved storages changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reserved state. In addition to updating to correspond to the storage number, the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) sets a command (first reservation number designation commands 0 to 4) indicating the first storage number to perform peripheral control. The data is transmitted to the substrate 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600. The game production mode type is specified (step S261).

  Then, the specified preliminary determination information (whether or not a big hit is to be made, if a big hit is made, if a big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, Game production mode), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of stored memories (the value of the number-of-reservation counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first opening passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the (The value of one special reserved number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the value (step S262).

  Then, by transmitting a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120), the command is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 in which the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved storages, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning is determined to be a big hit, if a big hit is made, a type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 The peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before executing the reach effect as the executed game effect or the preliminary determination information such as the type of the game effect to be executed is started before the variable display according to the start winning is started. The IC 1510a can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first hold storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Further, the first reserved storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage. Store in order from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area When the first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the first variation pattern command stored in the first storage area of the first hold storage area in response to the received first variation pattern command is stored. The determination information is discarded, and the preliminary determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the preliminary determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information.

  When the variable display control is set to the suspended state in this way, despite the fact that the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (reserved state), the big hit expectation of the variable display control (pseudo winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second starting port passage processing (step S234).

  Now, in the process of the above step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, it is shown in FIG. 227. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, sets the second reserved stored number to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is determined (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 are executed to newly set the variable display control of the second special symbol to the suspended state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held.

  In addition, when the second reserved storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. In addition to updating to correspond to the storage number, the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) sets a command (second reservation number designation commands 0 to 4) indicating the second storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission processing. The data is transmitted to the substrate 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S237). The first special symbol process executed in step S237 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used for the determination are used. Only the first special symbol process executed in step S237 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process of determining the mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. A variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and a variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S282)
4. First special symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283).
5. The state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed (step S284)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control-side power-on process (see FIG. 210).

  FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 229, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S301. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the held state based on the counter value of the first special held number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process proceeds to step S302 to store the variable display control in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read out from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with occurrence of a start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. Thereby, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  After that, as a process of step S305, a big hit determination process as a lottery process for the big hit hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is ended.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the big hit determination table at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 181 (A) if the current game state is the high probability state (high probability time saving state) (step S311). (Step S312) If the current gaming state is the low probability state (Step S311), the large hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 231 (A) is selected (Step S313). A comparison is made with the first special random number read in step S302 of one special symbol normal process (step S314).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 231 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-shortened state)). It has a table and a big hit determination table at the time of a high probability used when the game state is at a high probability (high probability time reduction state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to be compared with the first special random number, one kind of first special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and 299 types of first big random numbers The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the special random number matches the outlier determination value indicating the outlier (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). Note that, in the special symbol and special electric auditors control process executed in step S138 of the second special symbol process, the large probability determination table at the time of low probability referred to be compared with the second special random number in the first special symbol process process. Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the special random number, the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot, and 299 types of second special random number The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value indicating the outlier (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300).

  In addition, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability referred to be compared with the first special random number, ten types of the first special random number which is the same as the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability are included. The first special random numbers are associated with each other such that the first special random number matches the jackpot determination value and the 290 types of first special random numbers match the outlier determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability: 30 minutes). 1). Thus, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is 10 times that in the low-probability state (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state)). Enhanced. It should be noted that, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S138 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, Like the big hit determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the special random number, ten kinds of second random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the 290 kinds of second special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the hit is a loss. (The probability of big hit at high probability: 1/30).

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that it is a big hit (step S315 ), A big hit flag indicating that the change has won the big hit is set, and the process is terminated (step S316). The selected big hit determination table and the first special read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process are set. As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the data is out of the range, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317). Then, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302, when it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S318), a reach flag indicating that the variation becomes reach is set and the process is performed. The process ends (step S319).

  FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 232, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321).

  If the big hit flag has been set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 231 (B). (Step S322) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S323). On the other hand, if the big hit flag has not been set in step S321, the first special symbol is determined to be a lost symbol as a mode at the time of stopping the change (step S324).

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with each determination result (16R big hit, 4R big hit). . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, it is set so that the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are different. ing.

In particular,
1.16R The opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 according to the jackpot gaming state is performed, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is fluctuated 50 times. 16R jackpot to control to the high probability time-saving state until the next big hit or before the change display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times without becoming the next big hit The opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 according to the 2.4R big hit gaming state is controlled, and the change display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 50 times after the big hit gaming state ends. 4R large control to control to the high probability time saving state until the next big hit or before the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) change display is executed 50 times without the next big hit This One of the two types of jackpots is determined.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, out of 16R jackpots and 4R jackpots, 100 judgments are made for 4R jackpots having little profit for the player. Value distribution is set. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, the distribution of 55 determination values is set for the 16R jackpot that is more profitable for the player, Forty-four judgment values are set for 4R jackpots with little profit for the player. As described above, in the normal state (non-time saving state), the lottery on the first special symbol side is performed by causing the game ball B to enter the first starting port 2002, but at the time of the big hit (first time) on the first special symbol side. At the time of a big hit), a 4R big hit with little profit for the player is always determined. On the other hand, in the time-saving state controlled after the end of the big hitting game state, the game ball B can enter the second starting port 2004, and the game ball B can enter the second starting port 2004. The lottery on the second special symbol side is performed. At the time of the big hit on the second special symbol side (at the time of the extended holiday), since the profit of the player is determined to be either 16R big hit or 4R big hit, It can be noticed whether a big hit type is determined. Therefore, the game property changes between the time of the first big hit and the time of the extended holiday, and the game is not monotonous.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when a 4R jackpot is determined, a 4R jackpot symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when a 16R jackpot is determined, a 16R jackpot symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol, and when a 4R jackpot is determined, a 4R jackpot symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, as a process of step S325, the lottery result (indicating any one of a jackpot type, a reach loss, and a loss (in the form of the stop symbol of the first special symbol, A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S326, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the above-described first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process ends. The peripheral control IC 1510a starts the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern. The display of the effect display device 1600 is controlled as described above.

  Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing, determines from the received determination result notification command the 16R jackpot of the jackpot related to the special symbol. If it is specified, it is determined to be a 16R jackpot symbol (combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all "7" among "1" to "9"), and if 4R jackpot is specified, it is 4R. The jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol except “7” among “1” to “9”) is determined, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed ( At the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped at any one of the 16R jackpot symbol or the 4R jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Further, since different symbols are used as the 16R jackpot symbol and the 4R jackpot symbol, it is possible to determine whether the symbol is a 16R jackpot or a 4R jackpot.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, when the loss of reach is specified from the received determination result notification command, a symbol with a reach. (Combinations of decorative designs that are not the same. However, if the left and right decorative designs are the same), if a loss is specified, a loose design without a reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. Are determined to be different), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 233, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag to If it has been performed (step S341), the type of the jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the change pattern table (not shown) at the time of the jackpot according to the current game state are selected (step S341). In S342), if the reach flag is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current game state is selected (step S344), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are set. If it is not set, that is, if it is a normal loss (a loss without performing the reach effect) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S345).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S346). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S347). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S348). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the determined fluctuation time.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table includes a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Are obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process is performed on the variation patterns of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine a type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation degree with respect to the jackpot game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S283) as the process of step S349. At the time of updating, this processing ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second when the time is reduced is associated with the special symbol random numbers (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), At the time of working hours, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a manner that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of the out-of-office selected during the time reduction is such that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short as compared with the variation pattern at the time of the off-time selected during the non-time-saving time. Symbol fluctuation time information is set.

  FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 234, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S371. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process is ended.

  FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 235, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S381. As the processing of the above, while performing a display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is set and the counter value of the time reduction counter for setting the number of continuations of the time reduction state is “0”. (Step S383). If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S384), and it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is "0" (step S385). . If the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S386). When the counter value of the time-saving counter is determined to be “0” in the processing of step S383, or when the time-saving counter is determined to be not “0” in the processing of step S385, At this point, the flow shifts to the process in step S387.

  If the big hit flag is set (step S387), a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game state is started is set (step S388), and the big hit game state is started (big hit round start command is set). The waiting time (period for displaying the start of the big hit game state or the like) until the game is performed is set in the interval timer (step S389). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset. If it is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set (step S390), and the first special symbol process is performed. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S391), the process ends.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (16R jackpot, 4R jackpot). In step S388, a big hit start command (16R big hit start command, 4R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit is set. As a result, an effect corresponding to the type of the big hit specified by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S239).

  In the above step S389, the standby time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. However, in the process of step S401, after the standby time set in the interval timer has elapsed, the process returns to FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005, and sets the high probability time saving state as the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state (step). S402) is performed.

  FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening / closing process (step S402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S411 that the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the special winning opening 2005 When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds for long-time opening and 0.5 seconds for short-time opening) elapses from the open state (step S412), or when the large winning opening 2005 in the open state is played. When the ball B has won the maximum number of wins (for example, nine) (step S413), the large winning opening 2005 in the open state is controlled to be closed (step S414). If it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the closed state (step S415), the type of the jackpot and the current number of rounds are transmitted as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. Is set (Step S416), and the routine goes to Step S428.

  If it is determined in the processing of step S411 that the special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the special winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. When it is determined that a new round is to be started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the open state (step S 418), when the timing is set to the open state (step S 417), the peripheral control board 1510 A jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds is set as a command to be transmitted to (step S419). Then, the special winning opening 2005 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. If it is determined that a new round is not to be started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the open state (for example, the second opening in the same round) (step S418), the closed state is set. The special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. As a result, an effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot and the current number of rounds designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command can be executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  If it is determined in the process of step S428 that the game ball B has been received in the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 The special winning entrance ball entry command is set as the command transmitted to 1510 (step S429), and this processing ends. Thus, when the special winning opening ball entry command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, an effect according to the reception of the game ball B to the special winning opening 2005 is provided by the effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like. Can be performed by

  If it is determined in the process of step S417 that it is not the timing to open the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines When all rounds have been completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S423), the big hit execution flag is reset (step S424). Then, when the high probability flag is set (step S426), the time reduction flag is set, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is set to the initial value (for example, 50 times) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state (step S427). This processing ends. As described above, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are set, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled to the high probability time saving state.

  FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a gate section passing process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. Execute.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read ordinary random number, a lottery process or the like is performed on a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped (step S803).
2. Ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process which stands by until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4. The normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Ordinary symbol stop processing for stopping variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation control of the normal symbol becomes a mode suggesting “per day”, the upper second starting port door 2411 retreats and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is returned. Normal electric accessory opening processing for executing processing for controlling reception of B (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control-side power-on process (see FIG. 210).

  FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S811.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the ordinary reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this counter value, the retained number of ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”. Is determined (step S812). In the process of step S812, when it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S813 to S814 are performed in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to the suspended state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S813, the ordinary reservation number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S814, each random number acquired in step S811 is stored in a normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal hold number counter in the RAM area of the main control MPU 1310a. .

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S812 that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S813 to S814, the above-described variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly held.

  FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 240, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly performs the process of step S821 as follows: It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbols in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then, as a process of step S822, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol retaining storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is processed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the ordinary reserve number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the ordinary symbol stored in each of the ordinary reserved storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 are stored in the first (earliest) area. Store in order. When the random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random number extracted to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area When the condition for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S826), selects a time reduction time ordinary drawing hit determination table (not shown) ( (Step S826) If the current gaming state is the non-time reduction state (low probability non-time reduction state) (step S825), the non-time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S827). The ordinary symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process (step S828).

  It should be noted that the general chart hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is a time reduction (high probability time reduction state). And a non-working time normal time per lane determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-working time reduction state). Then, in the time saving time universal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all of the 251 types of ordinary random numbers match the universal figure hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general figure indicating a deviation. As described above, when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 during the working hours, the game is always won per ordinary drawing, and the upper second starting port door 2411 retreats to the second starting port 2004. The game balls B are controlled to be accepted.

  In addition, in the non-working time general map hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is found that all of the 251 types of normal random numbers match the general map hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. However, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-usual-drawing determination value indicating that the out-of-usual figure is out of place. As described above, in non-working hours, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the ball is not won per ordinary drawing, so that the upper second starting port door 2411 retreats and the second There is no control to allow the game balls B to be accepted into the starting port 2004.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process, and determines that it is determined to be an ordinary symbol hit (step S829). ), After setting a general symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the general symbol (step S830), the general symbol as a mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol stop symbol). On the other hand, the symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is a loss as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary processing, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. A non-normal symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated (step S833) so that the process shifts to the ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804), this process is ended.

  In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol always wins, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is extremely reduced. To a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the second opening opening 2004 is controlled to be in an open state and closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is constant and short, and the open state of the second starting port 2004 It is much easier for the second starting port 2004 to win the game ball B due to the long time, etc., and it is more efficient to aim at the second starting port 2004 than the first starting port 2002. B can be won. In the control of the non-time saving state, it is assumed that the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0/251 and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol does not always win, and the second starting port 2004 is aimed at. Also, the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting port 2004.

  As described above, during the control in the non-time saving state, the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting port 2004 even if the second starting port 2004 is aimed at. The game ball B must be fired (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B wins. Also, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center role 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B is inserted into the obstacle nail. By contacting N, the game ball B is given various movements and flows down. For this reason, even if the player plays the game ball B on the left side of the center role item 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, it does not necessarily win the first starting port 2002, and wins the first starting port 2002. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from an out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to make the game ball B win more efficiently by aiming at the second starting port 2004 than at the first starting port 2002. The game ball B must be fired (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 so that the ball B wins. In addition, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, when the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is opened. The passing game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. For this reason, during the control of the time reduction state, the game ball B driven into the right side of the center role item 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time reduction state is performed. As compared with the first starting port 2002 inside, the game ball B comes to the second starting port 2004 extremely efficiently.

  In addition, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate portion 2003, the probability of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol being a hit is extremely high, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed. The time required for the control is constant and short, and the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is long, so that the game ball B can easily win the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control in the non-time saving state. The special symbol change display control (suspension of the special symbol change display control) can be performed. That is, when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the big hitting game state, the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit can be obtained again in a short time. Thus, it is possible to control the big hitting game state and expect to obtain many game balls B. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of the game balls B to be paid out by winning the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 is set to one. Even if the ball B wins frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall while increasing the interest of the player.

[21. On-hold notice effect and on-hold change effect]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310. However, the display mode of the hold display until the hold display is exhausted. Is changed, it is possible to execute a hold announcement effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the change display of the decorative symbol (the change display of the special symbol) based on the hold display. Also, during the display period of the hold display, a hold change effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 transmits a reserved number designation command and a pre-judgment command based on a winning of a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied). . When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the hold number designation command and the advance determination command in the command analysis processing of step S601, the hold advance determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command (A hold memory number) and a hold advance determination table corresponding to the advance determination information (one of a jackpot, a reach loss, and a loss) specified from the advance determination command, and obtains the determination value set in the hold advance determination table and obtains the determination value. The type of the hold announcement pattern set in the hold announcement determination table is determined by comparing the random number for the hold announcement determination. In addition, in the suspension notice determination table, the distribution of the determination value for each suspension notice pattern is different for each of the preliminary determination information (one of a big hit, a reach loss, and a loss) specified from the preliminary determination command, and The appearance rates are different.

  In addition, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the number-of-holds designation command is increased, and the effect is displayed. One hold display is additionally displayed on the device 1600. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold display (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the number-of-holds designation command decreases. , Deletes the hold display on the effect display device 1600. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold advance notice pattern, Each time a variable display of a decorative symbol (variable display of a special symbol) based on another hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, at the time when the decoration display based on the hold display (variable display of the special symbol) is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted. After the start of the variable display (variable display of the special symbol), the display of the suspension may be continuously displayed, and the display mode of the suspension display may be changeable.

  Next, a suspension notice determination table in which a plurality of types of suspension notice patterns are set for each suspension number (retention storage number) specified from the suspension number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. The reservation notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 241 (A) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (number of hold = 1), and FIG. 241 (B) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 2 is lit (number of hold = 2). FIG. 241 (C) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 3 is lit (number of hold = 3), and FIG. 242 (D) is a table used when hold 4 is lit (number of hold = 4). 9 is a pending notice determination table to be executed.

  As described above, a plurality of types of hold advance notice patterns are set in the hold advance notice determination table corresponding to the number of holds (the number of hold storages). (Storage number), how the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 changes each time the hold storage is exhausted is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241 (A), the hold notice display table used when the hold 1 is lit (the number of holds = 1) may change the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600. No (that is, only the hold display is consumed), and a hold notice pattern in which only the display mode of one hold display is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 2 is turned on (the number of holds = 2), the display mode of the hold display can be changed once before the hold display is exhausted. Because of this, the suspension notice pattern in which the display modes of the two suspension displays are set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 3 is turned on (the number of holds = 3), the display mode of the hold display can be changed twice before the hold display is exhausted. Because of this, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for three times is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 242 (D), in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 4 is turned on (the number of holds = 4), the display mode of the hold display can be changed three times before the hold display is exhausted. Because of this, a suspension notice pattern in which the display mode of the suspension display for four times is set is associated.

  Further, as the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 set to the hold notice pattern, four displays are provided such that the hold display is displayed in any one of white (basic color), blue, red, and rainbow color. An embodiment is provided. When the hold notice pattern is determined from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the display mode of the hold display changing to the end, the big hit expectation is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color. It is set to be. In other words, when the lottery result is specified as the jackpot as the preliminary determination information, a hold notice pattern that is a display mode (for example, a rainbow color) with a high expectation of the jackpot as the final hold display mode is determined with a high probability. When the lottery result is determined to be a loss (loss, reach loss) as the determination information, a hold notice pattern that becomes a display mode (for example, white) having a low jackpot expectation as a final hold display mode is determined with a high probability. Therefore, when the display mode of the final hold display is displayed in the display mode having a high jackpot expectation, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased.

  Note that the hold notice pattern is such that the display form of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → red → rainbow color, and the display form of the hold display is maintained when the hold display is consumed. Alternatively, the next display mode is set so as to have a high expectation of big hits. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low jackpot expectation, there is a possibility that the display mode changes to the display mode with a high jackpot expectation when the hold display is exhausted. Aspects can be brought to attention with hope.

  Also, in the hold announcement pattern, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the hold display in white (basic color) in the order of blue → red → rainbow color after display in white (basic color). Starting from the mode (for example, suddenly starting with the rainbow color by the hold notice pattern number 4 when the hold 1 is lit) or skipping one or more display modes and changing to the next display mode (for example, when the hold 2 is lit) (The color changes from white (basic color) to rainbow color) according to the reserved notice pattern No. 7 of FIG. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display changes (the number of holds) is small, the display mode of the hold display can be displayed in a display mode with a high jackpot expectation. Further, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change to, and the display mode of the hold display will be completed to the end. We can draw attention with expectation.

  Also, in the hold notice determination table, only when the jackpot is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, the hold notice pattern which becomes a rainbow color as the final hold display mode (the hold notice pattern number when the hold 1 is lit) 4, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10 when hold 2 lights up, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7 when hold 3 lights up, etc.) It is set to be possible. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result becomes a big hit when the hold display is consumed, and the expectation of the player for the big hit game is increased. .

  In addition, when a loss is specified as advance determination information from the advance determination command in the hold advance determination table, the hold advance notification pattern (white when the hold 1 is lit) as white (basic color) or blue is displayed as the final hold display mode. Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when Hold 2 is on, Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when Hold 3 is on, Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when Hold 4 is on, etc.) On the other hand, when the jackpot and the reach are specified as the pre-determination information from the pre-determination command, a red-hold preliminary notice pattern (the preliminary preliminary notice pattern number 3 when the hold 1 is turned on, Hold notice pattern numbers 3 when hold 4 lights, such as hold notice pattern numbers 3, 6, 8 when hold 2 lights, hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 3 lights 6, etc.) are also set to be able to determine. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in red, it is determined that the reach display will be performed at least when the hold display is consumed, and that the player's expectation of the jackpot game will be increased. Has become.

  In the present embodiment, by determining the hold notice pattern at the start of display of the hold display, a series of contents in which the display mode of the hold display changes until the hold display is consumed is determined. However, as the determination method, when the display of the hold display is started, only the display mode of the hold display at the start and the final display mode of the hold display may be determined. If the display mode of the hold display at the start is different from the display mode of the final hold display, the display mode of the final hold display is at least before the target hold display is consumed. May be displayed, and it may be determined how the display mode of the hold display changes each time the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can change is reached. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is exhausted.

  Next, a description will be given below of a hold change effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display may change during the hold display period. In the above-described hold announcement effect, the display mode of the hold display can be changed every time the change display of the decorative symbol (the change display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the hold display. At the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed, a hold change effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed.

  Specifically, at the time when the display of the variation of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is started (start condition is satisfied) on the peripheral control board 1510, whether the display mode of the suspension display changes based on the suspension notice pattern By determining whether or not the pending change effect determination table corresponding to the determination result, and comparing the determination value set in the pending change effect determination table and the read random number for the pending change effect determination, The type of the pending change effect pattern set in the pending change effect determination table is determined. That is, it determines whether or not to execute the pending change effect, and determines the type of the pending change effect when performing the pending change effect.

  Here, a plurality of types of hold change effect patterns are set in the hold change effect determination table, and a hold change effect pattern that does not execute the hold change effect (hold change effect pattern number 1) and a hold change effect pattern Hold change effect pattern for executing the first hold change effect (hold change effect pattern number 2), hold change effect pattern for executing the second hold change effect as the hold change effect (hold change effect pattern number 3), hold change A hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing the third hold change effect as an effect is set. The pending change effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Also, in the hold change effect determination table, the distribution of the determination values for each of the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect is substantially the same, and the appearance rate of each hold change effect Are the same, but the distribution of the judgment values may be made different so that the appearance rates of the holding change effects are different.

  Further, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect. On the other hand, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change, many changes are made to the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) in which the hold change effect is not executed. Values are sorted. In this way, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the hold change effect is always executed, and when the hold change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes with a high probability. Accordingly, it is possible to expect and pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold change effect.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of four is set as the number of holdings (number of holdings stored) on the first special symbol side. However, the number of holdings corresponding to the number of holdings can be displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600. I have. Similarly, the upper limit of four as the number of holdings (number of holdings stored) on the second special symbol side is, but the number of holdings corresponding to the number of holdings can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600. . Then, in the lower left area or lower right area of the effect display device 1600, hold 1 (hold number = 1), hold 2 (hold number = 2), hold 3 (hold number = 3), hold 4 (hold number = 4) Is displayed, one hold display is added in order from the left side to the right side. In addition, when the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold display of the hold 1 displayed on the left side of the lower left area or the lower right area is deleted. Accordingly, other hold displays of the hold 2 to 4 are displayed so as to move to the left while being displayed in the display area. In the case of the hold change effect pattern in which the hold change effect is not executed (hold change effect pattern number 1), after the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, the display mode of the hold display is changed. Does not change, and a hold change effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display may change is not executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold announcement effect and the hold change effect are performed during the normal change which is a stage of determining whether or not the reach state is formed at the time of displaying the change of the decorative symbol. For this reason, after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, regardless of whether or not the reach state is formed, it is possible to draw attention with expectation that the hold announcement effect and the hold change effect are performed on the hold display. .

[21-1. Countdown production after unconfirmed production (first pending change production)
First, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) for executing the first hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the change of the decorative symbol is displayed. After the movement, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and moves in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in such a trajectory that the character comes into contact with the suspended display whose display mode changes. The non-determined effect in which the character moves in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a trajectory where the character does not contact the suspended display is executed. When the confirmed effect is performed, the character touches the hold display, and the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes. When the character does not touch the display, the display mode of the hold display does not change. That is, it indicates whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the character touches the hold display. In addition, in both cases of executing the confirmed effect and the non-confirmed effect, after the character moves in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the character is erased outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the present example, the effect of determining whether or not the character touches the hold display is executed as the fixed effect and the non-fixed effect. However, the fixed effect is a display effect in which the display mode of the hold display can change. Is executed, the non-determined effect may be executed in an expression mode in which the display mode of the hold display cannot be changed, and it is only necessary that each expression mode can be distinguished by the player.

  The items possessed by the character are displayed in any of blue, red, and rainbow colors, similarly to the display mode of the hold display that may change. Then, when a character touches the hold display and the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes, the display mode of the hold display changes to the display color of the item possessed by the character. ing. For this reason, what kind of display mode the hold display may change, that is, what kind of jackpot expectation degree the hold display may suggest, is based on whether the display form changes or not. You can figure out before.

  When a non-determined effect is performed, a character having an item with a predetermined display color appears again for a predetermined period after the end of the non-determined effect, and the display mode is changed to a hold display. On the other hand, there is a case where a fixed effect of moving in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a trajectory where the character touches is executed. On the other hand, if the character does not reappear for a predetermined period after the end of the non-fixed effect, the fixed effect is not executed. That is, it indicates whether or not the mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the character reappears for a predetermined period after the end of the non-fixed effect.

  FIG. 243 shows a timing chart when the effect pattern set as the first pending change effect is executed. First, the confirmed effect pattern is a display of a hold display in which a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the character touches a hold display in which a display mode is changed. This is an effect pattern in which the display mode changes.

  In addition, the non-determination effect pattern is a non-determination effect in which a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the character does not touch the hold display, so that the display mode of the hold display does not change. After the countdown effect is executed for a predetermined period of time after executing the same amount of time as the fixed effect, the fixed effect is not executed during the countdown effect, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display changes. There is no production pattern.

  In addition, after the non-determined effect, the determined effect pattern is a non-determined effect pattern in which a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the character does not touch the held display, so that the display mode of the held display does not change. After executing the determined effect for the same amount of time as the determined effect, a countdown effect is executed for a predetermined time, and during the countdown effect, the character reappears and the determined effect is executed, and as a result, the hold display is displayed. This is an effect pattern in which the mode changes. In addition, the non-determined effects defined effect patterns A to C are effect patterns having different timings at which the character appears again during execution of the countdown effect and the fixed effect is executed. More specifically, the fixed production pattern A after the non-determined production is a production pattern in which the character reappears and executes the final production at the time of the remaining 2 seconds of the 3 seconds of the countdown production, and the final production after the non-determination production. The pattern B is an effect pattern in which the character reappears at the time of the remaining one second out of the three seconds of the countdown effect and executes a fixed effect, and the fixed effect pattern C after the non-fixed effect is the three-second effect of the countdown effect. This is an effect pattern in which the character appears again at the time of the remaining 0 seconds to execute a fixed effect. Note that, in the determined effect patterns A to C after the non-determined effect, the display color of the item possessed by the character at the time of executing the non-determined effect may be different from the display color of the item possessed by the character at the time of executing the fixed effect. Alternatively, the display color of the item may be changed to a display color indicating that the big hit expectation degree is high when the display mode of the hold display is changed, when the fixed effect is executed, compared to the non-determined effect. For example, the display color of the item is displayed in blue when the character first appears during the execution of the non-determined effect, and the display color of the item is displayed in red when the character appears for the second time during the execution of the fixed effect. Even if the display color of the item at the first appearance of the character is displayed with a display color indicating that the big hit expectation is low, the display color of the item changes at the second appearance of the character It can be noticed with expectation whether or not.

  In addition, the special effect pattern after the unconfirmed effect is such that a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the display mode of the hold display does not change because the character does not touch the hold display. After the fixed effect is executed for the same amount of time as the fixed effect, a countdown effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, and a specific symbol (in this example, which appears during normal times) is displayed as a variable display of the decorative symbol during the countdown effect. This is an effect pattern in which the skull symbol (temporary symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol without any change, and thereafter, it is determined that the specific symbol is changed to the reach symbol. In addition, if a specific symbol is temporarily stopped during execution of the countdown effect, the countdown effect is terminated at that point even if there is remaining time, and the fixed effect is not executed. This is an effect pattern in which the display mode does not change. As described above, when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during the execution of the countdown effect, the countdown effect is not terminated and the fixed effect is not executed. Expectations do not decrease with the end of the countdown effect.

  In addition, the special effect patterns A to C after the non-fixed effect are effect patterns having different timings for temporarily stopping and displaying a specific symbol during execution of the countdown effect. Specifically, the special effect pattern A after the non-determination effect is an effect pattern in which a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the time of the remaining 2 seconds out of 3 seconds of the countdown effect, and the special effect pattern B after the non-determination effect is Is a production pattern in which a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the time of the remaining 1 second among the 3 seconds of the countdown production. This is an effect pattern for temporarily stopping and displaying a specific symbol.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the first hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 when the first hold change effect is executed.

  First, in the present example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side. 244 (A) and (B) when the execution of the first hold change effect with respect to the hold display of the hold 2 is determined at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol. As shown, after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, a character having an item in red appears from the left side of the display area toward the center. As shown in FIG. 244 (A), when performing the non-determination effect, the character may touch the hold display in the process of returning the character from the center of the display area to the left. And the display mode of the hold display does not change. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244 (B), in the case of executing the finalized effect, in the process of returning the character from the center of the display area to the left, the character touches the hold display of hold 2 Then, the display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 contacted by the character changes to red of the item held by the character. As described above, when a character appears, in the process of returning the character from the center of the display area to the left side, the character touches one of the hold displays, and the hold display in which the character touches is displayed. Although the display mode may change to the red color of the item possessed by the character, when the character appears, it is determined whether the character touches the hold display or the character touches any hold display. It is not possible to grasp whether to do so, and it is possible to pay attention to the moving direction of the character.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 244 (C), when the non-determined effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed for three seconds after the execution of the non-determined effect. In this countdown effect, by sequentially displaying “3 → 2 → 1 → 0” in the display area as time elapses, the expectation as to whether or not a fixed effect is to be performed is encouraged.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 244 (D), when the confirmed effect is executed during the execution of the countdown effect, the character having the red item appears again from the left side of the display area toward the center. As described above, when the character reappears, in the process of returning the character from the central portion of the display area to the left side, the character touches the hold display of the hold 2 and the hold 2 touches the character. Changes to the red display of the item held by the character. However, if the character reappears, in the process of returning the character from the center of the display area to the left, the character always touches one of the hold displays, and the hold display that the character touched Is changed to the red color of the item possessed by the character, but when the character reappears, it is not possible to grasp which of the reserved displays the character touches, and the character progresses. The direction can be noticed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244 (E), a specific symbol (in this example, a skull symbol as a decorative symbol that does not appear at normal times) is temporarily stopped and displayed as a variation display of the decorative symbol during execution of the countdown effect. In this case, even if there is remaining time, the countdown effect is terminated at that time, and the fixed effect is not executed. As a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change. However, as shown in FIGS. 244 (F) and (G), when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during the execution of the countdown effect, the timing at which the reach symbol set in the variation pattern is formed thereafter Then, a specific symbol changes to a reach symbol. In this example, a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the variation symbol of the decorative symbol during the execution of the countdown effect. However, any device may be used as long as it notifies in advance that a reach will be formed in the variation. Further, the reach symbol may be stopped and displayed at that time, instead of the temporary stop display of the specific symbol during the execution of the countdown effect, to confirm that the reach is formed. In this case as well, the countdown effect is terminated at the time of formation of the reach, the fixed effect is not executed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 244 (H), when the finalized effect is not executed during the execution of the countdown effect, and when a specific symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed as the variation display of the decorative symbol, the countdown effect is not performed. Upon termination, it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change.

[21-2. Repetition of parallel production (second pending change production)]
Next, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) for executing the second hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the change of the decorative symbol. Are moved, the plurality of characters appear in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time so that a plurality of characters appear near the reserved display and each character comes into contact with one of the reserved displays. Running parallel moves to move. In this parallel production, the number of characters that make contact with the hold display will be the same, but in any of the multiple touches of the character with respect to the hold display, the display mode of the hold display that the character has touched in any one of the touches One of a parallel production at the time of a changing hit and a parallel production at the time of a loss in which the display mode of the hold display touched by the character does not change at any contact. That is, in the parallel effect, when a plurality of characters move within the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time, the timing at which the character contacts the hold display occurs at the same time, and the display mode of the hold display Is notified that there is a chance of whether or not changes. Further, in the parallel effect, when a plurality of characters move in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time, the number of characters makes contact with the hold display. Can be obtained. In this example, as the parallel production at the time of hitting and the parallel production at the time of loss, the production of whether or not the display mode of the suspension display is changed by the contact of the character with the suspension display is executed. While the parallel display at the time of hitting is performed in a display mode in which the display mode of the hold display can change, the parallel display at the time of the loss may be performed in the display mode in which the display mode of the hold display cannot change. It suffices if each expression mode can be distinguished by the player.

  Also, when the parallel production at the time of loss is performed, as a second parallel production, a plurality of characters appear again in the vicinity of the hold display, and one of the parallel production at the time of a hit and the parallel production at the time of the loss is performed. May run. In addition, when the parallel production at the time of the loss is executed as the second parallel production, a plurality of characters appear again near the hold display as the third parallel production, and the parallel production at the time of the hit and the parallel production at the time of the loss are performed. There is a case where one of the effects is performed. Also, when the parallel production at the time of the loss is executed as the third parallel production, a plurality of characters appear again near the hold display as the fourth parallel production, and the parallel production at the time of the hit and the parallel production at the time of the loss are performed. Of the effects, there is a case where only the parallel effect at the time of execution is executed. As described above, even when the parallel production at the time of the loss is performed, the parallel production at the time of the loss may be performed as long as a plurality of characters appear again near the hold display. It is possible to notice with expectation whether or not a plurality of characters appear again after performing the effect. In addition, in the fourth parallel production, since the parallel production at the time of hit is always executed, even if the parallel production at the time of the loss is executed, it is expected whether or not the parallel production will be continued thereafter. It can be noticed. As the first to third parallel effects, as the number of executions of the parallel effect increases, the probability that the parallel effect is a parallel effect at the time of hit increases, and the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes increases. May be set as follows. With this, even when the parallel production at the time of the loss is performed, since the display form of the hold display is likely to change by continuing the parallel production thereafter, when the parallel production is continued, the hold display is performed. Can be noticed with expectation whether or not the display mode changes.

  FIG. 245 shows a timing chart when an effect pattern set as the second hold change effect is executed. First, in the hit parallel effect pattern A, a plurality of characters appear simultaneously in the effect display device 1600 such that a plurality of characters appear near the hold display and each character touches any of the hold displays. In the display area of the character, and in any one of a plurality of touches of the character with respect to the hold display, in one of the touches, the display pattern of the hold display touched by the character is changed to a parallel effect at a time when the display mode changes. is there.

  In addition, the loss-time parallel effect pattern A is such that a plurality of characters appear at the same time in the effect display device 1600 such that a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display and each character touches any of the hold displays. In the display area of the character, and in any of a plurality of touches of the character with respect to the hold display, in any of the touches, the display pattern of the hold display touched by the character does not change and the parallel pattern at the time of a loss is executed. is there.

  In addition, the hit time parallel production pattern B is to execute the parallel production twice, and after the execution of the parallel production at the time of loss, a plurality of characters appear again near the hold display as the second parallel production. This is an effect pattern in which a parallel production at the time of hitting is executed, and a display mode of the hold display at which the character touches in any one of a plurality of contact of the character with the hold display in the parallel production at the time of hit is changed. . Further, the loss-time parallel production pattern B is for executing the parallel production twice, and after the execution of the parallel production at the time of the loss, a plurality of characters appear again near the hold display as the second parallel production. This is an effect pattern in which a parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  The hit parallel production pattern C is for executing the parallel production three times. After the parallel production is repeated twice at the time of the loss, a plurality of characters are displayed near the hold display as the third parallel production. Appears again and performs the parallel production at the time of the hit, and the display mode of the hold display that the character touched in any of the multiple touches of the character with the hold display in the parallel production at the time of the hit changes This is a production pattern. The lost-time parallel effect pattern C is for executing the parallel effect three times. After performing the parallel effect twice at the time of the loss, a plurality of characters are displayed near the hold display as the third parallel effect. Appear again to execute a parallel effect at the time of loss, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  The hit parallel production pattern D is to execute the parallel production four times. After the parallel production at the time of the loss is repeated three times, a plurality of characters are displayed near the hold display as the fourth parallel production. Appears again and performs the parallel production at the time of the hit, and the display mode of the hold display that the character touched in any of the multiple touches of the character with the hold display in the parallel production at the time of the hit changes This is a production pattern.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the second hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the second hold change effect.

  First, in the present example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side. Then, at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, if the execution of the second hold change effect has been determined for the hold display of hold 2, as shown in FIG. After the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a plurality of (eight in this example) characters appear near the upper side of the hold display while passing through the back side of the hold display from below to above the hold display. As described above, at the time when a plurality of characters appear, each character appears after passing through the back side of the hold display, and thus does not hinder the visual recognition of the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 246 (B) and (C), after eight characters appear near the upper side of the hold display, each character touches any one of the hold displays 1-4. As shown in the figure, eight characters flow downward while passing the front side of the hold display at the same time. Also, each time a character touches any of the hold displays of Hold 1 to 4, the hold display touched by the character emits light as indicated by a star each time, and the character touches the hold display. It is notified that the display mode of the suspended display may change. As described above, at the time when each character touches any of the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4, each character flows down through the front side of the hold display and the hold display that the character touches is displayed. By emitting light, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the character has touched the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 246 (B), when performing a parallel production at the time of a loss, when each character makes contact with any of the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4, any of the touches Also, the display mode of the hold display touched by the character does not change. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (C), when executing the parallel production at the time of hitting, when each character touches any of the holding displays of the holdings 1 to 4, the holding 2 of the holding is displayed. When the character touches the hold display (when the character touches the hold display of hold 2 a plurality of times, any of the touches may be performed), the hold that the character touches The display mode of the hold display of No. 2 changes to the display mode of the hold display determined by the hold announcement effect pattern (in this example, red).

  In the parallel production described above, when a plurality of characters appear and each character touches one of the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4, the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes each time. Therefore, there is a chance that the display mode of the hold display changes by the number of characters. In addition, at the start of the parallel production, all eight characters that come into contact with the hold display appear, and the number of characters is clearly indicated. Can be grasped at the start of the parallel production. Further, in the parallel production, a plurality of characters appear and the characters touch any of the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4. However, when the plurality of characters appear, any of the hold displays appears. On the other hand, it is not possible to grasp whether or not each character touches, and it is possible to pay attention to the traveling direction of each character with respect to the hold display. In addition, it is not possible to grasp which of the holding displays of the holdings 1 to 4 that each character has touched changes the display mode of the holding display, and every time each character touches the holding display. It can be noticed whether or not the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes.

  In this example, each of the characters makes contact with one of the holding displays of the holdings 1 to 4. Of the eight characters appearing near the upper side of the holding display, the holding characters 1 to 4 are displayed. Two characters are made to contact each of the 4 reserved displays. However, among the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4, many of the eight characters may contact the hold display in which the display mode of the hold display changes. In this case, it is highly likely that the display mode of the hold display contacted by many characters in the parallel production is changed, so that attention should be paid particularly to which hold display is contacted by many characters. it can. Further, in the case of executing the parallel production at the time of the loss, even if the character touches the hold display, the display mode of the hold display at which the character touches is not changed. At the start of the process, the number of appearing characters may be reduced. In this case, at the start of the parallel effect, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change depending on whether or not the number of appearing characters is large.

  Then, when the parallel production at the time of the loss is performed, as the second parallel production, eight characters appear again near the upper side of the hold display, and the parallel production at the time of the hit and the parallel production at the time of the loss are performed. You may want to do either. Also, when the parallel production at the time of the loss is executed as the second parallel production, as the third parallel production, eight characters appear again near the upper side of the hold display, and the parallel production at the time of the hit and the loss are performed. There is a case where one of the parallel productions is executed. When the parallel production at the time of the loss is performed as the third parallel production, as shown in FIG. 246 (D), as the fourth parallel production, the eight characters are again placed near the upper side of the hold display. As shown in FIG. 246 (E), only the parallel production at the time of appearance may be executed among the parallel production at the time of appearance and the parallel production at the time of loss. As described above, even when the parallel production at the time of the loss is performed, there is a possibility that the parallel production at the time of the hit is performed as long as the eight characters reappear near the upper side of the hold display. It is possible to notice with expectation whether or not eight characters appear again after executing the parallel production of time. In addition, in the fourth parallel production, since the parallel production at the time of hit is always executed, even if the parallel production at the time of the loss is executed, it is expected whether or not the parallel production will be continued thereafter. It can be noticed.

  In this example, at the start of the parallel production, a plurality of (eight in this example) characters appear near the upper side of the hold display. It is possible to cause a plurality of characters to appear so as to include a special character that is determined to change the display mode of the hold display. In this case, if a special character is included in a plurality of characters at the start of the parallel production, when the special character touches the hold display, the display mode of the hold display in which the special character touches the hold display Always changes, the type of character appearing at the start of the parallel effect can be noticed. In addition, the special character is displayed larger than a normal character other than the special character from the time of its appearance, so that the special character stands out, and it is easy to determine whether or not a plurality of characters include the special character. Can be grasped. In addition, the plurality of characters are displayed so as to partially overlap each other at the time of their appearance, but when the plurality of characters include a special character, the special character is displayed in the foreground. In order to make the special character stand out, so that it can be easily grasped whether or not the plurality of characters include the special character. In addition, the special character is allowed to appear during the execution of the parallel production at the time of the hit, but as the number of executions of the parallel production increases, that is, the parallel production of the hit at the time of the first to fourth parallel productions is performed. It may be set so that the later the execution timing is, the higher the probability that a special character appears will be. With this, even when the parallel production at the time of the loss is performed, the possibility that a special character appears by continuing the parallel production afterwards becomes high. It can be noticed whether or not it will appear.

[21-3. Beam effect after target effect (third pending change effect)
Next, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing the third hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the change of the decorative symbol. After the character moves, a character appears and an aim in a predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and a staging display is performed so that the aim matches the hold display that may change the display mode. One of a target effect at the time of moving within the display area of the device 1600 and a target effect at the time of a loss of moving within the display area of the effect display device 1600 so that the aiming does not match the hold display. Running. In this target production at the time of hitting, the aiming of the hold display may cause a change in the display mode of the hold display with the aim in the beam production to be described later. In the effect, by not aiming at the hold display, it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change without executing the beam effect described later. That is, it indicates whether or not there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change depending on whether or not the aim of the hold display is adjusted.

  The aim for the hold display is displayed in any of blue, red, and rainbow colors, similarly to the display mode of the hold display that may change. Then, when the aim of the hold display is changed, when the display mode of the hold display that has been adjusted in the beam effect described later changes, the display mode of the hold display changes to the display color of the aim. I have to. For this reason, it is possible to grasp what kind of display mode the suspended display may change before determining whether the display mode changes.

  Also, when the hit target effect is executed, a beam is fired toward the holding display that is aimed at by the hit target effect, and when the beam collides with the aiming holding display. , And a beam effect at the time of a loss in which the beam is bounced back without colliding with the holding display with the aim. In this hit beam production, the collision of the beam with the holding display aimed at in the hit target production changes the display mode of the holding display where the beam collided. In the beam effect, the display mode of the hold display does not change because the beam does not collide with the hold display aimed at in the hit target effect. That is, it indicates whether or not the mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the beam collides with the hold display. In this way, when the target effect is executed, the display color of the aim indicates the possibility that the hold display may change to the display mode. Is executed, the display mode of the hold display is not changed unless the hit beam effect is further executed.

  In addition, as a character that appears in the target effect and the beam effect, the probability of whether or not the target display is aimed at the hold display or the probability that the beam will collide with the hold display in the beam effect is determined. One of three different characters A to C appears. Among them, the character A is set so as to have a higher probability of aiming at the hold display in the target effect as compared with the other characters, but to have a lower probability of the beam colliding with the hold display in the beam effect. ing. In addition, character B is set so that the probability of aiming at the hold display in the target effect and the probability of the beam colliding with the hold display in the beam effect are medium compared to other characters. Have been. In addition, the character C is set so that the probability of aiming at the hold display in the target effect is lower than that of the other characters, but the probability of the beam colliding with the hold display in the beam effect is higher. I have. In this way, by changing the degree of expectation of each of the target effect and the beam effect depending on the type of the character that has appeared at the start of the target effect, it is possible to change the degree of attention to those effects.

  FIG. 247 shows a timing chart when an effect pattern set as the third hold change effect is executed. First, in the target effect pattern at the time of a loss, a beam effect is executed by the appearance of a character and the aiming of a predetermined display color from the character toward the hold display, and the aim does not match the hold display. This is an effect pattern for executing a target effect at the time of a loss that determines that the display mode of the hold display does not change without any change.

  In addition, the beam effect pattern at the time of hitting, when a character appears, an aim in a predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and the aim is matched with the hold display, so that the hold is matched with the aim. After executing a hit target effect that suggests that the display mode of the display may change, a beam is fired toward the aiming holding display, and the beam collides with the aiming holding display. This is an effect pattern for executing a beam effect at the time of hitting when the display mode of the hold display in which the beam collides changes.

  In addition, the beam effect pattern at the time of the loss is such that when a character appears and an aim in a predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and the aim is aligned with the hold display, the aim is matched with the hold. After executing a hit target effect indicating that the display mode of the display may change, a beam is fired toward the aiming holding display, and the beam does not collide with the aiming holding display. This is an effect pattern for executing a beam effect at the time of a loss in which it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the third hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the third hold change effect.

  First, in the present example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side. Then, at the point of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, if the execution of the third hold change effect has been determined for the hold display of hold 2, as shown in FIG. After the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a character appears on the right side of the display area, and two aiming points in red directed from the character to the hold display appear near the hold display. These two sights are intended to stimulate expectations by repeating whether or not each of the sightings 1 to 4 is held or not. As described above, when two sights in red appear, it can be understood that the display mode of the hold display may change to red, which is the display color of the sight. At the time when the aim appears, it is not possible to know whether or not the aim is aligned with the hold indication, and which of the hold indications is aimed at. it can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (B), when the hit target effect is executed, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the appearance of the two aimings in red, the hold display of the hold 2 is displayed. The two sights are aligned. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (C), when the target effect at the time of the loss is executed, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the appearance of the two aiming portions in red, the two positions are displayed on the hold display. It is deleted without aiming, and it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change. In this way, when two aiming are performed on the hold display of the hold 2, it is understood that the display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 may change to red, which is the display color of the aim. However, at the time when the two targets are aligned with the hold display of the hold 2, it is impossible to actually grasp whether or not the display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 changes, and in the subsequent beam effect, It can be noticed whether or not the display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 changes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 248 (C), after the execution of the target effect at the time of the hit, the beam effect is executed. In the beam effect, the holding effect of the target effect at the time of the hit is aimed at the hold display of the hold 2 Fire a beam. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (D), when the hit beam effect is executed, the beam collides with the hold display of the hold 2 which is aimed at by the hit target effect, and the beam is hit. The display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 that has collided changes to red, which is the display color of the aim. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (E), when performing a beam effect at the time of a loss, the beam is rebounded without colliding with the hold display of the hold 2 which was aimed at by the target effect at the time of hit. , The display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 is not changed.

  In the target effect described above, after notifying the display mode of the hold display by the display color of the sight, there is a possibility of changing the display mode, and then, depending on whether or not any of the hold displays are aimed, the hold display is performed. It is notified whether the possibility that the display mode changes will continue or not, and which of the pending displays that may change the display mode will be notified. A notification is made as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the beam collides with the combined hold display, and the notification is made stepwise. In this way, by giving a step-by-step notification until the display mode of the hold display changes, it is possible to give attention to the contents of the effect until the end of the target effect and the beam effect, while giving different expectations at each stage. .

  In this example, when two aiming appear in the target effect, and aiming is attained for any one of the holding displays, two aiming are performed for the same holding display among the holding displays of holdings 1 to 4. Are matched, but the following patterns may be set. For example, even if a pattern is set such that the first aim is set for any of the hold indications of the two aim sets, and the second aim is not set for any of the hold indications. Good. In addition, the first aim is set for one of the holding indications of the two aiming, and the second aiming is set for a holding indication different from the holding indication for which the first aiming is set. May be set to match. However, if each of the two sights is aligned with two different hold indications, each of the two different hold indications will be fired when the beam is fired at the aiming hold indication in a subsequent beam effect. , And the beam does not collide with at least one of the two different reserved displays, and the display mode of the reserved display where the beam did not collide is not changed. Also, when both of the two targets are matched with respect to the same holding display, the probability that the beam will collide with the holding display with two matching targets in the subsequent beam effect is compared with the other patterns. And the probability that the display mode of the hold display changes is increased. In such a case, in the stage of determining whether or not the target display is aimed at the hold display, two targets are aimed at the same hold display or two targets are aimed at different hold displays. It can also be noticed.

  Further, in the above, a pattern in which the display color of the first aim and the display color of the second aim among the two aimes may be set differently. In addition, two characters appear in the target effect, and the character having the first aim and the character having the second aim set different patterns. When firing the beam, each character may fire the beam toward the hold display.

[22. Stock production over multiple fluctuations]
In the present embodiment, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, an operation valid time period during which the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is valid during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (during the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is set. Then, an operation effect capable of operating the pressing operation section 303 over the operation effective time can be executed. When a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and a game specified from the pre-determination command is transmitted. When the variation pattern that will execute the operation effect is specified as the advance determination information such as the mode type of the effect (the type of the variation pattern), from the time of the preliminary determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect At a plurality of timings set during the period, a stock effect of sequentially adding any one of a plurality of types of addition times can be executed. In this example, during the period from the preliminary determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect, at least for each of the holddowns (for each of the special symbol fluctuation display), any one of a plurality of types of addition time is added. It is possible to add time sequentially.

  In addition, at the time of preliminary determination of execution of the operation effect, the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the stock effect is sequentially performed so that the total of the added time added in the stock effect matches the operation effective time. By setting the addition time to be added, when the operation effect is executed, it is possible to continuously operate (press and hold) the pressing operation unit 303 over the operation effective time which is the total of the addition time added in the stock effect. I have.

  FIG. 249 shows a timing chart at the time of executing a stock effect over a plurality of fluctuations when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance. As shown in FIG. 249 (A), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 4 is turned on (the number of holds = 4), a predetermined additional time is required until the operation effect is executed when the hold is exhausted. Are set as six timings. More specifically, as the timing of adding the predetermined addition time, the stock timing 6 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 3, the stock time 5 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 2, and the stock time 4 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 1. Before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation at the time of the suspension digestion, a total of six stock times including stock times 1 to 3 are set. As described above, during the time between the preliminary determination of the execution of the operation effect and the execution of the operation effect, before the reserve digestion to execute the operation effect, the stock timing is set once for each of the suspension changes. At the same time, three stock times are set at the time of holding the digestion for executing the operation effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 3 is lit (the number of hold times = 3), a predetermined time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of the hold exhaustion. As the timing for adding the addition time, five stock times are set. More specifically, as the timing for adding the predetermined addition time, the stock timing 5 during the change when the hold 2 changes, the stock timing 4 during the change when the hold 1 changes, and the execution of the operation effect during the change during the hold digestion Previously, a total of five stock times, including stock times 1 to 3, have been set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 2 is lit (the number of holds = 2), a predetermined amount of time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of holding down. As the timing for adding the addition time, four stock times are set. Specifically, as the timing for adding the predetermined addition time, the stock timing 4 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 1 and the stock timing 1 to 3 before the execution of the operation effect during the change at the time of the holddown, a total of 6 times. The stock time of each time is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (D), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 1 is turned on (the number of holds = 1), a predetermined time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of the hold-down. Three timings are set as timings for adding the addition time. Specifically, as the timing for adding the predetermined addition time, a total of three stock timings including stock timings 1 to 3 are set before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation during the suspension digestion.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (A), any one of 5 to 10 seconds is set as the operation effective time used for the operation effect, and each operation effective time is set as a variation pattern for executing the operation effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns having time are set. In addition, at each timing of adding the predetermined addition time, any one of 0 to 5 seconds is set as the addition time. If the addition time is 0 second, the addition time does not increase. Then, at the time of the preliminary determination of the execution of the operation effect, the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and added at each timing so that the total of the addition time added in the stock effect coincides with the operation effective time. The predetermined addition time is determined in advance, and the predetermined addition time is sequentially added until the operation effect is performed. In this example, at each timing when the predetermined addition time is added, any one of 0 to 5 seconds is set as the addition time, but at each timing, the predetermined time is set to be subtracted. Alternatively, for example, the addition and the subtraction may be repeated until the execution of the operation effect. As described above, even when the time is subtracted in the stock effect, the total of the time added in the stock effect and the time subtracted in the stock effect is set to be equal to the operation effective time. I'm supposed to.

  In addition, as the operation effective time used for the operation effect, in addition to any one of 5 to 10 seconds, ∞ (infinity) is set. This ∞ indicates a variation pattern of the operation effect. Of these, only the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is set. In addition, at the time of preliminary determination of the execution of the operation effect, when ∞ is specified as the operation effective time set in the operation effect, the addition is performed at any one of a plurality of timings for adding the predetermined addition time. The addition time to be performed is previously determined to be 、, and the addition time of ∞ is added at that timing, so that the addition time coincides with ∞, which is the operation effective time. As described above, in the case where the addition time of ∞ is added in the stock effect, the winning is always derived as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display of the special symbol) for which the operation effect is performed. It can be expected with attention whether or not to add ∞ as the addition time. However, if the addition time added in the stock effect is ∞, the operation effective time used for the operation effect is notified that the operation effect time is ∞, but the operation effective time is 10 seconds when the operation effect is executed. , The operation valid time is set to end when 10 seconds have elapsed.

  Further, when determining a variation pattern for performing an operation effect, the variation pattern is determined such that the longer the operation effective time used for the operation effect is, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit is. In addition, since the total of the addition time added in the stock effect matches the operation effective time, the longer the addition time added at each timing, the higher the probability that the operation effective time becomes longer. In this manner, the longer the effective operation time used for the operation effect is, the higher the probability of deriving a hit as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) that will execute the operation effect is increased. Attention can be paid to whether the addition time added at each timing or the operation effective time, which is the sum of the addition times, is long.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 4 is turned on (the number of holds = 4), a predetermined additional time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of the hold-down. Is set as the timing for adding the four times, the holding 4:00 scenario determination table is used so that the total of the addition times added at the six times coincides with the operation valid time. The addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance. Specifically, when the operation valid time is determined in advance to be 10 seconds, one of the scenarios PTN_hold 4_A1 to A3 is determined. For example, when the scenario PTN_hold 4_A3 is determined, the additional time is set as the addition time. 2 seconds at stock time 6, 0 seconds at stock time 5 (do not add), 1 second at stock time 4, 1 second at stock time 3, 1 second at stock time 2, 1 second at stock time 1, The predetermined addition time is sequentially added at the six timings so as to match the operation effective time of 10 seconds. In addition, when 操作 (10) seconds is preliminarily determined as the operation effective time, any one of the scenarios PTN_holds 4_B1 to B3 is determined. At the last timing of the stock timing to which the addition time is added, the addition time of ∞ is added.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 250 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 3 is lit (the number of hold = 3), a predetermined time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of the hold-down. Since five stock times are set as timings for adding the addition time, the hold 3:00 scenario determination table is set so that the total of the addition times added at the five times coincides with the operation valid time. In addition, the addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance. Similarly, when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 2 is lit (the number of holds = 2), or when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 1 is lit (the number of the holds = 1), each of them is also performed. An addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance using a corresponding scenario determination table (not shown).

  In addition, in the operation effect, it is possible to operate the pressing operation unit 303 over the operation valid time, and it is possible to raise a predetermined meter by continuously operating the pressing operation unit 303, so that the operation meter can be operated within the operation valid time. The effect of whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of hit is determined among the fluctuation patterns for performing the operation effect, by continuously operating the pressing operation unit 303 in the operation effect, the predetermined time can be set within the operation effective time. While the meter can reach the upper limit, if the variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated in the operation effect, a predetermined time is maintained within the operation effective time. The meter does not reach the upper limit. However, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the predetermined meter may be set to an upper limit when the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated in the operation effect or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the operation effect. When it is determined that the predetermined meter has not reached the upper limit at the time when the operation valid time has elapsed, such as when the time has not reached, the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit at the time when the operation valid time elapses. That is, whether or not a winning is derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is notified based on whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation validity period. In addition, as described above, when determining a variation pattern that will execute an operation effect, the longer the operation effective time used for the operation effect, the higher the expectation of big hits is determined. Therefore, as the operation effective time used for the operation effect increases, the probability that the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit during the operation effective period increases, and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated with expectation within the operation effective time. .

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the stock effect and the operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. FIG. 251 and FIG. 252 are examples of specific effects on the effect display device 1600 when executing a stock effect and an operation effect.

  First, in the present example, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is turned on (the number of holds = 4), the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the addition added in the stock effect is performed. In order to make the total time coincide with the operation valid time, the stock timing 6 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 3, the stock time 5 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 2, the stock time 4 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 1, and the hold. The addition time to be added at each of the stock timings 1 to 3 before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation during digestion is determined in advance. Then, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), when, for example, 2 seconds is determined as the addition time to be added during the change at the time of the change of the hold 3 at the time of starting the change display of the decorative symbol, As shown in FIG. 251 (B), after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, “2:00 STOCK” is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area, and the addition time added in the stock effect is 2 seconds. Notifying.

  As shown in FIG. 251 (C), during the execution of the stock effect, the total of the added time added in the stock effect is displayed above the display area, and for example, 2 seconds are added as the added time. In this case, “TOTAL 2:00” is displayed above the display area to notify that the total of the addition time added in the stock effect is 2 seconds. Until the time when the operation effect is to be executed and the time when the hold is completed, the addition of the additional time in the stock effect is repeated each time the hold order is changed (every time the display of the decorative design is started to change). The total of the addition time added in the effect can be increased stepwise. Similarly, even during the variation display of the decorative symbol at the time of holding the digestion to execute the operation effect, the addition of the addition time in the stock effect is repeated before the execution of the operation effect, and the addition added in the stock effect. The total time can be increased step by step.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 252 (D), at the start of the operation effect, “TOTAL 5:00” is first displayed on the upper side of the display area, and the total of the addition time added in the stock effect, that is, the pressing operation unit 303 That the operation is valid for 5 seconds. In addition, a message “Align the symbols in time!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and a numeric symbol “777”, which is a big hit symbol, is displayed in a translucent manner behind the message. are doing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 252 (E), after the operation effect is started, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time from the operation effective time with the lapse of time (in this example, “the remaining 3:30 )). In addition, an image simulating the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area, and a message instructing to continue operating the pressing operation unit 303 (press and hold) is displayed. When the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated within the operation valid time, the meter drawn inside the semi-transparent numeral pattern is made to gradually rise, and the big hit symbol is increased by increasing the opaque area. It is nearing completion.

  Note that, as an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303, three display modes are provided so that the image is displayed in any of blue, red, and rainbow colors. The setting is such that the big hit expectation is higher in the order of blue, red and rainbow colors. For this reason, when a display mode with a high jackpot expectation is displayed as an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303, the probability that the meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time is high, and the willingness to participate in the operation effect can be increased. .

  Further, it is set such that the shorter the operation effective time, which is the total of the addition times added in the stock effect, the faster the meter rises with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. Further, it is set so that the shorter the remaining time of the operation effective time is, the faster the meter rises with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. Further, when the variation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the rising speed of the meter with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is set to be faster, whereas the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined. In this case, the speed at which the meter is raised with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is set to be slow. By controlling the rising speed of the meter, whether or not the meter reaches the upper limit within the effective operation time can be effectively enjoyed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 252 (F), when the meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time, the figure design of “777” which is a big hit design is completed, and the change display of the decoration design (the change display of the special design) ) Is a big hit. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the meter can reach the upper limit by continuously operating the pressing operation unit 303 within the operation effective time. If the meter does not reach the upper limit at the time when the operation effective time has elapsed, such as when the operation effective time has not elapsed, or when the meter has not reached the upper limit despite operating the pressing operation unit 303, the operation effective time At that point, the meter is set to reach the upper limit.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 252 (G), when the meter does not reach the upper limit within the operation effective time, the figure symbol of “777” which is a big hit symbol is not completed, and when the operation effective time elapses, A message "TIME UP" is displayed to notify that the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is a loss. When the variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined, the meter is prevented from reaching the upper limit even if the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated within the operation effective time.

[22-1. Stock production at the time of preliminary determination of the mode immediately before operation in operation production]
In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to continuously operate (press and hold) the pressing operation unit 303 for a predetermined operation effective time during the execution of the operation effect. Although a stock effect in which the addition time is sequentially added so that the total coincides with the operation effective time is executed, in this example, when the operation effect is executed, a predetermined operation immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. To allow the pressing operation unit 303 to operate, and at the time of the preliminary determination of the execution of the operation effect, a stock effect that sequentially stocks the contents of the immediately preceding operation mode operated by the operation effect is executed.

  Specifically, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. If a variation pattern that is to execute an operation effect having a predetermined immediately preceding operation mode is specified as advance determination information such as the type of the game effect to be performed (the type of the variation pattern), the execution of the operation effect At a plurality of timings set between the time of the preliminary determination of the above and the execution of the operation effect, it is possible to execute a stock effect that sequentially stocks the contents of the immediately preceding operation mode operated in the operation effect. In addition, as the timing for stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation performed in the operation effect, the stock timing is provided in the same manner as the timing for adding the above-described predetermined addition time. In other words, during the period from the preliminary determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect, before the reserve digestion to execute the operation effect, a stock time is set once for each change of the hold. At the same time, three stock periods are set at the time of holding the digestion for executing the operation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (A), the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect include whether the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, whether the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates in any of strong and weak, A combination of whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, green, or blue is set, and as the variation pattern for executing the operation effect, a plurality of patterns having the contents of the immediately preceding operation mode are provided. A type of variation pattern is set. Also, at each timing when the contents of the immediately preceding operation mode operated in the operation effect are stocked, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates in any of strong and weak, the pressing operation unit 303 is red, Either green or blue light is set. Then, at the time of the preliminary determination of the execution of the operation effect, the content of the operation immediately before operation operated in the operation effect is specified, and the content of the operation immediately before operation stocked in the stock effect is the same as the content of the operation immediately before operation operated in the operation effect. The contents immediately before the operation to be stocked at each timing are determined in advance so as to coincide with each other, and the contents of the predetermined operation immediately before the operation are sequentially stocked before the execution of the operation effect. .

  In this example, at each timing when the contents of the immediately preceding operation mode operated in the operation effect are stocked, whether the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates in any of strong or weak, and the pressing operation unit Although the content of any one of 303, which is lit in red, green, or blue is set, it may be set to erase the stored content of the immediately preceding operation mode at each timing. For example, stocking and erasing of the contents in the mode immediately before the operation may be repeated until the operation effect is executed. As described above, even when the content of the mode immediately before the operation is deleted in the stock effect, the sum of the content of the mode immediately before the operation stored in the stock effect and the content of the operation immediately before the process deleted in the stock effect is added. Is set so as to match the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect.

  In addition, when determining the variation pattern in which the operation effect is to be executed, the content of the mode immediately before the operation performed in the operation effect includes whether the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes and whether the pressing operation unit 303 is strong or weak. The variation pattern is determined so that the big hit expectation degree is different depending on the combination of whether the vibration occurs and whether the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, green, or blue. In principle, the variation pattern is determined in the order of lighting, vibration, and projection of the pressing operation unit 303 so that the big hit expectation is increased. Further, in the mode immediately before the operation in which the pressing operation unit 303 is turned on, the fluctuation pattern is determined in the order of blue → green → red so that the big hit expectation is increased, and in the mode immediately before the operation in which the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates. , The fluctuation pattern is determined in the order of weak vibration → strong vibration so that the big hit expectation becomes higher.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 4 is turned on (the number of holds = 4), the operation effect is performed until the operation effect is executed at the time of the holddown. Since the timing of stocking the contents of the operation immediately before operation is set to six times, the contents of the operation immediately before operation that is stocked at the six times are the contents of the operation immediately before operation that operates in the operation effect. In order to coincide with the above, the contents of the immediately preceding operation to be stocked at each timing are determined in advance by using the hold 4 o'clock scenario determination table. Specifically, when the immediately preceding operation mode 1 (projection & vibration A & red) is determined in advance as the content of the immediately preceding operation mode operated in the operation effect, any one of the scenarios PTN_B4_A1 to A5 is determined. For example, when the scenario PTN_hold 4_A1 is determined, a notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes at the stock time 6, a notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly at the stock time 5, and a pressing operation unit 303 that is red at the stock time 4 The operation immediately before operation, which is operated in the operation effect, is determined by preliminarily determining the notification to be lit and the notification not to be stored at any of the stock timings 1 to 3 and sequentially storing the contents of the predetermined operation immediately before operation at the six times. To match the content. In this example, when the content of the operation immediately before operation operated in the operation effect is the operation immediately before operation 1 (projection & vibration A & red), the expectation of the big hit is the highest among the plural types of operation immediately before operation. When all of the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly, and the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 lights up in red, a blessing effect that notifies a blessing message or the like is executed. are doing. Further, in this example, if the contents of the mode immediately before the operation are not stocked at all even during the stocking time, such as the stocking times 1 to 3 of the scenario PTN_Protection 4_A1, a sorry effect to notify that the stocking is not performed is executed. are doing.

  If the content of the mode immediately before the operation includes that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, for example, it is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red as in the scenario PTN_protection 4_A3. It is possible to notify that the light is turned on in blue or green, which is a color having a lower jackpot expectation than red, at a stock time earlier than the red. As described above, in this example, it is possible to notify the color of the pressing operation unit 303 that has been determined in advance in the order of green, blue, and red, which is the order of the jackpot expectation. For this reason, even if the user is notified that the big hit is expected to be lit in a low color, he or she should pay attention to whether or not the notification changes to the notification that the big hit expectation is lit in a high color in the subsequent stock period. Can be.

  When the content of the mode immediately before the operation includes that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly, for example, as in the scenario PTN_4_A4, it is not notified that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly. At the previous stock period, it is possible to notify that a weak vibration, which is a vibration mode having a lower jackpot expectation than a strong vibration, occurs. As described above, in the present example, it is possible to notify the vibration mode of the pressing operation unit 303 that is determined in advance in the order of the strong vibration, which is the order of the big hit expectation. For this reason, even if it is notified that the strong vibration with a low jackpot expectation is low, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the notification changes to the notification of the strong vibration with a high jackpot expectation in the subsequent stock period. .

  In addition, when the immediately preceding operation mode 18 (without protrusion, no vibration, and blue) is determined in advance as the content of the immediately preceding operation mode operated in the operation effect, any one of the scenarios PTN_B4_B1 to B3 is determined. However, in such a scenario PTN_hold 4_B1 to B3, it is configured to notify that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in blue at any one of the stock timings 4 to 6.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 253 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 3 is turned on (the number of holds = 3), the operation effect is performed until the operation effect is executed at the time of the holddown. Since five stock times are set as timings for stocking the contents of the operation immediately before operation, the contents of the operation immediately before operation that are stocked at the five times are changed to the operation immediately before operation that operates in the operation effect. The contents of the mode immediately before the operation to be stocked at each timing are determined in advance by using the hold 3 o'clock scenario determination table so as to match the contents of the above. Similarly, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 2 is lit (the number of holds = 2), or when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 1 is lit (the number of holds = 1), Using the corresponding scenario determination table (not shown), the contents of the immediately preceding operation stored at each timing are determined in advance.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the stock effect for stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation and the operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the stock effect and the operation effect in which the contents of the mode immediately before the operation are stocked.

  First, in this example, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is turned on (the number of holds = 4), the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect are specified, and the content is stocked in the stock effect. The stock timing 6 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 3, the stock time 5 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 2, and the change of the hold 1 so that the content of the mode immediately before the operation matches the content of the mode immediately before the operation operated in the operation effect. The contents immediately before the operation to be stocked at the respective timings of the stock timing 4 during the fluctuation of the time and the stock timings 1 to 3 before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation during the reserved digestion are determined in advance. Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), at the time of starting the variation display of the decorative symbol, for example, the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed in red as the content of the immediately preceding operation that is stocked during the variation at the time of the change of the hold 3. When the notification of the lighting is determined, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, “button red STOCK” is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area, and the stock is displayed. It is notified that the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the effect is the lighting of the pressing operation unit 303 in red.

  Further, when the display of the change of the decorative symbol is started, for example, when the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly is determined as the content of the immediately preceding operation that is stocked during the change of the hold 3 change. As shown in FIG. 254 (C), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "button vibration A STOCK" is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area, and the content of the operation immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect Indicates that the pressing operation unit 303 is strongly vibrating. Further, at the time of starting the change display of the decorative symbol, for example, when the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes is determined as the content of the immediately preceding operation that is stocked during the change of the hold 3 change As shown in FIG. 254 (D), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "button protruding STOCK" is displayed substantially at the center of the display area, and the contents of the operation immediately before the operation to be stocked in the stock effect are: It is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 is protruding.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), during the execution of the stock effect, a list of the contents immediately before the operation stored in the stock effect is displayed above the display area. When the lighting of the pressing operation unit 303 in red is stocked as the content, a display such as “button red STOCK completed” is displayed above the display area, and the content of the operation immediately before the stocking in the stock effect is pressed. It is notified that the operation unit 303 is lit in red. Until the time when the operation effect is executed, the stock of the contents in the mode immediately before the operation in the stock effect is repeated each time the hold order changes (every time the display of the decorative design is started to be changed). Thus, the content of the mode immediately before the operation stored in the stock effect can be increased stepwise. Similarly, even during the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern at the time of holding the digestion to execute the operation effect, before executing the operation effect, the stock of the content immediately before the operation in the stock effect is repeated, and the stock effect in the stock effect is repeated. The contents of the just-before operation mode can be increased stepwise.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (F), at the start of the operation effect, that is, immediately before the operation of the press operation unit 303, the press operation unit 303 is collectively operated according to the contents of the immediately preceding operation stocked in the stock effect. It is working. For example, when the content of the immediately preceding operation mode operated in the operation effect is the immediately preceding operation mode 1 (projection & vibration A & red), the pressing operation unit 303 is illuminated in red, vibrates strongly, and further operates to project further. are doing. During the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in the content of the mode immediately before the operation, “STOCK is being released” is displayed above the display area. Then, in the operation effect, similarly to the operation effect after the execution of the above-described stock effect in which the addition time is added, it is possible to operate the pressing operation unit 303 over the operation effective time and operate the pressing operation unit 303. By continuing, the predetermined meter can be raised, and an effect of whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time is executed.

  In this example, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect is the vibration of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing operation unit 303 may vibrate immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, in this example, after the contents of the mode immediately before the operation are stocked in the stock effect, immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 is operated collectively with the contents of the immediately preceding operation. Alternatively, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect, the pressing operation unit 303 may be operated once with the content of the mode immediately before the operation. Further, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in the content of the mode immediately before the operation may be maintained from the time when the content in the mode immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect to immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. In such a case, the content of the mode immediately before the operation can be grasped when the content of the mode immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect without depending on the visual recognition of the display area.

[23. Restriction of light guide effect using light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, when a fluctuating light-guiding effect is performed in which the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is illuminated and decorated during the change display of the decorative symbol (during the change display of the special symbol). Even if the decorative design change display (special design change display) is performed from the time when the decorative design that executed the time light effect is stopped (when the special design stops changing) until the specific period elapses, This limits the execution of the light guide effect when fluctuating. In addition, when a specific period has elapsed from the time when the decoration design in which the light guide effect at the time of change is executed is stopped (when the change of the special symbol is stopped), the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated in a different manner from the light guide effect at the time of the change. In this case, the light guide effect at the time of notification of cancellation is executed, and the fact that the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change is released is notified.

  Also, at the time when a specific period elapses from the time when the decoration design that performed the light guide effect at the time of the change is stopped and the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner, as the light guide effect at the time of the release notification, at the time of the release notification, When the light guide effect A is executed, but the decorative symbol is not changed, the light guide plate 2601 emits light in a mode different from that of the light guide effect A at the time of release notification as the light guide effect at the time of release notification. Light guide effect B is executed at the time of notification of the release to be decorated. That is, at the point in time when a specific period has elapsed from the stop of the change of the decorative symbol in which the light guide effect at the time of the change is executed, the mode of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is changed depending on whether or not the decorative symbol is being displayed. ing.

  FIG. 255 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the release notification-time light guide effect when a specific period occurs after the execution of the fluctuation-time light guide effect. First, when a special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) displayed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started to be displayed, the main control board 1310 sends a variable pattern command and determination. Although the result notification command is transmitted, if a fluctuation pattern that will execute the fluctuation light guiding effect is specified from the fluctuation pattern command, during the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern, as the fluctuation light guiding effect, The light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with light of the LED 2611 or the LED 2621 to display a picture. In addition, the timing for displaying the pattern on the light guide plate 2601 can be either during the normal fluctuation of whether or not to reach or during the reach effect after the reach. By doing so, it is suggested that the lottery result is likely to be a big hit in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, when the decorative design that has performed the fluctuation light guide effect is stopped, the counting of the time to determine whether or not the specific period has elapsed is started, and whether or not the specific period has elapsed until the specific period has elapsed. Continue counting whether or not. Until this specific period elapses, the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is limited, and the light guide plate 2601 is not decorated with light emission. In addition, the counting of the time as to whether or not the specific period has elapsed is performed not only during the period in which the decorative display is not displayed (variable display of the special symbol), but also during the display of the decorative symbol during the variable display (variable display of the special symbol). Medium) to keep counting. In other words, until the specific period elapses, even if the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed based on the fluctuating pattern in which the fluctuating light guide effect is executed, the execution of the fluctuating light guide effect is restricted. Therefore, the light guide plate 2601 is not decorated with light emission. As described above, during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol until the specific period elapses after the fluctuating light guide effect is executed, the fluctuating light guide effect is not performed. Execution is not continued in a short period of time, preventing the light of the LED 2611 and the LED 2621 from putting a burden on the player's eyes, and preventing the rarity of the effect of illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 2601 itself. can do.

  In this example, the variation time of the decorative symbol (special symbol) when the normal variation that does not reach the reach is performed is set to about 5 seconds on average, but the execution of the light guide effect at the time of variation is limited. The specific period is set to about 20 seconds. That is, the specific period is set so that normal fluctuations that do not reach reach can be performed four times. For this reason, at the time when the decorative symbol for which the fluctuation light guide effect has been executed is stopped, even if the upper limit number of four is suspended, the time until the four reserves are exhausted, that is, four. It is possible not to execute the light guide effect at the time of variation until the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the two suspensions is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (A), when a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner when a specific period has elapsed since the change of the decorative symbol in which the light guide effect at the time of the change is executed, a release notification is issued. As the light guide effect, the light guide effect A at the time of the cancellation notification is executed, and it is notified that the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of the change is released. Then, in the release notification time light guide effect A, so as to decorate the light guide plate 2601 with light emission in a mode different from the change time light guide effect, for example, to prevent the pattern shown in FIG. 158 from appearing in the change time light guide effect, It appears only in the light guide effect A at the time of release notification. In the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, a light guide plate different from the light guide plate 2601 used in the light guide effect at the time of change is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate is irradiated with LED light. Then, the picture shown in FIG. 158 may be displayed. In this way, in the release notification time light guide effect A, by illuminating the light guide plate 2601 in a manner different from the change time light guide effect, there is no confusion as to whether or not the change time light guide effect. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the lottery result indicates that there is a high possibility of a big hit being high in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Further, in the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, the time for decorating the light guide plate 2601 with light emission is set to an extremely short time (for example, 1 second or less) as compared with the execution time of the light guide effect at the time of change. The time to display the picture is instantaneously finished. Accordingly, even when the light guide effect A at the time of release notification is executed during the change display of the decorative symbol, the change such as the change display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the light guide plate 2601 is performed. It is possible to pay attention to the fluctuating production without obstructing the visual recognition of the production.

  In addition, at the point in time when a specific period has elapsed from the time when the decoration of the decorative symbol that has performed the fluctuation light guide effect is stopped, the restriction on the execution of the fluctuation light guide effect is released. Even if it is the timing to execute the fluctuating light guide effect (if the fluctuating pattern for executing the fluctuating light guide effect is being executed), the fluctuating light guide effect is executed at that time. Therefore, the light guide effect A at the time of the release notification is executed with priority. In such a case, a predetermined time (eg, for example, after the end of the release notification time light guide effect A) so that the fluctuation time light guide effect is not continuously executed after the end of the release notification time light guide effect A. After the elapse of 1 second), the fluctuating light guiding effect is executed. In this way, by temporarily stopping the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 from the end of the release notification time light guide effect A to the start of the change time light guide effect, the light guide plate 2601 is released when the change time light guide effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that the notification light guide effect A is continuing.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (B), when a decorative symbol has not been changed and displayed when a specific period has elapsed since the stop of the change of the decorative symbol for which the light guide effect at the time of change has been executed, a release notification is issued. As the light guide effect, the light guide effect B at the time of notification of cancellation is executed, and it is notified that the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change is released. Further, in this example, if a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has elapsed after the decorative symbol has not been changed and the decorative symbol has not been changed, the effect display device 1600 or the like is used. In order to execute a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) such as introduction of the pachinko machine 1, there is a high possibility that the demonstration effect is being executed at the time of executing the light guide effect B at the time of release notification. Then, in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, for example, a pattern in which the central portion is missing from the pattern shown in FIG. 158 is changed so as to decorate the light guide plate 2601 in a different manner from the light guide effect at the time of change. It does not appear in the light effect, and appears only in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification. In the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, a light guide plate different from the light guide plate 2601 used in the light guide effect at the time of change is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate is irradiated with LED light. 158. Alternatively, a pattern in which the central portion is missing from the patterns shown in FIG. 158 may be displayed. As described above, in the release notification-time light guide effect B, the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated and decorated in a mode different from the change-time light guide effect, so that it is not confused whether the light guide effect is the change-time light guide effect. In the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, when the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated and decorated, a pattern in which the central portion of the pattern shown in FIG. 158 is lacking is displayed, so that it is displayed on the effect display device 1600 through the central portion. It is possible to clearly recognize the image during the demonstration. Thereby, in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, it can be grasped that the decorative symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the light guide effect is a fluctuating light guide effect.

  Further, in the light guide effect B at the time of the release notification, the time for decorating the light guide plate 2601 with light emission is set to a longer time (for example, 5 seconds or more) than when performing the light guide effect at the time of change. The time for displaying the picture is made to last for a long time. Thus, when the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the effect display device 1600 is not focused on, but by performing the release notification time light guide effect B for a long time, the light guide effect in change time is obtained. It can be easily grasped that the restriction on the execution of the program has been released. In addition, for players who are dissatisfied that the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change is restricted, the player waits for the game from the stop of the change of the decorative symbol for which the light guide effect at the time of the change is executed, After executing the light effect B, it is possible to restart the game.

  In addition, in the case of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol during the execution of the release notification time light guide effect B in a state where the decorative symbol change display is not performed, the release notification time light guide effect B is ended. Like that. Accordingly, even when the decorative symbol variation display is started during the execution of the release notification light guide effect B, the decorative symbol variation display performed on the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the light guide plate 2601 and the like. This makes it possible to pay attention to the fluctuating effect without hindering the visual recognition of the fluctuating effect. In addition, in the case of starting the variation display of the decorative symbol during the execution of the release notification time light guide effect B, the release notification time light guide effect B is terminated, but immediately after the start of the variation display of the decoration symbol. Does not execute the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. That is, a predetermined time (for example, one second) elapses after the end of the release notification-time light guide effect B so that the fluctuation-type light guide effect is not continuously executed after the end of the release notification-time light guide effect B. After that, the fluctuating light guide effect is executed. In this way, by temporarily stopping the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 from the end of the release notification time light guide effect B to the start of the change time light guide effect, the light guide plate 2601 is released when the change time light guide effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that the notification light guide effect B is continuing.

  Also, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303 during the execution of the release notification time light guide effect B, the release notification time light guide effect B can be ended. As described above, in the release notification-time light guide effect B, the time for decorating the light guide plate 2601 with light emission is longer (for example, 5 seconds or more) than the time of the execution of the fluctuation-time light guide effect. If the player wants to end the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the player only has to operate the pressing operation unit 303, and the end timing of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification can be determined according to the player's will. And In addition, even during the execution of the release notification time light guide effect A, the player may operate the pressing operation unit 303 so that the release notification time light guide effect A may be ended.

  In addition, in the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation, a sound effect is output from a speaker or the like in accordance with the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601, whereas the light guide effect at the time of release notification (light guide effect A at the time of release notification, light guide at the time of release notification). In the effect B), the light guide plate 2601 is decorated with light emission, but no effect sound is output from a speaker or the like. Thereby, during the execution of the light guide effect at the time of release notification, it is not confused whether or not the light guide effect at the time of change, and it is highly likely that the lottery result will be a big hit in the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding of suggestion from occurring.

  In this example, various sounds are output from the speakers in each scene according to the progress of the game. However, the peripheral control IC 1510a dynamically sets each channel for each sound to be output from the speakers or the like. On the other hand, if the number of sound combinations to be output exceeds the maximum number of channels of each channel (for example, 16 channels), the output is scheduled within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. Each channel is dynamically assigned to a combination of sounds. Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output through each dynamically allocated channel within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority. In this regard, at the time of performing the fluctuating light guide effect, the effect sound accompanying the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is assigned to the channel and output. On the other hand, at the time of the release notification time light guide effect, the effect associated with the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is performed. The effect sound is not output without assigning the sound to the channel itself. That is, when the light guide effect at the time of release notification is executed, the effect sound accompanying the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is not assigned to the channel itself, so that an empty channel is easily generated. By this, at the start of the release guide at the time of notification of release A, a fluctuating effect such as a fluctuating display of a decorative symbol is being performed, but it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect sound relating to the fluctuating effect is not output. Can be. Further, at the start of the release notification-time light guide effect B, the variable effect such as the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed, but even when the variable effect is started during the execution of the release notification-time light guide effect B. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an effect sound related to the variable effect is not output.

  Next, a specific effect example of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 during the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change and the light guide effect at the time of release notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is an example of a specific effect of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 when the light guide effect at the time of change and the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 256 (A), when the special symbol display (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) displayed on the special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is started, the main control is started. Although the variation pattern command and the determination result notification command are transmitted from the substrate 1310, when the variation pattern that will execute the light guide effect at the time of variation is specified from the variation pattern command, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, a light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with light of the LED 2611 and the LED 2621 to display a picture. Displaying the pattern on the light guide plate 2601 in this manner suggests that the lottery result is likely to be a big hit in the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), when the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed and the stop symbol of the special symbol is to be stopped and displayed, a stop display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and based on the command, Thus, the stop display in the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined. At this time, counting of the time as to whether or not the specific period has elapsed is started. Until the specific period elapses, the execution of the fluctuating light guide effect is restricted, and the light guide plate 2601 emits light. They are not decorated.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (C), when a specific period has elapsed from the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol for which the light guide effect at the time of the fluctuation has been performed has elapsed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, FIG. As shown in the figure, as the release notification time light guide effect A, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with light of the LED 2611 and the LED 2621 to display a pattern different from the light guide effect at the time of change. are doing. Thus, in the release notification time light guide effect A, it is notified that the restriction on the execution of the change time light guide effect has been released by decorating the light guide plate 2601 with light emission decoration in a mode different from the change time light guide effect. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), when a state in which the decorative display has not been changed and displayed has not been performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds or more) since the decorative pattern stopped being changed, the demonstration effect is executed. However, when a specific period has elapsed from the time when the decoration of the decorative design for which the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is stopped during the execution of the demonstration effect, as shown in FIG. As the time light guide effect B, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of the LED 2611 or the LED 2621, and a pattern with a central portion missing as a different pattern from the fluctuating light guide effect. it's shown. At this time, an image during the demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly recognized from the center of the picture. As described above, in the release notification time light guide effect B, the light guide plate 2601 is decorated with light emission in a mode different from the change time light guide effect, thereby notifying that the restriction of the execution of the change time light guide effect has been released. ing.

[24. Disappointing production during the temporary stoppage of the lost pattern in super reach production]
In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 is started, the variation from the main control board 1310 is started. The pattern command and the judgment result notification command are transmitted, and based on those commands, the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → medium. They are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols. In addition, when the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed and the stop symbol of the special symbol is to be stopped and displayed, a stop display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined based on the command. The stop display of the decorative symbol in the stop symbol has been determined. Also, before the stop display in the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and from the state where the stop symbol of the decorative symbol fluctuates and the stop display is determined. During the temporary stop period (approximately 1 to 2 seconds), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol swings and fluctuates (the decorative symbol swings up and down and left and right in small increments).

  In addition, as a variation pattern in which a variation effect such as a reach effect is set, after a loss symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the decoration symbol, the variation symbol of the decoration symbol is started again from the state of the swing symbol, and a predetermined symbol is displayed. A stop symbol of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after the elapse of the period, and a re-variation variation pattern for determining the stop display of the decorative symbol at the stop symbol is also set. For this reason, in a state where the losing symbol fluctuates and fluctuates as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, attention can be paid to the user as to whether or not to resume the variable symbol display.

  When a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and a game specified from the pre-determination command is transmitted. When a specific variation pattern that will execute a reach production (such as a super-reach production) with a high expectation of big hits among the reach productions is specified as the preliminary determination information such as the type of the production mode (the type of the variation pattern). In the temporary stop period of the losing symbol, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with light of the LED 2621 to display a pattern, and the fluctuation effect of the big hit expectation in the subsequent fluctuation effect A stop-time prefetching effect that indicates in advance that a high reach effect is performed can be executed. That is, in the stop-time pre-reading effect, by irradiating the light of the LED 2621 to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 to display the picture, the lottery result can be a big hit in the subsequent variable effect. It is suggested in advance that it is highly likely.

  The above-mentioned stop-time pre-reading effect, when a specific change pattern that will execute a reach effect (such as a super-reach effect) with a high jackpot expectation among the reach effects is determined in advance, the change based on the specific change pattern Regardless of whether or not a plurality of variable effects are executed during the period until the effect is executed, it can be executed during the temporary stop period of each decorative symbol in the variable effect. That is, the stop-time pre-reading effect can be executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative design in the variable effect if the specific fluctuation pattern is determined in advance in a state where the operation is suspended, while in the state where no suspension is performed, It is not executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative design in the variable effect.

  However, the fluctuation effect in the period after the specific fluctuation pattern is preliminarily determined is a fluctuation effect at the time of a big hit where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, or a super reach effect with a high expectation of the big hit. In some cases, the stop-time prefetch effect is not executed. In other words, only in the case of a variable effect at the time of a loss in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and only in the case of a variable effect other than the super-reach effect, the stop-time pre-reading effect during the temporary stop period of the loss symbol. Is executable. In this way, when the stop-time pre-reading effect is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is started again from the state in which the lost symbol fluctuates and fluctuates as in the above-described re-variation variation pattern. Since the stop display with the lost symbol is determined, no expectation is given to whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol again at the time of executing the stop-time pre-reading effect, but in the subsequent variable effect The expectation that the lottery result will be a big hit is increased.

  In this example, in the state where there is a hold, the supermarket determines whether a specific fluctuation pattern that will execute a reach production with a high jackpot expectation (such as a super reach production) among the reach productions is determined in advance. It is determined whether or not to execute the stop-time pre-reading effect during the temporary stop period of the losing symbol at the end of the variable effect other than the reach effect, but in the state where there is a hold, the fluctuation pattern in which the lottery result is a big hit is determined in advance. When it is determined, it may be determined that the stop-time prefetch effect is executed with a higher probability than when the variation pattern in which the lottery result is lost is determined in advance. In such a case as well, the stop-time prefetching effect is an effect with a high degree of expectation of the big hit, and it is suggested in advance that there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit in the subsequent variable effect.

  In addition, according to the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation, the fluctuation pattern for executing the super reach effect at the time of the loss in which the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed. If specified, during the temporary stoppage period of the losing design at the end of the super-reach effect, a sorry effect to notify that a big hit was not obtained is executed. Such a disappointing effect is executed during the temporary stoppage period of the losing symbol at the end of the super-reach effect regardless of whether the state is on hold or not on hold. In addition, if it is a floating effect other than the super reach effect, or if the super reach effect is a super reach effect at the time of a big hit where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a sorry effect shall be executed. There is no. As described above, when the unfortunate effect is performed during the temporary stop period of the loss symbol at the end of the super reach effect, the variation of the decorative symbol is changed again from the state in which the loss symbol fluctuates and fluctuates as in the fluctuation pattern of the re-variation described above. Since the display is not started and the stop display in the lost symbol is determined, when the unfortunate effect is performed, no expectation is given to whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol again. I have.

  As described above, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super-reach effect, the stop-time pre-reading effect is not executed, and the unfortunate effect is executed. For this reason, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super-reach effect, not only is there no expectation whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol again, but also the lottery result in the subsequent variable effect is a big hit The expectation that it will not be given is also given. In super-reach production, the expectation of a big hit is high because of the high expectation of big hits in the reach production, but at the end of the super-reach production at the time of loss, there is no By performing an effect that does not give expectation, it is possible to prevent the feeling of excessive tension from continuing after the end of the super reach effect.

  FIG. 257 shows a timing chart at the time of executing the stop-time prefetching effect and the disappointing effect during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol. First, when a special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) displayed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started to be displayed, the main control board 1310 sends a variable pattern command and determination. Although the result notification command is transmitted, if a variable effect other than the super-reach effect is specified among the variable effects at the time of the loss based on the variable pattern command, the variable effect other than the super-reach effect is specified. In the temporary stop period of the losing symbol at the end, a stop-time prefetching effect can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 257 (A), during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the variable effect other than the super-reach effect, if there is no hold, or if there is a hold, the reach effect If a specific fluctuation pattern that will execute a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation (such as a super reach effect) is not determined in advance, the stop-time prefetch effect is not executed. In such a case, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the lost symbol is caused to fluctuate while the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed, and transmitted from the main control board 1310. The stop display of the lost symbol is determined based on the stop display command.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), in the temporary stop period of the loss design at the end of the variable effect other than the super reach effect, the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation among the reach effects in a state where there is a hold, When a specific variation pattern that will execute a super-reach effect is determined in advance, the stop-time prefetch effect is executed. In such a case, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is made to emit light as a stop-time pre-reading effect during the temporary stop period of the losing symbol, and a high jackpot expectation is high in the subsequent variable effect. It is intended to suggest in advance that a reach production will take place.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 257 (C), when a super-reach effect is specified from among the variable effects at the time of the loss based on the variable pattern command, the super-reach effect is determined to be in a state of holding or in a state of no holding. Regardless of whether or not there is, during the temporary stoppage period of the losing design at the end of the super-reach effect, a sorry effect to notify that a big hit was not obtained is executed. In such a case, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the background image is different from the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the lost symbol fluctuates and fluctuates in a state where the effect image dedicated to the unfortunate effect is displayed. In this way, the stop display of the lost symbol is determined based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of performing the stop-time pre-reading effect and the disappointing effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of performing the stop-time prefetching effect and the disappointing effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 258 (A), when the special symbol display (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) displayed on the special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is started, the main control is started. The variation pattern command and the determination result notification command are transmitted from the board 1310, and the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started based on the variation pattern command. . Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (B), after a lapse of a predetermined time, the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed is maintained. , So that the losing symbol fluctuates and fluctuates. Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (C), the stop display of the lost symbol is determined based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310. In addition, in the temporary stop period of the losing design at the end of the variable effect other than the super-reach effect, if there is no hold, or if there is a hold, the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation among reach effects ( If a specific variation pattern that will execute a super-reach effect is not determined in advance, the stop-time prefetch effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 258 (D), in the temporary stop period of the loss design at the end of the variable effect other than the super-reach effect, the reach effect with a high expectation of the jackpot among the reach effects ( When a specific variation pattern that will execute a super-reach effect is determined in advance, the stop-time prefetch effect is executed. In such a stop-time pre-reading effect, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is illuminated with the light of the LED 2621 so as to display the pattern, and the reach of the big fluctuation expectation in the subsequent variable effects is high. I try to suggest in advance that the production will take place. In addition, when the light guide plate 2601 is decorated with light emission, the light emission mode (emission color, light emission time, light emission frequency, etc.) of the light guide plate 2601 is changed according to the jackpot expectation degree at the time of executing a predetermined variation pattern determined in advance. Or the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2601 can be changed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (E), when a super-reach effect is specified among the variable effects at the time of the loss based on the variable pattern command, it is determined whether or not the super-reach effect is on hold or on-hold. Regardless of whether or not there is, a disappointing effect is being performed during the temporary stoppage of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect. In such a disappointing effect, the decorative image is different from the background image at the time when the losing design is temporarily stopped and displayed as a special effect image for the disappointing effect displayed on the effect display device 1600. The message "End" is displayed to clearly notify that no big hit was obtained. Also, in the disappointing effect, the lost pattern in the temporary stop display state is displayed small in the upper right of the display area, whereas the effect image dedicated to the disappointing effect is displayed large in the entire display area However, it is easier to pay attention to the effect image dedicated to the unfortunate effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (F), based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the stop display of the losing symbol displayed small in the upper right of the display area is determined.

  In the above-mentioned unfortunate effect, the effect image dedicated to the unfortunate effect is displayed as a still image with no movement of a character or the like. Also, while the super-reach effect is being performed, a loud sound is output from a speaker or the like more louder than usual, while the unfortunate effect at the end of the super-reach effect at the time of the loss is caused by the speaker or the like. There is no sound output from. From this, in the unfortunate effect, the player can grasp that the change display of the decorative pattern is not started again, and that the big hit is clearly notified. .

  In the unfortunate effect, a character that appears in the super reach effect is displayed as an effect image dedicated to the unfortunate effect. In other words, as the unfortunate performance, there are a plurality of types of unfortunate effects with different characters, and among the multiple types of super reach effects, the super reach is performed so that the character that appeared in the executed super reach effect also appears in the unfortunate effect. The disappointing production changes according to the type of production. Thereby, during the temporary stoppage of the lost symbol at the end of the super-reach effect, the same unfortunate effect is not executed only, so that the player is unlikely to get bored. However, after providing a plurality of types of unfortunate effects, a disappointing effect may be randomly executed from among the plurality of types during the temporary stoppage period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect.

[25. Button-related effects]
Next, button-related effects will be described. FIG. 259 is an explanatory diagram showing a dialogue notice as an example of a button-related presentation performed on the presentation display device 1600. FIG. 260 is a timing chart of the dialogue notice shown in FIG. FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation trigger pseudo error effect as an example of a button-related effect to be executed, and FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-operation pseudo error effect as an example of a button-related effect performed by the effect display device 1600. FIG. 263 (A) is a timing chart of the operation trigger pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 261, and FIG. 263 (B) is a timing chart of the non-operation pseudo error effect shown in FIG.

  First, a dialogue announcement as a button-related effect will be described. In this example, when a fluctuation pattern command instructing the start of the fluctuation effect and a determination result notification command according to the lottery result are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the lottery for the notice or the like in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing. Execute the processing. That is, a random number (announcement random number) for announcement determination is selected, while selecting an announcement lottery table corresponding to an announcement lottery table corresponding to a lottery result (big hit, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the fluctuation pattern command or the determination result command. The presence / absence of a notice effect and the kind of notice when executing the notice effect are determined by comparing the acquired judgment value set in the notice lottery table with the acquired notice random number.

  Then, when it is determined to execute the dialogue announcement as the button-related effect, at time t0 in FIG. 260, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 to start the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. (FIG. 259 (A)), a normal reach effect of generating a reach in which the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol and displaying the decorative symbols in the middle at a low speed is displayed (FIG. 259 (B)). Further, at timing t1 in FIG. 260A after the occurrence of the reach, an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing a button operation and a remaining time display 1600b are displayed (FIG. 259C). In this example, "press a button!" Is displayed as the operation instruction display 1600a.

  After the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the peripheral control board 1510, at timing t2 in FIG. 260A, an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation reception of the staging operation unit 300 (the pressing operation unit 303) is valid. Is started, and the scale displayed as the remaining time display 1600b is reduced as the valid period elapses (FIG. 259 (D)). When the effect operation unit 300 is operated and the operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t3 in FIG. 260A within the valid period, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the main character 1600c on the effect display device 1600. And the words of the main character 1600c are displayed (so-called cut-in), and a line notice is executed (FIG. 259 (E)). In this example, “Atsuyo!” Is displayed as a line of the main character 1600c, which indicates that there is a high possibility of a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display during execution. In addition, the content displayed as a line of the main character 1600c in the line announcement is not only related to a lottery result such as a jackpot expectation degree, but also a line (for example, “It's been a long time”) not related to the lottery result is displayed. In this case, the player is guessed that the possibility of a big hit as a result of the variable display being executed is low.

  If the effect operation unit 300 is not operated within a valid period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid, the dialogue notice is not executed. As described above, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated, the dialogue notice is not executed, so that the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation unit 300. It should be noted that the dialogue notice may be executed even when the effect operation unit 300 is not operated within a valid period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid. In this case, the effect is produced. A player who has forgotten to operate the operation unit 300 can be rescued and the contents of the dialogue notice, that is, the expectation of the big hit can be transmitted.

  In this example, after the dialogue of the main character 1600c is displayed over a predetermined period of time after the dialogue of the main character 1600c is displayed, the dialogue of the dialogue of the main character 1600c is ended at timing t4 in FIG. Then, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is executed (FIG. 260 (F)). Although the detailed production examples during each reach production are not shown, in the normal reach production, for example, the decoration pattern in the middle near the center of the screen fluctuates slowly and the background of the left, middle and right decoration patterns is supported. Display a `` normal reach directing background image '' different from the normal background image as a background image to be displayed, further output a normal reach directing effect sound, and stop and display the decorative pattern inside after a predetermined time Derivation and display of the result can be exemplified. In a super-reach effect other than the normal reach, for example, a main character 1600c or the like is displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600 (at this time, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced at the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600). Display), a "super-reach production background image" different from the background image at the time of normal or normal reach production is displayed as a background image corresponding to the background of the main character 1600c, and further a super-reach production production sound is displayed. For example, outputting the main character 1600c or the like to display a success / failure effect image indicating whether or not the predetermined purpose can be achieved can be exemplified. Note that, in the super reach effect, if the main character 1600c or the like can achieve a predetermined purpose after a predetermined time, a big hit occurs.

  In the example shown in FIG. 259, since the judgment result notification command indicating that a big hit has been received is received, after displaying the mode in which the predetermined purpose has been achieved in the super reach effect (FIG. 259 (F)), the big hit symbol ( 259 (G) in a state in which all of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are stopped at the same symbol (FIG. 259 (G)), and control to the big hit game state (FIG. 259 (G)). H)). In addition, it is possible to execute the line announcement even if the judgment result notification command to be out of order is received, in this case, after executing the line announcement, the middle decoration design is executed without performing a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect. The left and right decorative symbols may be stopped at a different symbol, or after displaying the dialogue, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is performed to display a mode in which the predetermined purpose has not been achieved, and then the interior decoration is performed. An out-of-position symbol for stopping and displaying the symbol with a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols may be displayed.

  In this way, in the dialogue announcement as the button-related effect, the validity period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid during the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern is set, and the effect operation unit 300 is set within this validity period. Is operated and an operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 causes the main character 1600c to appear, and a line of the main character 1600c is displayed. In the speech notice, the speech of the main character 1600c and the speech of the main character 1600c are displayed for a predetermined period regardless of the operation timing of the production operation unit 300, and disappear before starting the super reach production different from the normal reach production. It has become. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is operated at an early stage of the validity period (for example, 5 seconds) and an operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the dialogue notice ends, and until the timing t4 in FIG. When the normal reach is executed and timing t4 in FIG. 260 is reached, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is started, and the effect operation unit 300 is operated immediately before the end of the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) to operate the peripheral control board 1510. When the signal is input, the dialogue notice ends, and immediately at timing t4 in FIG. 260, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is started.

  Next, an operation trigger pseudo error effect as a button-related effect will be described. Upon receiving from the main control board 1310 a fluctuation pattern command for instructing the start of a fluctuation effect for executing an operation trigger pseudo error effect and a determination result notification command according to the lottery result, the peripheral control substrate 1510 performs the reception command analysis process. After performing a lottery process for a notice or the like, and at the timing t0 ′ of FIG. 263 (A), controlling the display of the effect display device 1600 to start the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, the left and right decorative symbols are the same. A normal reach effect is generated in which a reach that stops at the symbol is generated and the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed at a low speed (FIG. 261 (A)). In addition, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed, a lottery result indicating that a button-related effect other than the operation trigger pseudo error effect is to be executed is not obtained in the lottery process related to a notice or the like. That is, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed, other button-related effects are not executed.

  After the decoration display is started to be changed on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 displays an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing a button operation and a remaining time display 1600b at the timing t1 'in FIG. 263 (A) ( 261 (B)), at timing t2 ′ in FIG. 263 (A), a valid period (eg, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the staging operation unit 300 is valid is started, and the remaining time is displayed according to the elapse of the valid period. The scale displayed as 1600b is reduced (FIG. 261 (C)). Then, when the effect operation unit 300 is operated and the operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t3 ′ in FIG. 263 (A) within this effective period, the fluctuation effect and the sound effect of the decorative symbol (in this example, After the normal reach display is interrupted and the pachinko machine 1 is switched to a pseudo error mode as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state (including a state where a bug has occurred) (FIG. 261 (D)), a predetermined period of time is displayed. At the timing t4 'in FIG. 263 (A) after the lapse (for example, after 5 seconds), a pseudo return mode in which the pachinko machine 1 is recovered from the error state is displayed (FIG. 261 (E)).

  In this example, as a pseudo error mode, a special image (FIG. 261 (D)) is displayed as if the display contents of the effect display device 1600 were disturbed and hardened (progress of the effect was stopped). Specifically, a special image (mosaic-shaped special image) in which the image ((FIG. 261 (C))) at a predetermined timing during the normal reach effect is partially displaced is displayed, and at first glance, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. While the special image is being displayed, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600. The left, middle, and right decorative patterns that are displayed in a reduced size are displayed clearly without being partially displaced like special images, and are truly displayed to a game arcade manager or the like. Is recognized as not being abnormal (error state), and is not erroneously recognized as being abnormal (error state).

  The pseudo error mode may be any mode in which the illusion of the pachinko machine 1 can be illusioned as if an error state has occurred. In addition to the above-described example of the mosaic-shaped special image, the pseudo error mode is originally displayed on the effect display device 1600, for example. A mode in which an image to be displayed may be displayed in an incomplete state, a mode in which an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed as a still image without being updated, and the like may be used. An image displayed as the pseudo error mode (a mosaic-like special image in which the display content of the effect display device 1600 is disturbed, etc.) is prepared in advance (stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 as image data). Or may be generated each time by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data currently displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and specializes the read image data. Effect display device 1600 so as to be displayed in effect display device 1600 in a mode (a mosaic mode, a mode in which the vertical and horizontal display ratios are different from the normal mode, and a mode in which the direction ratio is different from the normal mode). Peripheral control IC for drawing data for drawing an image Generated on the VRAM 510a, it may be processed to) the display. Further, in this example, a message image indicating that the player is restored from the error state, such as "Please wait for a while," is displayed as the pseudo return mode, but the pseudo return mode indicates that the player is returning from the error state. May be any mode as long as the mode is recognizable. For example, a mode similar to a startup screen of a computer may be displayed.

  In addition, when the display is switched to the pseudo error mode, a pseudo error sound (for example, an abnormality or failure in the gaming machine 1) is completed in a shorter time (for example, 1 second) than the display period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pseudo error mode. A special sound such as "gakko!" Is output at the time of switching, and during the subsequent display of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode, no effect sound is output or the volume is suppressed. (Including silencing). By executing such a special sound effect in accordance with the pseudo error mode or the pseudo return mode, it becomes easier to give the player an illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. can do. Also, when displaying the pseudo return mode, a pseudo return sound different from the pseudo error sound (for example, a specific sound such as "pip-pip -..." as if the upper gaming machine 1 is being restored) is output. The pseudo return sound may be continuously output during the display period of the pseudo return mode (for example, 5 seconds) in order to give the player an impression of being restored from the abnormality. it can. However, it is necessary for the game arcade manager or the like to recognize that it is not a true abnormality (error state). Therefore, even during the display in the pseudo error mode or the pseudo return mode, the occurrence of a malfunction or the player In the event that an illegal act has occurred, the notification sound and the notification sound for notifying them are output so as to be reliably transmitted to the outside at a large volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) without suppressing the volume. . In addition, the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound depend on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d and the volume adjustment based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301, like the other effect sounds. Note that the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound may be set to have a relatively large volume with respect to the other effect sounds, and a volume adjustment based on a slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d and an operation of the effect operation unit 301. Even if the volume of the production sound is changed in accordance with the volume adjustment based on the sound, the false error sound and the pseudo return sound are output at a predetermined volume or more, thereby further increasing the trueness that the pachinko machine 1 is in the error state. This makes it easy for the player to make an illusion.

  Further, since the pseudo error mode is displayed immediately after the operation of the effect operation unit 300, the relationship between the operation of the effect operation unit 300 by the player and the pseudo error mode becomes close, and the player operates the effect operation unit 300. Can be recognized as having entered an error state. In this example, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode are also displayed when the effect operation unit 300 is not operated within a valid period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid. As a result, it is possible to surprise the player by assuming that the error state has occurred because the effect operation unit 300 has not been operated within the valid period.

  In addition, one or both of the display periods of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode may be adjusted according to the remaining period of the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid. . Specifically, the period from when the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed at the timing t1 'in FIG. You may make it fixed. Thereby, it is possible to execute a fluctuation effect in accordance with the fluctuation time regardless of the timing of receiving the operation of the effect operation unit 300.

  After the pseudo return mode is displayed (FIG. 261 (E)), at timing t5 'in FIG. 263 (A), the normal reach effect, which is the effect mode prior to the display of the pseudo error mode, is performed without executing the normal reach effect. Displays another effect mode (super reach effect) and starts a variable effect. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d in the center of the effect display device 1600 so as to face each other, and decorates left, middle, and right at the lower left of the effect display device 1600. The symbol is reduced and displayed (FIG. 261 (F)). Then, a battle effect is executed in which the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d confront each other. If the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, a mode in which the main character 1600c attacks the enemy character 1600d is displayed as a result of the battle effect (FIG. 261 (G)), and the main character 1600c is set to the enemy character. A mode of winning at 1600d is displayed (FIG. 261 (H)). On the other hand, when the received determination result notification command indicates a miss, a mode in which the enemy character 1600d attacks the main character 1600c as a result of the battle effect is displayed, and a mode in which the main character 1600c is defeated by the enemy character 1600d is displayed. Become like

  At timing t5 ", the main control MPU 1310 of the main control board 1310 stops the display of the change of the special symbol and transmits a stop display command to instruct the peripheral control board 1510 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol. Reference numeral 1510 denotes a mode in which the decorative symbol indicates the decorative symbol based on the reception of the stop display command, that is, “777” is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol in the example shown in FIG.

  Next, a non-operation pseudo error effect as a button-related effect will be described. Upon receiving from the main control board 1310 a fluctuation pattern command instructing the start of a fluctuation effect for executing a non-operation pseudo error effect and a determination result notification command according to the lottery result, the peripheral control substrate 1510 performs the reception command analysis processing. After performing a lottery process for a notice or the like, and at the timing t0 ″ in FIG. 263 (B), controlling the display of the effect display device 1600 to start the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, the left and right decorative symbols are the same. A normal reach effect is generated in which a reach that stops at the symbol is generated and the decorative symbol in the middle is fluctuated at a low speed (FIG. 262 (A)). , A lottery result indicating that a button-related effect other than the non-operation pseudo error effect is executed cannot be obtained. Other button-related production is so as not to be executed when you run the error performance.

  After the decoration display is started to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 displays an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing a button operation and a remaining time display 1600b at timing t1 "in FIG. 263 (B) ( 262 (B)) Thereafter, without starting the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 becomes effective, when the timing t2 ″ in FIG. After the sound effect (in this example, the display and sound during the normal reach effect) is interrupted and switched to a pseudo error mode as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state (FIG. 262 (C)), after a predetermined period has elapsed ( At a timing t3 ″ of FIG. 263 (B) (for example, after 5 seconds), a pseudo return mode is displayed in which the pachinko machine 1 is recovered from the error state. Figure 262 (D)).

  That is, in the non-operation pseudo error effect, the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the player is suddenly switched to the pseudo error mode while instructing the button operation to the player, and the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even though the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) during which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is effective is not actually started, even if an operation signal is output in response to the operation of the effect operation unit 300 The operation signal is not received by the peripheral control board 1510 (the operation signal may not be output even if the effect operation unit 300 is performed outside the valid period). As described above, since the pseudo error mode is suddenly displayed at an unexpected timing, it is possible to surprise and surprise the player who is preparing to operate the effect operation unit 300.

  After the pseudo return mode is displayed (FIG. 262 (D)), at timing t4 ″ in FIG. 263 (B), the normal reach effect, which is the effect mode prior to the display of the pseudo error mode, is performed without executing the normal reach effect. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a different effect mode (super-reach effect) and starts a variable effect so that the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d face each other at the center of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed at the lower left of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 262 (E)), and a battle effect is performed in which the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d confront each other. Also, if the received judgment result notification command indicates a miss, the enemy The manner in which the character 1600d attacks the main character 1600c is displayed (FIG. 262 (F)), and the manner in which the main character 1600c defeats the enemy character 1600d is displayed (FIG. 262 (G)). When the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, a mode in which the main character 1600c attacks the enemy character 1600d as a result of the battle effect is displayed, and a mode in which the main character 1600c defeats the enemy character 1600d is displayed.

  At timing t5 ", the main control MPU 1310 of the main control board 1310 stops the display of the change of the special symbol and transmits a stop display command to instruct the peripheral control board 1510 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol. Reference numeral 1510 denotes a mode in which the decorative symbol is determined according to the determination result command based on the reception of the stop display command, that is, “232” is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol in the example shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect as the button-related effects are executed, the fluctuation effect of the decorative pattern (normal reach effect in this example) is interrupted, and the pachinko machine 1 enters an error state. After switching to the pseudo error mode as if it were displayed, a pseudo recovery mode in which the pachinko machine 1 is returned from the error state after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 5 seconds) is displayed. After the pseudo return mode is displayed for a predetermined period, the variable effect of the decorative pattern before the interruption is not restarted, but a variable effect of an effect mode different from the variable effect is started. In addition, the super reach production as a production mode different from the normal reach production performed after the display of the pseudo return mode has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the normal reach production (a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit design) is easily derived). It is. Therefore, instead of resuming the normal reach production after the operation opportunity pseudo error production, it is a completely different production form, and switches to a super reach production with a higher expectation of big hits than the normal reach production, and executes the variable production, thereby performing a floating production. Can be improved.

  In the above example, the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button-related effects during the normal reach effect, and the big hit expectation degree is higher than the normal reach effect after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are completed. Is switched to a super-reach effect with a high degree of super-reach effect, but before the fluctuation effect of the decorative pattern is interrupted by the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect, the super reach effect other than the normal reach effect May be executed. In this case, the production mode (super-reach production type) and the jackpot expectation degree of the super-reach production performed after the operation trigger pseudo-error production and the non-operation pseudo-error production are completed, This is different from the Super Reach production that was performed before the suspension of the design fluctuation production May be a big hit expectations higher effect is produced than in the in a by super reach demonstration that was previously run interruption of variation effect decorative symbol (different types of super reach effect). That is, after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are completed, a variable effect that is more advantageous to the player than before the execution of the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect may be performed. . This not only increases the expectation for the jackpot before the execution of the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect, but also increases the expectation of the jackpot after execution of the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect. Expectations for big hits can be raised by starting a high degree of super-reach production, and the entertainment interest in games can be improved.

  Further, control for stopping the emission of game balls or control for stopping payout of game balls may be executed in synchronization with the display of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode. That is, the display period of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode (the period from the timing t3 ′ to the timing t5 ′ in FIG. 263 (A) and the period from the timing t2 ″ to the timing t4 ″ in FIG. 263 (B)) is a game. By stopping the launch of the ball or stopping the payout of the game ball, the pseudo error state can be given the truth and the player can believe that the error state has actually occurred, and the subsequent game production You can be surprised at the change.

  In addition, the execution timing of the button-related effect is not limited to the above-described one, but the variation effect of the decorative pattern is interrupted before the reach occurs, the button-related effect is executed, and the reach is generated after the button-related effect is completed. By performing the super-reach effect, the variable effect of the effect mode different from the variable effect of the decorative symbol before the interruption may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be lost (the decorative symbol including at least two types of symbols). In this case, the left and right decorative symbols may be the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol may be a non-reach symbol of a different symbol, or at least the left and right symbols may be different symbols. Good), and temporarily stop the display (the display is slowly changing up and down or left and right, but not completely stopped). Related effect may be executed variation effect of different representation embodiment the variation effect decorative symbol before interruption after completion of the button-related effect running (so-called re-change and quasi-continuous variation). Also, in this case, if the judgment result command that is out of order is received, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner without starting the variable effect in a different effect form from the decorative effect before the interruption after the termination of the button-related effect. Alternatively, the decorative design may be stopped at least at the left and right symbols that are different from each other to terminate the variable effect without generating reach.

  Further, the button-related effects (serial announcement, operation trigger pseudo error effect, non-operation pseudo error effect) are not limited to those described above, but may be effect operations involving movement (such as upward movement) of the pressing operation unit 303 from a reference position. A movable effect that prompts the player to operate after changing the appearance of the unit 300 may be used. The display of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode in the case of such a movable effect is performed, for example, at a predetermined timing during the movement of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 or immediately after the pressing operation unit 303 moves to the ascending position. At this timing, the movement of the pressing operation unit 303 is stopped to display a pseudo error mode or a pseudo return mode. Further, in the case of such an embodiment, the pressing operation unit 303 is deviated from the reference position until the pseudo return mode ends (the pressing operation unit 303 is stationary during the movement, and the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position). (At rest), and the pressing operation unit 303 that has deviated from the reference position at a predetermined timing after the end of the pseudo return mode may be restored to the reference position. In this way, by generating the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode together with the sudden stop of the movement in the movable effect operation unit 300, it becomes easier to give the player an illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. can do.

  Further, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button-related effects, the big hit expectation may be higher than when the dialogue notice is executed as the button-related effects. For example, when an operation trigger pseudo error effect and a non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as button-related effects, a super reach effect that is higher than a predetermined jackpot expectation degree is performed after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are completed. (Or the execution ratio of the super-reach effect that is higher than the predetermined jackpot expectation is higher than the execution ratio of the super-reach effect that is lower than the predetermined jackpot expectation). After the completion of the above, the super reach effect of less than the predetermined big hit expectation is executed (or the execution ratio of the super reach effect of less than the predetermined big hit expectation is made higher than the execution ratio of the super reach effect with the predetermined big hit expectation or higher) It may be. Thereby, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button-related effects, the expectation of the big hit can be increased, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In addition, one of a case where an operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed as a button-related effect and a case where a non-operation pseudo error effect is executed may be set to have a higher jackpot expectation degree than the other. For example, when an operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed as a button-related effect, a super reach effect at or above a predetermined jackpot expectation degree is executed after the operation trigger pseudo error effect ends (or a super reach at or above a predetermined jackpot expectation degree). If the non-operation pseudo error effect is executed as a button-related effect, a super-reach effect less than the predetermined jackpot expectation is performed. The execution may be performed (or the execution ratio of the super reach effect having the predetermined bigger hit expectation lower than that of the super reach effect having the predetermined bigger hit expectation or higher) may be performed. Thereby, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be changed according to the switching display timing of the pseudo error mode, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode may be generated at a different timing from the button-related effects described above. As another timing, it is preferable that the pachinko machine 1 gives an illusion to the player as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. For example, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 The rear left moving arm 3330 of the rear left effecting unit 3300 and the rear right moving arm 3430 of the rear right effecting unit 3400 are moved to the second position in the middle of the movement of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 or from the normal state. Timing immediately after moving to the state, and timing immediately after moving the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 to the second state. At these times, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the movement of the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 is stopped may be displayed pseudo error mode or pseudo-return manner. In addition, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the preceding decorative portion 3322 of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320, the former decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the tip of the lower right lower movable movable body 3420. The rotation of the step decoration portion 3422 may be stopped at a predetermined time during rotation, and the pseudo error mode or the pseudo return mode may be displayed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine (rotating type) The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine) or an integrated gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated (a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a spinning-type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 223, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body 6004 by inserting a key into a key hole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with the hinge as a center of rotation.

  A game panel 6006 is provided on an upper half of the front door 6002, and a projection protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on a lower half of the front door 6002. A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protruding portion. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the accumulation settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game. Have been. The main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed substantially at the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window. It can be seen through. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotator is called a reel or a drum in a game machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each variable rotator. The drive of these stepping motors is controlled by a main control board 1310. When the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-mentioned display window from top to bottom. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect members (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of the plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards, and the like based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the effect is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

  The main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of medals inserted into the medal slot 6008 as a game medium, starts changing the symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and has a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, and a right stop button 6018. The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit provision state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ', and the main control board 1310 allows a predetermined number of game balls to be thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium. Based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time, the display of the fluctuation of the symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as a game medium to the tray 6026.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 558 ... External terminal board, 559 ... Frame ground board, 560 ... Payout unit, 570 ... Ball Guidance unit, 580: payout device, 580a: payout passage, 580b: ball removal passage, 581: payout device main body, 582: payout device rear cover, 583: payout device front cover, 584: payout motor, 585 ... drive gear, 586 ... first transmission gear, 587 ... second transmission gear, 588 ... payout gear member, 588a ... payout gear, 588b ... detection piece, 589 ... payout blade, 589a ... blade piece, 589b ... ball container, 590 ... blade rotation detection Sensor 591 Dispensing detection sensor 592 Ball removal movable piece 593 Ball removal lever 600 Upper full tank path unit 610 Lower full tank path unit 630 Power supply board 6 0a power switch, 630b noise countermeasure circuit, 630c rectifier circuit, 630d power factor improvement circuit, 630e smoothing circuit, 630f power supply creation circuit, 630g power supply destruction circuit, 633 payment control board, 1300 main Control unit, 1310: main control board, 1500: effect control unit, 1501: cover body, 1502: base body, 1503: wiring cover body, 1510: peripheral control board, 1520: peripheral data ROM board, 1530: liquid crystal output board, 1540: shield plate, 1545: conductive elastic member, 1600: effect display device.

Claims (3)

A nail adjusting method for a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on a gaming board surface of a gaming machine,
A plurality of reference members provided in a specific area that is a part of the game board surface , and only the specific area of the game board surface having transparency is printed on a nail adjustment sheet to be printed, and the specific area The plurality of reference patterns corresponding to the plurality of reference members, and the nail adjustment sheet facing the specific area so as to match, to determine the position of the nail adjustment sheet with respect to the specific area ,
Of the plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the game board surface, whether or not the specific obstacle nail implanted in the specific area is sandwiched by the plurality of reference members in a normal adjustment state, Of the plurality of obstacle nail designs printed on the nail adjustment sheet, among the plurality of obstacle nail designs, those that are externally identifiable by comparison with a specific obstacle nail design sandwiched between the plurality of reference designs ,
The plurality of reference members are three-dimensionally shaped members having a flat surface that is substantially flush with the top of the specific obstacle nail, and a first reference member and a second reference member that form the plurality of reference members. The reference members have different shapes from each other, and the plurality of reference patterns include a first reference pattern that matches the first reference member and a second reference pattern that matches the second reference member. And
The first guide pattern is brought into contact with the flat portion of the first guide member, and the second guide pattern is brought into contact with the flat portion of the second guide member, so that the nail adjusting sheet for the specific region is A nail adjustment method characterized by facilitating alignment . A nail adjustment sheet provided to face a specific area that is a part of a game board surface on which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a gaming machine,
The nail adjustment sheet has permeability,
A specific obstacle nail pattern indicating that it is a specific obstacle nail implanted in the specific area to be checked for the adjustment state of the plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the game board surface,
It can be used at the time of positioning the nail adjustment sheet with respect to the specific area , and a plurality of reference patterns corresponding to a plurality of reference members provided in the specific area , and are printed ,
The plurality of reference patterns are provided so as to sandwich the specific obstacle nail pattern, and are to be brought into contact with a plane portion formed on the plurality of reference members that is substantially flush with a top portion of the specific obstacle nail. And
Further, each of the plurality of reference patterns has a different shape from each other . A gaming machine having a gaming board in which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined arrangement in a gaming area where a game is performed,
In a specific area that is a part of the gaming board surface,
A specific obstacle nail to be checked for the adjustment state of the plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area,
A plurality of reference members that are members that can be used when positioning the predetermined nail adjustment sheet with respect to the specific area ,
The plurality of reference members are provided in the specific area so as to sandwich the specific obstacle nail, and are three-dimensional modeling members having a flat portion that is substantially flush with a top portion of the specific obstacle nail,
Further, each of the plurality of reference members has a different shape from each other .